Configuring an alert filter

Transcription

TriGeo® SIM User Guide
Security Information Manager
Copyright © 2000–2010 by TriGeo® Network Security, Inc.
TriGeo® is a registered trademark of TriGeo Network Security, Inc.
TriGeo SIM™, nDepth™, nSight™, and USB-Defender™ are trademarks of TriGeo Network
Security, Inc.
All other company names, products, services, trademarks, or registered trademarks used herein
remain the properties of their respective owners.
The TriGeo software program, this manual, and other materials distributed in connection with the
license of this software program are protected by U.S. copyright law and international treaty. TriGeo
Network Security, Inc., retains title to and ownership of the software program and this manual.
Contents
Chapter 1: System Requirements
1
Package contents
1
Supported operating systems
2
TriGeo SIM Console
2
Agents
2
TriGeo Reports
2
Hardware requirements
3
Minimum hardware requirements
3
Recommended hardware
3
Technical Support
4
Chapter 2: First-time users
5
Introduction
5
About the TriGeo Security Information Manager (SIM)
6
System setup and maintenance
7
Preparing the TriGeo SIM for use
7
Connecting network security products to the TriGeo SIM
7
Ongoing maintenance
7
Finding information on using the Console
8
Console basics
8
Monitor (alerts and alert filters)
9
Alerts
9
Filters and filter groups
9
Ops Center and widgets
10
Explore
10
Build views (Users, Groups, and Rules)
12
Users
12
Groups
12
i
Contents
Rules
13
Manage (Agents and Appliances)
15
TriGeo Reports
16
Chapter 3: TriGeo SIM Console basics
17
Introduction to Console basics
17
Opening the TriGeo SIM Console
17
Opening views in the Console
18
Console features
19
The status bar
22
Appliances tab
22
Agents tab
23
Notifications tab
23
How to use the Notifications tab
24
Opening a filter from the Notifications tab
25
Removing notices from the Notifications tab
25
Responding to a Popup Notification form
26
Showing Console activity
27
Opening and closing panes and sidebars
28
Opening and closing nodes
29
ToolTips
30
Working with grids
31
Selecting items in a grid
31
Moving through a grid
31
Resizing grid columns
32
Rearranging grid columns
33
Sorting a grid by its columns
34
ii
Contents
Determining your version of the Console
36
Exiting the TriGeo Console
37
Chapter 4: Using the Ops Center
39
About the Ops Center
39
Ops Center features
40
About widgets
42
Master widgets and dashboard widgets
42
Using master widgets as templates
42
Widget independence
42
Widget storage
43
Using the Widget Manager
44
Opening and closing the Widget Manager
44
Creating new master widgets
44
Editing master widgets
45
Adding widgets to the dashboard
46
Deleting master widgets
47
Using the Widget Builder
48
Working with widgets in the Ops Center dashboard
52
Turning on a widget that has been turned off
52
Widget toolbar
52
Viewing a widget’s legend
53
Viewing specific widget data
54
Refreshing a widget’s data
54
Opening a filter from a widget
55
Editing a dashboard widget
56
Editing a widget’s chart presentation
57
Rearranging widgets on the dashboard
58
Resizing a widget
58
Deleting dashboard widgets
59
iii
Contents
Table of standard widgets
60
Chapter 5: Working with alerts and alert filters
About the Monitor view
63
63
Alerts
63
Filters
63
The Filters pane and filter groups
64
Standard TriGeo SIM filters
65
Monitor view features
68
Using the alert grid
72
Applying a filter to the alert grid
72
Pausing and resuming a filter's alert traffic
73
Sorting the alert grid
73
Highlighting alerts
74
Copying alert data to your clipboard
76
Marking alerts as read and unread
77
Exploring alerts
78
Removing alerts
79
Using the Alert Details/Alert Description pane
80
Using the Alert Details toolbar
81
Alert severity levels
82
Responding to alert messages
83
Responding to an alert
83
Using the Respond form’s drag and drop functionality
85
Managing alert filters
87
Creating a new filter
87
Editing an existing filter
89
Cloning an existing filter
90
Pausing filters
91
Resuming paused filters
92
Turning filters on and off
93
Copying a filter
94
iv
Contents
Importing a filter
95
Exporting a filter
96
Deleting a filter
97
Managing filter groups
98
Adding a new filter group
98
Renaming a filter group
98
Rearranging filter groups
99
Moving a filter from one group to another
100
Deleting a filter group
101
Using a filter's Widgets pane
102
About the Widgets pane
102
Opening the Widgets pane
103
Viewing a filter’s different widgets
104
Creating a new widget
105
Editing a widget
106
Refining a filter with a widget
107
Refreshing a widget
108
Editing a widget’s presentation
108
Chapter 6: Creating custom alert filters
109
Filter Creation
109
Features of Filter Creation
110
Features of the list pane
113
Features of the Conditions box
117
Configuring filter conditions
120
Adding conditions to filters
121
Adding conditions
121
Adding groups of conditions
123
Targeting
125
Deleting conditions
126
Comparing values with operators
127
Selecting a new operator
127
v
Contents
Operator tips
127
Table of operators
128
Examples of AND and OR conditions
130
Filter condition table
131
Using the Status bar
133
Status bar icons
134
Using Status bar messages to resolve problems
135
Configuring alert filter notifications
137
Selecting the notification method
137
Notifications table
138
Tutorial: Configuring an alert filter
141
Preparing for the lessons
142
Lesson 1: Creating a filter based on an alert
144
Step 1: Naming the alert
144
Step 2: Capturing successful logon attempts outside of business hours
145
Step 3: Limiting the filter to Administrative accounts
146
Step 4: Capturing failed logon attempts during business hours
147
Lesson 2: Creating a filter based on an Alert Group
149
Step 1: Creating the filter
149
Step 2: Adding the first condition
149
Step 3: Adding another condition
150
Lesson 3: Adding Groups and notification settings
151
Step 1: Opening the alert filter to edit it
151
Step 2: Adding a User-Defined Group
152
Step 3: Adding a Tool Profile
152
Step 4: Adding alert notification settings
153
vi
Contents
Chapter 7: Using Explorers
155
About the Explore view
155
Types of explorers
156
Explore view features
158
Using the Event explorer
160
Opening the Event explorer
161
Features of the Event explorer
162
Using the event map
165
Reading an event map
165
Event map legend
168
Using the event grid
169
Viewing information in the event grid
170
Exploring from the event grid
171
Responding to an event from the event grid
171
Using the Alert Details pane
172
Opening and closing the Alert Details pane
172
Viewing an event’s alert details
172
173
Exploring from the Alert Details pane
173
Using the NSLookup, Traceroute, and Whois explorers
174
About the NSLookup explorer
175
About the Traceroute explorer
176
About the Whois explorer
177
Exploring from the alert grid
178
Exploring from the Event explorer
178
Exploring from other explorers
178
Manually exploring an item
179
Canceling an explorer lookup
179
Using the Flow Explorer
180
Opening the Flow Explorer
180
Flow Explorer features
181
Flow Explorer history
182
vii
Contents
Configuring a Flow Explorer query
183
Flow analysis configuration and report combinations
185
Interpreting the Analysis Results graph
186
Interpreting the Analysis Results grid
187
Sorting the Analysis Results grid
188
Exploring flow analysis results
188
Responding to flow analysis results
188
Using the History pane
189
Hiding and showing the History pane
190
Viewing explorer history
190
Clearing explorer history
190
History pane icon legend
191
About TriGeo nDepth
192
Installing TriGeo nDepth
192
Configuring network tools for use with TriGeo nDepth
192
Using nDepth Explorer
193
Opening a blank nDepth Explorer
194
Opening nDepth Explorer from a particular data source
195
nDepth Explorer features
196
nDepth's History pane
198
Exploring nDepth Explorer search results
198
Performing a search
198
Using the nDepth Explorer Configuration form
200
Exploring search results with other TriGeo explorers
202
Responding to search results
202
Moving a search to the nDepth Browser
203
Using nDepth Browser
204
Opening nDepth Browser
204
Opening a blank nDepth Browser
205
Opening the nDepth Browser from a particular data source
206
Getting help with the nDepth Browser
207
viii
Contents
Chapter 8: Working with Groups
209
About Groups
209
Group types
210
Groups view features
212
212
Groups grid columns
214
Refining the Groups grid
215
Managing Groups
216
Adding a new Group
216
Editing a Group
217
Cloning a Group
218
Importing a Group
219
Exporting a Group
220
Deleting a Group
220
Configuring Alert Groups
221
Configuring an Alert Group
221
Alert list features
223
Configuring Directory Services Groups
225
How to use Directory Services Groups
225
Synchronizing Directory Service Groups with the TriGeo SIM
226
Viewing a Directory Services Group members
228
Directory Services Group grid columns
229
Deleting DS Groups
229
Configuring Email Templates
230
Step 1: Creating the email template
230
Step 2: Adding message parameters
231
Step 3: Creating the message
232
Managing email template folders
232
Configuring State Variables
233
Adding new State Variable fields
233
Editing State Variable fields
235
Deleting State Variable fields
236
ix
Contents
Managing State Variable folders
237
Configuring Time of Day Sets
238
Configuring a Time of Day Set
238
Selecting periods in the time grid
240
Configuring Tool Profiles
241
Tool Profile rules
241
Creating a Tool Profile (general procedure)
242
Step 1: Selecting a template for the profile
242
Step 2: Selecting the Agents that are members of the profile
243
Editing a Tool Profile’s tool settings
245
Opening a Tool Profile’s tool settings
245
Adding a new tool instance
246
247
Deleting a tool instance from a Tool Profile
248
Configuring User-Defined Groups
249
Examples of User-Defined Groups
250
Configuring a User-Defined Group
251
Adding data elements to a User-Defined Group
252
Editing a data element in a User-Defined Group
253
Deleting a data element from a User-Defined Group
253
Working with Group folders
254
Default Group folders
254
Default Email Template folders
254
Default State Variable folders
254
Showing and hiding sub-folders
255
Showing the contents of a Group folder
255
Adding Group folders and sub-folders
257
Renaming a Group folder
257
Moving Group folders
258
Moving Groups from one folder to another
259
Deleting a Group folder
260
x
Contents
Chapter 9: Managing rules
261
About rules
261
Rules view features
262
Rules view features
262
Rules grid columns
264
Refine Results form
266
Managing rules
267
Editing rules
268
Subscribing to a rule
270
Enabling a rule
272
Placing rules in test mode
273
Activating rules
275
Disabling a rule
276
Cloning rules
277
Importing a rule
278
Exporting rules
280
Deleting rules
281
Working with rule folders
282
Default rule folders
282
283
Showing the contents of a rule folder
284
Adding rule folders and sub-folders
285
Renaming a rule folder
285
Moving rule folders
286
Moving rules from one folder to another
287
Deleting a rule folder
287
Chapter 10: Rule Creation
289
Creating custom rules
289
Rule Creation
289
Caution: Practice with filters before creating rules
289
xi
Contents
Rule Creation features
290
Rule Creation view features
290
Rule window features
292
Correlations box features
296
Rule Creation procedures
299
Adding a new rule
299
Adding rule correlations
300
Configuring a rule's correlation time
303
Advanced thresholds
304
Opening the Set Advanced Threshold form
304
Setting an advanced threshold
305
Adding a threshold field
306
Editing threshold fields
306
Deleting a threshold field
307
Using the Actions box
308
Using constants and fields to make actions flexible
308
Configuring a rule’s actions
309
Rule correlation table
310
Actions table
313
Chapter 11: Users
325
About the Users view
325
Users view features
326
Users view features
326
Users grid columns
328
Refining the Users grid
329
xii
Contents
Adding new users
330
Viewing a user’s system privileges
333
Editing user settings
334
Deleting users
335
Chapter 12: Connecting to other products
About TriGeo tools
337
337
How TriGeo tools work
337
Manager tools
338
Agent tools
338
Using Tool Profiles to configure multiple Agents
338
Supported products
339
Glossary to TriGeo tool terms
340
Tool Configuration features
342
Tool Configuration form features
342
Tools grid columns
344
Tools grid icons
345
Refining the Tools grid
346
Connecting products to the TriGeo SIM
347
First-time users
347
A note about TriGeo nDepth
348
Configuring Manager tools (general procedure)
349
Configuring Agent tools (general procedure)
350
Opening the Tool Configuration form
351
Adding new tool instances
353
Starting a tool instance
355
Stopping a tool instance
355
Editing a tool instance
356
Deleting a tool instance
357
Using an Agent to edit a Tool Profile
358
Tool configuration tables
359
Tool categories
359
xiii
Contents
Configuring sensors
365
Configuring actors
368
Setting up a notification system
371
Chapter 13: Appliances
373
About the Appliances view
373
Appliances view features
374
374
Appliances grid columns
376
The Details pane
377
Setting up a Manager for the first time
379
Adding appliances to the Console
380
Logging in and out of Managers
382
Logging into a Manager
382
Logging out of a Manager
382
Changing an appliance’s basic configuration settings
383
Configuring a Manager's properties
384
Procedure for configuring a Manager
384
Completing the Login tab
385
Completing the License tab
387
Completing the Settings tab
389
Completing the Database tab
392
Configuring Manager network security tools
394
Using a database warehouse
395
Assigning a Manager’s alert data to a database warehouse
395
Disabling a database warehouse
395
Copying appliance data
396
Removing an appliance
396
Configuring alert distribution policy
397
Practical uses for alert distribution policy
397
Opening the Alert Distribution Policy window
398
About the Alert Distribution Policy window
400
xiv
Contents
402
Pushing alert policy to lower-level alert types
403
Exporting a Manager’s alert policy
404
Chapter 14: Managing Agents
405
About the Agents view
405
Agents view features
406
406
Agents grid columns
408
Refining the Agents grid
410
Managing Agents
411
Adding Agents
411
Configuring Agent tools
411
Responding to events that affect Agents
412
Changing an Agent’s Remote Updates setting
413
Deleting Agents
414
Deleting and recovering unused Agent licenses
415
Copying Agent data
416
Chapter 15: Running Reports
417
About TriGeo Reports
417
Opening TriGeo Reports
417
TriGeo Reports features
418
Key features of the TriGeo Reports window
418
Using the Menu Button
420
Using the Quick Access Toolbar
421
Default commands
421
Moving the Quick Access Toolbar
422
Minimizing the Ribbon
423
Configuring report preferences
424
Table of preferences
424
Selecting a (default) Primary Data Source
425
Configuring a syslog server
426
xv
Contents
Configuring a data warehouse
427
Troubleshooting database connections
430
Managing report categories
431
Manage Categories form
431
Selecting reports for specific industries
432
Industry options
433
Creating a list of favorite reports
435
Removing a report from the Favorite Reports tab
437
Viewing Historical Reports
438
Working with report lists
439
Viewing lists of reports by category
439
Locating a report by title
441
Viewing a report’s properties
442
443
Sorting, filtering, and grouping report lists
444
Sorting the report list
444
Filtering report lists
445
Filtering a report list
445
Changing a filter setting
446
Turning off report filters
446
Custom report filters
448
Creating a custom report filter
448
Saving a custom report filter
449
Opening a saved custom report filter
450
Grouping reports
451
Creating a report group
452
Viewing the reports within a group
452
Creating a sub-group
453
Running and scheduling reports
454
Running reports on demand
454
Report errors
456
Scheduling reports (process overview)
457
xvi
Contents
Step 1: Selecting the report you want to schedule
458
Step 2: Adding a new scheduled report task
459
Step 3: Scheduling the report
461
Step 4: Selecting advanced scheduling options
463
Step 5: Stating when the system can or cannot run the task
465
Step 6: Assigning the data source and scope
468
Step 7: Exporting a scheduled report
470
Managing reports
472
Editing a scheduled report task
472
Deleting a schedule from a task
473
Deleting a scheduled report task
474
Viewing reports
475
Opening your saved reports
475
Viewing the sections of a master report
476
Hiding and showing a master report’s sub-topic pane
477
Viewing the pages of a report
479
Magnifying and reducing report pages
481
Stopping a report in progress
482
Searching reports for specific text
483
Viewing the text-based details of a report
483
Using the Search tool
483
Using the Select Expert tool
485
Running a query with the Select Expert tool
486
Restoring the original report
488
Printing reports
489
Printing a report
489
Setting up printer preferences
490
xvii
Contents
Exporting a report
491
Appendix A: Alert Types
493
Types of alerts
493
Asset Alerts
495
Audit Alerts
498
Incident Alerts
513
Internal Alerts
514
Security Alerts
519
Appendix B: Table of alert event data fields
Table of alert data fields
557
557
Appendix C: CMC commands
561
TriGeo Management Configuration Commands (CMC)
561
Logging on to CMC
562
Using the CMC 'appliance' menu
564
Using the CMC 'manager' menu
566
Using the CMC 'ndepth' menu
568
Using the CMC 'service' menu
569
Appendix D: Report Tables
573
Table of Audit reports
573
Table of Security reports
589
Table of TriGeo reports
607
Report schedule definitions
609
xviii
Package contents
l
TriGeo Security Information Manager (SIM) Appliance(s)
l
TriGeo DVD:
o
Agent Installer
o
Remote Agent Installer
o
Remote Agent Uninstaller
o
Console Installer
o
Adobe AIR Runtime Installer
o
Reports Installer
o
Crystal Reports Runtime Installer
o
Upgrade and Upgrade Instructions
o
TriGeo SIM Installation Guide
o
TriGeo SIM User Guide
o
License Agreement
o
What’s New
1
Supported operating systems
TriGeo SIM Console
The TriGeo SIM Console is the graphical user interface used to monitor the TriGeo Manager and its
Agents. It can be installed on any workstation with an operating system that supports Adobe AIR
(http://www.adobe.com/products/air/systemreqs/):
l
Microsoft Windows 2000
l
Microsoft Windows XP
l
l
Microsoft Windows Vista
l
Microsoft Windows 7
l
Mac OS X
l
Linux
Agents
You can install TriGeo's Agent software on workstations that run any of the following operating
systems:
l
Microsoft Windows 2000, with Service Pack 4
l
l
l
l
Microsoft Windows 7
l
Mac OS X
l
Linux
l
Solaris (Sun or x86)
TriGeo Reports
You can install TriGeo Reports on workstations that run any of the following operating systems:
l
l
l
l
l
Microsoft Windows 7
2
Minimum hardware requirements
l
l
Console/Reports: 1 GHz Pentium III or equivalent processor, 1GM RAM, 5 GB hard disk drive
space.
Agent: 450 MHz Pentium III or equivalent processor, 128 MB RAM, 1 GB hard disk drive
space.
Recommended hardware
l
l
Console/Reports: 2 GHz Pentium 4 or equivalent processor, 2 GB RAM, 10 GB hard disk
drive space.
Agent: 800 MHz Pentium III or equivalent processor, 512 MB RAM, 1 GB hard disk drive
space.
3
Technical Support
Please refer to the TriGeo Knowledgebase or contact TriGeo Technical Support if you receive any
errors or if you are uncertain about how to properly perform a procedure.
TriGeo Technical Support is available by phone or email during business hours. Please provide your
TriGeo software version when contacting us.
Hours of Operation: Monday - Friday, 5:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Pacific Time
Telephone: Toll Free, 866–664–6068 (United States only)
International Technical Support: 1–208–664–6060
Email: support@trigeo.com
4
Introduction
If you are a new TriGeo SIM user, read this section first. It explains many key concepts and directs
you to information you will need to do the following:
l
prepare the TriGeo SIM for use
l
configure the TriGeo SIM for use with your network
l
maintain your TriGeo appliances
l
find information about using the Console
l
use TriGeo's reporting features.
5
About the TriGeo Security Information Manager
(SIM)
The TriGeo Security Information Manager (SIM) is a state-of-the-art appliance that adds value to
existing security products and increases efficiencies in administering, managing and monitoring
security policies and safeguards on your network.
The TriGeo SIM is based on brand new concepts in security. You can think of it as an immunity
system for computers. It is a system that is distributed throughout your network as “points of
presence” that work together to protect and defend your network. The TriGeo SIM responds
effectively with focus and speed to threats and offensive actions.
The TriGeo SIM system is based on software modules, called Agents, and on the management of
these Agents and their information.
Agents are installed on each appropriate workstation, server, and network device (where applicable).
Agents communicate the logging data from each device’s security products to a Manager. These
security products include anti-virus software, network-based intrusion detection systems, and logs
from operating systems and firewalls.
Agents collect each product’s security-related event data, normalize this data, and then pass the
normalized data on to the Manager, which is a secure point for the management of Agents. All data
received from the Agents are processed by the Manager’s policy engine; and when needed, the
Manager initiates appropriate action.
These actions can include notification of a problem via the Console, email, or pager; blocking an IP
address; shutting down or rebooting a workstation; and passing the alerts on to the TriGeo database
for future analysis and reporting with the Reports application.
You can configure security policies based on the alerts retrieved from the security products that are
installed on the Agents and the network. The TriGeo Console provides a dedicated, comprehensive,
graphical interface that eases the configuration and management of the TriGeo system.
6
The topics in this section will point you to the information you need to use the TriGeo SIM and the SIM
Console for the first time.
Preparing the TriGeo SIM for use
1. Install the TriGeo SIM Console to your workstation. For details, see the TriGeo SIM Installation Guide.
2. Install TriGeo’s Agent software on any computers that will be monitored by a Manager. For
details, see the TriGeo SIM Installation Guide.
3. Start the TriGeo SIM Console.
Connecting network security products to the TriGeo SIM
During the installation and training process, TriGeo typically configures the tools that connect your
third-party network security products and devices to your TriGeo Managers. These products are your
firewalls, anti-virus software, intrusion detection systems, and various operating system tools.
If you did not receive this training, or if you are configuring TriGeo tools for the first time, please go to
"Connecting products to the TriGeo SIM" on page 347 and carefully read "About TriGeo tools" on
page 337 before performing any of the following procedures.
Before you begin using the TriGeo SIM Console, you must do the following:
1. Add your TriGeo Managers to the Console, if you have not already done so. For details, see
"Appliances" on page 373.This chapter also includes information on licensing, logging on to
Managers, and other appliance properties.
2. Connect your third-party network security products and devices to the TriGeo SIM. For details,
see "Connecting products to the TriGeo SIM" on page 347.Here, you will find complete
information on connecting network and security data to your Managers and your Agents. Once
connected, the data is ready processing by the TriGeo SIM and for viewing in the Console.
Note: Before you configure a TriGeo tool (sensors and actors) for use with a network security
product or device, that product or device should already be installed on or remotely logging to
the computer the TriGeo SIM will be monitoring.
3. Add the users who will use the Console to manage the TriGeo SIM. For details, see "Adding
new users" on page 330.
Ongoing maintenance
l
To manage TriGeo appliances, including their network configuration, backup, and other
details, see "CMC commands" on page 561.
7
Finding information on using the Console
The Console is organized into different functional areas, called views. These views organize and
present different information about the components that make up the TriGeo SIM system.
l
In Ops Center, you'll find a dashboard view that presents visual representations of your data.
l
In Monitor, you'll filter and view alert details.
l
In Explore, you'll find utilities for investigating alerts and their details.
l
l
l
In Build, you'll create critical components of the TriGeo SIM that function on a TriGeo Manager for processing process data.
In Manage, you'll manage properties associated with Agents and Managers, and configure
data sources to integrate your network security data with the TriGeo SIM.
TriGeo Reports is a separate application. Its reporting tools let you run or schedule reports
about the data that is stored in your TriGeo SIM database.
The following topics briefly explain the role of each view of the Console, the view’s primary uses, and
where to get information on performing key tasks within that view. Topics are arranged here in an
order that will help you understand the most fundamental items first, such as alerts, alert filters, and
widgets. They then progress to more advanced features, such as exploring alerts, and creating
Groups and rules.
Console basics
See "Introduction to Console basics" on page 17 for a discussion of features that are used throughout
the Console’s user interface, such as panes, grids, a status bar, etc.
In particular, see the following sections:
l
l
To learn the key features of the Console, see "Console features" on page 19.
"Working with grids" on page 31 explains how to perform such common tasks as selecting
items in a grid, moving through a grid, resizing grid columns, rearranging grid columns, and sorting a grid by its columns.
8
Alerts
The Monitor view is the heart of the TriGeo Console. As the name implies, it is used for monitoring
your network activity. In Monitor, you will create filters and widgets that group and display different
alerts that come from your Agents, Managers, and network devices.
Alerts are messages created from Agent, Manager, and network device log entries. These log entries
are processed (or normalized) to extract information and display the data in a common column/fieldbased format, rather than the often convoluted format you see in the source data. These normalized
alerts are sent from the Agent to the Manager for processing. At the Manager, the alerts are
processed against your Rules, sent to your TriGeo Database for archiving, and sent to the TriGeo
Console for monitoring.
Filters and filter groups
On a busy network, there can be millions of alerts each day. Therefore, the Console uses alert filters
to manage alerts. A filter is a subset of your alerts that focuses on a particular type or group of alerts
and hides all others. When configuring a filter, you can examine and use individual alert properties to
determine precisely which alerts are to appear in that filter.
Filters apply at the Console level. This means they apply to all data sent from every Manager
monitored by the Console. Filters also display alerts in real time.
You can turn filters on and off, pause filters to sort or investigate their alerts, perform actions to
respond to alerts, and configure filters to notify you when they capture a particular alert. Filters can
also display widgets, which are charts and graphs that visually represent the alert data. Widgets are
described in more detail below.
The TriGeo SIM ships with many commonly used filters that support best practices in the security
industry. However, you can create your own custom filters, or modify existing filters to meet your
needs. There is no limit to the number of filters a Console can contain.
Filters are organized into filter groups. A filter group is simply a high-level category for storing filters
that logically fit into that category. Each title bar in the Monitor view’s Filters pane represents a
different filter group. Each item listed in a filter group is a different alert filter.
Clicking a filter in the Filters pane causes the alert grid to show a filtered view of the alert stream
coming into the Console. The grid displays only those alerts that are allowed by the filter—it hides all
of the other alerts. Because filters list only those events that meet their specific requirements, they
are a handy way to organize and quickly sift through large quantities of alerts.
9
Resources
l
To view and work with alerts and alert filters, see "Working with alerts and alert filters" on page
63.
l
To apply filters to your alert activity, see "Using the alert grid" on page 72.
l
To manage alert filters and alert groups, see "Managing alert filters" on page 87.
l
To manage filter groups, see "Managing filter groups" on page 98.
l
To explore the specific alert details, see "About the Explore view" on page 155.
l
l
l
To respond to an alert (that is, to take corrective or preventive action), see "Responding to
alert messages" on page 83.
To create your own custom alert filter, see "Creating custom alert filters" on page 109.
Also see "Managing Groups" on page 216 for details on how to create Groups and Email Templates for use with your alert filters.
Ops Center and widgets
The Ops Center is a "dashboard" used for viewing and managing informational "widgets." Each
widget represents a high-level graphical view of specific network activity. Widgets are designed to
present important high-level information in easy-to-read graphical formats, such as charts and graphs.
Widgets are filter-driven — that is, a filter is the data source for the graphical representation found in
the widget. In fact, widgets appear in Monitor, as well, so you can see graphical views of your filters
along with their grid-based views.
You can choose from a library of commonly used widgets that TriGeo has prepared, or you can create
your own widgets. You can add or remove widgets, edit existing widgets, or resize, refresh, and
rearrange widgets to meet your personal preferences.
Resources
l
l
l
For complete information on the Ops Center, Widget Manager, widgets, and how to use
them, see "Using the Ops Center" on page 39.
To learn how to create and manage widgets, see "Using the Widget Manager" on page 44.
To learn how to view, edit, rearrange, resize, and delete dashboard widgets, see "Working with
widgets in the Ops Center dashboard" on page 52.
Explore
The Console's Explore view contains several utilities, called explorers. You can think of this view as
a center for investigating alerts and their details.
Many of the explorers are utilities used for finding out more about alert specific details, such as
looking up IP addresses, domain names, and host names. The Event explorer lets you view all of the
events related to an alert message. It is designed to help you visualize how the alert occurred and the
10
Explore
system's response to that alert. You can follow the chain of events that caused the alert, and help
determine its root cause.
The Explore view also has a Respond menu that you can use from any of the explorers. Respond
allows you to take corrective action on an alert or other information presented in an explorer, such as
manually shutting down a workstation when you see a problem reported in the Console.
Resources
l
For general information on explorers, see "About the Explore view" on page 155.
l
For a description of each type of explorer, see "Types of explorers" on page 156.
l
To use the Event explorer, see "Using the Event explorer" on page 160.
l
To learn how to respond to an alert, see "Responding to alert messages" on page 83.
11
Build views (Users, Groups, and Rules)
The Console's Build views are used to create, manage, and organize components of the TriGeo SIM
that are stored on a Manager and used for processing alerts. In the Build views, you can manage
Users, Groups, and Rules. For more information on each Build view, see the descriptions below.
Users
The Users view is used to manage the system users who are associated with each TriGeo Manager.
By adding email addresses for each user, the Console can notify users of alert conditions by email.
Resources
l
To learn how to add and manage a Manager's users, see "Adding new users" on page 330.
Groups
The Console’s Build ► Groups view is used to create, manage, and organize Groups. Groups are
configurable lists of related parameters that are used in rules, filters, and sometimes other areas of
the TriGeo SIM. When configuring your rules and filters, you can benefit from huge gains in efficiency
by the careful planning and use of Groups in those rules and filters:
l
l
You can apply a whole set of parameters or settings to a filter or rule simply by adding that
Group to the rule or filter.
If you update a Group with new settings, any filters or rules that are configured to use that
Group are automatically updated to use the Group’s new settings.
Here are a few examples of practical uses for Groups:
l
l
l
Alert Groups are custom families of alerts that you can save as a Group. For example, you
might create an Alert Group made up of similar alerts that all need to trigger the same response
from the Console. When you apply the Alert Group to a rule, the Console implements the same
rule when any one of the alerts in the Group occurs.
Time of Day Sets allow your filters and rules to take different actions at different times of day.
For example, you might define two different Time of Day Sets — “Working Hours” and “Outside Working Hours.” You may want your rules to alert your system administrator via email
and cell phone during working hours. Outside of business hours, you may want your rules to
automatically shut down the offending computer to alert your administrator by email only.
Email Templates allow you to create pre-formatted email messages that your TriGeo rules can
use to notify you of an alert event.
These are just a few examples. There are many more Group types and endless possible uses.
Resources
l
To learn more about Groups, see "About Groups" on page 209.
l
To learn about the different Group types you can use, see "Group types" on page 210.
12
Rules
l
To add, edit, clone, import, export, or delete a Group, see "Managing Groups" on page 216.
l
To use Groups when configuring filters, see "Configuring filter conditions" on page 120.
l
To use Groups when configuring rules, see "Creating custom rules" on page 289.
Rules
The Rules view
The Console’s Build ► Rules view is used to create, configure, and manage your rules. Rules are
used to monitor and respond to alert traffic. They allow you to automatically notify or respond to
security events in real time, whether you are monitoring the Console or not. When an alert (or a series
of alerts) meets a rule's conditions, the rule automatically prompts the Manager to take action, such
as notifying the appropriate users, or performing a particular active response (such as blocking the IP
address or stopping a particular process).
The Console ships with a set of preconfigured rules that you can begin using immediately. However,
you can use the view's Rule Creation tool to create your own custom rules and your own variations
on any existing rules.
Rule Creation
In the Build ► Rules view, the Rule Creation tool is used to configure new rules and to edit existing
rules.
Like filters, you create rules by configuring conditions between alert variables other components,
such as Time of Day Sets, User-Defined Groups, Constants, etc. However, rules go a step further.
They let you correlate alert variables with other alerts and their alert variables.
By correlate, we mean you can specify how often and in what time frame the correlations must be
met before the rule is triggered. The combined correlations dictate when the rule is to initiate an active
response.
You can configure rules to fire after multiple alerts occur. The Manager will remember alerts if they
meet the rule's basic conditions. It waits for the other conditions to be met, too. If they are, the
Manager fires the rule. The rule does not take action until the alerts meet all of the conditions and
correlations defined for that rule.
The possibilities for rules are endless. Therefore, this section describes how to create rules only in
very general terms. This section is not intended to be a tutorial, but rather a reference for you to fall
back on if you are unclear about how any part of Rule Creation works.
Learning to build rules
The tools in Rule Creation are very similar to those found in Filter Creation. However, filters simply
report event occurrences; rules act on them. There is no harm if you create a filter that is unusual or
has logic problems. But this is not the always case with rules. Rules can have unexpected and
sometimes unpleasant consequences if they are not configured exactly as you intend them to be.
13
Inexperienced users should use caution when creating rules. Creating filters is an excellent way to
familiarize yourself with the logic and tools needed to create well crafted rules. You should only begin
configuring rules after you are at ease with configuring filters. Even then, always test your rules
before implementing them.
Resources
l
For general information on rules, see "About rules" on page 261.
l
To create and manage rules, see "Managing rules" on page 267.
l
To learn how to configure your own custom rules, see "Creating custom rules" on page 289.
l
Also see "Managing Groups" on page 216 for details on how to create Groups and Email Templates for use with your rules.
14
The Console's Manage area is used to configure and maintain properties of your TriGeo Agents and
Managers. In Manage, you can change properties of your Managers such as licenses, update
preferences, and password policies. This is also where you will configure Agents and Managers to
monitor and respond to the logging sources of your network security products and devices.
Resources
l
To connect the Console to your Managers, see "Setting up a Manager for the first time" on
page 379.
l
To assign a database warehouse, see "Using a database warehouse" on page 395.
l
To add and manage TriGeo Agents, see "Managing Agents" on page 411.
l
For step-by-step instructions on connecting Agent sensor and actor tools to your network security products and devices, see "Connecting products to the TriGeo SIM" on page 347.
15
TriGeo Reports
TriGeo Reports is an application that lets you run or schedule reports about the data that is stored in
your TriGeo SIM database. Reports combine alert details and graphical information for analysis and
storage.
Resources
l
l
To open TriGeo Reports, see "Opening TriGeo Reports" on page 417.
To see a list of predefined reports that are available, see "The following tables list all of TriGeo’s reports, provide descriptions of their contents, and suggest schedules for running each
report. " on page 573."The following tables list all of TriGeo’s reports, provide descriptions of
their contents, and suggest schedules for running each report. " on page 573.
l
To run or schedule a report, see "Running and scheduling reports" on page 454.
l
To view a report's content, see "Viewing reports" on page 475.
l
To search a report, see "Searching reports for specific text" on page 483.
l
To print a report, see "Printing reports" on page 489.
l
To export a report as a PDF or RPT file, see "Exporting a report" on page 491.
16
Introduction to Console basics
The TriGeo SIM Console is the heart of the TriGeo SIM system. You will use it to configure and
access Manager and Agent functions, create filters and rules for monitoring your TriGeo SIM data,
and set up related system components such as Groups and users.
This chapter provides a high-level view of the TriGeo SIM Console and explains how to use some of
its common user interface features. In it, you will learn the following:
l
Key features of the Console
l
Opening and closing panes
l
l
Working with grids
l
Using ToolTips
l
Using the status bar
l
l
Opening the TriGeo SIM Console
Do either of the following:
l
l
Click the Start button and then click All Programs. Then point to the TriGeo folder and click
the TriGeo SIM Console shortcut.
Double-click the TriGeo SIM desktop icon.
After a moment, TriGeo SIM Console appears. When you start the Console for the first time,
the Manage ► Appliances view appears, so you can configure and log in to a Manager.
Otherwise, the Console restores the view that was open the last time you closed the Console.
17
Opening views in the Console
The Console is made up of multiple views, where each view has a special function. To open a view of
the Console, simply click its corresponding button at the top of the Console.
To open a view:
l
To open the Ops Center view (to work with widgets), click the Ops Center button.
l
To open the Monitor view (to view, manage, and create filters), click the Monitor button.
l
To open the Explore view (to work with TriGeo explorers), click the Explore button.
l
To open the Groups view (to build and manage Groups), click the Build ► Groups button
l
To open the Rules view (to build and manage policy rules), click the Build ► Rules button.
l
l
l
l
To open the Users view (to add and manage TriGeo Console users), click the Build ► Users
button.
To open the Appliances view (to add and manage TriGeo appliances), click the Manage ►
Appliances button.
To open the Agents view (to add and manage TriGeo Agents), click the Manage ► Agents
button.
For instructions on using nSight and TriGeo Reports, click the Analyze button.
18
Console features
Console features
An active Console looks like the one shown here. This diagram shows many common features that
are used throughout the Console.
The following table describes each of these features. Please take a moment to familiarize yourself
with them, as you will use them frequently.
Item
Name
Description
Menu
This is the Console’s main menu. Each option on the menu
opens the Console to a different view, where you can perform
specialized tasks that are associated with that view. Some
options, such as the Build menu, open multiple views. The menu
option that is currently selected appears with a gray background.
Window
controllers
Use these buttons to minimize, restore, maximize, and close the
Console window.
19
Item
Name
Description
Sidebar and
Refine Results
pane
Clicking the Sidebar button alternately opens and closes the lefthand panes.
Grid
A key feature of the Console is its use of grids. Grids are simply
lists of items that are associated with a particular view. For
example, the Users grid shows a complete list of Console users.
The Monitor view’s grid displays a list of alert activity.
The Refine Results pane behaves like a search engine. It lets
you apply filters to a grid to reduce the number of items it shows.
The fields and options in this pane change to reflect the view and
grid you are working with. The Reset button restores the view to
its default settings.
The grid’s gear
button can be thought of as a grid menu. It
appears with each item listed in the grid. Clicking the button
displays a list of commands that can be performed on that
particular item.
You can also sort a grid by clicking its column headers. For more
information, see "Working with grids" on page 31. Note that grids
also use scroll bars so you can see the complete contents of
larger grids.
Grid toolbar
Many grids have a toolbar with command buttons. These buttons
typically open forms for performing specialized tasks, such as
adding and configuring new items for the grid, or importing,
exporting, or exploring items in the grid.
Help
Click Help to open the Console’s online Help to content about
the currently active view, window, or form. Help has complete
information about each item in the Console, as well a detailed
reference information about alert messages.
Pane dividers
(vertical and
horizontal)
The vertical and horizontal bars that separate the window’s
various panes can also be used to resize each pane:
Click a horizontal pane divider and then drag it up or down.
Click a vertical pane divider and then drag it left or right.
Lower pane
Most grids have a lower pane, just below the grid. Depending on
the view, these panes can show read-only reference information,
or they can be data entry forms for configuring and editing items
associated with the grid.
By default, a grid’s lower pane is hidden. Click this button to
alternately open and close the window’s lower pane.
20
Console features
Item
Name
Description
Forms
Many commands open specialized forms, which appear on top of
the view. Forms can contain read-only reference information, or
they can be data entry forms that are used to configure and edit
items associated with the grid.
Status bar
The status bar shows the Console’s current connection status
and reports the status for other “in progress” activities.
The status bar also displays three status panes—one for
Appliances, one for Agents, and one for Notifications. These
panes summarize information about your Managers, Agents, and
alert activity. For more information, see "The status bar" on page
22.
Save and
Cancel
Click Save to save your changes. The window will remain open
so you can continue working.
Click Cancel to cancel any changes you have made since the
last time you clicked Save.
Resize window
Click and drag this corner to resize the Console window.
21
The status bar
Regardless of which view you are working with, the bottom of the Console window always displays a
status bar.
The Console's status bar
The status bar displays information about activity the Console is performing in the background, such
as communicating with the Manager, or reconnecting to a disconnected Manager. The status bar also
has three status tabs—one for Appliances, one for Agents, and one for alert Notifications.
The following topics explain how to use and interpret each part of the status bar.
Appliances tab
The Appliances tab summarizes the current status your Managers. The number in the gray box (left)
shows how many Managers are currently connected. The number in the red box (right) shows how
many Managers are disconnected.
This tab cannot be opened. However, you can use it to open the Manage ► Appliances view as
follows:
l
l
l
Click Appliances ► to open the Manage ► Appliances view. This view contains a grid that
shows a complete list of your connected and disconnected Managers.
Click the number in the gray box to open the Manage ► Appliances view with the grid filtered
to show only those Managers that are currently connected.
Click the number in the red box to open the Manage ► Appliances view with the grid filtered
to show only those Managers that are currently disconnected.
22
Agents tab
Agents tab
The Agents tab summarizes the current status of your licensed TriGeo Agents. The number in the
gray box (left) shows how many Agents are currently connected. The number in the red box (right)
shows how many are currently disconnected.
This tab cannot be opened. However, you can use it to open the Manage ► Agents view as follows:
l
l
l
Click Agents ► to open the Manage ► Agents view with the grid showing a complete list of
your licensed TriGeo Agents.
Click the number in the gray box to open the Manage ► Agents view with the grid filtered to
show only those Agents that are currently connected.
Click the number in the red box to open the Manage ► Agents view with the grid filtered to
show only those Agents that are currently disconnected.
Notifications tab
The Notifications tab summarizes the alert activity from each of your active (turned on) notification
filters during this session with the Console. Notification filters are those filters that are configured to
notify you of alerts with either blink, popup, or sound notifications.
l
l
l
l
The number in the gray box (left) shows the total number alerts from your active notification
filters.
The number in the red box (right) shows the total number of different notification types (blink,
pop-up, or sound) that have occurred. Unlike the other status tabs, you can open the Notifications tab.
Click Notifications ▲ to open the Notifications tab to see detailed information about your
filter notifications.
Click Notifications ▼ to close the tab.
23
How to use the Notifications tab
When opened, the Notifications tab lists each alert message from your active notification filters. It
states the name of the filter that issues the alert, the time the alert occurred, and the total number of
times it has occurred during this session with the Console.
The Notifications tab, when opened
The following table explains each column of the Notifications tab.
Column
Icon
Description
The Notifications tab uses icons to signify the filter's method of notification:
means the filter has played a sound.
means the filter has opened an alert popup window.
means the filter's name is blinking in the Monitor view's Filters pane.
Filter Name
The name of each active notification filter that has notified you of an alert. Clicking
a filter name in this column opens that filter in the Monitor view's alert grid.
Time
The last time a notification occurred with each filter.
Total
The total number of notifications that have occurred with each filter.
24
You can open a filter from the Notifications tab to see, explore, or respond to the events that are
being reported by that filter.
To open a filter:
l
In the Notifications tab, click the name of the filter you want to open.
The alert grid refreshes to display the filter you selected. You may now examine the incidents
you are concerned with.
Removing notices from the Notifications tab
After reviewing a filter notification, you can delete it so you don’t wind up investigating the same
notices over and over.
To remove a filter notification:
l
In the Notifications pane, point to the notification you want to remove, and then click
25
.
Responding to a Popup Notification form
The Popup Notification form
If a filter displays the [Filter Name] Popup Notification form, you can respond to it three different
ways.
To
Do this
Open the filter in the Monitor
view to view the alert message
1. Select Take me to the filter [Filter Name].
Turn off Popup Notification
form for this filter
1. Select Never show this dialog again.
2. Click OK.
2. Click For the filter [Filter Name].
3. Click OK.
Turn off Popup Notification
form for all filters
1. Select Never show this dialog again.
2. Click For all filters.
3. Click OK.
Note: These options directly modify the filter. To turn them back on, you must edit the filter.
26
The far right section of the status bar displays the Console's current connectivity status. It also
displays messages that summarize activity the Console is performing in the background, such as
communicating with the Manager, or reconnecting to a disconnected Manager.
The status bar, showing its background activity
If there are multiple activities, their number appears to the left of the message. For example, if the
status bar reads (2) Reconnecting to Manager, it means the current activity is "Reconnecting to
manager" and there is one other activity being performed (or queued) at the same time.
If desired, you can show a detailed list of the Console's activity.
To show the Console's activity:
l
Click the square box next to the Connected message.
When activity occurs, a small pane appears, listing each activity. When the activity is over,
the pane hides itself.
27
Opening and closing panes and sidebars
To free up room on the Console, many panes are closed by default. You can open or close these
panes, as needed. In addition, most views have a sidebar that you can open and close to free up
space. You can also resize each pane by dragging the vertical and horizontal bars that separate them.
To open or close panes and sidebars:
l
l
l
l
l
In the Ops Center, click the Widget Manager button to alternately open and close the
Widget Manager panes.
In the Monitor view, click the Filters button to open and close the Filters and Filter Notifications panes.
In the Explore view, click the History button to open and close the History pane.
In the Build and Manage views, click the Console’s Sidebar button to alternately open and
close the Refine Results panes.
In the Monitor and Build views, click the
button to alternately open and close the pane
below a grid. You can also drag the top of this button up and down to resize the grid.
In each case, the icon on the button changes to show the direction the go when you click the button.
To resize panes:
l
Click a horizontal pane divider and then drag it up or down.
l
Click a vertical pane divider and then drag it left or right.
28
Some items (folders, alerts, etc.) appear in hierarchical node trees,
as shown here. Closing the node hides its items. Opening the
node shows its items.
To open or close nodes:
l
To open a node, click the ► icon. This displays the next level of items beneath the node.
l
Click the ▼ icon to close the node. This hides the node’s lower-level items.
In this picture, the node is closed, which
hides its lower-level items.
In this right picture, the node is open,
showing the lower-level items within the node.
29
ToolTips
Many panes, forms, fields, and grids use ToolTips to display helpful tips about the item you are
viewing. They also displays the complete contents of a text box that is partially hidden.
To see ToolTips:
l
Move your pointer over the item you want to learn more about. After a moment, the ToolTip
appears, as shown here.
30
Working with grids
Working with grids
Grids are used throughout the Console. The following topics explain how to perform common tasks
with grids, such as selecting rows and grid cells, resizing grid columns, rearranging grid columns, and
sorting a grid by its columns.
Selecting items in a grid
You can select an entire row or an individual cell in a grid. Some grids, such as the alert grid, allow
you to select multiple rows in any order, or as a continuous series of rows.
To select a row in a grid:
l
In the grid, click the row you want to work with.
To select rows in a grid:
l
l
To select specific rows, press and hold the Ctrl key; then click each row you want to select.
To select a continuous range of rows, press and hold the Shift key; then click the first and the
last row in the range. This selects the two rows, and all of the rows between them.
To select a grid cell:
l
Click the specific cell you want to work with. The row is also selected, by default.
Moving through a grid
l
l
After selecting a row in a grid, you can use the up (↑) and down (↑) arrow keys to move up and
down through the grid.
If the grid contains a long list of items, use the scroll bars to move quickly up and down in the
list.
31
Resizing grid columns
When needed, you can resize a grid column to see more of its data.
To resize a grid column:
1. Position your pointer on the line between two of the grid’s column headers.
2. When the pointer turns into a two-headed arrow, resize the columns by dragging the line
between the columns to the left or to the right.
32
When needed, you can rearrange the order in which grid columns appears. The columns will stay in
their rearranged order until you exit the Console. Upon reopening the Console, the columns revert to
their default order.
To rearrange grid columns:
l
Click the header of the column you want to move; then drag it to the right or left and drop it into
the desired position.
Before
In this example, we will swap the positions of the Role and Manager columns. First, click the Role
column header. Then drag and drop it to the right of the Manager column header.
After
33
You can sort the data in a grid by clicking its column headers. You can sort each column in ascending
(alphabetical) order, or in descending (reverse alphabetical) order. In many cases, you can sort a grid
by more than one column by using the Ctrl+click method.
Note: Before you can sort the Monitor view’s alert grid, you must first click the grid’s Pause button to
stop the incoming alert traffic. When you are done, click Resume to continue receiving alert traffic.
To sort a grid:
l
Click one of the grid’s column headers to sort the grid by that column.
If the column header shows an upward ▲ arrow, it means the column data is sorted in
ascending order (alphabetically, or from lowest to highest: A to Z, 1 to 0).
If the column header shows a downward ▼ arrow, it means the column data is sorted in
descending order (reverse alphabetical, or from highest to lowest: Z to A, 0 to 1).
l
Click the column header again to sort the grid by the same column, but in reverse order.
To sort a grid my multiple columns:
l
Press and hold the Ctrl key; then click another column header.
You can tell how you the table is sorted by the small ▲ and ▼ arrows in the column headers,
and by the little numbers (1 and 2) that appear next to them. An “up” ▲ arrow means the
column is sorted in ascending order. A “down” ▼ arrow means it is sorted in descending order.
Then numbers state the column sort order. 1 is the first sort, 2 is the second sort, and so on.
l
If a secondary column’s sort order is in the wrong direction, press the Ctrl key and click the
column header again. This will reverse the column’s sort order.
Example: In the example shown below, this tool list was first sorted by Category in
ascending order. This listed the tool categories in alphabetical order.
By pressing Ctrl and then clicking the Name column, you can also sort the tool names in
ascending or descending order. In the example shown here, the Name column was sorted in
34
ascending order, so the specific tools would appear in alphabetical order within each tool
category.
35
Use the following procedure when you need to determine which version of the TriGeo SIM Console
you are using.
To determine your version:
l
In the upper-left corner of the Console, click the TriGeo logo.
The About screen appears, showing the Console's version, build number, and TriGeo
Technical Support contact information.
36
Exiting the TriGeo Console closes the Console window and disconnects the Console from any
connected Managers.
Normally, you will not exit the Console unless you want to close it. Exiting the Console causes it to
disappear to the Managers. The Managers continue to gather information from their Agents. However,
when you reopen the Console, it will not display the Manager and Agent alert traffic when that
occurred when it was closed. Instead, the alert grid will be blank.
It is recommended that you keep the Console running either on your workstation or a secondary
workstation to best monitor alerts on a daily basis.
To exit the TriGeo Console:
l
Click
on the TriGeo Console’s title bar.
37
About the Ops Center
The Ops Center is a “dashboard” used for viewing and managing informational “widgets.” Each
widget represents a high-level graphical view of specific network activity. Widgets are designed to
present important high-level information in easy-to-read graphical formats, such as charts and graphs.
Widgets are filter-driven — that is, a filter is the data source for the graphical representation found in
the widget. In fact, widgets appear in Monitor, as well, so you can see graphical views of your filters
along with their grid-based views.
You can choose from a library of commonly used widgets that TriGeo has prepared, or you can create
your own widgets. You can add or remove widgets, edit existing widgets, or resize, refresh, and
rearrange widgets to meet your personal preferences.
To begin working with a dashboard widget, simply click to select the widget you want to work with.
You can point to the widget to display ToolTips and details about its graph. You can also use the
control options on its toolbar to change the widget’s settings display format.
You can resize widgets, but they are limited to certain sizes and aspect ratios to keep the Ops
Center tidy and organized.
39
Ops Center features
This topic describes the key features of the Ops Center and its Widget Manager.
The Ops Center view
The following table describes the key features of the Ops Center view.
Item
Name
Description
Widget
Manager
Click this button to alternately open and close the Widget
Manager. The Widget Manager includes two panes—the
Categories pane and the Widgets pane.
40
Ops Center features
Item
Name
Description
Filters pane
Widgets are organized by filter. You can use the Filters pane to
view, add, and edit the master widgets that are associated with
each filter, and to create dashboard widgets from each master
widget.
The Name column lists each filter that has one or more master
widgets. The Count column states how many master widgets
are associated with each filter. You can also sort the columns of
the Filters pane.
Opens the Widget Builder, so you can add a new master
widget to the selected category.
Opens the Widget Builder for the widget that is currently
selected in the Widgets pane. The Widget Builder lets you edit
the widget’s settings.
Widgets pane
The Widgets pane is used to view the master widgets that are
associated with each filter. You can also use this pane to create
dashboard widgets and to delete master widgets from the
selected filter.
Add to
Dashboard
This button adds a copy of the master widget that is currently
shown in the Widgets pane to the dashboard.
Delete Widget
This button deletes the master widget that is currently shown in
the Widgets pane. Deleting a master widget does not delete any
of the dashboard widgets that came from that widget.
Widget
scroll bar
Drag this scroll bar left and right to view each master widget in
the selected category. You can also click any of the widgets
shown in the preview pane to move that widget to the front.
Dashboard
The dashboard displays the widgets you have selected for
monitoring your network.
Widgets
Each widget represents a high-level graphical view of specific
network activity. Widgets are designed for easy interpretation
and to provide important information at a glance. You can edit,
refresh, resize, rearrange, and delete widgets, as required to
meet your monitoring needs.
41
About widgets
Each widget represents a high-level graphical view of specific network activity. Widgets are designed
to present important high-level information at a glance. Most widgets are filter-driven—that is, a filter
is the data source for what you are graphing in the widget.
The topics in this section describe some general information about widgets, their uses, and their
behavior.
Master widgets and dashboard widgets
There are two kinds of widgets—master widgets and dashboard widgets.
l
l
A master widget is a widget configured from a specific alert filter in such a way that it can act
as a template for creating other widgets.
When creating or editing a master widget, you can choose to save a copy of that widget’s current configuration to the Ops Center dashboard. This copy is called a dashboard widget.
Every dashboard widget comes from a master widget. Therefore, a dashboard widget is
simply a saved copy of a particular master widget configuration.
Using master widgets as templates
Master widgets are important because you can use them to create new dashboard widgets that are
based on variations on the master widget’s basic configuration. By using a master widget as a
template, you can quickly create and save variations on the master widget, without having to create
them from scratch.
For example, you could place two different copies of the same master widget on your dashboard—
perhaps the first widget displays “events per day” and another displays “events per hour.” Both
widgets use the same logic, but differ in how they display the events.
Widget independence
Once created, each dashboard widget becomes independent of the master widget it came from:
l
l
Editing or deleting a master widget does not affect any previous copies (dashboard widgets)
that were created from that master.
Editing or deleting a dashboard widget does not affect the master widget it came from.
Widget independence means you don’t have to worry about your dashboard widgets changing each
time you edit a master widget, and vice versa.
42
Widget storage
Widget storage
Widgets appear in two areas—the Ops Center and in the Monitor view’s Widgets pane:
l
l
In the Ops Center, master widgets always reside in the Widget Manager’s Categories list.
Dashboard widgets always reside on the dashboard. Dashboard widgets cannot be saved in
the Widget Manager.
In the Monitor view, each master widget appears in the Widgets pane for the filter that acts
as its data source. Dashboard widgets do not appear in the Monitor view’s Widgets pane. For
more information on using widgets in the Monitor view, see "Using a filter's Widgets pane" on
page 102.
43
Using the Widget Manager
The topics in this section explain how to use the Widget Manager to create and manage your
widgets.
Opening and closing the Widget Manager
l
At the top of the Ops Manager view, click Widget Manager to alternately open and close the
Widget Manager.
The Widget Manager includes the Filters pane and the Widgets pane.
Creating new master widgets
In the Ops Center, you can use the Widget Manager to create a new master widget for any of your
filters. Widgets are created with a tool called the Widget Builder, which allows you to define the new
widget’s foundational and aesthetic settings. It also allows you to save a copy of the new widget to
the Ops Center dashboard.
To create a new master widget from the Ops Center:
1. Open the Ops Center view.
2. If needed, click Widget Manager to open the Filters and Widgets panes.
3. Click the
button.
The Widget Builder appears.
4. Complete the Widget Builder. For details, see "Using the Widget Builder" on page 48.
5. Select the Save to Dashboard check box if you want to save a copy of the new widget to the
Ops Center dashboard.
6. When you are finished, click Save.
Upon saving the new widget, several things happen:
l
l
l
l
In the Filters pane, the Count value of the associated filter increases by one to
account for the new widget.
The new widget appears in the Widgets pane for the associated filter.
The next time you open the widget’s source filter in the Monitor view, the new widget
will appear in the Widgets pane’s widget list.
If you selected the Save to Dashboard option, a copy of the widget also appears in the
44
In the Ops Center, you can use the Widget Manager to edit any of the master widgets that are
associated with a filter. Typically, you will edit a master widget when you want to change a master
widget’s name, behavior, or appearance, or whenever you want to use the master widget as a
template to create a new dashboard widget based on the master widget’s current configuration.
Once saved, an updated master widget appears with its new configuration in the Ops Center’s
Widget Manager and in the Monitor view’s Widgets pane.
Once created, each dashboard widget operates independently of the master widget it was created
from. Therefore, editing a master widget does not affect any previous copies (dashboard widgets) that
were created from that master. This independence lets you use a master widget as a template for
creating variations of the same widget for the Ops Center dashboard.
To edit a master widget in the Ops Center:
3. In the Filters pane, select the filter you want to work with.
The widgets associated with this filter appear in the Widgets pane.
4. Drag the pane’s scroll bar left or right to browse the filter's widgets.
5. When you find the widget you want to edit, click the Filters pane gear
button.
6. Use the Widget Builder to reconfigure the widget, as needed. For detailed instructions, see
"Using the Widget Builder" on page 48.
7. Select the Save to Dashboard check box if you want to save a copy of the reconfigured
master widget to the Ops Center dashboard.
8. Click Save to save your changes to the widget.
The master widget’s new configuration appears in the Widgets pane. If you selected the Save
to Dashboard option, a copy of the newly configured widget also appears in the Ops Center
dashboard.
45
Adding widgets to the dashboard
Use either of the following procedures to add a copy of a master widget to the Ops Center
dashboard. The original remains with its filter. Once a copy is on the dashboard, you may edit its
graphical presentation, as needed.
To add a widget from the Widgets pane to the dashboard:
The widgets associated with this filter appear in the Widgets pane.
4. To preview the widgets in the Widgets pane, do one of the following:
l
Drag the pane’s scroll bar left or right to browse the filter's widgets.
l
Click any widget to move it to the front of the pane.
5. When you find the widget you want to add to the dashboard, do either of the following:
l
l
Click Add to Dashboard.
Click anywhere on the widget. Drag it to the dashboard, and then drop it in the position
you want.
46
To add a widget to the dashboard from the Widget Builder:
1. When creating or editing a master widget with the Widget Builder, configure the form so the
widget will appear the way you want it to on the dashboard.
2. Select the Save to Dashboard check box.
3. Click Save.
A copy of the widget appears at the bottom of the Ops Center dashboard.
Widgets can only be deleted from the Ops Center, and master widgets can only be deleted from the
Widget Manager. Deleting a master widget does not delete any of the dashboard widgets that came
from that master.
To delete a master widget:
2. If needed, click Widget Manager to open the Filters list and the Widgets pane.
3. In the Filters list, select the filter that contains the widget you want to delete.
4. In the Widgets pane, use the scroll bar to select the widget you want to delete.
5. Click Delete Widget.
6. At the confirmation prompt, click Yes.
47
This topic explains how to use the Widget Builder. You will use this form whenever you add a new
widget or edit the configuration of an existing widget.
The Widget Builder
The following table explains how use each field on the Widget Builder.
Field
Name
Description
Type a name for the widget. This name will appear in the widget’s title bar.
48
Field
Filter
Description
Select the filter that is to be the widget's data source. If a filter name
appears in italics, it means the filter is currently turned off.
When creating a widget from the Monitor view, this field defaults to the filter
that is currently active. If you select a different filter, the widget will be
associated with that filter, not the active filter.
When creating a widget from the Ops Center, this field defaults to the first
option in the list.
Note: If you create a widget from a filter that is turned off, the widget will not
display any chart information until the filter is turned back on.
Description
Type a brief description of the information this widget is reporting. You may
use up to 80 characters.
Visual Configuration
Visualization
Type
Select the type of chart or graph you want—Pie, Bar, Line, Table, etc.
Select Table for those times when a table of values is a useful way to view
the data. You can display a widget with any of these display types at any
time. However, some display types may not make sense for some widgets,
depending on the widget’s content.
Color /
Color Palette
Select a color palette for the chart or graph.
X-Axis Label
If desired, type a label for the chart or graph’s horizontal axis.
Y-Axis Label
If desired, type a label for the chart or graph’s vertical axis.
Preview
The Preview section shows what the widget will look like, based on the
options you have selected in the Visual Configuration section.
Data Configuration
Field
Select a data field you want reported from those that are available in the
selected data source.
49
Field
Show
Description
Select how you want the frequency reported:
l
l
Count: (default) This option counts each occurrence of the selected
Field value. For example, if the Field you select is AlertID, you are
counting the number of alerts. As a practical matter, no matter which
field you select, you are counting alerts. But it is best to think of the
widget as counting occurrences of the field.
Distinct Count: This option does not count repeating Field values.
Instead, it counts each time a distinctly different event occurs. For
example, if you select a Field value like Alert Name or Detection
IP, the widget will count each specific value only once.
When used in a single-dimension chart, the Distinct Count option
reports all values as 1, so this option is best used with multidimensional charts.
Sort
Select how you want the data Show data sorted:
l
l
Descending (default) order is from highest to lowest (Z to A, or 0 to
1, etc.).
Ascending order is from lowest to highest (A to Z, or 1 to 0, etc.).
Sorting only applies when your Versus value is something other than Time.
Versus
If you want a second dimension in the chart, select another data field from
those that are available in the selected data source.
This field’s sort order is ascending.
Split By
If you want a third dimension in the chart, select another data field from
those that are available in the selected data source.
This field’s sort order is ascending.
Limit
Most filters contain a data span that exceeds what is practical to chart. The
Limit value limits the number of items that will be seen.
Select a limit for the number of items that are to be charted. The default
value is 5.
For example, this can represent your Top 5 or Bottom 5, depending on how
you sort the data.
50
Field
Scope
Description
Select a value for the scope. This is the timeframe reported by the chart or
graph. The scope is always measured backward from the moment the chart
is refreshed. For example, a scope of 30 minutes means “the last 30
minutes.”
The scope can be measured in Seconds, Minutes (default), Hours, or
Days. For events that happen frequently, choose a narrow scope. For
events that happen rarely, choose a large scope.
Resolution
Select the time value that defines the “tick marks” that are to be used on the
chart’s horizontal X-axis. This field is required when Versus is a Time
Field.
For example, if you are looking at 30 minutes of data, a Resolution of 5
Minutes means the bars or line chart data points are drawn in 5 minute
increments. In charts with wider scope, the resolution could be hours or
even days.
This option is disabled for widgets that are not reporting time-based data.
Refresh
Select the rate at which you want the widget to refresh its visual display.
This is necessary because the Console is monitoring real-time data.
Therefore, you need to periodically refresh the chart.
Save and cancel
Save to
Dashboard
Select this option to save the new or updated widget to the bottom of the
Save
Click Save to save the new or revised master widget.
Upon saving, the new widget configuration immediately appears in the Op
Center Widget Manager and in the Monitor view's Widget pane.
Cancel
Click Cancel to cancel your changes close the Widget Builder.
51
Working with widgets in the Ops Center
dashboard
The topics in the section explain the key features of widgets, as well as how to work with and manage
widgets in the Ops Center dashboard.
Turning on a widget that has been turned off
If a widget states "Filter is Turned Off," you can turn the widget on again by turning its filter back on.
See "Turning filters on and off" on page 93.
Widget toolbar
The following table describes the function of each button on a widget toolbar. All of these buttons are
on the widget toolbar, except for the “legend” button, which appears in the lower-left corner of the
widget.
Button
Function
Opens the widget in the Widget Builder, so you can edit its settings.
“Flips” the widget, so you can configure its presentation format.
Refreshes the widget’s data.
Expands (maximizes) the widget to fill the desktop.
52
Button
Function
Restores the widget from its maximized size to its default size.
This button has two functions:
l
l
In normal dashboard mode, this button deletes the widget from the
dashboard.
When you are editing a “flipped” widget, this button closes the widget’s edit
mode, and returns it to its normal desktop view.
Opens the widget’s legend.
Each widget bar chart, graph, and pie chart has a legend that explains what each bar, line, or wedge in
the chart represents.
To view a widget’s legend:
l
Click the widget’s legend
button.
The chart legend appears, as shown here.
To close a widget’s legend:
l
Click the legend’s “close”
button.
53
Viewing specific widget data
Widget graphs and charts display basic high-level information. However, each widget includes
ToolTips that show specific data about each bar, line, or wedge in the chart. Typically, this
information is the reported alert, Alert Group, or alert field, and its number of occurrences.
To view specific chart data:
l
Point to the specific bar, line, or wedge you want to know about.
A ToolTip appears, showing specific data about the item you are pointing to.
Refreshing a widget’s data
Widgets automatically refresh themselves according to the Refresh rate that was set when the
widget was created. If a widget has a slow refresh rate, you can refresh it whenever you want.
Refreshing a widget immediately updates it to show the most current real-time data from your
network traffic.
To refresh a widget:
You can refresh the data shown by an individual widget as follows:
l
On the widget toolbar, click the refresh
button.
The widget refreshes to show the latest data from your network.
54
Widgets act as shortcuts to the alert filters that are their data sources. This means you can open the
source filter directly from a widget. You do this by clicking the specific line, bar, or pie wedge of chart
that interests you. The corresponding filter then opens in the Monitor view. The filter lists only the
events that correspond with the chart item you selected.
To open a filter from a dashboard widget:
2. In the dashboard, locate the widget you want to work with.
3. On the widget, click the specific line, bar, or pie wedge that interests you.
The Monitor view appears, with the alert grid showing the filter that is the widget’s data
source. Note that the alert grid lists only those events that correspond to the line, bar, or pie
wedge that you clicked. Also note that the filter is paused. Click Resume on the alert grid
toolbar to begin running the filter again.
Note: It is possible for you to select an item in the widget that is no longer shown in the Monitor's
alert grid. That is, the filter may actually show fewer events than appear in the widget. This can
happen if the widget's scope is broader than the filter's scope. In this case, the filter may no longer
have some of the data shown by the widget, because the filter has had to make room for new data.
Remember, the widget's scope can be different than the filter's scope. The widget tracks statistics
about alerts that occurred over time (and perhaps a very large timeframe). The filter tracks only a
certain quantity of events for a timeframe that may be much smaller than the widget's scope.
55
To think about it another way: the Console filters are aware of 10,000 alerts at a time. With every
refresh interval, a widget looks at those 10,000 alerts to draw a line, bar, or wedge that matches the
right count for that time. Those 10,000 alerts are also displayed in the corresponding filter. But when
the Console gets to 10,000 alerts, the widget doesn't "erase" any data points it has already drawn, but
the filter has to remove the oldest alerts from the grid to make room for new data.
Editing a dashboard widget
In the Ops Center dashboard, you can edit any dashboard widget. Editing a dashboard widget does
not affect the master widget it came from, or any other widget. You are editing only that particular
widget.
When editing a dashboard widget, the Save to Dashboard option is disabled, because dashboard
widgets can only be created from a master widget.
To edit a dashboard widget:
1. In the Ops Center dashboard, locate the widget you want to work with.
2. Click the gear
button on the widget toolbar.
3. Make the necessary changes to the Widget Builder, as described in "Using the Widget
Builder" on page 48.
The widget appears in the dashboard with its new configuration.
56
On the back of each widget there is a form that lets you change how the data is presented on the
widget. However, your options are limited to the type of widget you are working with and the type of
data it is reporting. For example, widgets that only report data in one dimension may be limited to a pie
chart, while information in two dimensions can be reported in a bar chart or a line chart.
To edit a widget’s presentation from the dashboard:
1. In the Ops Center dashboard, locate the widget you want to work with.
2. Click the edit
3. The widget flips over to display its configuration options, as shown here.
4. Configure the widget, according to its configuration options. These options are a sub-set of the
fields on the Widget Builder. For complete information on each of these fields, see "Using
the Widget Builder" on page 48.
57
Rearranging widgets on the dashboard
Use the following procedure to rearrange the widgets on the dashboard so they appear in the order
you want.
To arrange widgets on the dashboard:
2. If needed, click Widget Manager to close the Categories and Widgets panes. This provides
the most space for arranging your widgets.
3. In the dashboard, drag a widget’s title bar to move that widget into a new position on the
dashboard.
As you move the widget around the dashboard, the other widgets rearrange themselves and
make room for your widget. Upon releasing the mouse button, the widget snaps into place.
Resizing a widget
You can view widgets in “full-screen” mode or in their normal size. You can also change the size of a
widget to make it taller or wider. However, the widget’s different sizes must conform to the
dashboard’s standard geometry.
To resize a widget:
l
In the Ops Center dashboard, drag the lower-right corner of the widget in any direction.
As you resize the widget, the surrounding widgets rearrange themselves to make room for the
larger one. Upon releasing the mouse button, the widget snaps to the closest size allowed by
the desktop’s geometry.
To show a widget in full-screen mode:
l
In the Ops Center dashboard, click the Maximize
button on the widget’s toolbar.
The widget takes up the entire dashboard.
To restore a widget to its normal size:
l
In the Ops Center dashboard, click the Minimize
The widget returns to its normal size.
58
button on the widget’s toolbar.
Widgets can only be deleted from the Ops Center. You can delete dashboard widgets directly from
the dashboard.
To delete a widget from the dashboard:
2. In the dashboard, locate the widget you want to delete.
3. Click the delete
The widget is deleted from the dashboard.
Note: If needed, you can readily recreate the dashboard widget, so long as you do not delete
the master widget it came from.
59
The following table briefly describes the widgets that ship with the TriGeo SIM Console.
Widget name/Filter
Description
All Alerts
Displays all alerts from all filters.
Alerts by Alert Type
Displays a count of the top 10 alerts by alert type (alert name).
Alerts by Tool Name
Displays the number of alerts being captured by each configured
tool, over time.
Alerts per Minute
Displays the total count of alerts per minute for the last 15 minutes.
Change Management
Displays alerts related to changes occurring on the network.
Change Management
Alerts by Agent
Displays the top 10 Agents generating change management
alerts
Change Management
Alerts by Type
Displays the top 10 change management alerts by alert type.
Failed Logons
Displays all user account failed logon attempts.
Failed Logons by User
Account
Displays the top 5 Failed Logons by User Account name.
File Audit Failures
Displays FileAuditFailure alerts, which show failed attempts to
access audited files.
File Audit Failures by File
Name
Displays the top 10 file names generating file audit failures.
File Audit Failures by
Source Account
Displays the top 10 source accounts generating file audit failures.
Firewall
Displays all alerts from firewall devices.
Firewall Alerts by Firewall
Displays the top 5 firewalls generating firewall alerts
Firewall Alerts by Type
Displays the top 5 firewall alerts by alert type.
Incidents
Displays all Incident alerts.
60
Widget name/Filter
Description
Incidents by Rule Name
Displays the top 5 incidents by the name of the rule that generated the Incident.
Interactive Logons by User
Account
Displays the top 10 user logons by user account name.
My Rules Fired by Rule
Name
Displays the top 5 subscribed alerts by the name of the rule that
generated them.
Network Alerts
Displays all Network alerts.
Network Alerts by Source
Machine
Displays the top 10 machines generating network alerts.
Network Alert Trends
Displays the top 10 network-related alerts by alert type.
Rule Activity
Shows all of the TriGeo rules that have fired.
Rules Fired by Rule Name
Displays the top 5 rules fired by rule name.
Security Processes
Displays process launches and exits from processes in the
"Security Processes" User-Defined Group, which is used to monitor critical security-related processes.
Security Processes by
Agent
Displays the top 10 Agents generating security process alerts.
Subscriptions
Displays alerts created by rules you are "Subscribed" to in the
Rules area.
TriGeo Alerts
Displays all Internal alerts (alerts generated during operation of
the TriGeo SIM).
TriGeo Alerts by Alert Type
Displays the top 10 TriGeo Alerts by alert type.
Unusual Network Traffic
Displays alerts that indicate unusual or suspicious network traffic.
Unusual Network Traffic by
Destination
Displays the top 5 destinations for unusual network traffic.
Unusual Network Traffic by
Source
Displays the top 10 sources of unusual network traffic.
USD Defender
Displays all USB-Defender events.
61
Widget name/Filter
Description
USB-Defender Activity by
Detection IP
Displays the top 5 Agents with the most USB-Defender alerts.
USB File Auditing
Displays USB-Defender's File Auditing events.
USB File Auditing by
Detection IP
Displays the top 5 Agents with the most USB file auditing alerts.
User Logons
Displays all user account logons
User Logons by Agent
Displays the top 5 Agents reporting user logons.
User Logons by Source
Machine
Displays the top 5 user logons by source machine.
User Logons by User
Account
Displays the top 10 user logons by user account name.
User Logons (Interactive)
Displays interactive user account logons.
Virus Attacks
Displays all virus attack alerts.
Virus Attacks by Source
Machine
Displays the top 5 sources of virus attacks or infections.
62
Chapter 5: Working with alerts and alert
filters
About the Monitor view
The Monitor view is the heart of the TriGeo Console. As the name implies, it is used for monitoring
your network activity. In Monitor, you will create filters and widgets that group and display different
alerts that come from your Agents, Managers, and network devices.
Alerts
Alerts are messages created from Agent, Manager, and network device log entries. These log entries
are processed (or normalized) to extract information and display the data in a common column/fieldbased format, rather than the often convoluted format you see in the source data. These normalized
alerts are sent from the Agent to the Manager for processing. At the Manager, the alerts are
processed against your Rules, sent to your TriGeo Database for archiving, and sent to the TriGeo
Console for monitoring.
Filters
On a busy network, there can be millions of alerts each day. Therefore, the Console uses alert filters
to manage alerts. A filter is a subset of your alerts that focuses on a particular type or group of alerts
and hides all others. When configuring a filter, you can examine and use individual alert properties to
determine precisely which alerts are to appear in that filter.
Filters apply at the Console level. This means they apply to all data sent from every Manager
monitored by the Console. Filters also display alerts in real time.
You can turn filters on and off, pause filters to sort or investigate their alerts, perform actions to
respond to alerts, and configure filters to notify you when they capture a particular alert. Filters can
also display widgets, which are charts and graphs that visually represent the alert data. Widgets are
described in more detail below.
The TriGeo SIM ships with many commonly used filters that support best practices in the security
industry. However, you can create your own custom filters, or modify existing filters to meet your
needs. There is no limit to the number of filters a Console can contain.
63
The Filters pane and filter groups
Filters are managed in the Filters pane. The Filters pane stores all of the
filters that can be applied to the Console’s alert grid.
Filters are organized into filter groups. A filter group is simply a high-level
category for storing filters that logically fit into that category. Each title
bar in the Monitor view’s Filters pane represents a different filter group.
Each item listed in a filter group is a different alert filter.
Clicking a filter in the Filters pane causes the alert grid to show a filtered
view of the alert stream coming into the Console. The grid displays only
those alerts that are allowed by the filter—it hides all of the other alerts.
Because filters list only those events that meet their specific
requirements, they are a handy way to organize and quickly sift through
large quantities of alerts.
Filter attributes
The number next to each filter shows the total number of alerts that are
currently associated with that filter. Positioning your pointer over a filter
displays a ToolTip that briefly describes the purpose of each filter, when
such a description is available. Any filters that appear in italics are
currently turned off.
Filters pane uses
You can use the Filters pane to do any of the following tasks:
l
Create your own custom filters and reconfigure existing filters to meet your needs.
l
Create filter groups for storing and organizing your filters.
l
Turn filters on and off, and pause them to stop the flow of alert traffic.
l
Move filters from one filter group to another.
l
Copy filters.
l
Rename filters and filter groups.
l
Import and export filters.
l
Delete obsolete filters and filter groups.
l
To apply a filter to the alert grid, simply click one of the filters listed in the Filters pane.
As a response, the alert grid immediately refreshes. Its title bar shows the name of the filter,
and the alert grid displays only those alert messages that are allowed by the filter—it hides or
“filters out” all other alert messages.
64
The TriGeo SIM ships with some commonly used filters that support best practices in the security
industry. Each of these filters is described in the following table. They are listed alphabetically for
easy reference. The Default status column indicates if the filter is On (visible) or Off (hidden) by
default.
To add your own custom filters, see "Creating custom alert filters" on page 109. To change an
existing filter, see "Editing an existing filter" on page 89.
Note: If you are installing an upgrade, the TriGeo SIM automatically converts your existing filters into
the new graphical format described in see "Editing an existing filter" on page 89.
Default
status
Filter
Description
Admin Account
Authentication
Displays alerts for authentication to administrative-level
accounts.
Off
All Alerts
Displays all alerts from all sources.
On
Change
Management
Displays alerts for changes made to users, groups, and
devices.
On
Denied ACL Traffic
Displays alerts for network traffic that has been
administratively denied.
Off
Domain
Controllers (all)
Displays all alerts from domain controller devices.
Off
Failed Logons
Displays failed logon attempts.
On
File Audit Failures
Displays FileAuditFailure alerts, which show failed
attempts to access audited files.
Off
Firewall
Displays all alerts from firewall devices.
On
FTP Traffic
Displays TCP Traffic to and from ports 20 and 21,
indicating file transfer activity on the network.
On
IDS
Displays all alerts from network intrusion detection
devices.
On
Incidents
Displays all Incident Alerts.
On
65
Default
status
Filter
Description
Network Alerts
Displays all alerts in the NetworkAudit category of the
alert tree.
On
Proxy Bypassers
Displays WebTrafficAudit alerts that are not from a proxy
server. This can indicates an internal machine attempting
to access the Web directly, rather than by using the proxy
server.
Off
Rule Activity
Displays InternalRuleFired and InternalTestRule alerts,
which indicate that TriGeo Rules have been triggered.
On
Security Alerts
Displays all alerts in the SecurityAlert category of the alert
tree.
On
Security
Processes
Displays ProcessStart and ProcessStop alerts related to
critical security processes running on machines. These
processes include anti-virus, anti-spyware, and firewall
processes.
On
SMTP Traffic
Displays TCP traffic to and from port 25. It can
also identify potentially infected hosts.
On
SNMP Traffic
Displays network traffic to and from port 161. This filter can
be used to discover network scan attempts and normal
network monitoring tools.
On
Subscriptions
Displays alerts from user rule subscriptions.
On
TriGeo Alerts
Displays all alerts in the InternalAlert category of the alert
tree.
On
Unusual Network
Traffic
Displays alerts in the NetworkSuspicious branch of the
alert tree, which indicate that potentially suspicious or
unusual network activity may be occurring.
On
USB File Auditing
Displays file-related alerts from Agents with USB-Defender
installed.
On
USB-Defender
Displays alerts from TriGeo's USB-Defender technology
that are related to insertion and removal of USB devices.
On
66
Default
status
Filter
Description
User Logon
(interactive)
Displays UserLogon alerts where the logon type indicates
a user physically logging on at a machine, or interactively
logging on to a remote desktop.
On
User Logons
Displays all UserLogon alerts from all sources, indicating
varying types of user authentication and access.
On
Virus Attacks
Displays all VirusAttack alerts. VirusAttack alerts are
created when virus scanners detect potentially malicious
virus activity.
Off
Web Traffic for
Source Machine
Displays WebTrafficAudit alerts that match a specific
source machine. This filter can be used to track a single
machine’s web activity to discover potentially abusive
activity.
Off
Web Traffic –
Spyware
Displays WebTrafficAudit activity to and from URLs that
are indicated by the Spyware Sites User-Defined Group to
be potentially malicious websites.
Off
67
The Monitor view
The following table describes the key features of the Monitor view.
Item
Name
Description
Filters button
Click the Filters button to alternately show and hide the Filters
pane.
68
Item
Name
Description
Filters pane
The Filters pane stores all of the filters that you can apply to the
Console’s alert messages.
l
l
l
Click a filter name to apply that filter to the alert grid. The
alert grid refreshes to show only the incoming alerts
allowed by the filter’s conditions.
Use the plus
button to create your own custom filters
and filter groups.
Use the pane’s gear
button to edit, pause, resume,
turn on, turn off, import, export, or delete filters.
Alert grid
TriGeo Agents monitor each configured data source on your
network. The Agents then send alerts to your Managers. The
Console's alert grid displays every alert that is logged to each
Manager the Console is connected to.
The grid’s title bar displays the name of that filter that is currently
applied. By default, incoming alerts always appear at the top of the
grid. This allows the Console to always show the most recent alert
activity first.
Respond menu
Use this menu to actively respond to a particular alert message.
For example, you can choose to block an IP address, or restart or
shut down machine that is the source of the alert activity. For
more information, see "Responding to alert messages" on page
83.
Explore menu
Use this menu to explore a particular alert message or one of its
specific data elements with a TriGeo explorer. The menu is
context-sensitive. The contents of the selected cell (called a
string) determines which explorers you may choose from. For
more information, see "Exploring alerts" on page 78.
Pause/Resume
This button toggles to pause or resume the alert traffic that is
currently being reported by the filter.
This button lets you “highlight” rows in the alert grid with a
particular color. Highlighting can serve as a helpful visual
reference point for marking and locating specific alerts in the grid.
For more information, see "Highlighting alerts" on page 74.
69
Item
Name
Description
The gear button at the top of the grid opens commands that you
can perform on multiple selections in the grid, and commands that
do not require a grid selection. You can use these commands to
mark messages as read or unread, to remove messages, or to
copy alert information.
Sort (▼ ▲)
When a filter is paused, you can click the column headers to sort
the grid in ascending (▲) or desending (▼) order by each of its
columns. For more information, see "Sorting a grid by its columns"
on page 34.
Filter
Notifications
pane
The Filter Notifications pane summarizes the alert activity from
each of your active notification filters—these are filters that use
blink, popup, or sound notifications. Click a filter name in this tab
to view the alerts associated with that filter. This pane behaves
exactly like the status bar's Notifications tab.
Widgets pane
This pane displays the widgets associated with the filter that is
currently applied to the alert grid. Widgets automatically refresh
themselves to reflect changes in alert grid filtering.
You can use this pane view the different widgets associated with
the filter, change a widget’s visualization type (bar chart, pie chart,
line graph, etc.), create a new widget, edit an existing widget, or
save a widget to the Ops Center dashboard.
Alert Details/
Alert
Description
Alert Details and Alert Description are two views of the same
pane. This pane displays detailed information about the last alert
to be selected in the grid.
l
l
The Alert Details view displays specific technical details
about the alert. You can also use this view to create a filter
based on the selected alert, or to scroll through the
contents of the alert grid.
The Alert Description view displays a written description
of the alert that is currently selected.
For more information, see "Using the Alert Details/Alert
Description pane" on page 80.
70
Item
Name
Description
Notifications
The Notifications tab summarizes the alert activity from each of
your active notification filters—these are filters that use blink,
popup, or sound notifications. Click a filter name in this tab to view
the alerts associated with that filter. For more information, see
"Notifications tab" on page 23.
71
Using the alert grid
This section explains how to use the alert grid, which you can use to perform any of the following
tasks:
l
l
Pausing and resuming alert traffic
l
l
Highlighting alerts
l
Copying alerts to your clipboard
l
Marking alerts as unread and read
l
Exploring alerts with TriGeo explorers
l
Responding to alerts to take preventive or corrective action
l
Removing alerts from the grid.
In the Monitor view, each item listed in the Filters pane represents a different alert filter. You can
filter the alerts coming into the Console by selecting any of these items.
To apply a filter:
1. Open the Monitor view.
2. In the Filters pane, click the title bar of the filter group you want to work with.
The filter group opens to list the filters that are available for that group.
3. Select the filter you want to apply to the alert grid.
The alert grid title bar displays the name of the filter you have selected, and the grid refreshes
to display only those alerts that meet the special conditions of that filter.
Note: Alert filters are saved on the workstation that is running the TriGeo Console. If you
move to another workstation, the filters will not follow. However, you can export the filters
from one workstation and import them into another workstation. For more information, see
"Exporting a filter" on page 96 and "Importing a filter" on page 95.
72
Filters capture and report alerts in real time. This causes alerts to "stream" in the alert grid, which can
make them difficult to work with. Therefore, you can pause the flow of incoming alert traffic, which
allows you to more easily examine your alerts. Once paused, the incoming alert traffic stops, so you
can work with the grid to sort, highlight, read, copy, and explore individual alerts, as needed.
To pause a incoming filter's alert traffic:
2. In the Filters pane, click the click to select the filter you want to work with.
3. On the alert grid toolbar, click Pause.
The Console stops the flow of incoming alert traffic.
To resume the filter's incoming alert traffic:
l
On the alert grid toolbar, click Resume.
The Console resumes the filter's flow of incoming alert traffic.
You can sort the alert grid by any of its columns by clicking its column headers. Doing so also
changes how the graph is sorted. However, you must pause the alert grid before you can sort it.
Pausing the grid temporarily stops the incoming flow of alert traffic.
For example, if you click the Alert Name column header, the grid becomes sorted by alert names in
ascending order. If you click the column header again, it sorts the grid by that column in descending
order.
To sort the alert grid:
1. On the alert grid toolbar, click Pause.
2. Sort the grid as you normally would. You can also sort the grid by more than one column. For
more information, see "Sorting a grid by its columns" on page 34.
3. When you are finished working with the sorted grid, click Resume to continue receiving the
filter’s unsorted alert traffic.
73
Highlighting alerts
In the Monitor view’s alert grid, you can highlight alerts to call attention to them or mark them for
future reference. This allows the alerts to really stand out as you scroll through the contents of the
grid. You can highlight multiple alerts at the same time. You can also choose the color you want for
each set of alerts you are highlighting.
To highlight alerts:
2. In the Filters pane, click to select the filter you want to work with.
The alert grid displays the filter you have selected.
3. On the alert grid toolbar, click Pause to temporarily stop any incoming alerts.
Note: It is not required to pause a filter to highlight its alerts; however, it is convenient.
Pausing temporarily stops the flow of alert traffic (freezing any alert movement in the grid) so
you can easily select each item.
4. In the alert grid, click to select the alerts you want highlighted. To learn how to select multiple
alerts, see "Selecting items in a grid" on page 31.
5. On the alert grid toolbar, click the ▼ arrow next to the “highlight”
button.
6. Use the color picker to select the highlight color you want. You can also type the hexadecimal
value of any color in the Web-safe color palette.
In the grid, the selected alerts become highlighted in the color you chose.
74
Highlighting alerts
7. Click Resume to continue the flow of incoming alert traffic.
To highlight more alerts with the same color:
1. In the alert grid, click to select the alerts you want highlighted.
2. Click the "marker" part of the alert grid’s “highlight”
button.
The selected alerts become highlighted with the marker color.
To turn an alert’s highlighting off:
1. (Optional) On the alert grid toolbar, click Pause to temporarily stop any incoming alerts.
2. In the alert grid, select the alerts for which you want to remove highlighting. To learn how to
select multiple alerts, see "Selecting items in a grid" on page 31.
3. On the alert grid toolbar, click the ▼ arrow next to the “highlight”
No Color
button.
The highlighting is removed from the alerts.
4. Click Resume to continue the flow of incoming alert traffic.
75
button. Then click the
Copying alert data to your clipboard
When needed, you can copy alert data from the Monitor view's alert grid or Alert Details pane to
your clipboard. This allows you to paste the data into another application, such as Microsoft Excel, for
comparison or analysis, to share the data with someone who does not have a Console, or to send to
TriGeo Network Security for technical support. You can copy the data for a single alert or for multiple
alerts.
To copy alert data from the alert grid:
3. In the alert grid, click to select the alerts you want to copy. You can select multiple alerts, as
described in "Selecting items in a grid" on page 31.
4. Click the alert grid’s gear
button and then click Copy.
The alert data is now copied to your clipboard (as text), where it can be pasted into another
application.
To copy alert data from the Alert Details grid:
3. In the alert grid, click to select the alert you want to work with.
4. In the Alert Details pane, click to select the rows you want to copy. You can select multiple
alerts, as described in "Selecting items in a grid" on page 31..
button and then click Copy.
The selected alert details are now copied to your clipboard (as text), where it can be pasted
into another application.
76
You may want to mark the alerts in alert filter as being unread and read. A read alert is one that you
have already looked at. An unread alert is one you have not looked at yet. By marking alerts this way,
you can easily track which alerts you have already examined.
To mark alerts as read and unread:
3. In the alert grid, select the alerts you want to mark as read or unread. You can select multiple
alerts, as described in"Selecting items in a grid" on page 31. Skip this step if you are going to
mark all of the alerts as read or unread.
button, and then select one of the options listed in the following
table.
Command
Description
Mark
Unread
Select this command to mark the selected alerts as unread. This means
you have not looked at them yet. Unread alerts appear in bold text. When
a filter has the “read/unread” feature turned on, any of its alerts that are
captured by other filters will appear as unread in those filters, too.
Mark
Read
Select this command to mark the selected alerts as having been read.
Alerts marked as “read” appear in normal text, rather than bold text.
Mark All
Unread
Select this command to mark all of the alerts in the active filter as unread.
This means you have not looked at them yet. Unread alerts appear in bold
text.
Mark All
Read
Select this command to mark all of the alerts in the active filter as having
been read. Alerts marked as “read” appear in normal text, rather than bold
text.
The grid refreshes to show each row’s read/unread status.
To read an unread alert:
l
In the grid, click to select the alert.
The alert’s status changes from unread to read.
77
Exploring alerts
The alert grid’s Explore menu lets you use a TriGeo explorer to investigate a particular alert or one of
its data fields.
To explore an alert:
3. In the alert grid, click the row (or cell) you want to explore.
4. In the filter’s Explore menu, select the TriGeo explorer you want to work with. For a
description of each menu option, see "Types of explorers" on page 156.
The Explore view appears, showing the TriGeo explorer you selected. The explorer contains
the data for the cell you selected.
78
Removing alerts
Removing alerts
When needed, you can remove individual alerts from a filter, or all of the alerts from a filter. You may
want to do this to clean a filter of historical information that is no longer important to you.
To remove individual alerts:
3. In the alert grid, select the alerts you want to remove. You can select multiple alerts, as
described in"Selecting items in a grid" on page 31.
button, and then click Remove.
The selected alerts are removed from the grid.
To remove all alerts:
button, and then click Remove All.
All of the filter’s existing alerts are removed from the grid. The filter will now show only new
incoming alerts.
79
Using the Alert Details/Alert Description pane
In the Monitor view, the right half of the lower pane has two different views to show the properties of
the alert that is currently selected in the alert grid:
l
l
The Alert Details view displays detailed information about the alert that is currently selected
in the grid. If more than one alert is selected, it shows the properties of the last alert to be
selected.
The Alert Description view displays a written description of the last alert to be selected in the
grid.
You can also use this pane to create a filter based on the selected alert, or to scroll through the
contents of the alert grid.
The Alert Details view
The Alert Description view
80
The following table explains how to use the toolbar at the top of the Alert Details/Alert Description
pane.
Button
Description
Click this button to create a new filter that captures the currently selected alert type.
The new filter becomes the active filter in the alert grid, and appears in the Filters pane
under the last selected filter. If needed, you can edit the filter so it captures alerts of an
even more specific nature. See "Editing an existing filter" on page 89.
Click these buttons to move up and down among the alerts in the alert grid. The pane
shows detailed technical information about each alert that is selected. This lets you
view the technical details and written descriptions of each alert in the grid.
Remember, you can also use your keyboard's up (↑) and down (↓) arrow keys:
l
l
To cycle through the alerts in the alert grid, click anywhere in the alert grid.
Then use your up and down arrow keys.
To cycle through the fields in the Alert Details pane, click anywhere in the
Alert Details grid. Then use your up and down arrow keys.
Click this button to open the pane’s Alert Details view. This view shows detailed
information about each of the selected alert's data fields. The actual fields that appear
here vary, according to the alert type that is currently selected. For example, networkoriented alerts show fields for IP addresses and ports. Account-oriented alerts show
account names and domains.
For a description of each alert field that can appear in the Alert Details view, see
"Table of alert data fields" on page 557.
Click this button to open the pane’s Alert Description view, which provides a detailed
written description of the alert type that is currently selected.
81
Alert severity levels
Each alert is assigned a number that indicates its severity. The following table explains each severity
level.
Level
Name
Description
0
Debug
Designates detailed event information used for debugging by TriGeo
engineers.
1
System
Error
Indicates that part of the system is unusable.
2
Informational
Indicates TriGeo informational messages only.
3
Normal Audit
Indicates normal behavior, but could be part of a signature attack.
4
Normal
Notice
Indicates normal behavior that should be monitored.
5
Suspicious
Indicates normal behavior under some circumstances, but should be
investigated.
6
Threatening
Indicates that investigation is needed and possibly an action.
7
Critical
Indicates that immediate action is needed.
82
The alert grid’s Respond menu lets you take direct action on a particular alert message. Each
Respond command opens the Respond form. The Respond form includes data from the field you
selected and options for customizing the action, just as you would configure a rule’s active response
in Rule Creation.
The Respond menu is context-sensitive. The alert type or cell that is currently selected in the alert
grid determines which responses you may choose from.
Responding to an alert
1. In the Monitor view’s alert grid, click the specific cell of the alert message you want to
respond to.
2. Click the alert grid’s Respond menu, and then select the type of response you want to make.
You can choose between All Actions and a list of commonly used actions.
The Respond form appears.
83
The Respond form has three main sections:
l
The top of the form shows the Manager that is affected by the action you are taking,
and the specific action you are going to take.
If you selected All Actions , the form displays the default action of Send Popup
Message. In either case, you can select a different action from the form’s Action list.
The list includes many of the actions found in Rule Creation, and you configure them
the same way.
l
The middle of the form displays the configuration fields that apply to the action you
have selected, and the contents of the cell you selected in Step 1. You will use this
section to customize the action you want to take.
This cell data from Step 1 appears in the appropriate configuration field of the Respond
form. For example, if you selected an alert row’s InsertionIP cell and then selected a
response of Send Popup Message, the value of the InsertionIP cell appears in the
Action form’s Agent field.
l
The bottom contains an alert information grid. This grid displays the same detailed alert
information as the Alert Details pane. You can drag information from this section into
the form’s configuration fields. To interpret this information, see "Table of alert event
data fields" on page 557.
3. In the middle of the form, complete the action’s configuration fields. You can do this by typing
text into each field, by dragging and dropping information from the form’s alert information
section, or some combination of the two.
For complete information on configuring action fields, see the "Actions table" on page 313.
Also see "Using the Respond form’s drag and drop functionality" on page 85.
4. Click OK to execute the action. Otherwise, click Cancel.
84
In the Respond form, you can drag and drop information from the form’s alert information section (at
the bottom of the form) into its action configuration fields (in the middle of the form). You can use this
method to do any of the following:
l
add content to a blank field
l
replace the content of a field
l
add to the content that is already in a field.
You can also use a combination of typing and drag and drop to configure an action.
To place alert information into a field:
Follow this procedure to add content to a blank configuration field or to replace the content of an
existing configuration field.
1. In the Respond form’s alert information grid, scroll to locate the field that contains the data element needed to configure the action.
2. Click the data and then drag it into the appropriate action configuration field (in the middle of
the Respond form).
85
The the new data element appears in the configuration field.
To add to the contents of a field from the alert information:
Follow this procedure to add new field information to a configuration box, rather than replace it.
Typically, you will use this procedure to add multiple data elements to the Message box.
1. In the Respond form’s alert information section, scroll to locate the field that contains the data
element you want to add to the configuration field.
2. Select the information field’s contents by clicking its data in the Information column.
3. Press Ctrl, then drag the data into the appropriate action configuration field (in the middle of
the form) to add the new data element to the configuration field.
86
The topics in this section explain how to create and manage alert filters. It includes instructions on the
following:
l
creating new filters
l
editing an existing filter
l
clone an existing filter
l
pausing filters to stop incoming alert traffic
l
turning filters on and off
l
copying a filter
l
importing a filter
l
exporting a filter, and
l
deleting a filter.
Creating a new filter
Use the following procedure whenever you need to create a new filter. You will configure the filter with
the Filter Creation tool. Instructions on using this form are provided at length in "Creating custom
alert filters" on page 109.
To create a new filter:
2. In the Filters pane, click the title bar of the filter group you want the new filter to reside in. If
you change your mind later, you can always move the filter to a different group.
The filter group opens to list the filters that are available for that group.
3. On the Filters pane, click the plus
button and then click New Filter.
The Monitor view changes from showing the alert grid to showing the Filter Creation tool.
The tool shows a new filter with the name of [New Filter].
4. In the Name box, type a name for the filter. This is the name that will be used to identify the
filter in the Filters pane.
5. In the Lines Displayed box, type or select the total number of alerts that are to be displayed in
this filter. You can use the up and down arrow buttons to the right of the box to select a value.
The default value is 1000 lines. You can select up to a maximum of 2000 lines.
6. In the Description box, type a brief description of what the filter does, or the situation for
which the filter is intended.
7. Use the list pane and the Conditions box to configure the conditions that define the filter.
These are conditions between alerts, Alert Groups, alert fields, and other components. For
more information, see "Configuring filter conditions" on page 120.
87
8. If you want special notification whenever the filter captures an alert event, drag an option from
the Notifications list to the Notification box. Then configure the notification method. See
"Configuring alert filter notifications" on page 137 for complete instructions.
9. Click Save to save the filter’s settings.
10. If applicable, use the Filter Status section to verify, troubleshoot, and resolve any problems
with the filter’s logic. For more information, see "Using the Status bar" on page 133.
When finished, the new filter appears in the filter group you selected in Step 2.
88
Use the following procedure whenever you need to edit or rename an existing filter. Once the filter is
open for editing, you can change its name, description, configuration, or notification settings, as
needed.
Filters are edited in Filter Creation. Instructions on using this tool are provided at length in "Creating
custom alert filters" on page 109.
To edit an existing filter:
2. In the Filters pane, open the filter group that contains the filter you want to edit.
3. Select the filter you want to edit.
4. On the Filters pane, click the gear
button and then click Edit.
The Monitor view changes from showing the alert grid to showing the Filter Creation tool.
5. Edit the filter’s configuration, as required. For complete instructions, see "Creating custom
alert filters" on page 109.
6. Click Save to save the filter’s settings.
7. If applicable, use the Filter Status section to verify, troubleshoot, and resolve any problems
with the filter’s logic. For more information, see "Using the Status bar" on page 133.
89
Cloning an existing filter
Cloning a filter lets you copy an existing filter, but save it with a new name. Cloning allows you to
quickly create variations on existing filters.
To clone a filter:
2. In the Filters pane, select the filter you want to clone.
4. Click the row’s gear
button and then click Clone.
The newly cloned filter appears in the filter group, just below the original filter.
A clone always uses the same name as the filter it was cloned from, followed by the word
Clone. For example, a clone of the Virus Attacks filter would is called Virus Attacks Clone.
A second clone of the Virus Attacks filter is called Virus Attacks Clone 2, and so on.
5. Edit the cloned Group, as needed, to give it its own name and to assign its own specific settings.
90
Pausing filters
Pausing filters
At any time, you can pause a filter to stop the stream of alert messages that are appearing on that
filter. This allows you to inspect a set of alert messages without being interrupted by new incoming
messages. You can pause each filter independently, or you can pause every filter on the Console.
To pause a filter:
2. In the Filters pane, click to select the filter you want to pause.
The alert grid changes to display the filter you selected.
3. Do either of the following:
l
On the alert grid’s title bar, click Pause.
l
On the Filters pane, click the gear
button and then click Pause/Resume.
In the Filters pane, the word Paused appears next to the filter.
To pause all filters:
button and then click Pause All.
In the Filters pane, the word Paused appears next to every filter, except those that have been
turned off.
91
Resuming paused filters
When a filter is paused, it ceases to receive any alert traffic. To begin receiving alert traffic again, you
must resume the filter. You can resume each filter independently, or you can resume every paused
filter on the Console.
To resume running a filter:
2. In the Filters pane, click to select the filter you want to resume.
The alert grid changes to display the filter you selected.
l
On the alert grid’s title bar, click Resume.
l
On the Filters pane, click the gear
button and then click Pause/Resume.
In the Filters pane, the word Paused is replaced by the number of alerts that are currently
associated with the filter.
To resume running all filters:
button and then click Resume All.
In the Filters pane, the word Paused is replaced by the number of alerts that are currently
associated with each filter.
92
Perhaps you only use a few filters on a regular basis. If so, you can turn off any unused filters. If you
later decide you need the filter, you can easily turn it back on again. This “on/off” feature lets you
conserve resources and not monitor a filter without taking the drastic measure of deleting the filter.
When you turn a filter back on, it starts from that moment in time—it does not pull prior alerts from
memory.
Filters are turned on and off from the Filters pane. Filters that are off appear in italic type and show a
status of Off. Filters that are on appear normal.
To turn a filter off:
2. In the Filters pane, select the filter you want to turn off.
button and then click Turn Off.
In the Filters pane, the filter title is now italicized and reads Off in its status column. While the
filter is no longer in use now, it remains available for later use.
To turn on filter back on:
2. In the Filters pane, select the filter you want to turn on.
button and then click Turn On.
The filter appears in the alert grid and begins processing data. In the Filters pane, the filter’s
status column changes from Off to showing the total number of alerts associated with the
filter.
93
Copying a filter
You can copy a filter. This allows you to quickly create variations on existing filters, or the same the
same filter in multiple filter groups.
To copy a filter:
2. In the Filters pane, open the filter group that contains the filter you want to copy.
3. Now open the filter group that is to receive the copied filter.
4. In the first folder, click the filter you want to copy. Then press Ctrl while dragging the filter to
the group that is to receive the copy.
A copy of the filter appears in the new filter group.
To create a variation of the original filter:
1. In the Filters pane, click the select the newly copied filter.
2. Click the Filters pane gear
3. In Filter Creation, rename and reconfigure the filter, as desired. For more information, see
"Creating custom alert filters" on page 109.
4. Click Save.
94
Importing a filter
Importing a filter
Alert filters are saved on the workstation that is running the TriGeo Console. If you move to another
workstation, the filters will not follow. However, you can export the filters from one workstation and
import them into another workstation. This allows you to move filters from one Console to another, so
that another user can use the same filters on their Console, too. It also allows you to import filters that
are provided by TriGeo Network Security. You may import more than one filter at a time.
To import a filter:
2. In the Filters pane, select the filter group that is receive the new filters.
button and then click Import Filters.
The Select Filter File(s) to Import form appears.
4. In the Look In box, browse to the folder that contains the filters you want to import.
5. Select the filter files you want to import, and then click Open. To select multiple files, press
Ctrl key while clicking each file you want to import.
The imported filters appears in the filter group you selected in Step 2.
95
Exporting a filter
When needed, you can export a filter. Exporting does not remove the filter; it copies the filter to
another location. Exporting filters is useful for the following reasons:
l
l
l
You can move filters from one Console workstation to another, so that another Console users
can use the same filters.
You can save a export your filters to a computer folder or network folder for archival purposes.
You can provide TriGeo Network Security with a copy of a filter for technical support or troubleshooting purposes.
Filters are exported from the Filters pane. You may export only one filter at a time.
To export a filter:
2. In the Filters pane, select the filter you want to export.
button and then click Export Filter.
4. In the Browse For Folder form, browse to the folder in which you want to save the exported
file. If needed, you can click Make New Folder to create a new folder for the file.
5. Click OK.
The system exports the folder file to the folder.
96
Deleting a filter
Deleting a filter
When needed, you can delete a filter, which removes the filter from the both the alert grid and the
Filters pane. Deleting a filter also deletes all of the widgets associated with that filter.
Use caution when deleting a filter. The only way to restore it and its widgets is to recreate them.
To delete a filter:
2. In the Filters pane, click to select the filter you want to delete.
l
Click the selected filter’s delete
l
Click the pane’s gear
button.
button, and then click Delete.
The filter is deleted and no longer appears in the Filters pane.
97
Managing filter groups
The topics in this section explain how to create and manage filter groups in the Filters pane. It
includes instructions on the following:
l
adding a new filter group
l
renaming a filter group
l
rearranging filter groups
l
moving a filter from one group to another, and
l
deleting a filter group.
Adding a new filter group
2. Click the Filters pane plus
button and then click New Group.
3. A new filter group appears, and its title bar is an editable text box.
4. Type a name for the new group and then press Enter.
5. The new filter group appears in the Filters list. Filter groups are listed in the order in which you
create them. However, you can rearrange them, as desired.
Renaming a filter group
2. In the Filters pane, do one of the following:
l
l
Double-click the title bar of the filter group you want to rename.
Click to select the title bar of the filter group you want to rename. Click the Filters pane
gear
The filter group’s title bar changes to an editable text box.
3. Type a new name for the filter group and then press Enter.
98
By default, new filter groups appear at the bottom of the Filters pane. However, you can rearrange
your filter groups so they appear in the different order. For example, you may want to put your most
frequently used filter groups toward the top of the pane, and your lesser used groups toward the
bottom.
To move a filter group:
2. In the Filters pane, click the title bar of the filter group you move, and then drag it to its new
position.
99
Moving a filter from one group to another
Once you have created your filter groups, you can organize your filters to them by dragging them from
one group to another.
To move a filter from one group to another:
2. In the Filters pane, open the filter group that contains the filter you want to move.
l
l
Click the filter you want to move; then drag and drop it just below the title bar of the
group that is to receive the filter.
Open the filter group that is to receive the filter. Then drag the filter from its original
group into position in the new group.
The filter appears in its new filter group.
100
When needed, you can delete an entire filter group. Deleting a filter group deletes all of the filters that
are stored within that group and all of the widgets that are associated with those filters. Before
deleting a filter group, be sure to move any filters you want to save into another filter group.
To delete a filter group:
2. In the Filters pane, click to select the filter group you want to delete.
l
Click the filter group’s delete
l
Click the pane’s gear
button.
button, and then click Delete.
The filter group and all of its filters are deleted and no longer appear in the Filters pane.
101
Using a filter's Widgets pane
About the Widgets pane
In the Monitor view, the left half of the lower pane is called the Widgets pane. It displays widgets
that are associated with the filter that is active in the alert grid. Widgets automatically refresh
themselves to reflect the filter’s real-time alert traffic, according to the Refresh rate that was set
when the widget was created.
You can use a filter’s Widget pane to do the following:
l
View each master widget that is associated with the selected filter.
l
Create new master widgets for the filter.
l
l
l
Edit any of the filter’s master widgets. This lets you change a master widget’s default behavior
or appearance, or use a filter’s master widget as a template to create new dashboard widgets.
Refine a filter to show only the events associated with a particular line, bar, or pie wedge.
Change a master widget’s graphical presentation; that is, you can change how it is displayed
(bar chart, pie chart, or line graph) from options that are appropriate for the filter.
The following topics describe each of these tasks in detail. For a more detailed discussion on
widgets, see "Using the Widget Manager" on page 44.
102
Open the Monitor view.
2. If needed, click
to open the view’s lower pane. Then drag it to the desired size. The
Widgets pane is the left half of this lower pane.
By default, the Widgets pane does not display a widget.
3. In the drop-down list, select the widget you want to see (if any are currently available). The
filter’s widgets are listed in alphabetical order.
Upon closing the view, the Console will remember the Widgets pane’s last setting the next
time you open it.
103
Viewing a filter’s different widgets
3. Open the Widgets pane, if it is not already visible.
4. Click the pane’s drop-down list, and then select the widget you want to view.
The pane displays the widget you have selected.
104
In the Widgets pane, you can create a new master widget for the active filter. As in the Ops Center,
widgets are created with the Widget Builder, which allows you to define the new widget’s
foundational and aesthetic settings.
For more information on widgets, see "Master widgets and dashboard widgets" on page 42.
To create a new master widget from the Monitor view:
4. Click the pane’s
button.
5. Complete the Widget Builder.For details, see "Using the Widget Builder" on page 48.
Upon saving, the new master widget appears in the Widgets pane’s drop-down list. In
addition, the next time you open the Ops Center, the new widget will appear in the Widgets
pane for the Category associated with this filter. You may then add the widget to your
desktop.
105
Editing a widget
You can use the Widgets pane to edit any of the widgets that are associated with the active filter.
You will need to edit a widget whenever you want to change its name, behavior, or appearance.
To edit a filter’s widget:
4. In the pane’s widget list, select the widget you want to work with.
The pane displays the widget you have selected.
5. Click the pane’s gear
button.
6. Use the Widget Builder to reconfigure the widget, as needed. For detailed instructions, see
"Using the Widget Builder" on page 48.
7. Click Save to save your changes to the widget.
Upon saving, the widget’s new configuration appears in the Widgets pane. If the widget’s
name changed, the new name appears in the pane’s widget list.
In addition, the next time you open the Ops Center, the widget’s new configuration will appear
in the Widgets pane for the Category associated with this filter. However, none of the
previous dashboard widgets that are based on this widget will change.
106
In the Monitor view, widgets allow you to refine the alert filters that are their data sources. You do
this by clicking the specific line, bar, or pie wedge of chart that interests you. The alert grid then
refreshes to lists only the events that correspond with the chart item you selected.
To refine a filter with a widget:
1. In the Widgets pane, select the widget you want to view.
2. On the widget, click the specific line, bar, or pie wedge that interests you.
The alert grid refreshes to list only those events that correspond to the line, bar, or pie wedge
that you clicked. Note that the filter is paused.
Also note that the widget remains in place, so you can click other line, bar, or wedge to
investigate another part of the chart. Each time you click a different item, the data in the alert
grid changes to list the alert messages associated with that item.
3. Click Resume on the alert grid toolbar to begin running the filter again.
107
Refreshing a widget
Widgets automatically refresh themselves according to the Refresh rate that was set when the
widget was created. If a widget has a slow refresh rate, you can refresh it whenever you want.
Refreshing a widget immediately updates it to show the most current real-time data from your
network traffic.
To refresh a widget:
l
In the Widgets pane, click the refresh
The widget refreshes to show the latest data from your network.
Editing a widget’s presentation
On the back of each widget there is a form that lets you change how the data is presented on the
widget. However, your options are limited to the type of widget you are working with and the type of
data it is reporting. For example, widgets that only report data in one dimension may be limited to a pie
chart, while information in two dimensions can be reported in a bar chart or a line chart.
To edit a widget’s presentation:
1. In the Widgets pane, click the
The widget flips over to display its configuration options.
2. Configure the widget, according to its configuration options. These options are a sub-set of the
fields on the Widget Builder. For complete information on each of these fields, see "Using
the Widget Builder" on page 48.
108
Filter Creation
The Monitor view has a Filter Creation tool that lets you create and edit your own custom alert
filters, as well as edit any existing filters. You can use this form to name, describe, configure, and
verify your filters.
Alert filters are based on specific Alerts or Alert Groups. You configure them by dragging and dropping
the filter’s Alert attributes into configuration boxes. When an Agent or Manager reports an event that
conforms to the alert filter’s conditions, the alert message appears in the alert grid, whenever that
filter is active.
Each filter you create is added to the Filters pane. Selecting the filter causes it to become the active
filter in the alert grid. As with other filters, the alert grid show only those alert messages that meet
your filter’s requirements.
The possibilities for alert filters are endless, so this section describes how to create filters in general
terms. This section is not intended to be a tutorial, but rather a reference for you to fall back on if you
are unclear about how any of the custom filter form’s elements, commands, or functions perform.
The tools in Filter Creation are very similar to those found in Rule Creation. Filters simply report
event occurrences, so there is no harm if you create a filter that is unusual or has logic problems. But
this is not the case when building rules—creating an incorrect rule can have unpleasant
consequences. Therefore, creating filters with Filter Creation is an excellent way to familiarize
yourself with the logic and tools needed to create well crafted rules.
109
This picture shows the main elements of the Filter Creation tool.
The Filter Creation tool
Each element of the form is described in the following table. The topics that follow this section
describe each element in detail.
110
Item
Name
Description
List pane
This “accordion” pane is called the list pane. It contains
categorized lists of the alerts, alert groups, alert variables, groups,
profiles, and constants that you can use when creating conditions
for your filters
If more than one Manager is linked to the Console, each item in
the list pane lists the Manager it is associated with. Therefore,
some list items may appear to be listed multiple times. But in
reality, they are listed once for each Manager. Alerts are universal
to all Managers, so they do not show a Manager association.For
more information, see "Features of the list pane" on page 113.
Filter
identification
section
Use the top part of the form to name and describe the filter, so you
can quickly identify it.
Filter Status
bar
The Filter Status bar lists warnings and error messages about
your filter’s current configuration logic.
l
l
l
Click ► to view a list of warning and error messages.
Click a message flag to provide detailed information about
the nature of that problem.
Click a message to highlight the specific area or field that
is the source of that problem.
For more information, see "Using the Status bar" on page 133.
Conditions
box
Use this box to define the conditions for the data that is to be
reported by the filter. You configure conditions by dragging items
from the list pane into the Conditions box. For more information,
see "Configuring filter conditions" on page 120.
Notifications
box
Use this box to define how the Console is to alert users of alert
events, such as sound, pop-up message, etc. For more
information, see "Configuring alert filter notifications" on page
137.
Undo/Redo
Click the Undo button to undo your last desktop action. You can
click the Undo button repeatedly to undo up to 20 steps.
Click the Redo button to redo a step that you have undone. You
can click the Redo button repeatedly to redo up to 20 steps.
You can only use Undo or Redo for any steps you made since
the last time you clicked Save.
111
Item
Name
Description
Save/Cancel
Click Save to save your changes to a filter, close Filter Creation,
and return to the alert grid.
Click the Cancel button to cancel any changes you have made to
a filter since the last time you clicked Save, exit Filter Creation,
and return to the alert grid. If you have any unsaved changes, the
system will prompt you to confirm that you want to cancel.
112
The list pane is the “accordion” list on the left side of Filter Creation and
Rule Creation. It contains categorized lists of alerts, Alert Groups, alert
fields, Groups (from the Groups grid), profiles, and constants that you can
use when creating conditions for your filters and rules.
If more than one Manager is linked to the Console, each item in the list
pane lists the Manager it is associated with. Therefore, some list items
may appear to be listed multiple times. But in reality, they are listed once
for each Manager. Alerts are universal to all Managers, so they do not
show a Manager association.
The following table describes the contents of each list in the list pane. They are listed in the order in
which they appear.
List
Description
Alerts
The topmost list is the Alerts list. It lists all of the Console’s alert types.
You can show the alerts either of two ways—as a hierarchical node tree,
or as an alphabetized list. Both views contains the same alerts—they are
just presented differently.
You can search either view. To do so, begin typing a word or phrase in the
box at the top of the list. The Alerts list will refresh to show any alert types
that include your word or phrase. Then use the list to select each alert type
that you want to include as a filter condition or a rule correlation.
113
List
Description
Click this button to display the Alerts list as a hierarchical node tree. This
is the Alerts list's default view. This view also has the following attributes:
l
l
l
The node tree displays alert types with the same hierarchy they
have in in "Types of alerts" on page 493.
Lower-level alert types are hidden by nodes in the alert tree. To
open a node, click the ► icon. This displays the node’s next level
of alerts.
Using the search box displays the alert and its parent alert types,
so you can see how the alert appears in the alert hierarchy.
Click this button to list alert types alphabetically, regardless of their position
in the hierarchy.
Alert Groups
The Alert Groups list displays preconfigured groups of alerts that can be
used to initiate a particular alert filter condition or rule correlation. The top
box lists the names of Alert Groups. The Fields list displays those fields
that apply to the Alert Group that is currently selected.
Alert groups are created in the Groups grid. For more information, see
"Configuring Alert Groups" on page 221.
Fields
User-Defined
Groups
The Fields list displays those data fields that apply to whichever alert is
selected in the Alerts or Alert Groups list.
This list displays the different preconfigured User-Defined Groups that
apply to the Managers. User-Defined Groups are groups of preferences
used in rules and alert filters that allow you to match, include, or exclude
events, information, or data fields based on their membership with a
particular Group. In most cases, User-Defined Groups are used in rules as
a type of white list or blacklist for choosing which events to include or to
ignore.
User-Defined Groups are created in the Group Builder. For more
information, see "Configuring User-Defined Groups" on page 249.
Tool Profiles
This list displays all the different Tool Profiles that apply to the Managers.
Tool Profiles are groups of Agents that have common tool configurations.
You can use them to have your rules and filters include or exclude the
Agents associated with a particular profile.
Tool Profiles are created in the Groups grid. For more information, see
"Configuring Tool Profiles" on page 241.
114
List
Description
Directory
Service Groups
This list displays the Directory Service Groups that are synchronized with
the Managers. Directory Service Groups are preconfigured groups of
network computers and system users that you can use in rules and filters.
They allow you to match, include, or exclude events to specific users or
computers based on their Group membership.
Directory service groups are synchronized to the TriGeo SIM through the
Groups grid. For more information, see "Configuring Directory Services
Groups" on page 225.
Time Of Day
Sets
This list displays all of the different Time Of Day Sets that apply to the
Managers. Time Of Day Sets are specific groups of hours that you can
associate with rules and alert filters. You can use them to have your filters
include or exclude messages that occur during the hours associated with a
particular Time of Day Set, or to have your rules take different actions at
different times of day.
Time of Day Sets are created in the Groups grid. For more information,
see "Configuring Time of Day Sets" on page 238.
State
Variables
(applies only to
rules)
This list displays all of the different State Variables that apply to this
Manager. The upper box lists the names of State Variables. The lower box
lists the various fields that apply to whichever State Variable is selected in
the upper box.
State Variables are created within the Groups grid. For more information,
see "Configuring State Variables" on page 233.
Subscription
Groups (applies
only to filters)
This list displays all of the TriGeo Console user names, and the Manager
each user is currently associated with. Each name in the list represents
the list of rules that each individual user is subscribed to. By adding a
Subscription Group to a filter, you can build the filter so that it only displays
alerts messages that are related to specific rules that a particular user is
interested in (or “subscribed to”).
Subscription groups are created in the Rules grid. For more information,
see "Subscribing to a rule" on page 270.
Constants
This list displays the three types of constants that rules and filters can use
for comparing alert data—text, number, or time.
Actions (applies
only to rules)
This list displays all of the active responses that a rule can initiate, such
as sending an email message, sending a pop-up message, blocking an IP
address, etc. For a definition of each possible action, see the "Actions
table" on page 313.
115
List
Description
Notifications
(applies only to
filters)
This list includes the various notification methods the Console can use to
announce an alert message for the filter. You can have the Console
display a pop-up message, display the new alert as “unread,” play a sound,
or have the filter name blink. If needed, you can configure multiple
notification methods for the same filter. For more information, see
"Configuring alert filter notifications" on page 137.
116
Use the Conditions box to configure the conditions that determine which alerts a filter is to report.
Conditions are the various rules that state when the filter is to display an alert message.
To define conditions, you drag alert variables from the Alerts, Alert Groups, and Fields lists into the
Conditions box. Then use the Conditions tools (described below) to configure how these variables
are to compare to other items, such as Time Of Day sets, Tool Profiles, User-defined Groups,
Constants, and other alert fields.
You can also compare groups with AND/OR conditions. AND conditions state which alerts must all
occur together before the filter shows an alert. OR conditions state that if any one of several
conditions occur, the filter shows the alert.
The combined conditions dictate when the alert filter is to display an alert. The filter ignores (and does
not display) any alerts that do not meet these conditions.
The Conditions tools allow you to configure relationships between events in the Conditions box,
and to establish conditions for when the alert filter is to display the alert message. The following table
describes each item condition tool.
The Conditions box
The following table describes each feature of the Conditions box.
117
Item
Name
Description
►
Individual groups (and the entire Conditions box) can be expanded or
collapsed to show or hide their settings:
▼
l
l
Click to ► expand a collapsed group.
Click to ▼ collapse an expanded group. The number that
appears in parentheses indicates how many conditions are
contained in the group.
Once a group is properly configured, you may want to collapse it to
avoid accidentally changing it.
This is the Group button. It appear at the top of every group box. Click
it to create a new group within the group box. A group within a group is
called a nested group.
Each group is subject to AND and OR relationships with the groups
around it and within it. By default, new groups appear with AND
comparisons.
This is the Delete button. It appears at the top of every Group box.
When you point to a condition, it also appears next to that condition.
Click this button to delete a condition or a group. Deleting a group also
deletes any groups that are nested within that group.
Alert
variable
From the Alerts, Alert Groups, or Fields list, drag an alert, Alert
Group, or alert field into the Conditions box. This is called the alert
variable.
You can think of an alert variable as the subject of each group of
conditions. As alert messages stream into the Console, the filter
analyzes the values associated with each alert variable to determine if
the alert message meets the filter’s conditions.
Operators
Whenever you drag a list item or a field next to alert variable, an
operator icon appears between them. The operator states how the
filter is to compare the alert variable to the other item to determine if
the alert meets the filter’s conditions.
l
l
Click an operator to cycle through the various operators that
are available for that comparison. Just keep clicking until you
see the operator you want to use.
Ctrl+click an operator to view all of the operators that are
available for that comparison. Then click to select the specific
operator you want to use.
For more information, see "Comparing values with operators" on page
127.
118
Item
Name
Description
List item
List items are the various non-alert items from the list pane. You drag
and drop them into groups to define conditions based on your Time Of
Day Sets, Tool Profiles, User-Defined Groups, Constants, etc.
Some alert variables automatically add a blank Constant as its list
item. You can overwrite the Constant with another list item, or you
can click the Constant to add a specific value for the constant. For
example, clicking a text Constant turns the field into an editable text
box so you can type specific text. The text field also allows wildcard
characters.
Note that each list item has an icon that corresponds to the list it
came from. These icons let you to quickly identify what kinds of items
are defining your filter’s conditions.
Nested
group
A group within a group is called a nested group. You may drag alert
variables and other items from the list pane into the nested group
boxes. By using nested groups, you can refine conditions by
combining or comparing one group of conditions to another. This
allows you to create the logic for highly complex and exact conditions.
This example above shows one nested group. It represents a set of
conditions within a higher-level group.
AND
Conditions (and groups of conditions) are subject to AND and
ORcomparisons. If you click an AND operator, it changes to an OR,
and vice versa.
OR
For more information, see the "Comparing values with operators" on
page 127.
For examples of how to use the Conditions box to configure an alert filter, see "Configuring filter
conditions" on page 120 and "Tutorial: Configuring an alert filter" on page 141.
119
Configuring filter conditions
The topics in this section explain how to configure the conditions that define a filter. You will learn
how to use the list pane and the Conditions box to configure the conditions that determine which
alerts or alert events the filter will capture. These procedures are the same, whether you are
configuring a new filter or editing an existing one.
This section includes the following topics:
l
Creating the conditions that define the filter
l
Grouping conditions
l
Targeting conditions
l
Using operators to compare conditions
l
Using AND and OR relationships with conditions and condition groups
l
Deleting conditions and condition groups
l
Troubleshooting problems with filter logic
120
The topics in this section explain how to add the conditions that determine which alerts or alert events
the filter will capture. Conditions can be based on specific alerts, alert groups, alert fields, Groups
(from Build ► Groups), or Constants.
Whenever you add the first condition to the Conditions form, you create a group. Groups let you
combine a set of conditions so you can further combine or compare that set to some other set of
conditions.
You can keep adding conditions to a group. You can create new groups that you can combine or
compare with your previous groups. You can also add nested groups, which are groups within groups.
Nested groups let you create the logic for complex conditions.
The procedures for adding conditions and groups are the same, regardless of the type of condition you
are building.
Adding conditions
1. Open the filter you want to work with in Filter Creation.
2. In the list pane, click the title bar of the list you want to work with.
Typically, you will begin by adding an alert variable from the Alerts, Alerts Group, or alert
Fields. An alert variable is any alert, Alert Group, or alert field that is part of a rule or filter
condition. An alert variable can be compared to a Group, a constant, or another alert field, as
needed to define each condition.
Anything from an alert list is called an alert variable, and is the “subject” of the filter (or one of
the subjects, if there is more than one alert variable). For a description of each alert type, see
"Types of alerts" on page 493.
3. In the list, select the alert variable you want to work with. Then drag it into the Conditions
box.
Filter Creation’s targeting feature ensures that you place each element in a valid location.
4. Decide on the next item that defines the filter’s configuration. This could be an another alert
field, a constant, or something from one of the Group lists. Then drag it from its list and drop it
across from the alert variable you placed in Step 3.
An operator appears between these items. The operator states how the filter is to compare the
alert variable to the other item.
5. Click the operator, and then select the appropriate operator that defines the relationship
between the two items. For example, you can choose if the alert variable should be “equal to,”
“contained in,” “exist,” or be “greater than or equal to” the list item. For more information see
"Comparing values with operators" on page 127.
121
6. Repeat Steps 1 – 5 for each additional condition that is to define this group of conditions.
7. Determine if all of the conditions in the group must apply before the alert is to be reported (an
AND condition), or if any one of the conditions may apply for the alert to be reported (an OR
condition). Then click the AND or OR symbols to define the proper relationship for the conditions in the group.
8. Click Save to save your changes and close Filter Creation.
You can continue using this same procedure to add new groups, new conditions, and to apply
AND and OR relationships to your conditions and groups. The best way to learn how to
configure alert filters is to practice. Feel free to experiment. You cannot harm anything by
configuring and applying filters. To get started, see "Tutorial: Configuring an alert filter" on
page 141.
122
Use the Group buttons to group related alerts together that are to be compared to some other alert or
group. Grouping alerts lets you refine the filter by adding more complex conditions and logic.
Furthermore, you can add groups within groups. This lets you refine conditions by combining or
comparing one group to another.
To add the first group to the Conditions box:
l
In the list pane, drag an alert, alert group, or alert field into the empty Conditions box.
The new group appears in the Conditions box. You can now drag items from the list pane into
the group.
To add a another group to the Conditions box:
l
In the list pane, drag an alert, alert group, or alert field just below an existing group box.
Before
After
This creates a new group just below the existing one. This new group compares directly to the
other group. By default, an OR operator connects groups at the same level. However, you can
change this to an AND operator.
123
To add a nested group:
l
Click the Group
button at the top of a Group box.
A new group appears below and within the group that was already present. By default, an AND
operator connects the original group to the new group. But in this example we have changed it
to an OR operator. You can now drag items from the list pane into the group to create the
conditions for that group.
To move a group:
l
Click the group’s title bar and then drag it to a new target position.
To move a condition:
l
Click the condition and then drag it to a new target position.
124
Targeting
Targeting
The Filter Creation and Rule Creation tools both use a targeting feature to help you configure
custom alert filters and rules.
l
l
In Filter Creation, this feature applies whenever you drag an item from the list pane to a configurable Conditions or Notifications box.
In Rule Creation, this feature applies whenever you drag an item from the list pane to a
configurable Correlations, Correlation Time, or Actions box.
Targeting in action. In this example, we are dragging the TCPTrafficAudit alert's DestinationPort field into a nested group.
The orange line shows a valid place to drop the field.
Here is how targeting works:
l
l
l
As you drag an item over a location where it can be placed, an orange line appears, indicating
that the item can be placed there.
You can place items within groups, or above, below, or on top of items that are already
present. When you drag on top of an item, it replaces the item that was already there with the
new item.
Targeting prevents you from dragging an item to a location that is inappropriate for that item.
Inappropriate targets will appear in gray to show that they are not compatible with the item you
are positioning.
For more information, see the "Filter condition table" on page 131, which provides a matrix of valid
locations for each type of item from the list pane.
125
Deleting conditions
When needed, you can delete an individual condition, a group of conditions, or the entire contents of a
filter's Conditions box. These procedures also apply to the conditions in a rule's Correlations box.
To delete a condition within a group:
l
In the Conditions box, point to the condition you want to delete. Then click the Delete
button that appears.
The condition is removed from the group.
To delete a group:
l
Click the Delete
button for the group you want to delete.
The group and any of its nested groups are removed from the Conditions box. However, any
groups that were not nested remain intact. If you deleted the top group in the Conditions box,
the Conditions box remains open so you can continue working.
126
When configuring a rule or a filter, whenever you drag an item from the list pane and position it next to
alert variable, an operator icon appears between them. The operator states how the alert variable
must compare with the other item to be subject to rule's or filter’s conditions.
For example, an operator might state whether or not an alert should be contained within or outside of
an Time of Day Set; or it may state whether or not an alert applies to a particular Tool Profile.
The operators that appear between two elements vary, depending on your selections. The form only
allows comparisons that are logical for the elements you have selected. For more information on
which operators are available for a particular field, see the following reference tables:
l
For configuring filter conditions, see the "Filter condition table" on page 131.
l
For configuring rule correlations, see see the "Rule correlation table" on page 310.
Each of these tables provides a matrix of valid operators for comparing an alert variable to other
elements.
Selecting a new operator
l
l
Click an operator to cycle through the various operators that are acceptable for the current condition.
Ctrl+click an operator to show a list of operators you can choose from. Then click to select
the operator you want to use.
Operator tips
The following tips apply to operators:
l
l
l
When comparing two numeric values, the full range of mathematical operator options is available.
An IP address is treated as a string (or text) value. Therefore, operators are limited to “equal”
and “not equal.”
DateTime fields have a default value of “> Time Now”, which means, greater than the current
date and time.
127
Table of operators
The following table describes each operator and how it should be interpreted when used as a filter
condition. An alert variable is any alert, Alert Group, or alert field that is part of a rule or filter condition.
An alert variable can be compared to a Group, a constant, or another alert field, as needed to define
each condition.
Operator
Meaning
Description
Exists
Use these operators to specify if a particular alert or Alert
Group exists. Read conditions with these operators as
follows: “This [alert/Alert Group] must [exist/not exist].”
Not exist
Note: "Not exist" is only used in rules.
is in
Use these operators when comparing alert fields with
groups (such as Alert Groups, User-Defined Groups, etc.).
They determine the filter’s behavior, based on whether or
not the field is contained a specific Group.
is not in
Read conditions with these operators as follows:
Equals
Does not equal
l
This [alert field] must be in this [Group].
l
This [alert field] must not be in this [Group].
l
This [alert variable] must equal this [list item*].
l
This [alert variable] must not equal this [list item*].
Text comparisons (for IP addresses, host names, etc.) are
limited to
128
Table of operators
Operator
Meaning
Description
Greater than
l
Greater than OR
equal to
l
Less than
l
Less than OR
equal to
AND
l
This [alert variable] must be greater than or equal to
this [list item*].
This [alert variable] must be less than this [list
item*].
This [alert variable] must be less than or equal to
this [list item*].
Conditions and groups of conditions are subject to AND
and OR comparisons.
l
l
OR
This [alert variable] must be greater than this [list
item*].
The AND symbol means two or more conditions (or
groups) must occur together for the filter to apply.
This is the default comparison for new groups.
The OR symbol means any one of several
conditions (or groups) may occur for the filter to
apply. When comparing groups of distinct alerts,
you must use the OR symbol.
If you click an AND operator, it changes to an OR, and
vice versa.
*A list item can be another alert variable, such as an alert field. For example, you may want to
compare that an alert's source is equal to a destination. In this case, you would compare two alert
fields, such as SourceMachine = DestinationMachine.
129
Examples of AND and OR conditions
Filter groups and conditions, and rule groups and correlations, are all subject to AND and OR
conditions. By default, new groups, conditions, and correlations appear with an AND condition. AND
and OR conditions can surround nested groups, and they can be used between groups on the same
level to create complex filter conditions or rule correlations.
Example
Description
If x AND y AND z occur, report the
alert.
If all of the conditions apply, report the alert.
If x OR y OR z occurs, report the alert.
If any of the conditions apply, report the alert.
If (x AND y) OR z occurs, report the
alert.
If conditions x and y occur, or if condition z occurs,
report the alert.
If (a AND b) OR (x AND y) OR (z),
occurs, report the alert.
In this case, you would create three groups, two
nested within the third:
l
l
“Condition1” AND
“Condition2 AND Condition3” OR
“Condition4 AND Condition5.”
The nested groups are configured as (a AND
b) and
(x AND y), joined with an OR.
The outer group is configured as (z),
surrounding the nested groups with an OR.
In this example, the filter reports the alert when it meets
the following conditions:
Condition1 and Condition2 and Condition3, or
Condition1 and Condition4 and Condition5.
130
The following table is for use with Filter Creation. It lists the possible filter combinations that you can
create in the Conditions box for each type of field.
l
l
l
The Left field column lists each type of field you can drag into the Conditions box’s left field.
The Right field column lists the corresponding field types that you can drag into the Conditions box’s right field.
The Operators columns list the types of comparisons you can make between left and right
fields.
Operators
Left field
exists
alert
•
alert group
•
in
not
in
text alert field
=
≠
•
•
text alert field
•
•
text alert group field
•
•
text constant
<
<=
Right field
•
directory service group
•
•
subscription group
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
•
>=
•
time alert field
number alert field
>
•
•
•
•
time alert field
•
•
•
•
time alert group field
•
•
•
•
time constant
time of day
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
number alert field
•
•
•
•
•
•
number alert field group
•
•
•
•
•
•
number constant
•
•
text alert field
•
•
•
•
text constant
131
Operators
Left field
exists
in
not
in
•
•
•
•
subscription group
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
=
≠
•
number constant
time constant
>=
<
<=
Right field
•
•
•
•
time alert field
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
time constant
time of day
•
number alert group field
text constant
>
•
•
•
•
•
•
number alert field
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
number constant
•
•
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
•
•
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
•
•
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
132
As you configure a filter or rule, the Status bar indicates if its configuration is valid by verifying its
current logic. Whenever there is a problem, the Status bar lists the number of warnings and errors it
has found with the configuration.
The Status bar can be found in Filter Creation and in Rule Creation
Clicking a warning or error message flag provides detailed information about the nature of that
problem. Clicking a warning or error message highlights the specific area or field that is the source of
that problem.
As you make changes and corrections, the Status bar's warning and error counts automatically
updates in real time to reflect each configuration change.
The following topics describe how to use the Filter Status bar in Filter Creation and the Rule Status
bar in Rule Creation. The two status bars behave exactly the same way.
133
Status bar icons
The Status bar displays the overall status of the filter or rule configuration. The overall status is
determined by the worst problem in the status list. If the configuration has both errors and warnings,
its status will be Error to indicate that it has a fatal problem.
Icon
Description
Green (No Problems) The rule or filter configuration has no errors or warnings and should
behave as expected.
Yellow (Warning) The rule or filter has one or more warnings, so it may not behave in the
manner you expect it to. The number in parentheses indicates how many warnings exist
in the filter’s current configuration.
Red (Problems) The rule or filter has one or more errors, so it will not run properly in its current configuration. The number in parentheses indicates how many errors exist in the
filter’s current configuration.
134
By default, the Status bar only lists the total number of warnings and error messages it has found with
the current filter or rule configuration. This is to save space when you are working. However, opening
the Status bar displays a complete list of warnings and errors that you can use the troubleshoot and
resolve each problem.
To resolve problems with the Status bar:
1. Click the Status bar (or click its ► button) to open the status list.
The Status bar opens to list each specific warning and error that applies to rule or filter's
current configuration logic. Note that in each instance, the message states the general nature
of the problem.
2. In the problem list, click a warning or error message to identify the exact area or field that is the
source of the warning or error.
In the configuration form, the area or field that is the actual source of the problem becomes
highlighted in red.
3. In the problem list, click the message flag to open a detailed description of the problem.
135
A popup message appears, providing a detailed description of that specific warning or error.
You can use this information to troubleshoot and resolve the problem. To close the message,
click its button.
4. Correct the problem, as needed. Warnings are to notify you of potential problems. Errors must
be corrected for the filter or rule to work properly.
5. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each message until they are resolved to your satisfaction.
When you resolve all of the warnings and errors, the Status section automatically collapses to
hide itself. However, you can hide the Status section at any time by clicking the Status bar (or
its ▼ button).
136
In Filter Creation, the Notifications box lets you to define how the Console is to notify a user when
the filter receives an alert. Each notification option instructs the Console to announce the alert in a
particular way. You can have the filter display a pop-up message, display the alert in bold text, play a
warning sound, have the filter name blink, or configure a combination of these methods.
Selecting the notification method
1. In the list pane, click the Notifications list.
2. Drag one or more notification option from the Notifications list to the Notifications box.
3. Configure each option, as described in the Notifications table, below.
137
Notifications table
The following table lists the various notification methods that can be employed to notify a user that a
filter’s alert threshold has been met.
l
The Notification column lists each options that is available in the list pane’s Notifications
list. They are alphabetized for easy reference.
l
The Description column briefly states how each option behaves.
l
The Fields column explains the data fields that can be configured for each option.
Notification
Description
Fields
Display
Popup
Message
This option causes the filter to
display the Popup
Notification form when
receiving an alert.
Notify on x alerts received
This form states the name of
the filter that is receiving the
alerts, and that the filter’s alert
threshold has been met.
From the form, the message
recipient can choose to view
the filter, to turn off the pop-up
form for that filter, or to turn off
the pop-up form for all filters.
Display New
Alerts As
Unread
This option displays new
alerts in the filter with bold
text.
Type the number of alerts the filter must
receive before displaying the Popup
Notification form.
Repeat on x alerts received
If you want the pop-up form to appear
again after receiving repeated alerts,
select the Repeat on check box.
Then in the alerts received box, type
how many more alerts the filter should
receive before issuing the pop-up form
another time.
Not applicable
They remain bold until you
acknowledge them by clicking
them or by opening them in the
Event Explorer.
138
Notifications table
Notification
Description
Fields
Enable
Blinking Filter
Name
This option causes the filter
name to blink in the Filters
pane.
Color
Click the Color button to open the Blink
Color form. Choose a color from one of
the three color palettes. Then click OK.
The filter name will blink in this color.
Time (ms)
Move the slider to select the amount of
time between blinks, in milliseconds.
receive before the filter tab begins
blinking.
The filter tab stops blinking once you
acknowledge it by selecting it. If you
want the tab to begin blinking again after
receiving repeated alerts, select the
Repeat on check box. Then in the alerts
received box, type how many more
alerts the filter should receive before it
starts blinking again.
139
Notification
Description
Fields
Play Sound
This option causes the filter to
play a sound upon receiving an
alert.
Sound/Browse
To select a sound, click the Browse
button. Then use the Open form to locate
and select the sound file that you want to
use. Sound files must be of the .wav file
type.
When you are done, the name of the file
should appear in the Sound box. To test
the sound, click the “play”
button.
receive before displaying the sound.
If you want the sound to play again after
receiving repeated alerts, select the
Repeat on check box.
Then in the alerts received box, type
how many more alerts the filter should
receive before the filter plays the sound
another time.
140
The following lessons explain how to configure an alert filter. You will create variations of a new alert
filter called Admin Logon/Failure After Hours. You will configure this alert filter to display alert
messages for any successful or failed attempt to log onto administrative accounts after normal
business hours.
These lessons illustrate how you can approach filters any number of ways to report only the alert
messages that are important to you.
141
Before you begin the examples, you will need to prepare several groups in the Build ► Groups view.
You will need to prepare one Time Of Day Set, one Alert Group, one User-Defined Group, and one
Tool Profile. Their practical use will become apparent as you work your way through each example.
For information building Groups, see "Managing Groups" on page 216.
To prepare for the tutorial:
1. Create a Time Of Day Set that represents your company’s normal daily business hours and
name it Business Hours. For instructions, see "Configuring Time of Day Sets" on page 238.
2. Create a new Alert Group called Logon/Failure.
For its description, type User Logon or Logon Failure. In the Alerts list, locate and select
UserLogon and UserLogonFailure, and then click Save. This Alert Group represents any
successful or failed logon attempt. For instructions, see "Configuring Alert Groups" on page
221.
142
3. Create a User-Defined Group called Admin Accounts.
For its description, type Administrative-level Accounts. In the Elements list, configure an
administrator and a root element, and then click Save. This User-Defined Group represents
administrative accounts on your network. For instructions, see "Configuring User-Defined
4. Create a Tool Profile called Servers.
For its description, type Servers on my network. Add the Agents that represent several of
your servers, and then click Save. This Tool Profile represents your company’s servers. For
instructions, see "Configuring Tool Profiles" on page 241.
Now, on to the lessons for creating an alert filter!
143
Lesson 1: Creating a filter based on an alert
In this lesson, you will create a filter that reports the following:
l
l
Any successful logon attempts that occur on an administrator account outside of normal business hours, and
Any failed logon attempts that occur on an administrator account within normal business
hours.
When you are finished, the filter’s final configuration will look like the one shown here.
Step 1: Naming the alert
First, we will name the filter and describe its behavior.
Filter Creation appears.
3. In the Name box, type Admin Logon/Failure After Hours.
4. In the Description box, type Logons or logon failures to the administrator account
outside of business hours.
144
In this procedure, you will configure the filter to report successful logon attempts that occur outside of
normal business hours.
1. In the list pane, click the title bar of the Alerts list.
2. Click the
button to list the alerts alphabetically.
3. In the text box, search for and then select UserLogon.
The Fields box below the Alerts list displays the various data fields that apply to this alert.
4. In the Fields box, select the DetectionTime field and drag it into the Conditions box.
5. In the list pane, click the Time of Day Sets title bar.
6. Select Business Hours and drag it to the Conditions box, to the right of the DetectionTime
field.
7. Click the operator between them and then click the “not contained in”
symbol.
So far, the filter condition reads: “Report an alert if a logon occurs outside of business hours."
145
Step 3: Limiting the filter to Administrative accounts
Now, we will refine the filter to limit it to reporting activities that occur on Administrative accounts.
1. Click the Alerts list title bar and select UserLogon again.
2. In the Fields box, select DestinationAccount and drag it below the previous condition.
3. In the Conditions box, click the empty field to the right of the DestinationAccount field.
The field becomes an editable text box. You will use this text box to specify a constant—
specifically, the destination account that is being logged on to, which in this case is
“Administrator.”
4. In the text box, type *Administrator*.
5. If needed, click the operator between the DestinationAccount field and Administrator
constant until you see the “equal” sign.
At this point, the filter’s conditions read: “Report an alert if a logon occurs outside of business
hours AND the logon occurs on an account that equals the Administrator account.”
A note on wildcards (*)
Text box fields support wild cards. The asterisks (*) indicate that you want to match the string with
whatever comes before or after the string you enter here. The wildcards are not required, and depend
on the field that is being matched. However, they will usually achieve the desired result.
l
l
l
Some fields are very short. In this case, if an exact match is desired, you would not use the
wildcards.
If the value is a prefix to a range of data you want to match, you may only want to include a trailing asterisk.
If you are working with a field like eventinfo, which is associated with long text strings, you
would definitely want to use both a leading and a trailing asterisk.
146
Now, we will expand the filter to report logon failures that occur on administrative accounts during
business hours.
First, we'll add a new group to contain the new set of conditions:
1. In the Alerts list, locate and select UserLogonFailure.
2. In the Fields box, select the DetectionTime field and drag it just below the existing group box.
Before
After
Note that we have added a new group, not a nested group. This new group will compare
directly to the previous group. A nested group would have defined a sub-set of conditions that
only applied to the previous group.
3. Click the Time of Day Sets list. Select Business Hours and drag it to the new condition, to
the right of the DetectionTime field.
4. Click the operator between them and select the “contained in”
present.
147
symbol, if it is not already
This new condition reads: “Report an alert if a logon failure occurs within business hours.”
Now, we'll add a second condition to the group:
1. In the Alerts list, locate and select UserLogonFailure again.
2. In the Fields box, select DestinationAccount and drag it to the bottom of the new group box.
3. Click the empty field to the right of the new DestinationAccount field. Then in the Enter Text
Value form, type *Administrator*.
4. If needed, click the operator between the DestinationAccount field and Administrator
constant and then click the “equal” sign.
The new condition reads: “Report an alert if the logon failure occurs on an account that equals
the Administrator’s account.”
Together, the filter’s conditions read: “Report an alert if a successful logon occurs outside of
business hoursAND it occurs on the Administrator account, OR if a logon failure occurs within
business hours AND it occurs on the Administrator account.”
5. Click Save to save the alert filter.
148
This lesson shows you how to simplify the creation of alert filters with the use of Alert Groups.You
will rebuild the alert filter you made in Lesson 1. But instead of using fields from the Alerts list, you
will use fields from the Alert Groups list. In particular, you will use the Alert Group you made earlier,
called Logon/Failure.
As you may recall, the Logon/Failure Alert Group covers both successful and failed logon attempts.
Therefore, you can use this Alert Group to represent successful and failed logon attempts at the same
time. When you are finished, the filter’s final configuration will look like the one shown here.
Step 1: Creating the filter
Filter Creation appears.
3. In the Name box, type Admin Logon/Failure After Hours #2.
4. In the Description box, type Logons or logon failures to the administrator account outside of business hours.
Step 2: Adding the first condition
1. Click the title bar of the Alert Groups list.
2. Locate and select Logon/Failure Alert Group. You can jump to the Ls by clicking within the
list and then typing L.
The Fields list displays the various data fields that apply to the Logon/Failure Alert Group.
3. In the Fields list, select DetectionTime and drag it into the Conditions box.
4. Click the Time of Day Sets list.
149
5. Select Business Hours and drag it to the Conditions box, to the right of the DetectionTime
field.
6. Click the operator between them until you see the “not contained in”
symbol.
This condition reads: “Report an alert message if a successful or failed logon attempt occurs
outside of business hours.”
Step 3: Adding another condition
1. In the Alert Groups list, select Logon/Failure.
2. In the Fields list, select DestinationAccount and drag it to the bottom of the Conditions box.
3. Click the empty field to the right of the new DestinationAccount field. Then in the Enter Text
Value form, type *Administrator*.
4. If needed, click the operator between the DestinationAccount field and *Administrator*
constant until you see the “equal” sign.
The new condition reads: “Report an alert message if the successful or failed logon attempt
occurs on an account that equals the Administrator account.”
Together, the alert filter’s conditions read: “Report an alert if a successful or failed logon
attempt occurs outside of business hours AND the logon attempt occurs on the Administrator
account.”
5. Click Save to save the alert filter.
By using an Alert Group that represents both successful and failed logon attempts, we have
simplified the filter and greatly reduced the number of steps it takes to configure it.
150
In this lesson, you will refine the filter you built in Lesson 2. You will do this by adding the following
items to the filter:
l
l
l
A User-Defined Group called Admin Accounts will expand the filter to include logon events
that occur on any administrative account.
A Tool Profile called Servers will limit the alert messages to those that occur on servers.
An alert notification format will cause the filter to blink and flash red whenever the filter reports
an alert message.
When you are finished, the filter’s final configuration will look like the one shown here.
Step 1: Opening the alert filter to edit it
You only need to perform this procedure if you have already closed the filter you created in Lesson 2.
2. In the Filters pane, click My Filters.
3. Click Admin Logon/Failure After Hours #2.
4. On the Filters pane, click the
The Monitor view opens the filter in Filter Creation.
5. Click the Filters button to close the Filters pane.
151
Step 2: Adding a User-Defined Group
1. In the list pane, click the User-Defined Groups list.
2. Select Admin Accounts and drag it to the Conditions box, on top of the *Administrator*
constant.
3. If needed, click the operator between them until you see the “contained in”
symbol.
The Conditions box should look like the one shown here.
The alert filter’s conditions now read: “Report an alert if a successful or failed logon attempt
occurs outside of business hours AND the logon attempt occurs on ANY administrator
account.”
By using an alert group that represents both successful and failed logon attempts, and a UserDefined Group that represents all administrative accounts, we have simplified the filter and
expanded its reach at the same time.
Step 3: Adding a Tool Profile
Now you will add a Tool Profile called Servers to the alert filter. The Tool Profile limits the alert
messages to those that occur on servers.
1. In the list pane, click the Alert Groups list.
2. Within the list, select Logon/Failure.
3. In the Fields box, click InsertionIP and drag it into the Conditions box, below the current
filter conditions. Insertion IP represents the Agent or Manager that is being accessed during
logon.
4. Click the Tool Profiles list.
5. Click Servers and drag it into the Conditions box, to the right of the InsertionIP field.
6. Click the operator between them and select the “contained in”
present.
152
symbol, if it is not already
The alert filter’s conditions now read: “Report an alert if a successful or failed logon attempt
occurs outside of business hours AND the logon attempt occurs on ANY administrator
account on ANY network server.”
By using combinations of Alert Groups, Time Of Day Sets, Tool Profiles, and User-Defined
Groups, you can quickly create filters that report very specific events.
In this final step, you will configure the Notifications box to define how the Console is to alert a user
when the filter issues an alert message. In this example, we will configure the filter so when an alert
occurs, the filter name flashes and changes color.
To set up an alert notification:
1. In the list pane, click the Notifications list.
2. Drag Enable Blinking Filter Name into the Notifications box.
3. Click the Color button to open the color palette.
4. Click the blink color you want.
When an alert occurs, the filter name will blink in this color. If needed, you can close the color
palette by clicking outside of its box.
5. Move the Time (ms) slider to around 500. This is the amount of time between blinks, in milliseconds.
6. In the After x alerts received box, type or select 1. This is the number of alerts the filter must
153
receive before the filter begins blinking.
In this case, once it is active, the filter will begin blinking after reporting one alert message.
You acknowledge the filter by clicking it in the Notifications pane, which opens the filter in the
alert grid and causes it to stop blinking.
7. Select the Repeat on x alerts received check box, and then type or select a value of 1.
This means you want the filter to begin blinking again after receiving the first message after
you acknowledged the last one. If you had typed a value of 5, the filter would begin blinking
again only after reporting five alert messages.
8. Click Save to save the filter configuration.
When you are finished, the Notifications box should look like the one shown above. The alert
filter will now behave as follows: Whenever the filter receives a new alert that matches its
conditions, the filter name will flash red. When you acknowledge the filter (by clicking in the
Notifications pane), it will stop blinking. However, it will begin to blink again upon receiving
the next alert that matches these conditions.
154
About the Explore view
The Console's Explore view contains several utilities, called explorers. You can think of this view as
a center for investigating alerts and their details.
Many of the explorers are utilities used for finding out more about alert specific details, such as
looking up IP addresses, domain names, and host names. The Event explorer lets you view all of the
events related to an alert message. It is designed to help you visualize how the alert occurred and the
system's response to that alert. You can follow the chain of events that caused the alert, and help
determine its root cause.
The Explore view also has a Respond menu that you can use from any of the explorers. Respond
allows you to take corrective action on an alert or other information presented in an explorer, such as
manually shutting down a workstation when you see a problem reported in the Console.
155
Types of explorers
The Console contains the following explorers.
Explorer
Description
Event
The Event explorer, which can only be opened from the Monitor view, allows you
to view all of the events that are related to the alert that is currently selected in
the Console. The Event explorer displays both sequential and concurrent events.
That is, you can view the events that occurred before, during, and after the alert
occurred. You can also monitor events in real time, to see where they came from
and where they are going. Use this explorer when you need to know what caused
the rule to fire.
Whois
The Whois explorer identifies the source of an IP address or domain name based
on how it is registered with domain and network authorities. It can tell you where
something is located physically in the world, and who actually owns the device
you're searching for. For example, use this explorer if you need to know who
owns a domain that corresponds to the IP that caused that rule to fire.
NSLookup
The NSLookup explorer resolves IP addresses to host names, and host names
to IP addresses. Use this explorer to determine more information about a source
or destination IP address. For example, use this explorer when you need to know
a name that corresponds to that IP address that caused the rule to fire (it resolves
a name like “trigeo.com” to an IP address).
Traceroute
The Traceroute explorer traces the network links from your host computer to the
destination you specify. That is, it shows you the “hops” between your computer
and the IP address of the destination. For example, use this explorer to determine
the network connections between yourself and an IP that caused the rule to fire.
Flow
Explorer
The Flow Explorer lets you perform flow analysis to determine which IP
addresses or ports are generating or receiving the most network traffic. You can
also analyze the volume of data (in bytes or packets) that is transferring to or
from a given IP address or port number on your network. The explorer reports this
information in easy-to-read graphs and tables.
For example, if you see a strange IP address at the top of the Flow Explorer’s
activity list, you can select the desired bar on the graph or a row in the table, and
then choose the Whois explorer from the Explore menu to find out what that the
IP address is and why it is transmitting so much data.
156
Types of explorers
Explorer
Description
nDepth
Explorer
The nDepth Explorer is a search engine that is fully integrated with TriGeo
explorers. It allows you to search data stored on the nDepth appliance from the
TriGeo SIM. You can use the nDepth Explorer to conduct custom searches, to
send data discovered from the nDepth Explorer to other TriGeo explorers, and to
initiate searches with the nDepth Browser. To do so, select the text string that
interests you, and then select an explorer (Whois, Traceroute, etc.) from the
Explore menu.
nDepth
Browser
The nDepth Browser is a self-contained browser that provides direct access to
the nDepth appliance. This interface lets you search, explore, alert, and report on
all your data in real time. You can also save, reuse, and share custom search
strings.
The following sections describe each of these explorers in detail.
157
The Explore view
The following table describes the key features of the Explore view.
Item
Name
Description
History pane
The History pane displays a record of your explorer viewing
history. Selecting an item in the history list displays the
corresponding explorer event in the Explorer pane.
Click the History button to alternately show and hide the History
pane. When needed, you can delete individual history items from
the history list. The Reset button lets you remove all items from
the history list. For more information, see "Using the History
pane" on page 189.
158
Item
Name
Description
Explorer pane
The Explorer pane shows the explorers that are currently open.
You can have multiple explorers open at the same time.
Cascade button
This button arranges the open explorer windows so they appear
in an organized “cascade.” Their title bars are all visible, but the
windows are all stacked, one on top of another. The active
explorer is at the front of the stack.
Respond menu
This menu lets you take action to respond to the alert or alert field
that is the subject of the active explorer. You can also use the
Respond menu to take action even when no explorer windows
are open or active.
This menu behaves exactly as it does in the Monitor view’s alert
grid. For more information, see "Responding to alert messages"
on page 83.
Explore menu
This menu contains options to open the other explorers. You can
use it to further explore the alert message or alert field that is the
subject of the active explorer. Or you can open a blank explorer
to manually enter the item you want to explore.
Explorer
windows
The explorers you are working with appear as individual windows
within the Explorer pane. You can minimize, resize, and close
each explorer window, as needed.
Minimized
explorers
Any explorers that you have minimized appear at the bottom of
the Explorer pane as a title bar. Simply click a title bar to reopen
that explorer.
159
Using the Event explorer
The Event explorer, which can only be opened from the Monitor view, lets you to view all of the
events that are related to the alert message currently selected in the Console. The Event explorer
displays both sequential and concurrent events. That is, you can view the events that occurred
before, during, and after the alert message occurred. You can also monitor events in real time, to see
where they came from and where they are going.
The Event explorer
You can explore events for any alert in the Console. When you explore an alert, the Console makes a
request to the TriGeo Manager to determine which events are related to that alert. The Event explorer
then displays a summary of events that occurred before, during, and after the system issued the alert.
The Event explorer shows only those events that relate to the alert that you selected. That is, it
shows the event that triggered the alert, and any events that occurred because of that alert (such as a
response, notification, other alert, etc.).
With its straightforward graphical display, the Event explorer can help you visualize how an alert
occurred and the system’s response to that alert. You can follow the chain of events that caused the
alert, and help determine its root cause.
160
You can only open the Event explorer from the Monitor view’s alert grid. You may explore any alert
that appears in the grid.
To open the Event explorer:
1. In the Monitor view’s alert grid, click to select the alert you want to explore.
2. In the alert grid’s Explore menu, click Event.
The Explore view opens, showing the Event explorer. The Event explorer shows all of the
events that are associated with the alert you are exploring. The event that you are currently
focusing on appears in the History pane. In this case, it is the alert itself.
161
The Event explorer has three main sections – the information pane, the event map, and the event grid.
Key features of the Event explorer
The following table describes the key features of each section. The following topics explain how to
use each feature in detail.
Item
Name
Description
Alert Details
Click this button to alternately open and close the Alert Details
pane.
162
Item
Name
Description
Alert Details
pane
The Event explorer's Alert Details displays information about the
event is currently selected in the event map or the event grid.
l
It provides detailed information about the event.
l
It displays a written definition of the alert.
l
It allows you to create a new filter based on the alert.
l
You can also copy text from this pane and paste it into
explorers to explore specific data.
This pane works exactly like Alert Details pane in the Monitor
view. For details, see "Using the Alert Details/Alert Description
pane" on page 80.
Event map
The event map displays a graphical view of the event you are
exploring, as well as the related events that came before and after
the central event. The event you are exploring appears in the
middle. Prior events appear to the left. Events that follow appear
to the right. You can double-click any event to move that event to
the middle, which allows you to view its relationship with other
events. For more information, see "Using the event map" on page
165.
Stop
Click Stop to cancel an explorer lookup at any time.
Next/Previous
You can step through the events in the map by clicking the Next
and Previous buttons.
Pane divider
Drag this bar up or down to resize the event map and event grid
panes.
Event grid
The event grid provides a tabular version of the event map. The
events are listed chronologically, from earliest to latest.
Clicking an event in the grid highlights the corresponding item in
the event map. The information pane also changes to show
information about the event you have selected.
You can sort the alert grid by each of its columns, so long as you
click Pause first. To learn how to sort a grid, see "Sorting a grid by
its columns" on page 34..
163
Item
Name
Description
Scroll bars
The vertical and horizontal scroll bars let you quickly scroll
through the information pane, larger event maps, and the event
grid. For example, you can use the event grid’s scroll bars to view
the full range of events and all of the data associated with each
event.
164
Using the event map
Using the event map
The top section of the Event explorer is called the event map. The event map displays a graphical
view of the event you are exploring, as well as related events that came before and after the central
event. Each event in the map can be thought of as a node that links to other events.
When you first open an alert in the Event explorer, that alert is always the central event in the event
map. However, you can double-click any related event to move that event to the center of the map.
This lets you see the events that came before and after that event. In this way, you can move through
the entire chain of events to analyze the relationships between them.
In the example shown here, we are exploring in internal rule that fired after a series of
WebTrafficAudit events. The rule then triggered the HTTPClientAccess alert.
l
l
l
l
l
Read the map from left to right.
The Event explorer always places the event you are currently exploring in the middle of the
map.
Related events prior to the central event appear to the left. These events “caused” the event
you are exploring. If there are no prior events, this appears as a box labeled None.
Related events that follow the central event appear to the right. These events followed or were
“caused by” the central event. These are the various system responses (if any) that were triggered by the central event. If there are no events that follow, this appears as a box labeled
None.
If the same event occurs multiple times, they appear together in a box, like the one shown
above for the prior events. In this example, WebTrafficAudit occurred 10 times before triggering the rule, so they are grouped together. You can use the scroll bar to view each event.
You can also select each event in the box to view information about it in the information pane.
165
l
Click an event in the event map to highlight the corresponding item in the event grid. The
information pane also changes to show information about the event you have selected.
Selecting an event from the event map
166
l
Double-click an event in the event map to move that event to the center position. The map
then displays the related events that came before and after the new central event. As before,
events prior to the central event appear to the left; events that follow the central event appear
to the right.
When you select a new central event, the information pane changes to show information about
that event. The event grid also refreshes to reflect the new central event.
l
Click Prev (previous) to move the previous event in the map to the center position.
l
Click Next to move the next event in the map to the center position.
l
Click Stop to cancel an explorer lookup at any time.
167
Event map legend
Events that appear in the event map can be alerts, rules, or commands (system responses to an
event). Each type of event in the map has its own icon. The following table explains each icon.
Icon
Meaning
An alert from the Audit Alerts tree.
An alert from the Security Alert tree.
An alert from the Asset Alert tree.
An alert from the Incident alert tree.
An alert from the Internal Alert tree that is not related to rules or active response activity.
An internal command that indicates the system has taken action to respond to an
event.
Rule activity, either from a rule in test mode, or from a rule that has initiated an
actual active response.
168
The event grid lists all of the events that appear in the event map in a tabular form. Events are listed
chronologically, from the earliest event (top) to the latest event (bottom). The grid is useful for
comparing events and for exploring event data.
The event grid’s Order column icons indicate when each event occurred, as described in the
following table.
Icon
Meaning
The event occurred before the central event shown in the event map.
The event occurred during (as part of) the central event.
The event occurred after the central event shown in the event map.
The columns in the event grid show detailed information about the alert. The columns vary, depending
on the alert you are viewing. For a description of each data field that can appear in the grid, see
169
Viewing information in the event grid
l
Click an event in the grid to highlight the corresponding item in the event map. The information
pane also changes to show information about the event you have selected.
Select an item in the grid to see its alert details and to its position in the event map
l
l
l
l
When needed, you can use the vertical scroll bar to view all of the events.
Use the horizontal scroll bar to view all of the data fields associated with a particular event.
This same data also appears in the information pane, but as text.
Click an individual cell in the grid to explore that field.
Point to an individual cell in the grid to see a ToolTip that displays the complete contents of the
cell.
170
1. In the event map or the event grid, select the event you want to explore.
2. In the event grid, select the specific field you want to explore.
3. In the Explore menu, select the explorer you want to work with.
The explorer appears, with the field data you selected appearing in the Search box.
4. If you are using the nDepth Explorer, click Search. The other explorers begin searching automatically.
Responding to an event from the event grid
You can use the event grid to perform an active response to a particular event.
To respond from the event grid:
1. In the event map or the event grid, select the event you want to respond to.
2. In the event grid, select the specific field you want to respond to.
3. In the Respond menu, select the response you want.
4. Complete the Respond form. See the "Actions table" on page 313 for details on configuring
each response.
171
Using the Alert Details pane
In the Event explorer, the upper-left pane is called the Alert Details pane. It has two different views
to show the properties of the alert that is currently selected in the event map or the event grid:
l
l
The Alert Details view displays detailed information about the alert that is currently selected
in the grid. If more than one alert is selected, it shows the properties of the last alert to be
selected.
The Alert Description view displays a written description of the last alert to be selected in the
grid.
You can also use this pane to create a filter based on the selected alert, to scroll through the contents
of the event grid, or to explore specific alert data with other TriGeo explorers.
Opening and closing the Alert Details pane
You can open and close the Event explorer’s Alert Details pane of two ways:
l
l
Click the event map’s Alert Details button.
Position your pointer over two thin lines next to the Alert Details pane (or if the pane is closed,
next to the left side of the event map). When the pointer turns into a double-headed arrow,
double-click to open or close the pane.
When the Alert Details pane opens, it shows information about the alert that is currently
selected in the event map or event grid.
Viewing an event’s alert details
To view details information about a particular alert or event:
l
Click the event in the event map.
l
Click the event in the event grid.
The Alert Details pane displays information about the event you selected.
172
The following table explains how to use the toolbar at the top of the Alert Details pane.
Button
Description
Click this button to create a new filter that captures the currently selected alert type.
Upon doing so, the Monitor view opens, with the new filter open in the alert grid. The
new filter appears in the Filters pane, under the last selected filter. If needed, you can
edit the filter so it captures alerts of an even more specific nature. See "Editing an
existing filter" on page 89.
Click these buttons to move up and down among the alerts in the event grid. The pane
shows detailed technical information about each alert that is selected. This lets you
view the technical details and written descriptions of each alert in the grid.
Remember, you can also use your keyboard's up (↑) and down (↓) arrow keys:
l
l
To cycle through the alerts in the alert grid, click anywhere in the event grid.
Then use your up and down arrow keys.
To cycle through the fields in the Alert Details pane, click anywhere in the
Alert Details grid. Then use your up and down arrow keys.
Click this button to open the pane’s Alert Details view. This view shows detailed
information about each of the selected alert's data fields. The actual fields that appear
here vary, according to the alert type that is currently selected. For example, networkoriented alerts show fields for IP addresses and ports. Account-oriented alerts show
account names and domains.
For a description of each alert field that can appear in the Alert Details view, see
Click this button to open the pane’s Alert Description view, which provides a detailed
written description of the alert type that is currently selected.
Exploring from the Alert Details pane
1. In the event map or the event grid, select the event you want to explore.
2. In the Alert Details pane's Information column, click the alert field you want to explore.
3. In the Explore list, select the explorer you want to work with.
The explorer appears, with the field data you selected appearing the Search box.
4. If you are using the nDepth Explorer, click Search. The other explorers begin searching automatically.
173
Using the NSLookup, Traceroute, and Whois
explorers
The NSLookup, Traceroute, and Whois explorers all have different functions, but they all behave the
same way. Therefore, their functions and behavior are explained here together.
You can explore with NSLookup, Traceroute, and Whois several different ways:
l
You can explore directly from an alert filter.
l
You can explore from the Event explorer’s event map, event grid, or information pane.
l
You can explore from other explorers.
l
You can manually explore a particular data source by typing its IP address, destination IP
address, host name, or domain name.
174
The NSLookup explorer is a network utility that is designed to resolve IP addresses to host names,
and host names to IP addresses. Use this explorer whenever you need to know a name that
corresponds to the IP address that caused the rule to fire. For example, it resolves a name like
“trigeo.com” to an IP address.
In the example shown here, we opened the NSLookup explorer for an alert field that has an IP
address of 192.168.168.10 (which appears in the Search field). The explorer retrieved the
corresponding host name, which is grendel.corp.trigeo.com.
Opening the NSLookup explorer adds an item to the Explore view’s History pane. The new item has
a NSLookup explorer
icon.
175
About the Traceroute explorer
The Traceroute explorer is a network utility that is designed to trace the network links from your host
computer to the destination you specify. Use this explorer whenever you need to determine the
network connections between yourself and the IP address that caused the rule to fire.
In the example shown here, we used the Traceroute explorer on the IP address of 192.168.167.1. It
shows you the “hops” between your computer and that IP address. In this example, connecting to that
IP address required two “hops.”
Opening the Traceroute Explorer adds an item to the Explore view’s History pane. The new item has
a Traceroute explorer
icon.
176
The Whois explorer is a network utility that is designed to identify the source of an IP address or
domain name based on how it is registered with domain and network authorities. This explorer
contacts the central databases for IP addresses and domain names and returns the results of any of
your searches. It can tell you where something is located physically in the world, and who actually
owns the device you’re searching for. For example, use this explorer if you need to know who owns a
domain that corresponds to the IP address that caused a rule to fire.
The example on the left shows the results for an IP address. The example on the right shows the
results for the TriGeo domain name, trigeo.com. From these, you can find out who owns the IP
address and where the server is hosted.
Opening the Whois Explorer adds an item to the Explore view’s History pane. The new item has a
Whois explorer
icon.
177
Exploring from the alert grid
1. In the Monitor view’s alert grid, click the alert message you want to explore.
2. To explore a particular field, click the corresponding cell in the grid.
3. In the alert grid’s Explore menu, select the explorer you want to work with.
The Console’s Explore view appears, showing the explorer you have selected. The explorer
provides information on the item you are exploring, and adds a new entry to the History pane.
Exploring from the Event explorer
For information on using the NSLookup, Traceroute, and Whois explorers with the Event explorer,
see "Exploring from the event grid" on page 171 and "Exploring from the Alert Details pane" on page
173.
Exploring from other explorers
Once an explorer is open, you can continue exploring its search results with any of the other
explorers.
To continue exploring:
1. In an open explorer window, click and drag to select the IP address, host name, or domain
name you want to explore.
2. In the Manager list, select the Manager you want to explore from, if different from the one
shown.
3. In the Explore menu, select the explorer you want to use.
The new explorer opens with the item you selected appearing in the Search box. It
automatically begins searching for that item.
178
At any time, you can manually explore an IP address, host name, or domain name. You can do this by
opening a new, empty explorer, or by typing directly into the Search box of an explorer that is already
open.
To manually explore an item:
1. Open the Console’s Explore view or the Monitor view.
The explorer you selected appears. In this case, the explorer is blank because you did not
open it from an alert, an event, or another explorer.
Note: You can also perform this procedure from an explorer that is already open.
3. In the Manager list, select the Manager you want to explore from, if different from the one
shown.
4. In the Search box, type the IP address, host name, or domain name you want to explore.
5. Click Search.
The explorer provides information on the item you are exploring, and adds a new entry to the
History pane.
Canceling an explorer lookup
l
You can cancel an explorer lookup at any time by clicking the Stop button.
179
Using the Flow Explorer
The Flow Explorer lets you perform flow analysis to determine which IP addresses or ports are
generating or receiving the most network traffic. You can also analyze the volume of data (in bytes or
packets) that is transferring to or from a given IP address or port number on your network. The
explorer reports this information in easy-to-read graphs and tables.
This is how it works. The TriGeo SIM has a “collector” that gathers flow data from routers, switches,
and other flow-enabled devices, and puts this information in a database. The Flow Explorer then
queries this database to find out what is happening on your network.
The explorer then reports which IP addresses or port numbers are generating or receiving the most
activity, and the volume of their data.
If you see something unusual, you can use the Flow Explorer to open other explorers. For example, if
you see a strange IP address at the top of the activity list, you can click the address and select
Whois from the Explore menu to find out who that IP address belongs to and why it is transmitting so
much data. You can also use the Respond menu to take action on any items that are reported by the
Flow Explorer.
Each time you perform a flow analysis, a new item representing the search is added to the History
pane.
Opening the Flow Explorer
The Flow Explorer always opens with its default settings. It is used to configure your own flow
analysis query of the IP addresses or ports that are generating or receiving the most network traffic.
To open the Flow Explorer from the Monitor view:
l
In the Monitor view’s Explore menu, click Flow Explorer.
The Explorer view opens, showing the Flow Explorer with its default settings.
To open the Flow Explorer from the Explorer view:
l
In the Explorer view’s Explore menu, click Flow Explorer.
The Flow Explorer opens with its default settings.
180
The Flow Explorer
The Flow Explorer has three main sections:
l
l
l
The Analysis Configuration form lets you configure a query to the flow database to find out
what is happening on your network. For more information, see "Configuring a Flow Explorer
query" on page 183.
The Analysis Results graph displays flow analysis data in a graphic format. The graph also
provides access to other explorers and lets you respond to events with specific actions.
The Analysis Results grid displays flow analysis data in a tabular format. You can sort the
columns of this grid, which in turn updates the graph. The grid also provides access to other
explorers and lets you respond to events with specific actions.
Note: The Flow Explorer does not show any Analysis Results information until you perform a
query.
181
Flow Explorer history
Every time you perform a new flow analysis with the Flow Explorer, it adds a new item to the
Explorer view’s History pane.
History item for the Flow Explorer
The history item provides detailed information about the flow analysis:
l
l
The number preceding the item is the Maximum in Table setting. This is followed by the Endpoint and Top Talker choices. So, a history item might read as follows: (20) Top By Destination IP.
Pointing to the history icon opens a ToolTip that displays the query’s Start and End dates and
times, and whether the query was sorted by Bytes or Packets.
If you click an earlier Flow Explorer history item, the Flow Explorer’s Analysis Configuration and
Analysis Results areas refresh to appear as they did for that query. If you change anything in the
Flow Explorer for an earlier query and then click Analyze, the analysis becomes a new history item.
182
This topic explains how to use the Flow Explorer’s Analysis Configuration form to configure (or
reconfigure) a flow analysis query.
To configure a query:
1. At the top of the Flow Explorer, click Configure to open the Analysis Configuration form, if
it is not already showing.
2. Complete the Analysis Configuration tab as described in the following table.
Option
Description
Manager
Select the Manager you want to query. This list only includes flowenabled Managers.
Note: To enable flow, use the CMC command enableflow. It
enables the SIM appliance to collect data and the Manager to
perform analysis against the database. For information on this CMC
command, see "Using the CMC 'service' menu" on page 569.
Flow Time
In the drop-down list, select the timeframe for which you want to
query the flow data.
By default, the form opens with the flow time set for the last hour
(the end time is now, and the start time is one hour ago).
183
Option
Description
Creating custom
timeframes
To create a custom timeframe, select Custom range. in the Flow
Time list. Then, in the From and To boxes, type or select the start
date and time, and the end date and time, respectively.
If you type a timeframe, you must use the date and time format
shown on the form. Or you can click each box’s “time”
button to
open a calendar that lets you select the date and time of your
choice. You can use your keyboard’s up, down, right, and left arrows
to move within the calendar and to select a time.
To close the calendar, click anywhere outside of its boundary.
Top Talker
Endpoint
The “top talkers” are the most significant or active communicators
on your network. Choose how you want to aggregate (gather and
report) your network’s top talkers:
l
Click By IP to aggregate the flow data by IP address.
l
Click By Port to aggregate the flow data by port number.
Choose how you want to aggregate (gather and report) the top talker
flow data:
l
l
Order by
Click Source to aggregate by source IP address or port
number.
Click Destination to aggregate by destination IP address or
port number.
Select the value by which you want to sort the graph and table—
Bytes (kB) or Packets. Both values will appear in the report. This
just defines how the report is to be sorted.
184
Option
Description
Maximum in
Graph
Type or select the number of items that you want to appear in the
results graph. The maximum is 50.
Maximum in
Table
Type or select the number of items that you want to appear in the
results table. The maximum is 1000.
3. Click Analyze.
The Analyzing status bar appears while the Flow Explorer submits your query to the TriGeo
SIM. After a few moments, the Flow Explorer’s Analysis Results appear, displaying the
results of your query. In addition, a new item representing the search appears in the History
pane.
This is a list of the various flow analysis combinations that you can query and report on with the Flow
Explorer, where:
X = the number of results that appears in the graph, and
Y = the number of results that appear in the table
Top X,Y by Source IP by Bytes
Top X,Y by Source IP by Packets
Top X,Y by Destination IP by Bytes
Top X,Y by Destination IP by Packets
Top X,Y by Source Port by Bytes
Top X,Y by Source Port by Packets
Top X,Y by Destination Port by Bytes
Top X,Y by Destination Port by Packets
185
Interpreting the Analysis Results graph
The Flow Analysis graph and table is called the Analysis Results section
The Flow Explorer’s Analysis Results section displays a graphical version of your query results The
graph has the following features:
l
l
l
l
The numbers to the left of the bars show the “top talker” IP addresses or port numbers, based
on your query options.
The orange bars, the scale at bottom of the graph, and graph title all identify and measure your
Order By query option.
The green bars and the scale at the top of the graph identify and measure the other Order By
option.
Pointing to a bar displays the actual number of kilobytes or packets associated with that item.
Note: The graph shows only the top results of your query. The Analysis Results table shows results
up to the Maximum in Table value.
In the example shown here, the query sorted the report by packets. So the orange bars and the
bottom scale are for packets. The green bars and the top scale are for kilobytes.
186
The Explorer’s Analysis Results grid displays your query results in tabular form. The actual columns
that appear in the grid depend on the query options you selected.
Grid columns
The following table describes each column that can appear in the Analysis Results grid.
Column
Description
Source IP
The IP address the network traffic is coming from.
Destination IP
The IP address the network traffic is going to.
Source Port
The port number the network traffic is coming from.
Destination
Port
The port number the network traffic is going to.
Service
Displays a service name based on the registered ports database. This is a
“friendly” name, such as “HTTP” instead of “port 80”. If a port does not
have a registered name, it appears as “Unassigned”.
Packets
Displays the number of packets that are being transmitted from the
reported IP addresses or over the given port (from the source, or to the
destination, depending on what you selected).
Bytes (kB)
Displays the quantity of bytes (in kilobytes) that are being transmitted from
the reported IP addresses or over the given port (from the source, or to the
destination, depending on what you selected).
Protocol Name
Displays the protocol used in this result, such as ICMP, TCP, or UDP.
187
Sorting the Analysis Results grid
You can sort the Analysis Results grid by any of its columns by clicking its column headers. Doing
so also changes how the graph is sorted.
For example, if you click the Packets column header once, it sorts the Packets column in descending
order. If you click it again, it sorts the column in ascending order. In each case, the graph changes to
reflect each change in sort order.
You can also sort the grid by more than one column. For information on sorting grids, see "Sorting a
grid by its columns" on page 34.
Note: Sorting the grid causes the graph to refresh, to reflect the grid’s new data arrangement.
Because the graph always shows the top results from the grid, sorting lets you use the graph to view
and compare different sets of data.
Exploring flow analysis results
You can pass a port number or IP address from the Flow Explorer’s Analysis Results graph or grid to
another explorer.
To explore flow results:
1. In the Analysis Results graph or grid, click the port number or IP address you want to explore.
The explorer you selected opens, exploring the item you have selected.
Responding to flow analysis results
You can respond to any port number or IP address that is reported by the Flow Explorer’s Analysis
Results graph or grid.
To respond to flow results:
1. In the Analysis Results graph or grid, click the port number or IP address you want to respond
to.
2. In the Respond menu, select the active response you want to take.
The Respond form opens, so you can configure the appropriate response. For more
information, see "Responding to alert messages" on page 83.
188
You can do a lot of things with the Explore view’s History pane:
l
l
l
l
You can hide the pane and then reopen it when you need it.
You can remove individual items or all of the items from the
list.
You can point to a history icon to open a ToolTip to find out
more about that history item.
But most importantly, you can re-open each event in the list
simply by clicking it. This reopens the explorer window that
originally investigated that item. In this way, you can move
through your exploration history, quickly viewing the events
you explored before and after the event you are exploring
now.
The Explore view's History pane
189
Hiding and showing the History pane
Use the History pane’s History button to alternately hide and show the History pane. Hiding the
pane provides additional space for your explorers.
To hide or show the History pane:
l
With the History pane showing, click the History button.
The History pane becomes hidden along the left side of the window.
l
With the History pane hidden, click the History button.
The History pane reappears on the left side of the window.
Viewing explorer history
l
Click any item listed in the Explore view’s History pane.
The Explorer window reopens the explorer that was used to investigate that item.
Clearing explorer history
When needed, you can clear individual items or all items from the History pane.
To clear an item from the History pane:
1. In the History pane, point to the item you want to remove.
2. Click
Clear.
3. At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to remove the item from the History pane.
To clear all items from the History pane:
1. At the bottom of the History pane, click Reset.
2. At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to remove all of the items from the History pane; otherwise, click No to keep them.
190
The following table explains the meaning of each icon that can appear in the History pane.
Icon
Meaning
An alert from the Audit Alerts tree.
An alert from the Security Alert tree.
An alert from the Asset Alert tree.
An alert from the Incident alert tree.
An alert from the Internal Alert tree that is not related to rules or active response activity.
An internal command that indicates the system has taken action to respond to an
event.
Rule activity, either from a rule in test mode, or from a rule that has initiated an
actual active response.
An NSLookup explorer event.
A Traceroute explorer event.
An nDepth Explorer event.
A Whois explorer event.
A Flow Explorer event.
191
About TriGeo nDepth
TriGeo nDepth is an add-on appliance and plug-in application that are sold separately. If purchased,
each TriGeo Manager has its own dedicated nDepth appliance that is mounted in a rack with the
TriGeo SIM. The appliance stores all of the original log file source data that passes through a
particular TriGeo Manager. The log data is stored in its entirety, in real time, as it originally occurs
from each host (network device) and source (application or tool) that is monitored by the Manager.
nDepth also contains a powerful search engine. It indexes the original log file source data in real time
and allows you to search that data with simple or highly specific search criteria. nDepth has two
different search tools:
l
l
The nDepth Explorer is a search engine that is fully integrated with the Console’s other
explorers. It allows you to search data stored on the nDepth appliance from the TriGeo SIM.
You can use nDepth Explorer to conduct custom searches, to open alert data fields in other TriGeo explorers, and to initiate searches with the nDepth Browser.
The nDepth Browser is a web browser-based explorer that provides direct access to the
nDepth appliance. This interface lets you search, explore, alert, and report on all your data in
real time. You can also save, reuse, and share custom search strings. It opens in your default
web browser.
nDepth is intended for customers who have very specific data analysis needs, and who fully
understand how to interpret the raw log file data that is generated by their network devices and tools.
The following topics explain how to open the nDepth Explorer, perform a basic search, interpret your
search results, explore additional search options, and open other explorers.
Installing TriGeo nDepth
For complete information on installing TriGeo nDepth, see the TriGeo SIM Installation Guide.
Configuring network tools for use with TriGeo nDepth
If you are using nDepth, you must configure each tool (TriGeo sensors and actors) for use with
nDepth through the TriGeo Tool Configuration system.
First, decide which network devices, applications, and tools being monitored by the Manager are to
also send their log file data to nDepth. Then configure each of these tools for use with nDepth. You
can choose to route a tool’s log file data to the TriGeo SIM, directly to TriGeo nDepth, or to both.
TriGeo recommends that nDepth users configure each tool so it routes its log data to both nDepth and
the TriGeo SIM. This allows you to receive alerts on these tools, and to search data stored on the
nDepth appliance with both the TriGeo Explorer and the nDepth Browser.
For complete information on configuring tools for use with nDepth, see "Connecting products to the
TriGeo SIM" on page 347.
192
nDepth Explorer is a search engine that is fully integrated with the Console’s other explorers. It allows
you to search data stored on the nDepth appliance from the TriGeo SIM. You can use nDepth
Explorer to conduct custom searches, to open alert data fields in other TriGeo explorers, and to
initiate searches with the nDepth Browser.
You can open a blank nDepth Explorer to conduct a new custom search. Or you can open the nDepth
Explorer from an existing data source, such as an alert field or another TriGeo explorer (NSLookup,
Whois, and Traceroute, and Flow), to search for similar events or data.
You can also use nDepth Explorer to further explore your search results by adding new search strings
to the search box, or by appending text to an existing search strings.
The following topics explain how to open the nDepth Explorer, perform a basic search, interpret your
search results, explore additional search options, and open other explorers.
Note: To use nDepth Explorer, you must purchase an nDepth appliance and configure it for use with
the TriGeo Manager. Otherwise, all nDepth Explorer commands are disabled.
193
Opening a blank nDepth Explorer
l
In the Monitor view’s Explore menu, click nDepth Explorer.
l
In the Explore view’s Explore menu, click nDepth Explorer.
In either case, the Explorer pane opens, showing a blank nDepth Explorer. To use the nDepth
Explorer, you must select your search parameters. See "Using the nDepth Explorer
Configuration form" on page 200.
194
1. Do one of the following:
l
l
l
In the Monitor view’s alert grid, select the alert row or field you want to explore.
In the Event explorer’s Alert Details pane, event map, or event grid, click the item or
field you want to explore.
In a TriGeo explorer, select the data source you want to explore.
2. In the Explore menu, click nDepth.
The Explore view opens, with the nDepth Explorer appearing. Note that the explorer’s search
field contains the alert field you are exploring.
3. Click Search.
nDepth searches all hosts and sources for all instances of that alert field that have occurred in
the last 10 minutes.
If needed, you can refine your search by refining settings with the Configuration form. See
"Using the nDepth Explorer Configuration form" on page 200.
195
Key features of the nDepth Explorer
The following table describe the key features of nDepth Explorer.
Item
Name
Description
Configure
button
Click this button to alternately show and hide the Configuration
form.
Configuration
form
Use the Configuration form to search all of the original log file
source data that passes through a particular TriGeo Manager. The
log data is stored in its entirety, in real time, as it originally occurs
from each host (network device) and source (application or tool)
that is monitored by the Manager. You can perform simple
searches or highly specific searches. For more information, see
"Using the nDepth Explorer Configuration form" on page 200.
196
Item
Name
Description
Results
The Results box displays all of the data that matches your search
criteria from the Configuration form. To make viewing easier,
each result appears with an alternating gray or white background.
The number of results that appear depend entirely on your query.
The first line of every search displays the raw log data that
matched your search criteria. The second line of each result
displays the following information about the matched data:
l
host is the network device the data originated from.
l
source is the source tool the data originated from.
l
source type is the category of the source tool the data
originated from.
Note: Sources and source types match TriGeo’s tool
configuration categories.
If there is more than one page of search results, you can view
each page with the arrows in the lower-right corner of the explorer.
Refresh
Refreshes the data to show the most current data that matches
your Configuration form settings.
Stop
Click this button at any time to stop a search that is in progress.
nDepth
Browser
Opens nDepth Browser, which then performs a search based on
your current nDepth Explorer search settings.
The nDepth Browser is a web-based interface that allows you to
perform extremely precise searches and analysis on data that is
stored on the nDepth appliance. For more information, see "Using
nDepth Browser" on page 204, and see nDepth Browser Help.
Viewing range
and search
result total
The lower-right of the explorer shows the total number of items
that matched your search results, as well as the block of items
within that range that you are currently viewing.
◄◄
Displays the first page of the search results.
◄
Displays the previous page of the search results.
►
Displays the next page of the search results.
►►
Displays the last page of the search results.
197
nDepth's History pane
Each nDepth Explorer search adds an item to the Explorer view’s History pane. The history item
(shown here) displays an nDepth icon, the number of search results, and your search string text, if
applicable.
Pointing to the item's history icon also displays the number of search results and your search string. If
your search specified a particular host or source, they are listed here, too.
A new search always adds a history item. If you click an earlier history item, the system takes you
back to that search; it does not make a new item. As soon as you change something in the nDepth
Explorer and perform a new search, that search becomes a new history item.
Exploring nDepth Explorer search results
You can use nDepth Explorer to further explore your search results by adding new search strings to
the search box, or by appending text to an existing search strings.
Performing a search
1. Select the nDepth Explorer you want to work with (if more than one are open).
2. Click Reset to make the Configuration form editable.
3. Select the text string you want to explore. Then press Ctrl+C to copy the search string.
4. Click the Search box. Then press Ctrl+V to paste the search string into the Search box.
5. Make any necessary changes to the Configuration form.
6. To begin the search, do either of the following:
l
After entering a search string, press Enter.
l
After completing the Configuration form, click Search.
The Results box displays all of the log file data that matches the Manager, time frame, host,
source, and search string you have selected. If no results are found, the following message
appears: “No matching results found.”
198
Performing a search
To explore your search results:
1. In the Results box, drag to select the string you want to explore.
2. In the Explore menu, select the explorer you want to use.
3. If needed, click Search.
199
Use nDepth Explorer’s Configuration form to search all of the original log file source data that
passes through a particular TriGeo Manager. In this case, you are not actually searching so much as
you are applying filters to reduce the amount of reported data.
To use the nDepth Explorer’s Configuration form:
Complete the Configuration form as described in the following table.
Field
Description
Manager
Select the select the Manager on which you want to perform an nDepth
search. Each Manager is linked to a single nDepth appliance, so by selecting
a Manager, you are effectively selecting the corresponding nDepth
appliance.
Enter search
term
In the search box, enter the search string or text you want to find in the data.
To enter a search string:
l
Type a search string directly in the search box.
l
Copy (Ctrl+C) a search string and paste (Ctrl+V) it in the text box.
The search box behaves the same as in the nDepth Browser. You can use all
of the same options, and it has all of the same complexity. For more
information on advanced search features, see nDepth Browser Help.
If desired, you can begin a search immediately after entering a search string
by pressing Enter.
Search Time
In the Search Time list, select the timeframe in which you want to search
the log file data. By default, the form’s search time is for the last 10 minutes
(the end time is now, and the start time is 10 minutes ago).
200
Field
Description
Creating
custom
timeframes
To create a custom timeframe, select Custom range in the Search Time
list. Then, in the From and To boxes, type or select the start date and time,
and the end date and time, respectively.
If you type a timeframe, you must use the date and time format shown on the
form. Or you can click each box’s “time”
button to open a calendar that
lets you select the date and time of your choice. You can use your
keyboard’s up, down, right, and left arrows to move within the calendar and to
select a time.
To close the calendar, click anywhere outside of its boundary.
Host
A host is a specific network device. In the Host list, select which host’s data
you want to search. This narrows your search results to data from that host.
The default is ALL, which returns all matches to your search from all network
devices that have sent data to the Manager’s nDepth appliance.
Source
A source is a specific type of data that is generated by a tool on a network
device and collected by the Manager’s nDepth appliance. In the Source list,
select which specific data source you want to search. This narrows your
search results to data from that source. The default is ALL, which searches
all source data from the host you selected.
Reset
Click Reset to return the form to its default settings.
Search
After completing the form, click Search to begin your search.
Note: You can stop a search at any time by clicking the Stop at the top of the
Results area.
201
Exploring search results with other TriGeo explorers
You can access other TriGeo explorers from the nDepth Explorer’s Results box. This allows you to
further investigate your nDepth search results with other TriGeo explorers.
For example, if you see an IP address in your nDepth search results, you may want to use the
NSLookup, Traceroute, or Whois explorers to figure out where that IP is. Or, if you see something
unusual in your nDepth Explorer, you may want to take some kind of corrective action.
To explore nDepth Explorer results:
1. In the Results box, select the text you want to investigate.
2. In the Explore menu, select the explorer you want to open.
The system “passes” the selected text to the TriGeo explorer you selected.
Responding to search results
As with other explorers, you can respond to any item that is reported in the nDepth Explorer search
results. For example, you could send a user account a popup message, or block a hostile IP address.
To respond to nDepth Explorer results:
1. In the Results box, select the text you want to respond to.
2. In the Respond menu, select the active response you want to take.
The Respond form opens, so you can configure the appropriate response. For more
information, see "Responding to alert messages" on page 83.
202
When needed, you can move a search from the nDepth Explorer into nDepth Browser. This allows
you to precisely tailor the search to your needs.
To open a search in the nDepth Browser:
l
l
In the nDepth Explorer’s Results box, select the text you want the nDepth Browser to search
for. Then in the Explore menu, click nDepth Browser.
In the nDepth Explorer’s Results box, select the text you want the nDepth Browser to search
for. Then, above the Results box, click the nDepth Browser button.
nDepth Browser opens in your default web browser and performs a search based on your
current nDepth Explorer search settings. The nDepth Browser searches all hosts and sources
for all instances of that alert field that have occurred in the last 10 minutes. For more
information, see "Using nDepth Browser" on page 204.
203
Using nDepth Browser
nDepth Browser is a web browser-based explorer that provides direct access to the nDepth
appliance. This interface lets you search, explore, alert, and report on all your data in real time. You
can also save, reuse, and share custom search strings.
This section explains how to open and access the nDepth Browser. For instructions on using the
browser, see nDepth Browser Help. For best results, TriGeo recommends using Mozilla Firefox as
your default web browser.
Opening nDepth Browser
You can open nDepth Browser from any place you can open nDepth Explorer. In the Monitor view,
you can open the nDepth Browser from an existing alert field. Or from the Explorer view, you can
open nDepth Browser from any other TriGeo explorer to search for similar events or data. When
working with explorers, nDepth Browser uses the selected text as its search string.
For example, if you were using NSLookup to resolve “trigeo.com”, you could then click the resulting
IP address and look that up in the nDepth Browser. Or if you were looking at something in the nDepth
Explorer, you could click the nDepth Browser button to perform the same search in the browser.
You can also open a blank nDepth Browser to conduct your own custom searches.
Note: If you have not purchased an nDepth appliance, nDepth Browser commands are disabled.
204
l
In the Monitor view’s Explore menu, click nDepth Browser.
l
In the Explore view’s Explore menu, click nDepth Browser.
In either case, your default web browser opens, showing the nDepth Browser's home page.
nDepth Browser default page
205
Opening the nDepth Browser from a particular data source
l
l
In the Monitor view’s alert grid, select the alert row or field you want to explore.
In the Explorer view’s Event explorer’s information pane, event map or event grid, click
the item or field you want to explore.
l
In any TriGeo explorer, select the data source you want to explore.
l
In the nDepth Explorer’s Results box, select the text you want to explore.
2. In the Explore menu, click nDepth Browser.
Note: If you are starting from nDepth Explorer, you can also click nDepth Browser to begin
exploring the selected text in nDepth Browser.
In each case, your default web browser opens. The Console passes the alert field or search
string you selected to nDepth Browser, which searches all hosts and sources for all instances
of that alert field that have occurred in the last 10 minutes.
nDepth Browser showing search results. In this case, we searched for an IP address of 192.168.168.10.
206
TriGeo SIM Console Help contains complete information and numerous examples on creating,
refining, and saving search strings.
To open nDepth Browser Help:
1. From either the TriGeo SIM Console or nDepth Browser, click the Help button.
2. In Help's Contents tab, open nDepth Browser Help.
207
About Groups
The Build ► Groups view is used to create, name, configure, and organize groups of parameters.
You may then choose from these Groups when configuring filters (in Filter Creation) and rules (in
Rule Creation) to include or exclude the specific elements defined within each Group.
Throughout this manual, when you see the word Groups (capitalized), it refers to a Group that has
been configured in the Build ► Groups view. The capitalization indicates that these Groups are
configurable objects that can be applied to your rules and filters, and it helps distinguish them from
other, generic groups of things.
Each Group you create only applies to the Manager that is selected when you create the Group. If you
need a similar Group for another Manager, you must create it separately with that other Manager; or
you must export the Group, and then import it from the other Manager’s Groups grid.
209
Group types
You can use the Build ► Groups view to create any of the Groups listed in the following table.
Group type
Description
Alert Groups
Alert Groups are custom families of alerts that you can save as a Group.
You can then associate the Alert Group with your rules and filters.
For example, you might create an Alert Group made up of similar alerts
that all need to trigger the same response from the Console. When you
apply the Alert Group to a rule, the Console implements the same rule
when any one of the alerts in the Group occurs.
Directory Service
Groups
If you use a directory service, such as Active Directory, you can connect
the TriGeo SIM to the server that stores your existing directory service
(DS) Groups. Once connected, you can synchronize your DS Groups
with the TriGeo SIM and apply them to your TriGeo rules and filters. DS
Groups allow you to match, include, or exclude events to specific users
or computers, based on their DS Group membership.
In most cases, DS Groups are used in rules and filters as a type of white
list or blacklist for choosing which users or computers to include or to
ignore. When used by a filter, a DS Group lets you limit the scope of the
alerts included in the filter to those users or computers that have
membership in a particular Group.
Email Template
Email Templates allow you to create pre-formatted email messages that
your TriGeo rules can use to notify you of an alert event.
State Variables
State Variables are used in rules. They represent temporary or
transitional states. For example, you can create a State Variable to track
the “state” of a particular system, setting it to a different value depending
on whether the system comes online or goes offline.
Time of Day Sets
Time of Day Sets are specific groups of hours that you can associate
with rules and filters. Time of Day Sets allow them to take different
actions at different times of day.
For example, if you define two different Time of Day Sets for “Working
Hours” and “Outside Working Hours,” you can assign different rules to
each of these Time of Day Sets. For instance, you may want a rule that
automatically shuts down the offending computer and alerts your system
administrator via email.
210
Group types
Group type
Description
Tool Profiles
Tool Profiles are groups of Agents that have common tool configurations.
Most Agents in a network have only a few different network security tool
configurations. Tool Profiles allow you to group Agents by their common
tool configurations. You can then have your rules and filters include or
exclude the Agents associated with a particular profile.
User-Defined
Groups
User-Defined Groups are groups of preferences that are used in rules
and filters. They allow you to match, include, or exclude events,
information, or data fields based on their membership in a particular
Group. In most cases, User-Defined Groups are used in rules and filters
as a type of white list or blacklist for choosing which events to include or
to ignore.
211
The topics in this section describe the key features of the Groups view, including its major sections,
the meaning of its grid columns, and how to refine its grid.
The following table describes the key features of the Build ► Groups view.
Item
Name
Description
Refine
Results
This form behaves like a search engine, letting you apply filters to
the Groups grid to reduce the number of Groups it shows. For
information on using this form, see "Refining the Groups grid" on
page 215.
212
Item
Name
Description
Groups grid
By default, the Groups grid shows every Group associated with
each Manager the Console is connected to. If the same Group is
configured for more than one Manager, it will appear in the grid
multiple times—once for each Manager it is associated with. You
can sort the grid and refine it with the Refine Results form.
The gear button in each row opens a menu of commands that you
can perform on the item that is currently selected in the grid. It
has commands for editing, cloning, exporting, and deleting the
selected Group.
Click this button whenever you want to create a new Group.
Selecting an option from this list opens the Edit pane as an
editable form, which you can use to create the new Group.
The gear button at the top of the grid opens commands that you
can perform on multiple selections in the grid, and commands
that do not require a grid selection. In this case, it has a
command to import Groups from a remote source. You can
import Groups from one Manager to another, or you can import
Groups that are provided by TriGeo Network Security. You may
import only one Group at a time.
Group Details
pane
This pane displays detailed information about the Group that is
currently selected in the grid. When you select a Group in the
grid, the pane's name changes to reflect the Group type you are
currently viewing.
When adding or editing a Group, the pane turns into an editable
form, and the form's name changes to reflect the type of Group
you are working with. This pane can be hidden when it is not
needed.
Folders pane
The Folders pane lets you create folders and sub-folders for
organizing your State Variables and Email Templates. This pane
is disabled when you are working with other Groups. For
instruction on performing these tasks, see "Working with Group
folders" on page 254.
Clicking a folder in the Folders pane causes the Groups grid to
display only the Groups that are stored in that folder and any of its
sub-folders, if applicable.
213
Groups grid columns
The following table describes the meaning of each column in the Groups grid.
Column
Description
The gear button in each row opens a menu of commands that you can
perform on the item that is currently selected in the grid. It has commands
for editing, cloning, exporting, and deleting the selected Group.
Type
Displays the type of the Group—Tool Profile, User-Defined Group, Time
of Day Set, etc.
Name
Displays the name of the Group.
Description
Displays a description of the Group. Pointing to this field displays the
complete description as a ToolTip.
Created By
Displays the name of the Console user who created the Group.
Created Date
Displays the date the Group was created.
Modified By
Displays the name of the Console user who last modified the Group.
Modified Date
Displays the date on which the Groups was last modified.
Manager
Displays the name of the Manager the Group is associated with.
214
By default, the Groups grid shows every Group associated with each Manager the Console is
connected to. If the same Group is configured for more than one Manager, it appears in the grid
multiple times—once for each Manager it is associated with. To help you work more efficiently with a
long list of Groups, the Refine Results pane lets you apply filters to the Groups grid to reduce the
number of Groups it shows.
When you select options in the Refine Results pane, the grid refreshes to show only those items that
match the refinement options you have selected. The other items in the grid are still there; however,
they are hidden. To restore them, simply click the Reset button or select All in the refinement lists
you are using.
The following table explains how to use the Refine Results form.
Field
Description
Reset
Click Reset to return the form and the Groups grid to their default settings.
Search
Use this field to perform keyword searches for specific Groups. To search,
type the text you want to search for in the text box. The grid displays only
those Groups that match or include the text you entered.
Type
Select the type of the Group you want to work with (Tool Profile, UserDefined Group, Time of Day Set, etc.) to have the grid display only Groups
of that type.
Manager
Select a Manager to have the grid display only the Groups that are
associated with that Manager.
Created By
Select the name of the Console user who created the Group to have the
grid display only Groups from that user.
Created Date
Range
Type or select a date range to have the grid display only Groups that were
created on or within that date range.
Modified By
Select the name of the Console user who last modified the Group to have
the grid display only Groups modified by that user.
Modified Date
Range
Type or select a date range to have the grid display only Groups that were
modified on or within that date range.
215
Managing Groups
The topics in this section explain how to create and manage Groups. It includes procedures on
performing the following tasks:
l
adding a new Group
l
editing a Group
l
cloning a Group
l
importing a Group
l
exporting a Group
l
deleting a Group.
Adding a new Group
1. Open the Build ► Groups view.
and then click the Group type you want to create. For a
2. In the Groups grid, click
description of each Group type option, see the "Group types" on page 210.
The Group Details pane opens to show an editable form for the Group type you have
selected.
3. In the Name box, type a name for Group.
4. In the Description box, type a brief description of the Group and its intended use.
5. In the Manager list, select the Manager on which the Group is to reside.
6. Complete the rest of the form to configure the Group. For instructions on configuring a particular Group, see the following topics:
l
See "Configuring Alert Groups" on page 221.
l
See "Configuring Directory Services Groups" on page 225.
l
See "Configuring Email Templates" on page 230.
l
See "Configuring State Variables" on page 233.
l
See "Configuring Time of Day Sets" on page 238.
l
See "Configuring Tool Profiles" on page 241.
l
See "Configuring User-Defined Groups" on page 249.
The new Group appears in the Groups grid.
216
Editing a Group
Editing a Group
Editing a Group is very much like creating a new one. The only difference is that you are reconfiguring
an existing item.
To edit a Group:
2. In the Groups grid, do one of the following:
l
Double-click the Group you want to edit.
l
Click the gear
button for the Group you want to edit and click Edit.
The Edit pane opens as an editable form, showing the selected Group’s current configuration.
3. Make any necessary changes to the Edit form to reconfigure the Group.
The revised Group is applied to the Manager and appears in the Groups grid.
217
Cloning a Group
Cloning a Group lets you copy an existing Group, but save it with a new name. Cloning allows you to
quickly create variations on existing Groups for use with your rules, filters, and Agents.
Cloned Groups must be for the same Manager as the original Group. That is, you cannot clone a
Group from one Manager for use with another Manager.
To clone a Group:
2. In the Groups grid, click to select the Group you want to clone.
The newly cloned Group appears in the Groups grid in the row just below the original Group.
A clone always uses the same name as the Group it was cloned from, followed by the word
Clone. For example, a clone of the Disk Warning Group would be called Disk Warning
Clone. A second clone of the Disk Warning Group would be called Disk Warning Clone 2,
and so on.
4. Edit the cloned Group, as needed, to give it its own name and to assign its own specific settings.
218
Importing a Group
Importing a Group
You can import Groups from a remote source into the Groups grid. You can import a Group that you
have exported from another Manager, or you can import Groups that are provided by TriGeo Network
Security. You may import only one Group at a time.
To import a Group:
2. On the Groups grid toolbar, click the gear
button and then click Import.
The Open form appears.
3. In the Look In box, browse to the folder that contains the Group file you want to import.
l
Double-click the file to open it.
l
Click to select the file you want to import, and then click Open.
The Group appears in the Groups grid and in the Group Details form for editing.
5. In the Group Details form, select the Manager this Group is to be assigned to.
6. Make any other desired changes in the Group Details form.
7. Click Save to send the Group to the Manager.
8. If you are working with Email Templates or State Variables, drag the new Group from the
Groups grid into the folder (in the Folders pane) that is to store the Group.
219
Exporting a Group
When needed, you can export Groups. Exporting Groups is useful for three reasons:
l
Once exported, you can import the Group into another Manager.
l
You can save a copy off of the Manager for any reason.
l
You can provide TriGeo Network Security with a copy of your Group for technical support or
troubleshooting purposes.
You may export only one Group at a time.
To export a Group:
2. In the Groups grid, click to select the Group you want to export.
button and then click Export.
4. After a moment, the Save As form appears.
5. Use the Save As form to select the folder in which you want to save the exported Group.
6. In the File name box, type a name for the exported Group.
7. Click Save to export and save the Group; otherwise, click Cancel.
You can now import the Group for use with another Manager. For the import procedure, see
"Importing a Group" on page 219.
Deleting a Group
When needed, you can delete any of your Groups.
To delete a Group:
2. In the Groups grid, select the Group you want to delete.
button and then click Delete.
4. At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to delete the Group.
The item disappears from the Groups grid.
220
Whenever you create or edit an Alert Group, the Build ► Groups view’s Edit pane opens and
becomes the Alert Group form. The Alert Group form lets you create custom families of alerts that
you can save as a Group. You can then associate the Alert Group with your rules and filters.
For example, you might create an Alert Group made up of similar alerts that all need to trigger the
same response from the Console. When you apply the Alert Group to a rule, the Console implements
the rule when any one of the alerts in the Group occurs.
Each Alert Group you create only applies to the Manager that is selected when you create the Group.
If you need a similar Alert Group for a different Manager, you must create it separately for the other
Manager.
Configuring an Alert Group
2. On the Groups grid, click
and then click Alert Group.
The Edit pane opens, showing the Alert Group form.
3. In the Name box, type a name for the new Alert Group.
4. In the Description box, type a brief description of the Alert Group’s contents.
5. In the Manager list, select the Manager on which this Group is to reside. If you are editing an
existing Group, this field shows the Manager on which it resides.
Now you will configure the Alert Group by selecting the alerts you want in the Group.
The Alerts box lists alerts in a hierarchical tree. You may need to open the nodes in the alert
tree to see the alert you are looking for. For complete information on alerts, see "Types of
alerts" on page 493.
221
6. In the Alerts list, select each alert that you want to include in this Group.
l
To choose an alert, click its check box.
l
To remove an alert, clear its check box.
Note: In the node-tree view, you can Ctrl+Click to select (or clear) an alert and all of the alerts
below that item (that is, its child alerts). For example, press Ctrl and click Security Alert to
select Security Alert and all of its child alerts.
See the following topic to learn about each feature in the Alerts list.
7. Click Save.
The new Alert Group appears in the Groups grid.
222
Alert list features
Alert list features
The following table explains how to use each feature of the Alerts list.
Icon
Description
Click this button to display the Alerts list as a hierarchical node tree. Then use the
list to select each alert type that you want to include in this Group. This is the default
view.
This view also has the following attributes:
l
l
l
l
The node tree displays alerts types with the same hierarchy they have in
"Types of alerts" on page 493.
Lower-level alert types are hidden by nodes in the alert tree. To open a node,
click the ► icon. This displays the node’s next level of alerts.
Using the search box displays the alert and its parent alert types, so you can
see how the alert appears in the alert hierarchy.
You can Ctrl+Click to select (or clear) an alert and all of the alerts below that
item (that is, its child alerts). For example, if you press Ctrl and click Security
Alert, you will select Security Alert and all of its child alerts.
Click this button to list alert types alphabetically, regardless of their position in the
hierarchy. Then use the list to select each alert type that you want to include in this
Group.
You can use this box to search either view of the Alerts list. To do so, simply type a
word or phrase in the text box. The Alerts list will refresh to show any alerts that
include your word or phrase.
►
This icon represents a closed (or collapsed) alert node in the alert tree hierarchy.
Each time you see this icon, it means the alert node contains lower-level alerts.
To open a node, click it. Opening the node expands the alert tree, displaying the next
level of related alerts. For a complete description of alerts, see "Types of alerts" on
page 493.
▼
This icon represents an open (or expanded) alert node in the alert tree hierarchy.
Each time you see this icon, the node is displaying its related lower-level alerts.
To close (or collapse) the node, click it. This collapses the alert tree at that level,
hiding its lower-level alerts.
This item has not been selected; nor have any of its lower-level items.
This item has been selected; but not any of its lower-level items.
223
Icon
Description
This item has not been selected, but one or more if its lower-level items has been
selected.
This item has been selected, and so have one or more of its lower-level items.
224
Many companies use a directory service, such as Active Directory, to organize and administer their
network’s computers and system users. This computer and user information is organized into
Directory Service Groups (or more simply, DS Groups) that are managed with the directory service.
If you use such a directory service, you can connect the TriGeo SIM to the server that stores your
existing DS Groups, synchronize your Groups with the TriGeo SIM, and apply your Groups to your
TriGeo rules and filters.
Once your directory service is connected, your DS Groups become seamlessly integrated with the
TriGeo SIM. Whenever you make a change to a Group in the directory service, TriGeo automatically
updates your rules and filters to reflect the change.
The topics in this section explain how to retrieve and synchronize information from your directory
service for use with the TriGeo SIM.
How to use Directory Services Groups
DS Groups allow you to match, include, or exclude events to specific users or computers based on
their Group membership, to determine if a particular alert event is relevant or not.
In most cases, DS Groups are used in rules and filters as a type of white list or blacklist for choosing
which users or computers to include or to ignore. When used by a filter, a DS Group lets you limit the
scope of the alerts included in the filter to those users or computers that have membership in a
particular Group.
For example, you may want to use a DS Group that you created in your directory services that
contains the names of high-risk network users. You can then refer to this Group in a rule or filter. For
instance, your rule may dictate to always disable these users if you detect malicious activity.
225
This procedure explains how to retrieve Group data from your directory service and select which DS
Groups are to be synchronized with the TriGeo SIM. This procedure ensures that you capture the
most current information from any Groups that are not currently synchronized with the TriGeo SIM.
You can also use this procedure to remove DS Groups that no longer require synchronization.
Note: To use DS Groups, first make sure the Directory Service Query Tool is configured and running
on the TriGeo SIM Manager for which you want to use DS Groups. For more information, see
"Connecting products to the TriGeo SIM" on page 347.
DS Groups only apply to Managers that are connected to them. If you need a similar DS Group for
another Manager, you must connect to the directory service with the other Manager.
To retrieve DS Group data from your directory service:
2. On the Groups grid, click
and then click Directory Services Group.
The Select Directory Services Group form appears. You will use this form to select which
directory service Groups you want to synchronize for use with the TriGeo SIM.
3. In the Manager list (the upper-right drop-down list), select the Manager that is going to use the
DS Groups.
4. In the other drop-down list, select the directory services domain you want to work with.
The form displays the actual contents (folders and Group categories) of your directory service
system:
l
l
Each folder to the left contains the Group categories that are associated with that area
of your directory service. You can click a folder node (►) to display the Group categories contained within that folder.
The Available Groups box lists a different set of Group categories with each folder
226
you select. For example, clicking the Users folder shows a different set of Group
categories than if you click the Laptops folder.
5. In the folder list, click the Group category you want to work with.
6. In the Available Groups list, do the following:
l
Click the check box for each Group you want to synchronize with the TriGeo SIM.
l
Clear the check box for each Group you want to remove from synchronization.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until you have selected all of the DS Groups you want synchronized
with the TriGeo SIM.
8. Click Save.
The system synchronizes the DS Groups to the TriGeo SIM and adds them to the Groups
grid. The DS Groups are now ready for use with your rules and filters.
227
Viewing a Directory Services Group members
The Groups grid shows each DS Group that is synchronized with the TriGeo SIM. When you select a
DS Group in the Groups grid, the Directory Service Groups pane appears to show the members of
that DS Group.
To view a DS Group:
2. In the Groups grid, select the DS Group you want to view.
The Edit pane opens, showing the Directory Services Group form. The form displays the
contents of the Group, as shown here.
228
The grid in the Directory Services Group form provides information on each specific computer
account and user account that is currently associated with the DS Group. The following table
describes the meaning of each grid column.
Column
Description
Type
Displays an icon that shows if the group member is a User or
a Computer. The computer icon represents a computer
account. The person icon represents a user account.
Name
Displays the display name of the group member.
Description
Displays the description associated with the group member in
directory services.
SAM Name
Displays the account name of the member.
Principal Name
Displays the principal name of the member.
Distinguish Name Date
Displays the complete distinguished name of the member.
Email
Displays the email address of the member.
Deleting DS Groups
You can delete DS Groups from the Console, just as you would any other Group. Deleting a DS
Group does not remove the Group from your original directory service. You can restore a DS Group at
any time if you ever need to use it again. For the procedure, see "Deleting a Group" on page 220.
229
Configuring Email Templates
Email templates allow you to create pre-formatted email messages that rules can use to notify you of
an alert event. These templates become available in the Actions component list, whenever you drag
Send Email Message or Send Pager Message to the Actions box. You will then be prompted to fill
in the message variables from the Alerts or Alert Groups lists.
You create and manage templates in the Build ► Groups view’s Email Template form. As with
rules, you can add, edit, clone, and delete templates, and you can organize them in folders.
Step 1: Creating the email template
This section describes how to create the actual email template. Email templates allow you to report
specific information about an alert event, because you can include variables that capture specific
parameters about that event. For example, you can report which server is affected, what time the
event occurred, or which Agent was shut down. The possibilities for message templates are endless.
To create an email template:
l
To add a new email template, click
and then click Email Template.
l
Double-click the email template you want to edit.
The Email Template form appear. If you are editing an existing template, the form shows any
parameters that have already been configured for the template.
3. In the Manager list, select the Manager on which this template resides. If you are editing an
existing template, this field shows the Manager this template is associated with.
230
4. In the Name box, type a name for the template. This should be a name that makes it easy to
identify the type of event that has occurred, or where or to whom the email message is going.
5. In the From box, type whom the message is from. Typically, this is “TriGeo” or “TriGeo Manager.”
6. In the Subject line, type a subject for the message. Typically, you will want a subject that indicates the nature of the alert event.
7. Click Save to save the template.
In the Parameters list, you will add variables that are placeholders for specific items within the
message text. When the Manager sends the message, it will complete the message by filling in the
variable parameters with the appropriate text. You can add as many parameters as you like.
For example, you may want a message to tell you which Agent or server was affected. Or you may
want to know the time the event occurred. So you can create a variables for Agents, servers, or time.
In the previous example, there are parameters for the server and for the destination computer.
If you add too many or unnecessary parameters, you can easily delete the ones you don’t need.
To add message parameters:
1. In the Name box, type the name of the parameter you want to capture in the email message.
2. Click the Add
button.
The new parameter appears in the Parameters list.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each parameter you want to capture in this message.
4. Click Save so save your changes to the template.
231
To delete a parameter:
1. In the Parameters list, select the parameter you want to delete.
2. Click the Delete
button.
3. The parameter disappears from the Parameters list.
4. Click Save to permanently delete the parameter.
Step 3: Creating the message
Now, in the Message box, you will create the actual text of the email message.
To create an email template message:
1. In the Message box, type the email message that the Manager is to send when an event
occurs, like in the example shown here.
2. In the Parameters list, select a parameter. Then drag it to the appropriate spot in the message
text. The parameters serve as placeholders for information that the Manager will fill in.
3. Repeat Step 2 for each parameter.
4. When you have finished with the template, click Save.
The new template appears in Groups grid.
Managing email template folders
As with rules and State Variables, you can use the Folders pane to organize your email templates
into folders and sub-folders. You can add, rename, move, and delete template folders. For instruction
on performing these tasks, see "Working with Group folders" on page 254.
232
You can use the Groups grid to add, edit, and delete State Variables and the number, text, and time
fields associated with each State Variable.
State Variables are used in rules. They represent temporary or transitional states. For example, you
can create a State Variable to track the “state” of a particular system, setting it to a different value
depending on whether the system comes online or goes offline.
You can also configure rules to monitor the contents of a State Variable to validate or invalidate a rule.
For example, you can set a DEFCON value and ensure that the DEFCON value is over 3 before
notifying on-call staff.
The procedures in this section explain how to do the following:
l
How to add and configure a new State Variable
l
How to edit an existing State Variable field
l
How to delete a State Variable field.
Note: If you require permanent lists of data that can be preserved over long periods of time, you can
use User-Defined Groups in a similar manner. For more information, see "Configuring User-Defined
Adding new State Variable fields
l
To add a new State Variable, click
and then click State Variable.
l
Double-click the State Variable you want to edit.
l
Click the gear
icon for the State Variable you want to edit, and then click Edit.
The State Variables pane opens as an editable form. If you are editing an existing State
Variable, the form shows any fields that have already been configured.
233
3. In the Name box, type a name for the State Variable.
4. In the Manager list, select the Manager on which this State Variable is to reside. If you are
editing an existing Group, this field shows the Manager on which it resides.
Now you will add the State Variable fields that make up the Group. Adding State Variable
fields is a straightforward process. You simply name the field, and then select what the
variable represents—text, a number, or time.
5. Click the Add
button.
The Add Variable Field form becomes active.
6. In the Name box, type a name for the State Variable field.
7. In the Type list, select the type of State Variable the field represents—Text, Number, or
Time.
8. Click the left Save button to save the field; otherwise, click Cancel.
The new State Variable field appears in the State Variables grid, showing the field’s name and
comparison type.
9. Repeat Steps 5–8 for each field you want to add to the State Variable.
10. Click the rightmost Save button to save the State Variable settings.
The new State Variable appears in the Groups grid and the Rule Builder’s State Variables
list. You can now incorporate this State Variable whenever you add or edit a rule.
234
2. In the Groups grid, do either of the following:
l
l
Click the gear
The State Variables pane opens as an editable form.
3. In the fields grid, select the State Variable field you want to edit.
The Add Variable Field form becomes active, showing the field’s current configuration.
4. Make the necessary changes to the field’s Name or Type.
5. Click the form’s Save button to apply your changes to the field.
The updated field appears in the fields grid.
6. Click the rightmost Save button to save your changes to the State Variable.
235
Deleting State Variable fields
l
l
Click the gear
The State Variables pane opens as an editable form.
3. In the fields grid, select the field you want to delete.
4. Click the Delete
button.
The field disappears from the fields grid.
5. Click Save to save the changes to the State Variable.
236
As with rules and email templates, you can use the Folders pane to organize your State Variables
into folders and sub-folders. You can add, rename, move, and delete State Variable folders. For
instruction on performing these tasks, see "Working with Group folders" on page 254.
237
Configuring Time of Day Sets
Time of Day Sets are Groups of hours that you can associate with rules and filters. Time of Day Sets
allow your rules and filters to take different actions at different times of day.
For example, if you define two different Time of Day Sets for “Business Hours” and “Outside
Business Hours,” you can assign different rules to each of these Time of Day Sets. For instance, you
may want your rules to alert your system administrator via email and pager during working hours.
Outside of business hours, you may want your rules to alert your administrator by pager only, and
automatically shut down the offending PC.
You can easily create as many Time of Day Sets as you needed, to reflect all of your business needs.
A well-planned group of Time of Day Sets provides you with versatile and responsive rules that
perform the way you want, when you want.
Each Time of Day Set you create only applies to the Manager that is selected when you create it. If
you need a similar Time of Day Set for another Manager, then you must create it separately with that
other Manager.
l
To add a new Time of Day Set, click
and then click Time of Day Set.
l
Double-click the Time of Day Set you want to edit.
The Edit pane opens, showing the Time of Day Set form.
3. In the Name box, type a name for the new Time of Day Set.
4. In the Description box, type a brief description of the Time of Day Set and its intended use.
5. In the Manager list, select the Manager on which this Time of Day Set is to reside. If you are
editing an existing Group, this field shows the Manager on which it resides.
238
The form has a time grid that lets you define a Time of Day Set for the Manager. The time grid
is based on a one-week period, and is organized as follows:
l
l
l
It has seven rows, where each row represents one day of the week.
It has 24 numbered columns, where each column represents one hour of the day. The
white column headers represent morning hours (midnight to noon). The shaded column
headers represent evening hours (noon to midnight).
Each column has two check boxes that divide each hour into two half-hour (30-minute)
periods.
Together, the rows, columns, and check boxes divide an entire week into 30-minute periods.
6. In the time grid, click to select the half-hour periods that are to define this Time of Day Set. For
assistance, see the table in the topic, below.
7. Click Save.
The new Time of Day Set appears in the Groups grid.
239
Selecting periods in the time grid
The following table explains how to select periods in the Time of Day Sets time grid.
To
Do this
Select a period
Click an individual check box to select that period.
Select a group of
periods
Click and drag to select a range of periods. You can drag up, down, or
diagonally.
Delete a selected
period
Click the check box to clear that selection. You can also click and
drag over a range of selected periods to clear those selections.
240
Most Agents in a network have only a few different tool configurations. Because of this, the Group
Builder lets you to group Agents that share the same tool configurations into Tool Profiles. Once you
define a Tool Profile, your rules and filters can use it to include or exclude the Agents associated with
that profile.
You can create as many Tool Profiles as you need to reflect each of your common network security
tool configurations. For example, you might set up a standard user workstation profile, a web sever
profile, etc. TriGeo provides several default Tool Profiles that address common configurations.
One of the great benefits of using Tool Profiles is that you can maintain all of the Agents in a profile at
once by updating only the Tool Profile’s tool configuration. The Group Builder then propagates your
changes to all of the Agents in the profile.
A well-planned set of Tool Profiles provides you with a versatile and efficient method to update and
maintain your Agents’ tool configurations.
Tool Profile rules
l
l
An Agent can only be a member of one Tool Profile. It cannot be in multiple profiles.
Each Tool Profile you create only applies to the Manager that is selected when you create it. If
you need a similar Tool Profile for another Manager, you must create it separately for the other
Manager.
241
Creating a Tool Profile (general procedure)
Tool Profiles are created in the Build ► Groups view. Creating a Tool Profile is a two-step process:
1. Select the Agent that is to act as a template for the profile.
2. Add the Agents that are to be members of the profile.
Upon saving, the system applies the template Agent’s tool configuration to every other Agent
that you added to the profile.
When you select an Agent for use as a template, select one that has a very similar tool configuration
to how you want profile’s final tool configuration to look.
One trick is to prepare a template Agent in advance, by manually configuring an Agent that you know
will be a member of the new profile. Edit its tools to get them exactly how you want them. Then use
the Agent as the template for the new profile. This minimizes your need to edit the profile’s tool
configuration later on.
The complete procedure for creating at Tool Profile is given below.
Step 1: Selecting a template for the profile
In this procedure, you will create, name, describe, and select a template for the new Tool Profile.
To create a Tool Profile:
2. On the Groups grid toolbar, click
and then click Tool Profile.
The Tool Profile form appears.
3. In the Name box, type a name for the Tool Profile.
4. In the Description box, type a brief description of the Tool Profile and its intended use.
5. In the Manager list, select the Manager on which this Tool Profile is to reside. If you are editing
242
an existing Group, this field shows the Manager on which its resides.
Note: If the Manager you want is not listed, go to Manage ► Appliances and log on to that
Manager. You must be logged on to a Manager before you can create Groups for it.
6. In the Template list, select the Agent with the tool configuration this profile is to be based on.
If you do not want to use a template, select None.
Note: For best results, always select a template when creating a new Tool Profile. Otherwise,
the profile will delete the tools on every Agent in the profile.
If you do not want to use a template, then be sure click Edit Tools and add tools to the profile
before you add Agents and save the profile. If you do not, there will be no tools in the profile;
and upon saving, any Agents in that profile will have their tools deleted.
7. Click Save.
The new Tool Profile appears in the Groups grid.
Now you will select the Agents that are to be members of the Tool Profile. These Agents will be
governed by the Tool Profile’s tool configuration.
The Tool Profile form contains two list boxes. The Available Agents box lists each Agent that is
associated with the Manager but is not in the Tool Profile. The Selected Agents box lists those
Agents that are in the Tool Profile.
To add Agents to a Tool Profile:
1. In the Groups grid, locate the new Tool Profile you just created.
2. Double-click the Tool Profile to re-open it.
The profile appears in the Tool Profile form. As you can see, the Agent you selected as a
template appears in the Selected Agents list, by default.
3. In the Available Agents list, select an Agent that you want to add to the Tool Profile. Or, in
the Selected Agents list, select an Agent that you want to remove from the Tool Profile.
4. Use the appropriate arrow button to add or remove Agents to or from the profile, as described
in the following table.
Button
Function
Moves the selected Agent from the Available Agents list to the Selected
Agents list (and into the profile).
Moves all Agents from the Available Agents list to the Selected Agents list
(and into the profile).
243
Button
Function
Removes the selected Agent from the Selected Agents list to the Available
Agents list (and out of the profile).
Removes all Agents from the Selected Agents list to the Available Agents
list (and out of the profile).
5. Click Save to save the Tool Profile.
Upon saving, the system applies the template Agent’s tool configuration to every other Agent
that you added to the profile.
Note: If you remove an Agent from a Tool Profile (that was previously saved with that profile),
the Agent retains the profile's tool configuration, but will no longer have membership in the
profile.
Troubleshooting tip
At times, not all of the Agents in a Tool Profile will use the same logging path for a particular tool. You
can verify this by checking the Agent’s configured tool status. If a tool has a status of
(Not
Running), it is likely that tool has a different logging path.
To correct this problem, you may want to add another tool instance to the profile’s tool catalog that
points to the alternative logging path. Or, you can create a new profile that has the alternative logging
path.
244
When editing a Tool Profile, you can use the Tool Profile form’s Edit Tools command to add, edit, or
delete the tool instances associated with the profile. When doing this, be aware that when you
change a Tool Profile, you change the tool configuration of every Agent that is associated with that
Tool Profile.
When editing an individual Agent, you have to stop and start each tool instance, because you are
making direct changes to the running configuration of the Agent. But when editing a Tool Profile’s tool
configuration, you do not need to stop or start each tool instances. However, you must still activate
the changes.
This difference is because any time you edit a Tool Profile’s tool configuration, you are working on the
profile’s configuration data, not an actual Agent. When editing a Tool Profile, you do not actually
change the Agents that are members of the profile until you click Activate. Upon activating, the
system automatically sends the changes out to every Agent that is a member of that profile, stops
each tool instance, makes the changes, and then restarts each tool instance.
Opening a Tool Profile’s tool settings
2. In the Groups grid, locate the Tool Profile you want to edit.
l
Double-click the Tool Profile you want to edit.
l
Click the gear
The Tool Profile pane opens, showing the Agents that are in the profile.
4. At the bottom of the Tool Profile pane, form, click Edit Tools.
The Tool Configuration for [Tool Profile] form appears. The form’s Tools grid contains all
of the tool instances that define the Tool Profile.
245
Adding a new tool instance
1. On the Tools grid, select the tool you want to configure.
2. Click New.
3. In the Properties form, update the tool settings, as needed:
l
l
l
To configure a sensor that will gather data from the product’s event log data, see "Configuring sensors" on page 365.
To configure an actor that will allow the Manager to perform active responses, see "Configuring actors" on page 368.
To configure a notification setting that will allow the Manager to notify users of alert
events via email, see "Setting up a notification system" on page 371.
4. Click Save.
l
Click Activate to apply your changes to every Agent associated with the Tool Profile.
l
Click Discard to discard your changes and reload the tools’ previous configuration.
6. Click Close to return to the Groups grid.
246
1. In the Tools grid, select the tool instance you want to edit.
l
l
l
4. Click Save.
l
l
At times, not all of the Agents in a profile will use the same logging path for a particular tool.
You can verify this by checking the Agent’s configured tool status. If a tool has a status of
(Not Running), it is likely that tool has a different logging path.
To correct this problem, you may want to add another tool instance to the profile’s tool catalog
that points to the alternative logging path. Or, you can create a new profile that has the
alternative logging path.
6. Repeat this procedure for each tool instance you want to reconfigure.
247
Deleting a tool instance from a Tool Profile
1. In the Tools grid, click to select the tool instance you want to delete.
2. Click the gear
l
l
248
User-Defined Groups are groups of preferences that are used in rules and filters. User-Defined
Groups allow you to match, include, or exclude events, information, or data fields based on their
membership in a particular Group.
This section includes examples of User-Defined Groups, as well as the procedures for performing the
following tasks:
l
l
Configuring data elements for a User-Defined Group
l
Editing an existing data element in a User-Defined Group
l
Deleting a data element from a User-Defined Group.
249
Examples of User-Defined Groups
In most cases, User-Defined Groups are used as a type of white list or blacklist for choosing which
events to include or to ignore. When used by a filter, a User-Defined Group lets you limit the scope of
the alerts included in the filter to those items that have membership in a particular Group.
Each User-Defined Group is made up of one or more elements that define the Group. The elements
can be almost anything: IP addresses, user names, email addresses, web site URLs, etc. Because
of their versatility, the possibilities of User-Defined Groups are almost endless.
For example, you may want to create a Group of trusted IP addresses that you can use in rules and
filters. You can then refer to this Group in a rule. For instance, your rule may dictate to never block
these IP addresses.
Or you may want to create a Group of trusted accounts for the local administrator. You could then
format your rules so that they never block these accounts. Or, because these accounts are trusted,
you may want to watch them more carefully so that you are notified whenever they log on or make
changes.
You can create as many User-Defined Groups as you need to reflect all of your different rule and
filtering needs. Well-planned User-Defined Groups can provide you with the precise feedback active
responses you need to manage and maintain your network security.
Each User-Defined Group you create only applies to the Manager that is selected when you create it.
If you need a similar User-Defined Group for another Manager, then you must create it separately with
that other Manager.
250
l
To add a new User-Defined Group, click
and then click User-Defined Group.
l
Double-click the User-Defined Group you want to edit.
The Edit pane opens, showing the User-Defined Group form. If you are editing an existing
User-Defined Group, the form shows any parameters that have already been configured for the
Group.
3. In the Name box, type a name for the Group.
4. In the Description box, type a brief description of the Group and its intended use.
5. In the Manager list, select the Manager on which this Group resides. If you are editing an existing Group, this field shows the Manager on which it resides.
6. Make any necessary additions, changes, or deletions to the Group’s Element Details grid, as
described below in "Adding data elements to a User-Defined Group."
7. Click Save to save your changes to the User-Defined Group.
251
Adding data elements to a User-Defined Group
Once you have created a User-Defined Group, you can add the data elements that make up the
Group.
To add a User-Defined Group’s data elements:
2. In the Groups grid, double-click the User-Defined Group you want to work with.
The Edit pane opens, showing the Group’s current configuration.
3. At the bottom of the Edit pane, click the Add
button.
The Element Details form becomes active.
4. Complete the Element Details form as described in the following table.
Field
Description
Name
Type a name for the data element.
Data
Type the specific data element that you want to include or ignore in your
rules and filters. You can use an asterisk ( * ) as a wildcard to include all
similar data elements.
Description
Type a detailed description of the data element and its intended use, if
appropriate.
In this example, the data elements are a list of anti-virus firewall processes.
5. Click Save.
The new element appears in the data element grid. Note that the table displays each element’s
name, data element, and description.
6. Repeat Steps 3–5 for each data element you want to add to the Group.
252
3. In the form’s data element grid, select the data element you want to edit.
The Element Details form displays the data element’s current configuration.
4. Make the necessary changes to the Element Details form.
5. Click Save to save your changes to the Group.
The revised data element appears in the data element grid.
Deleting a data element from a User-Defined Group
3. In the form’s data element grid, select the data element you want to delete.
4. Click the Delete
button.
The element is removed from the Group’s data element grid.
5. Click Save to save the changes to the Group.
253
Working with Group folders
In the Build ► Groups view, the Folders pane lets you categorize
and organize your State Variables and Email Templates.
The Folders pane behaves just like the folders in an operating
system. You can create folders and sub-folders, and you can move,
rename, and delete folders.
The topics in this section explain how to manage your Group folders.
Note: The Folders pane is disabled whenever you are working with a
Group that does not support folders.
Default Group folders
The Folders pane for Email Templates and State Variables both have their own sets of default
folders.
Default Email Template folders
In the Build ► Groups view, the Folders pane has two fixed top-level Email Templates folders.
Each folder contains the Email Templates that are currently configured for its corresponding Group
list.
l
l
The Email Templates folder contains your own custom Email Templates and allows you to
organize them into your own custom set of sub-folders.
The NATO5 Templates folder contains TriGeo's predefined Email Templates. TriGeo provides these through automatic or manual updates.
To help ensure that you can always go back to a secure starting point, TriGeo recommends that you
do not edit the templates in the NATO5 Templates folder. Instead, you can clone a copy of any of
these pre-defined templates and then store the cloned copy in a custom Email Templates folder.
You may then edit the cloned copy as you see fit.
Default State Variable folders
l
The State Variables folder contains your own custom State Variables and allows you to organize them into your own custom set of sub-folders
254
In the Build ► Groups view, the Folders pane is organized as a hierarchical node tree of folders and
sub-folders. By default, the tree is collapsed, showing only the top level of folders. This procedure
explains how to show and hide the pane’s sub-folders.
To open (expand) a folder to see its sub-folders:
l
Click a folder with an ► icon to open a folder and show its first level of sub-folders.
To close (collapse) a folder to hide its sub-folders:
l
Click a folder with an ▼ icon to close the folder and hide its sub-folders.
Showing the contents of a Group folder
Select a Group folder in the Folders pane to display the contents of that folder and its sub-folders in
the grid.
To view the contents of a State Variable folder:
By default, the Groups grid lists all of your Groups.
l
l
In the Groups grid, select a State Variable.
In the Refine Results form’s Type list, select State Variable. Then, in the Groups
grid, select a State Variable.
The Folders pane becomes active, expanding and highlighting the folder that is associated
with the State Variable you selected in the Groups grid. The Groups grid also lists any other
State Variables that are stored in the same folder or any of its sub-folders.
3. View the relationship between a State Variable and its folder as follows:
l
l
In the Folders pane, click a folder to have the Groups grid display the State Variables
stored within that folder and any of its sub-folders.
In the Groups grid, click a State Variable. The Folders pane then highlights the folder
that variable is stored in.
255
To view the contents of an Email Template folder:
By default, the Groups grid lists all of your Groups.
l
l
In the Groups grid, select an Email Template.
In the Refine Results form’s Type list, select Email Template. Then, in the Groups
grid, select an Email Template.
The Folders pane becomes active, expanding and highlighting the folder that is associated
with the template you selected in the Groups grid. The Groups grid also lists any other
templates that are stored in the same folder or any of its sub-folders.
3. View the relationship between an Email Template and its folder as follows:
l
l
In the Folders pane, click a folder to have the Groups grid display the Email Templates
stored within that folder and any of its sub-folders.
In the Groups grid, click an Email Template. The Folders pane then highlights the
folder that template is stored in, as shown here.
256
Whenever needed, you can add new Group folders and sub-folders to the Folders pane. This allows
you to organize your State Variables and Email Templates in a manner that makes them easy to
organize and identify.
To add a new Group folder:
2. In the Refine Results form’s Type list, select or Email Template or State Variable, as
appropriate for the Group for which you are creating a folder.
The Groups grid list the Groups associated with the Group type you selected.
3. In the Groups grid, click a Group name to activate the appropriate Folders pane.
4. In the Folders pane, select the folder for which you want to create a sub-folder. If needed,
click the folder’s ► icon to view the folder’s sub-folders, if present.
5. Click the
button at the bottom of the Folders pane.
A new sub-folder appears with the default name of folder.
6. Double-click the new folder.
The folder becomes highlighted and its name is surrounded by an editable box.
7. Type a name for the new folder, and then press Enter.
You may now store items in the new folder.
Renaming a Group folder
When needed, you can rename your own custom Group folders in the Folders pane. However, you
may not rename any of the Console’s preconfigured folders.
To rename a folder:
2. In the Folders pane, double-click the folder you want to rename.
A box appears around the folder, and its name becomes editable.
3. Type a new name for the folder, and then press Enter.
The folder appears in the Folders pane with its new name.
257
Moving Group folders
When needed, you can rearrange Group folders by moving them around. However, all of the folders
must be of the same Group type. For example, you can move a State Variable folder to another other
State Variable folder or sub-folder. But you cannot move a State Variable folder to an Email Template
folder or sub-folder. Moving a folder moves the entire contents of that folder, including any of its subfolders.
To move a Group folder:
2. In the Folders pane, select the folder that is to be the new parent of the folder you want to
move.
3. Click the folder’s ► icon to open the folder and view its sub-folders.
4. Now select the folder you want to move, and then drag and drop it just below its new parent
folder. When the pointer is in the correct position, a black line will appear below the parent
folder.
The folder you moved now appears with its new parent folder.
258
You can use the Folders pane and the Groups grid to move State Variables and Email Templates
from one folder to another.
Moving Groups has the following restrictions:
l
l
l
Pre-configured TriGeo Group folders cannot be moved. However, you can clone copies of
these Groups and then place the copies in your custom folders.
You may only move Groups into folders that are associated with the same Manager as the
Groups you are moving. All other folders are disabled.
When moving a Group, you must move it to a folder for the same type of item. For example,
you cannot move an Email Template to a State Variable folder, or vice versa. However, you
can move an Email Template from one Email Template folder to another.
To move a Group from one template to another:
2. In the Folders pane, click the folder that contains the State Variable or Email Template you
want to move.
The Groups grid displays the items that make up the contents of that folder.
3. In the Groups grid, select the Variable or Email Template you want to move. Then drag it to
the Folders pane and drop it in the folder you want to move it to.
By default, the Folders pane shows an expanded folder tree. This allows you to easily select a
new folder for the item you are moving. Only those folders that are associated with the same
Manager as the State Variable or Email Template are moving are available.
In the Folders pane, the Variable or Email Template now appears in the new folder.
259
Deleting a Group folder
When needed, you can delete a Group folder. However, doing so also deletes the contents of the
folder, including any sub-folders. So be sure to move or archive any State Variables or Email
Templates you want to save before deleting a folder.
To delete a folder:
2. In the Folders pane, click to select the folder or sub-folder you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete
button.
4. At the Confirm Delete prompt, click Yes to delete the folder; otherwise, click No.
The folder and its sub-folders disappear from the Folders pane.
260
About rules
The Console’s Build ► Rules view is used to create, configure, and manage your rules. Rules are
used to monitor and respond to alert traffic. They allow you to automatically notify or respond to
security events in real time, whether you are monitoring the Console or not. When an alert (or a series
of alerts) meets a rule's conditions, the rule automatically prompts the Manager to take action, such
as notifying the appropriate users, or performing a particular active response (such as blocking the IP
address or stopping a particular process).
The Console ships with a set of preconfigured rules that you can begin using immediately. However,
you can use the view's Rule Creation tool to create your own custom rules and your own variations
on any existing rules.
Note: Each rule you create only applies to the Manager that is selected when you created the rule. If
you need a similar rule for another Manager, you must create it separately on the other Manager; or
you can export the rule, and then import it from the other Manager’s Rules grid.
261
Rules view features
This topic describes the key features of the Rules view and the Rules grid, and explains how to
refine the Rules grid.
Rules view features
The Rules view
The following table describes the key features of the Build ► Rules view.
Item
Name
Description
Sidebar
Click this button to alternately hide and show the Refine Results and
Folders panes.
262
Rules view features
Item
Name
Description
Refine
Results
This form lets you apply filters to the Rules grid to reduce the number of
rules it shows. See "Refine Results form" on page 266, below.
Folders
pane
The Folders pane lets you create folders and sub-folders for organizing
your rules. Clicking a folder in the Folders pane causes the Rules grid
to display only the rules from that folder and its sub-folders.
You can add, rename, move, and delete folders, and you can move
rules from one folder to another. For more information, see "Working
with rule folders" on page 282.
Rules grid
The Rules grid manages all rules that are configured for all of the
Managers that are connected to the Console. If the same rule is
configured for more than one Manager, it appears multiple times—once
for each Manager it is associated with. Like other grids, the Rules grid
can be sorted.
Activate
Rules
Click this button to activate any new rule changes.
Subscribe
Use this list to select which Console users are to subscribe to a
particular rule. This means the system will notify the subscribing users'
Consoles each time the rule triggers an alert. The alert appears in their
Monitor view’s alert grid.
Click this button whenever you want to create a new rule. It opens the
Rule Builder form, which lets you configure custom policy rules by
dragging and dropping the rule’s attributes into correlation and action
boxes.
Click this button to open a menu of commands that you can perform on
one or more selected rules. There are commands to Edit (to open the
rule in the Edit Creation form), Enable, Disable, Test On, Test Off,
Delete, Import, and Export.
ToolTips
If you point to a cell in the grid to that is partially hidden, a ToolTip
appears, displaying the entire contents of that cell. This is a great way
to view the complete description of a particular rule.
263
Rules grid columns
The Rules grid contains all policy rules that are configured for all Managers that are connected to the
Console. The Manager column indicates which Manager each rule applies to.
By default, the view shows the rules from the Custom Rules folder in the Folders pane. If you do not
have any custom rules, then click the TriGeo Rules folder to list the rules that the Console ships
with.
The following table describes the meaning of each column in the Rules grid. Columns are listed in
their default order, from left to right.
Column
Description
The gear button in each row opens a menu of commands that you can perform
on the item that is currently selected in the grid. These commands let you edit,
enable, disable, test, clone, and delete the selected rule.
Enabled
Indicates whether or not the rule is enabled and ready for use with your policies.
means the rule is enabled and is in active use.
means the rule is disabled, and is not in use.
Test
Indicates whether or not the rule is in test mode. When a rule is in test mode, it
causes alerts to appear in the Console, but it cannot perform any active
responses. This lets you see how the rule would behave when it is fully
enabled, but without risking any negative unintended consequences.
means the rule is in test mode.
means the rule is not in test mode.
Note: A rule must be Enabled before you can test it.
Name
The name of the rule.
Description
A description of the rule. Pointing to this field displays the complete description
as a ToolTip.
Folder
The name of the folder (in the Folders pane) in which the rule is stored.
Created By
The name of the Console user who created the rule.
Created
Date
The date the rule was created.
264
Rules grid columns
Column
Description
Modified
By
The name of the Console user who last modified the rule.
Modified
Date
The date and time on which the rule was last modified.
Manager
The Manager the rule is associated with.
265
Refine Results form
You can use the Refine Results form to refine the Rules grid. The form behaves like a search
engine, letting you apply filters to the Rules grid to reduce the number of rules it shows.
you are using.
Field
Description
Reset
Click Reset to clear the form. This returns the form and the Rules grid to their
default settings.
Search
Use this Search field to perform keyword searches for specific rules. To
search, type the text you want to search for in the text box. The grid displays
only those rules whose Name fields match or include the text you entered.
Enabled
Click this check box to show only those rules that are Enabled. Clear this
check box to show both Enabled and Disabled rules.
Test
Click this check box to show only those rules that are in test mode. Clear this
check box to show rules that are both in and out of test mode.
Manager
Select a Manager to have the grid display only the rules that are associated
with that Manager.
Created By
Select the name of the Console user who created the rule to have the grid
display only rules created by that user.
Created
Date Range
Type or select a date range to have the grid display only rules that were created
within that date range.
Modified By
Select the name of the Console user who last modified the rule to have the grid
display only rules modified by that user.
Modified
Date Range
Type or select the begin and end date range to have the grid display only rules
that were modified on or within that date range.
266
Managing rules
Managing rules
The topics in this section explain how to manage your rules. Many management tasks can be done
from the Rules grid, or in Rule Builder as you are configuring a rule. This section includes
procedures for doing the following:
l
editing a rule
l
subscribing to a rule
l
enabling a rule
l
testing a rule
l
activating a rule
l
disabling a rule
l
cloning a rule
l
importing a rule
l
exporting a rule, and
l
deleting a rule.
267
Editing rules
Whenever you need to edit a rule’s name or configuration, you use the Rule Creation tool to make
the necessary changes to the rule. When needed, you can edit multiple rules at the same time.
It is not necessary to disable a rule before editing it. When you edit a rule, you are editing a local copy
until you save and activate it. If the rule was enabled when you began editing it, it will continue to be
enabled while you work on the new version. When you save the new version and then click Activate
Rules, the Manager replaces the original rule with the new version.
To open rules for editing:
1. Open the Build ► Rules view.
2. In the Folders pane, click the folder that contains the rules you want to edit.
The Rules grid displays the rules associated with the selected folder and its sub-folders.
3. In the Rules grid, click to select the rule (or rules) you want to edit.
4. Open the rules for editing as follows:
l
To edit a single rule, either double-click the rule, or click the row's gear
button and
then click Edit.
l
To edit multiple rules, click the grid's gear
button and then click and then click Edit.
Rule Creation appears, showing the rule’s current configuration. If you opened multiple rules,
they all appear as "cascaded" windows. You may now edit the rules.
Locked rules
If a prompt like the one shown here appears, it means another user is already editing one of the
selected rules and has those rules "locked."
In this case, you can do either of two things:
l
l
You can proceed in a read-only fashion, which allows you to see the details of a rule.
You can break the lock and take control over the rule, which means the other person will not be
able to save any changes he or she makes to the rule.
268
Editing rules
To edit the rule:
1. Use Rule Creation to make any necessary changes to the rule’s name, Manager, folder,
description, enabled status, test-mode state, correlations, correlation time, or actions. For
more information, see "Creating custom rules" on page 289.
l
If you want to use the rule immediately upon saving it, select the Enable check box.
l
If you want to try the rule in test mode, select the Test check box.
2. Click Save.
The Rules grid appears.
3. To begin using (or testing) the rule’s new configuration, click Activate Rules.
269
You can assign rules to specific Console users, which means those users will subscribe to those
rules. This means the system will notify the subscribing users' Consoles each time one of the
subscribed-to rules triggers an alert. The alerts will appear in their Monitor view’s alert grid.
Rule subscriptions can be used in conjunction with filters and reports to monitor activity for specific
rules. Each user can subscribe to as many different rules as needed.
You can assign subscriptions in Rule Creation while you are creating the rule, or anytime later
directly from the Rules grid.
To manage rule subscribers from the Rules grid:
2. In the Folders pane, click the folder that contains the rule you want to work with.
3. In the Rules grid, select the rules you want to work with.
4. On the Rules grid toolbar, click Subscribe.
The Subscribe list opens. It only includes those Console uses who are associated with the
same Manager as the selected rule.
A check box with a gray background means the user already subscribes to one or more of the
selected rules, but not all of them.
5. Select the check box for each Console user who is to subscribe to the selected rules:
l
l
l
Select an empty user's check box to have that user subscribe to all of the selected
rules.
Clear a gray user's check box to remove the user's subscription to all of the selected
rules.
Clear a gray user's check box and then select it again, to have that user subscribe to all
of the selected rules. Remember, these users are already subscribed to some rules,
but not all of them. This procedure assigns all of the selected rules to that user.
As you can see, if you have multiple rules selected, each subscription change affects every
selected rule.
6. Click Subscribe again to close the list.
The selected Console users now subscribe to the selected rules.
270
To add rule subscribers from Rule Creation:
1. With a rule open in Rule Creation, click Subscribe.
The Subscribe list opens. It only includes those Console uses who are associated with the
same Manager as the selected rule.
2. Manage the rule's subscribers as follows:
l
Select the check box for each Console user who is to subscribe to this rule.
l
Clear the check box for each subscriber who is no longer to subscribe to this rule.
3. Click Subscribe again to close the list.
4. Click Save.
The selected Console users now subscribe to the rule.
271
Enabling a rule
The Manager only uses rules that are enabled. It ignores all other rules. Therefore, the Manager
cannot use rules until you enable them. You can enable rules from the Rules grid, or directly from
Rule Creation. In either case, the Enable check box lets you turn a rule on and off.
Note: In the Rules grid, you can enable multiple rules at the same time. However, this command
acts as a toggle on each individual rule that is selected. For example, if one rule is disabled and
another is enabled, performing this command on both rules at the same time will invert the settings of
both rules. So the first rule would become enabled, and the second would become disabled.
Therefore, when performing this command on multiple rules, you will typically want to select only
those rules that already have the same Enabled/Disabled state.
To enable rules from the Rules grid:
2. In the Folders pane, select the folder that contains the rules you want to enable.
3. In the Rules grid, select the rule (or rules) you want to enable.
4. Enable the rules as follows:
l
To enable a single rule, click the row's gear
l
To enable multiple rules, click the grid's gear
In the Rules grid, the rules’ Enabled
button and then click Enable.
button and then click Enable.
icons become active, which means the rules are now
enabled. However, the Manager cannot begin using these rules until you activate them. See
"Activating rules" on page 275.
5. Click Activate Rules to begin using the rule.
To enable a rule from Rule Creation:
1. With a rule open in Rule Creation, select the Enable check box.
2. When you are finished configuring the rule, click Save.
The Rules grid appears, with the
icon appearing in the rule's Enabled column. This icon
means the rule is now enabled. However, the Manager cannot begin using the rule until you
activate it.
3. Click Activate Rules to begin using the rule.
272
Before fully enabling a rule, you can try it out in test mode. In test mode, the Manager processes the
rule’s alert messages as it normally would, but without performing any of the rule’s actions. This lets
you see how the rule will behave when it is activated, without any possible disruption to your network.
Note: In the Rules grid, you can change the test mode of multiple rules at the same time. However,
this command acts as a toggle on each individual rule that is selected. For example, if one rule is in
test mode and another isn't, performing this command on both rules at the same time will invert the
settings of both rules. So the first rule would move out of test mode, and the second would move into
test mode. Therefore, when performing this command on multiple rules, you will typically want to
select only those rules that already have the same Test On/Test Off state.
To place rules in test mode in the Rules grid:
2. In the Folders pane, select the folder that contains the rules you want to test.
3. Check the rules' Enabled status. If any of the rules you want to test show a "disabled"
icon), then they need to be enabled. You can do this by clicking the row's gear
button and
then clicking Enable.
In the Rules grid, the
icon appears in the rule’s Enabled column to indicate that the rule
has been enabled.
4. In the Rules grid, select the rule (or rules) you want to test.
5. Place the rules in test mode as follows:
l
To put a single rule in test mode, click the row's gear
button and then click Test
On.
l
To put multiple rules in test mode, click the grid's gear
button and then click Test
On.
In the Rules grid, the
icon appears in the rules’ Test column to indicate that the rules are in
test mode.
6. Click Activate Rules.
The rules are now functional, but in test mode.
273
To remove a rule from test mode in the Rules grid:
2. In the Folders pane, select the folder that contains the rules you want to work with.
3. In the Rules grid, select the rule (or rules) you want to work with.
4. Remove the rules from test mode as follows:
l
To remove a single rule from test mode, click the row's gear
button and then click
Test Off.
l
To remove multiple rules from test mode, click the grid's gear
button and then click
Test Off.
In the Rules grid, the "disabled"
icon appears in the rules’ Test column to indicate that the
rules are no longer in test mode.
The rules are now fully functional.
To place a rule in test mode from Rule Creation:
2. In the Folders pane, click the folder that contains the rule you want to test.
3. In the Rules grid, click to select the rule you want to test.
4. On the Rules grid toolbar, click Edit.
Rule Creation appears, showing the rule’s current configuration.
5. Select the Enable check box.
6. Select the Test check box.
Note: To test a rule, you must have both Enable and Test checked. If only Enable is
checked, the rule is completely enabled (that is, it is fully in use). If only Test is checked, the
rule will not be enabled, which means the Manager will not be able to use it for testing.
7. Click Save.
The rule is now in test mode.
To fully activate a rule from in Rule Creation:
1. Open the rule in Rule Creation, as described above.
2. Clear the Test check box.
3. Click Save.
4. On the Rule Builder toolbar, click Activate Rules.
The rule is now fully functional.
274
Activating rules
Activating rules
Whenever you create a new rule or change an existing rule, you are working on a “local copy” of the
rule. The Manager has no way of using the rule change until you activate it. Activating a rule tells the
Manager to reload the enabled rules it is working on, which allows it to upload up the changes you just
made. You must activate rules whenever you create a new rule, edit an existing rule, or make
changes to a rule’s Enabled/Disabled or Test On/Test Off status. Otherwise, the Manager will not
recognize the change.
To activate rule changes, both the Rules grid and Rule Creation have an Activate Rules command.
This command sends any new rule changes to the Manager for immediate use. In Rule Creation, the
Activate Rules command leaves Rule Creation open so you can continue working.
To activate rules from the Rules grid:
2. Many any necessary changes to your rules.
3. On the Rules grid toolbar, click Activate Rules.
The Manager activates any new rule changes and begins processing all enabled rules.
To activate rules from Rule Creation:
l
At any time, in Rule Creation, click Activate Rules.
The Manager activates any new rule changes and begins processing all enabled rules.
However, Rule Creation stays open so you can continue working. The rule you are currently
working on is not activated. It cannot be activated until it is first saved.
275
Disabling a rule
The Manager will continue to use any active rules, so long as they are enabled. If needed, you can
easily turn off rules by disabling them. However, the Manager will continue to use those rules until
you activate their new “disabled” status with the Activate Rules command.
Note: In the Rules grid, you can disable multiple rules at the same time. However, this command
acts as a toggle on each individual rule that is selected. For example, if one rule is disabled and
another is enabled, performing this command on both rules at the same time will invert the settings of
both rules. So the first rule would become enabled, and the second would become disabled.
Therefore, when performing this command on multiple rules, you will typically want to select only
those rules that already have the same Enabled/Disabled state.
To disable rules from the Rules grid:
2. In the Folders pane, select the folder that contains the rules you want to disable.
3. In the Rules grid, select the rule (or rules) you want to disable.
4. Disable the rules as follows:
l
To disable a single rule, click the row's gear
l
To disable multiple rules, click the grid's gear
button and then click Disable.
button and then click Disable.
In the Rules grid, the Enabled column for each rule shows a “disabled”
rules are now inactive.
The Manager stops processing the disabled rules.
To disable a rule from Rule Creation:
1. Open the rule you want to disable in Rule Creation.
2. Clear the Enable check box.
3. Click Save.
The Manager stops processing the disabled rule.
276
icon to indicate the
Cloning rules
Cloning rules
The Clone command lets you copy any existing rule, make changes to the copy, and then save the
copy with a new name in one of your Custom Rules sub-folders.
The benefit of cloning is that you can quickly create variations on existing rules. You simply clone a
preconfigured rule, such as a rule from the TriGeo Rules or NATO5 Rules folder, and then adjust the
cloned copy to suit your specific needs.
Note: A cloned rule must be for the same Manager as the original rule. That is, you cannot clone a
rule from one Manager and save it for another Manager.
To clone rules:
2. In the Folders pane, click the folder that contains the rule you want to clone.
3. In the Rules grid, click to select the rule you want to clone.
4. Click the row's gear
The Clone Rule form appears.
5. In the Clone Name box, type a name for the cloned rule.
6. In the Folders list, select which Custom Rules folder is to store the cloned rule.
7. Click OK to save the cloned rule; otherwise, click Cancel.
The newly cloned copy of the rule automatically opens in Rule Creation so you can begin
making changes.
277
Importing a rule
You can import a rule from a remote source into a particular rule folder. For example, you may want to
import a rule from one Manager to another. Or you can import a rule that is provided by TriGeo
Network Security. You may only import one rule at a time.
To import a rule to a rule folder:
2. On the Rules grid toolbar, click
and then click Import.
The Open form appears.
3. In the Look In box, browse to and open the folder that contains the rule you want to import.
4. Select the rule file you want to import.
The file you selected appears in the File Name box.
5. Click Open to import the file; otherwise, click Cancel.
The Import Rules form appears.
278
Importing a rule
6. In the Manager list, select which Manager the imported rule is to be associated with.
7. In the Folders list, click to select the rule folder that is to store the imported rule. You will need
to click a folder’s ► icon to view its sub-folders.
8. Click Import.
The system imports the rules into the designated rule folder.
279
Exporting rules
Exporting rules is useful for three reasons:
l
You can export a rule from one Manager and import it into another Manager.
l
You can export rules to save archived copies in a safe place.
l
You can export rules to provide TriGeo Network Security with a copy of your rule for technical
support or troubleshooting purposes.
You can export multiple rules at the same time. The rules will be saved to a new folder that contains
each rule.
To export rules:
2. In the Folders pane, select the folder that contains the rule you want to export.
The Rules grid displays the rules in that folder.
3. In the Rules grid, select the rules you want to export.
4. On the Rules grid toolbar, click
and then click Export.
The Select Directory to Export Rule to form appears.
5. In the Save in box, locate the general area in which you want to save the exported rule folder.
6. In the File name box, type a name for the folder that is to contain the exported rules.
7. Click Save.
280
Deleting rules
The rules are exported and saved in the folder you specified. Each exported rule retains its
name and the date and time on which it was exported.
If an Export Error message appears, it means one or more of the rules failed to export. If you
are exporting multiple rules, the system exports as many as it can, and the message lists
which rules failed to export and which ones succeeded. Click OK to close the form.
Deleting rules
When needed, you can easily delete rules. You can delete one rule at a time, or you can delete
multiple rules. Deleting a rule is permanent. Once a rule is deleted, it can only be restored by recreating it or by importing a previously exported rule.
To delete rules:
2. In the Folders pane, select the folder that contains the rule you want to delete.
The Rules grid displays the rules in that folder.
3. In the Rules grid, select the rule (or rules) you want to delete.
4. Delete the rules as follows:
l
To delete a single rule, click the row's gear
l
To delete multiple rules, click the grid's gear
5. At the Confirm Delete prompt, click Yes to delete the rules; otherwise, click No.
The rules disappear from the Rules grid.
6. Click Activate Rules to notify the Manager that the rules were deleted.
281
Working with rule folders
In the Build ► Rules view, the Folders pane lets you categorize and
organize your policy rules. You can also import rules to a folder, or
export rules from a folder.
The Folders pane behaves just like the folders in an operating
system. You can create folders and sub-folders, and you can move,
rename, and delete folders.
The Folders pane is disabled whenever you are working with a Group
that does not support folders.
Default rule folders
By default, the Rules view shows the rules from the Custom Rules
folder. If you do not have any custom rules, then click the TriGeo Rules folder to list the rules that the
Console ships with.
In the Build ► Rules view, the Folders pane has three fixed top-level folders—one for each rule
type:
l
l
l
The Custom Rules folder contains your own custom rules and allows you to organize them
into your own custom set of sub-folders.
TheTriGeo Rules folder contains all of the preconfigured rules that the TriGeo SIM appliance
ships with.
The NATO5 Rules folder contains rules that TriGeo provides to address best practices, to suggest implementations, and to address general and specific threats. TriGeo regularly updates
these rules through product updates.
When you click a top-level folder, the grid shows the rules from that folder, as well as any of its subfolders. For example, if you click the NATO5 Rules folder, the grid shows all NATO5 rules. But if you
click the folder’s Virus/Worm sub-folder, then the grid only shows rules from that folder and any of its
sub-folders, if applicable.
You cannot make changes to TriGeo Rules or NATO5 Rules folders, sub-folders, or their contents.
In addition, some Rules grid commands are disabled for TriGeo and NATO5 rules to ensure that their
rule configurations remains intact.
However, none of these limitations apply to your custom rules. You you can clone rules from any of
the TriGeo Rules or NATO5 Rules folders and sub-folders, store the cloned rules in your Custom
Rules folders, and then edit them as you see fit.
282
In the Build ► Rules view, the Folders pane is organized as a hierarchical node tree of folders and
sub-folders. By default, the tree is collapsed, showing only the top level of folders. This procedure
explains how to show and hide the pane’s sub-folders.
To open (expand) a folder to see its sub-folders:
l
Click a folder with an ► icon to open a folder and show its first level of sub-folders.
To close (collapse) a folder to hide its sub-folders:
l
Click a folder with an ▼ icon to close the folder and hide its sub-folders.
283
Showing the contents of a rule folder
Select a rule folder in the Folders pane to display the contents of that folder and its sub-folders in the
view’s grid.
To view the contents of a rule folder:
2. In the Folders pane, select the rule folder you want to work with.
The Rules grid displays the rules stored within that folder and its sub-folders.
If you double-click a rule in the grid, Rule Creation opens, showing the rule’s current
configuration.
284
Whenever needed, you can add new folders and sub-folders to the Folders pane. This allows you to
organize your rules in a manner that makes them easy to organize and identify.
To add a new rule folder:
2. In the Folders pane, click the Custom Rules folder’s ► icon to open the folder and view its
sub-folders, if any are present.
3. Click the
button at the bottom of the Folders pane.
A new sub-folder appears with the default name of folder.
4. Double-click the new folder.
The folder becomes highlighted and its name is surrounded by an editable box.
5. Type a name for the new folder, and then press Enter.
You may now store rules in the new folder.
Renaming a rule folder
When needed, you can rename your own custom rule folders in the Folders pane. However, you may
not rename any of the Console’s preconfigured rule folders.
To rename a folder:
2. In the Folders pane, double-click the folder you want to rename.
A box appears around the folder, and its name becomes editable.
3. Type a new name for the folder, and then press Enter.
The folder appears in the Folders pane with its new name.
285
Moving rule folders
When needed, you can rearrange your custom rule folders by moving them to another custom folder
or sub-folder. Moving a folder moves the entire contents of that folder, including any of its sub-folders.
TriGeo’s default rule folders (TriGeo Rules or NATO5 Rules folders and sub-folders) cannot be
moved. However, you can clone copies of rules from these folders and place them into your own
Custom Rules folders, which you may then move around as you see fit.
To move a rule folder:
1. Open the Build ► Groups or the Build ► Rules view, as appropriate.
2. In the Folders pane, select the folder that is to be the new parent of the folder you want to
move.
3. Click the folder’s ► icon to open the folder and view its sub-folders.
4. Now select the folder you want to move, and then drag and drop it just below its new parent
folder. When the pointer is in the correct position, a black line will appear below the parent
folder.
Before
After. The folder you moved now appears with its new parent
folder.
286
You can use the Folders pane and the Rules grid to move your own custom rules from one Custom
Rules folder to another. Moving rules has the following restrictions:
l
l
Rules in TriGeo’s default rule folders (TriGeo Rules or NATO5 Rules folders and sub-folders)
cannot be moved. However, you can clone copies of these rules and place the clones in your
Custom Rules folders.
You may only move rules into folders that are associated with the same Manager as the rules
you are moving. All other folders are disabled.
To move a rule:
2. In the Folders pane, select the folder that is to receive the rules you want to move.
3. Click the folder’s ► icon to open that folder.
4. Now click the folder that contains the rules you want to move.
The Rules grid displays the rules stored within that folder.
5. In the Rules grid, select the rules you want to move. For instructions on selecting multiple
rules, see "Selecting items in a grid" on page 31.
6. Drag the rules to the Folders pane, into the new folder that is to store them.
The rules are now stored in their new folder. Select the folder to see its contents in the Rules
grid.
Deleting a rule folder
When needed, you can delete a rule folder. However, doing so also deletes the contents of the folder,
including any sub-folders and their associated rules. So be sure to move or archive any rules you
want to save before deleting a rule folder.
To delete a folder:
1. Open the Build ► Groups or the Build ► Rules view, as appropriate.
2. In the Folders pane, click to select the folder or sub-folder you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete
button.
4. At the Confirm Delete prompt, click Yes to delete the folder; otherwise, click No.
The folder and its sub-folders disappear from the Folders pane.
287
Creating custom rules
Rule Creation
In the Build ► Rules view, the Rule Creation tool is used to configure new rules and to edit existing
rules.
Like filters, you create rules by configuring conditions between alert variables other components,
such as Time of Day Sets, User-Defined Groups, Constants, etc. However, rules go a step further.
They let you correlate alert variables with other alerts and their alert variables.
response.
The possibilities for rules are endless. Therefore, this section describes how to create rules only in
very general terms. This section is not intended to be a tutorial, but rather a reference for you to fall
back on if you are unclear about how any part of Rule Creation works.
Note: Each rule you create only applies to the Manager that is selected when you created the rule. If
you need a similar rule for another Manager, you must create it separately on the other Manager; or
you can export the rule, and then import it from the other Manager’s Rules grid.
Caution: Practice with filters before creating rules
The tools in Rule Creation are very similar to those found in Filter Creation. However, filters simply
report event occurrences; rules act on them. There is no harm if you create a filter that is unusual or
has logic problems. But this is not the always case with rules. Rules can have unexpected and
sometimes unpleasant consequences if they are not configured exactly as you intend them to be.
Inexperienced users should use caution when creating rules. Creating filters is an excellent way to
familiarize yourself with the logic and tools needed to create well crafted rules. You should only begin
configuring rules after you are at ease with configuring filters. Even then, always test your rules
before implementing them.
289
Rule Creation features
The topics in this section describe the key features of the Rule Creation view, the rule window, and
the Correlations box, which are all used to configure and edit policy rules.
l
l
l
The Rule Creation view is a different view of the Rules view that allows you to configure and
edit policy rules.
The rule window is the window that you will use to view, configure, and edit your policy rules.
The Correlations box is a component of the rule window that is used to configure the specific
correlations that define the rule.
The key features of the Rule Creation tool
The following table descries the key features of the Rule Creation tool. The topics that follow
discuss some of these features in greater detail.
290
Item
Name
Description
Back to
Rules
Listing
Click this button to hide Rule Creation and return to the Rules grid.
Rule Creation remains open in the background, so you can return to
it to continue working on your rules.
In the Rules grid, clicking Back to Rule Creation will return you to
Rule Creation.
List pane
The list pane is the “accordion” list to the left. It contains categorized
lists of the components you can use when configuring policy rules.
It behaves exactly like the list pane in Filter Creation. To view the
contents of a component list, click its title bar. To add a component
to a rule, select it from its list and then drag it into the appropriate
correlation box.
If more than one Manager is linked to the Console, each item in the
list pane lists the Manager it is associated with. Therefore, some list
items may appear to be listed multiple times. But in reality, they are
listed once for each Manager. Alerts are universal to all Managers,
so they do not show a Manager association.
For detailed information about each list, see "Features of the list
pane" on page 113.
Rule window
Each rule you create or edit appears in its own rule window. This is
where you configure name, describe, configure, edit, test, verify, and
enable each rule.
You can have multiple rule windows open at the same time. You can
also minimize, maximize, resize, and close each window, as
needed.
For detailed information on configuring rules, see "Creating custom
rules" on page 289.
Minimized
rule window
bar
Any minimized rule windows appear in the bar at the bottom of the
Rule Creation pane, behind the active rule window. Each minimized
window shows the name of its rule. Clicking a minimized rule opens
that rule in the Rule Creation pane.
291
Each rule you create or edit appears in its own rule configuration window. You will use these windows
to design and edit custom policy rules. You can use the rule window to name, describe, configure,
edit, enable, and test your custom rules.
The elements of a rule window
The following table describes each key feature and field of a rule window.
292
Item
Name
Description
Title bar
Each rule you create or edit appears in its own configuration window.
Upon naming a rule, the window’s title bar displays the name of the
rule. You can also use the title bar to minimize, maximize, and resize
rule window. Minimized rule windows appear at the bottom of the
Rule Creation pane.
Name
Type a name for the rule.
on
When creating a new rule, use this list to select which Manager the
rule is to be associated with. Otherwise, when editing a rule, this field
displays which Manager the rule is associated with.
in
Select the folder (in the Folders pane) in which the rule is to be
stored.
Description
Type a description of what the rule does, or the situation for which the
rule is intended.
If the description extends beyond the visible area of the text box, a
larger text box appears, so you can type a detailed description of the
rule, its logic, its expected behavior, and its active response. When
you are done typing, either press Tab or click anywhere outside the
text box to close it.
Enable
Select this check box to enable the rule. Clear this check box to
disable the rule.
Test
Select this check box to place the rule in test mode. Clear this check
box to take the rule out of test mode.
Note: You must enable a rule before you can test it.
Subscribe
Use this list to select which Console users are to subscribe to the
rule. This means the system will notify the subscribing users'
Consoles each time one of the subscribed-to rules triggers an alert.
The alerts will appear in their alert grid.
293
Item
Name
Description
Rule Status
The Rule Status bar lists warnings and error messages about your
rule's current configuration logic.
l
l
l
Click ► to view a list of warning and error messages.
Click a message flag to provide detailed information about the
nature of that problem.
Click a message to highlight the specific area or field that is
the source of that problem.
For more information, see "Using the Status bar" on page 133.
Correlations
Use the Correlations box to configure correlations between groups
of alert events. You can coordinate multiple alert events into a set of
conditions that will prompt the Manager to issue a particular active
response.
You set up correlations by dragging items from the Alerts and Alert
Groups lists into this box, and then setting the specific conditions or
for the alert that are to prompt action.
The Correlations toolbar lets you group alert conditions, and
determine if they must all apply (an AND correlation) or if any of them
may apply (an OR correlation) to prompt a response.
Correlation
Time
Use the Correlation Time box to establish the allowable frequency
and time span in which the correlation events must occur before the
rule applies.
The Advanced section lets you define an alert event threshold, and
to define the re-inference period for the threshold. The threshold tells
the Manager which specific fields to monitor to determine if a valid
alert event has occurred (i.e., when to “count” the alert).
The box’s Advanced section lets you define a Response Window
that lets the rule ignore any events that occur outside (past or future)
of the established period.
Actions
Use the Actions box to dictate which actions the rule is to execute
when the events described in the Correlations and Correlation
Time boxes occur. Examples of actions include sending an email
message to your system administrator, or blocking an IP address.
294
Item
Name
Description
Undo/Redo
Click the Undo button to undo your last desktop action. You can click
the Undo button repeatedly to undo up to 20 steps.
Click the Red button to redo a step that you have undone. You can
click the Redo button repeatedly to redo up to 20 steps.
You can only use Undo or Redo for any steps you made since the
last time you clicked Apply.
Save
/Cancel/
Apply
Use these commands to save or cancel your work:
l
l
l
Click Save to save your changes to a rule and close the rule
window.
Click the Cancel button to cancel any changes you have
made to a rule since the last time you clicked Save, and close
the rule window. If you have any unsaved changes, the
system will prompt you to save or discard them.
Click Apply to save your changes to a rule, but keep the rule
window open so you can continue working. You can click
Apply at any time.
295
To create a rule, you drag items from the list pane into the rule window’s Correlations box to
configure the relationships (or correlations) that define the rule. These correlations define the events
that must occur for the rule to take effect.
The Correlations box, which is used for configuring policy rule correlations
Creating rule correlations is a lot like configuring conditions for custom filters, so the Correlations
box in Rule Creation behaves a lot like the Conditions box in Filter Creation. The following table
describes each item shown in the Correlations box, above.
Item
Name
►
▼
Description
Groups can be expanded or collapsed to show or hide their settings:
l
Click to ► expand a collapsed group.
l
Click to ▼ collapse an expanded group.
Once a group is configured properly, you may want to collapse it to avoid
accidentally changing it.
296
Item
Name
Description
This is the Group button. It appear at the top of every group box. Click it
to create a new group within the group box. A group within a group is
called a nested group. You may then drag alert variables and other items
from the list pane into the nested group box.
By using nested groups, you can refine correlations by combining or
comparing one group of correlations to another to create the logic for
complex correlations.
Each group is subject to AND and OR relationships with the groups
around it and within it. By default, new groups appear with AND
comparisons.
This is the Threshold button, which opens the Threshold form for a
group. The Threshold form is described below.
This is the Delete button. It appears at the top of every Group box and
every correlation. Click this button to delete a correlation or a particular
group. Deleting a group also deletes any groups that are nested within
that group.
Alert
variable
From the Alerts, Alert Groups, or Fields list, drag an alert, Alert Group,
or alert field into the Correlations box. This is called the alert variable. A
rule can have multiple alerts and Alert Groups in its correlation
configuration.
You can think of an alert variable as the subject of each group of
correlations. As alerts stream through the Manager, the rule analyzes the
values associated with each alert variable to determine if the alert meets
the rule’s conditions. If so, the Manager either initiates an active
response, or stores the alert for comparison with other alerts that may
occur within the rule's allotted timeframe.
297
Item
Name
Operators
Description
Whenever you drag a list item or a field next to alert variable, an operator
icon appears between them. The operator states how the filter is to
compare the alert variable to the other item to determine if the alert meets
the rule’s conditions.
l
l
Click an operator to cycle through the various operators that are
available for that comparison. Just keep clicking until you see the
Ctrl+click an operator to view all of the operators that are
available for that comparison. Then click to select the specific
For more information, see "Comparing values with operators" on page
127.
List item
List items are the various non-alert items from the list pane. You drag and
drop them into groups to define rule correlations based on your Time Of
Day Sets, Tool Profiles, User-Defined Groups, Constants, etc.
Some alert variables automatically add a blank Constant as its list item.
You can overwrite the Constant with another list item, or you can click
the Constant to type or select a specific value for the constant.
Note that each list item has an icon that corresponds to the list it came
from. These icons let you to quickly identify what kinds of items are
defining your rules’s correlations.
Threshold
The Threshold section lets you define a threshold for the correlations in
a Group box. You can think of a threshold as a correlation frequency for
the grouping; that is, the number of times the events defined by the group
must occur within a specified period before the rule takes effect.
A group threshold behaves exactly like the threshold in the Correlation
Time box. For more information, see "Configuring a rule's correlation
time" on page 303.
This is the Set Advanced Threshold button. Whenever a group
threshold’s number of Alerts within [time] is greater than 1, this button
becomes enabled so you can open the Set Advanced Thresholds form.
This form lets you specify advanced threshold fields and define an
advanced response window for the alert fields within the grouping.
For more information, see "Advanced thresholds" on page 304.
298
Item
Name
AND
OR
Description
Rule correlations and groups of correlations are subject to AND and OR
comparisons. If you click an AND operator, it changes to an OR, and
vice versa. For more information, see "Comparing values with operators"
on page 127.
299
Rule Creation procedures
Adding a new rule
Follow this general procedure whenever you want to create a new rule. Be sure to test your rules
before fully implementing them. Testing helps ensure that your rules do not cause any unpleasant
consequences.
To add a new rule:
2. On the Rule grid toolbar, click
.
The Rule Creation tool appears.
Note: At any time while you are configuring a rule, you can click the Back to Rules Listing
button to return to the Rules grid. Rule Creation remains open in the background.
3. In the Name box, type a name for the rule. Note that the name also appears on the form’s title
bar.
4. In the on list, select the Manager on which this rule is to reside.
5. In the in list, select the folder and sub-folder in which this rule is to be stored in the Folders
pane.
6. In the Description box, type a complete description of the rule, such its use, purpose, or
behavior.
7. Configure the rule's correlations. See "Adding rule correlations" on page 300.
8. If needed, configure the rule's correlation time and advanced threshold. See "Configuring a
rule's correlation time" on page 303 and "Advanced thresholds" on page 304.
9. Configure the rule's active response. See "Using the Actions box" on page 308.
10. Apply the appropriate Enabled, Test, and Subscription settings. For details, see "Managing
rules" on page 267.
l
l
l
To assign rule subscribers, click the Subscribe list, and then click the check box for
each user who is to subscribe to the rule.
If you want to use the rule immediately upon saving it, select the Enabled check box.
If you want to operate the rule in test mode before fully activating it, select the Test
check box. It is highly recommended that you operate each new rule in test mode to
confirm that the rule behaves as expected.
11. When you are satisfied with the rule’s configuration, click Save.
Note: You can also click Apply to save your changes without closing the form.
The Rules grid appears. The new rule appears in the Rules grid and in the Folders pane, in
the folder you designated for the rule.
12. To begin using (or testing) the revised rule, click Activate Rules.
300
To create a rule in Rule Creation, you drag items from the list pane into the rule window’s
Correlations box. The Correlations box allows you to group and configure the relationships (or
correlations) that define the rule. These correlations state which events must occur for the rule to take
effect.
Like filters, you drag alerts, Alert Groups, or alert fields into the Correlations box, and then configure
conditions between these alert variables other components, such as Time of Day Sets, User-Defined
Groups, Constants, etc. You then use other correlation tools to configure how these variables
compare with other alerts and alert variables.
response.
Correlations for a complex rule
Correlations for a simple rule
The rule Correlations form is very similar to the Conditions form in Filter Creation. In addition,
creating rule correlations is a lot like configuring conditions for custom filters. However, rules are
more complex than filters and will always have something in the Correlations, Correlation Time,
and Actions boxes.
301
Tips for success
l
l
The best way to learn how to configure rules is to practice. Because of the similarities between
filters and rules, and because filters cannot disrupt your network but policy rules can, we
highly recommend you experiment with creating filters before you begin configuring rules.
When you are at ease with filters, you can move on to rules. For detailed instructions and a
tutorial on configuring filters, see "Creating custom alert filters" on page 109.
Always test your rules before actually using them, so you can avoid accidentally disrupting
your network.
The following procedure applies for every type of correlation you build, regardless of the type of list
item you are adding.
To configure rule correlations:
1. Open the rule you want to work with in Rule Creation.
2. In the list pane, click the title bar of the list you want to work with.
Typically, you will begin with the Alerts or Alerts Group list to add an alert, alert group, or
alert field to the Correlations box. Anything from an alert list is called an alert variable, and is
the “subject” of the rule (or one of the subjects, if there is more than one alert variable).
3. In the list, select the item you want to work with. Then drag it into the Correlations box.
Like Filter Creation, Rule Creation uses targeting to help you configure your custom rules.
The targeting feature ensures that you place each element in a valid location. Targeting applies
whenever you drag an item from the list pane to a configurable Correlations box or Actions
box. For more information, see "Targeting" on page 125.
4. Decide on the next item that defines the rule’s configuration. This could be an alert field or
perhaps something from one of the Group lists. Then drag it from its list and drop it next to the
alert variable you placed in Step 3.
An operator appears between these items. The operator states how the rule is to compare the
alert variable to the other element. For more information, see "Comparing values with
operators" on page 127.
The operator that appears between two elements depends on your selection. In this respect,
Rule Creation is context sensitive. It only allows comparisons that are logical for the
elements you have selected. See the "Rule correlation table" on page 310 for more information
on the operators that can be used for each field.
5. Click the operator, and then select the appropriate operator that defines the relationship
between the alert variable and the list item. For example, you can choose if the alert variable
should be “equal to,” “contained in,” “exist,” or be “greater than or equal to” the list item. For
more information, see "Comparing values with operators" on page 127.
6. Repeat Steps 1 – 5 for each additional event correlation that is to define this rule.
7. Determine if all of the correlation in the group must apply before the rule is to be reported (an
AND correlation), or if any one of the correlations may apply for the alert to be reported (an OR
correlation). Then click the AND or OR symbols to define the proper relationship for the correlations in the group.
302
8. Click Save to save your changes.
Note: While configuring a rule, you can click Apply to periodically to save your changes
without exiting the window.
You can continue using this procedure to add new correlations and groups of correlations, and to
apply AND and OR relationships to your groups and correlations.
303
Configuring a rule's correlation time
The Correlation Time box establishes the frequency in which the events in the Correlations box
must occur before the rule applies. It works like this: The alert events in the Correlations box must
happen x times within y amount of time before the rule applies and the Manager initiates the active
response.
The Correlation Time box
The Response Window setting lets you decide when alert events defined by the Correlations box
are out of scope by eliminating those alert responses that happen outside of that window. When
issuing alert responses, the Manager ignores similar alert events that are in the past of or in the future
of the response window you define here. The Manager does this by comparing its current time to the
timestamp of the alert event.
The response window can prevent accidental rule activation and response when, for example, a
computer has been offline for several days and then comes online, triggering several “bad” events.
If you define a response window of 30 minutes for a rule, the Manager ignores any events that occur
30 minutes prior to or after the current timestamp. So any events that occur more than 30 minutes
before or after current time are not considered valid for the rule.
To configure a rule's correlation time:
1. In the number field before Alerts within, type or select the number of times the events in the
Correlations box must occur before the rule applies. The default setting is 1.
2. In the number field after Alerts within, type or select the time span in which the alert messages must occur before this rule applies. The default setting is for Seconds, but you can also
select Minutes or Hours.
3. In the Response Window field, type or select the response window for this rule.
The default setting is 5 minutes. However, you can set any number of seconds, minutes, or
hours.
304
Advanced thresholds
Advanced thresholds
Whenever a Group threshold or the Correlation Time form’s Alerts within box has a value greater
than 1, the Set Advanced Thresholds button becomes enabled. This button opens the Set
Advanced Thresholds form, so you can define an alert event threshold and the re-inference period
for that threshold. The threshold tells the Manager which specific alert fields to monitor to determine if
a valid alert event has occurred (i.e., when to “count” the alert).
For example:
l
l
Threshold event x must occur multiple times on the same destination computer with the
frequency defined in the Correlation Time box.
Or, threshold event y must occur on different destination computers with the frequency defined
in the Correlation Time box.
When the threshold event counter increases to the number shown in the Alerts box, the threshold
itself becomes true and triggers the next set of conditions in the rule.
Opening the Set Advanced Threshold form
l
In the Correlations box, click the
l
In the Correlation Time box, click the
button on the nested group you want to work with.
button.
305
Setting an advanced threshold
1. Open the Set Advanced Thresholds form.
2. Select the Re-Infer (TOT) check box if you want to define a second threshold. Then use the
adjacent fields to type or select the threshold’s time interval and unit of measure.
The Re-Infer (TOT) option defines the period in which an alert must remain above the
threshold before the system issues a new notification and/or active response.
For example, suppose an alert has exceeded the threshold, and the alert’s Re-Infer (TOT)
period is 1 Hour. If the alert stays above the threshold for more than 1 hour, the system will
issue an additional notification or active response at the end of 1 hour.
306
1. Click
to open the Set Advanced Thresholds form.
2. At the bottom of the form, click Add.
The Available Fields pane has two boxes. The top box lists all of the alerts that have been
applied to the rule’s Correlations box. The bottom box lists the alert fields associated with
whichever alert is currently selected in the top box.
3. In the top Available Fields box, select an alert.
The fields associated with that alert appear in the lower Available Fields box.
4. In the lower Available Fields box, select the alert field that is to help define the alert threshold.
5. Below the Available Fields boxes, there is a drop-down list. It is called the Select Modifier
list. In the Select Modifier list, select the appropriate option:
l
l
6. Click
Select Same if the threshold is to be defined by the selected field being the same multiple times.
Select Distinct if the threshold is to be defined by the selected field being different each
time.
.
The field and its modifier appear in the Selected Fields grid.
7. Repeat Steps 2 – 6 for any additional threshold fields.
8. Click OK to save the fields to the threshold and close the form; otherwise, click Cancel.
These fields now raise the threshold for the correlation event and its active response to occur.
Editing threshold fields
You cannot actually edit a threshold field. Instead, you must delete it, and then replace it with a
corrected field configuration.
To replace a threshold field:
1. Click
to open the advanced threshold you want to work with.
2. In the Selected Fields list, click
to remove the field you want to change.
3. In the Available Fields list, select the appropriate alert, and then the alert field.
4. in the Select Modifier list, select the new modifier for the field (Same or Distinct).
5. Click
.
The corrected field and its modifier appear in the Selected Fields box.
6. Click OK to close the form.
307
Deleting a threshold field
1. Click
to open the advanced threshold you want to work with.
2. In the Selected Fields list, select the field you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete
button.
The threshold field disappears from the Selected Fields list.
4. Click OK to close the form.
308
In Rule Creation, the Actions box defines which action response the Manager is to take whenever
the correlation events specified by the rule occurs. You can assign more than one action to a rule. For
example, you may want to shut down an Agent, and then notify your system administrator of the
event via email.
The fields in the Actions box indicate where the action is to be performed, what the action is
supposed to do, and to whom it is supposed to happen. For example, if you want a rule to disable a
user, you could select the action called Disable Domain User Account. For the action to apply, you
must specify which account you want to disable, and where you want to disable it (that is, which
Agent).
Using constants and fields to make actions flexible
When configuring an action, you can assign constants that define fixed parameters for a rule. Or you
can assign alert fields (from the alerts in the Correlations box). Fields determine a rule’s parameters
when some degree of flexibility is required. Constants and fields both have their uses. But fields can
provide actions with a great deal of flexibility.
Say you have two network users: Bob and Jane. To disable Bob’s user account, you could assign a
constant to the rule that explicitly represents Bob’s account. But doing so limits the rule to Bob's
account.
Now if you assign a field to the rule, the rule can be interpreted as follows: “When user activity meets
the conditions in the Correlations box to prompt the Disable Domain User Account action, use the
alert's UserDisable.SourceAccount field to determine which user account to disable.”
If Bob triggered the rule, the Manager disables Bob’s account. But if Jane also triggers the rule, the
Manager can disable her account, too.
309
Configuring a rule’s actions
Use the following high-level procedure to configure a rule’s actions.
To configure a rule's actions:
1. In the list pane, click the Actions list to open it.
2. Select the action you want, then drag it to the rule window’s Actions box.
The top left of the Actions box shows the name the action that is to be taken. In most cases,
the Actions form will prompt you for specific parameters about the computer, IP address, port,
alert, user, etc., that is to receive the action.
3. Use the list pane to assign the appropriate alert field or constant to each parameter:
l
l
In the Alerts or Alert Groups lists, select an appropriate alert field for each parameter,
and drag it to the appropriate parameter box in the Actions form.
When needed, in the Constants list, select a constant for a parameter, and then drag it
to the appropriate parameter box in the Actions form. Typically, you will select a text
constant. Once the constant is in place, double-click the parameter box to edit the
constant.
For details on configuring specific actions, refer to the "Actions table" on page 313.
310
The following table is for use with Rule Creation. It lists the possible rule configurations you can
create in the rule window’s Correlations box for each type of field.
l
l
l
The Left field column lists each type of field you can drag into the Correlations box’s left
field.
The Right field column lists the corresponding field types that you can drag into the Correlations box’s right field.
The Operators columns list the types of comparisons you can make between left and right
fields.
Operators
exists
not
exists
alert
•
•
alert group
•
•
Left field
in
not
in
text alert field
=
≠
>
>=
<
<=
Right field
•
•
text alert field
•
•
•
•
text state variable field
•
•
text constant
•
•
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
time alert field
•
•
•
•
•
time alert field
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
time state variable field
•
•
•
•
time constant
•
number alert field
311
time of day
•
•
•
•
•
•
number alert field
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
number state variable field
•
•
•
•
•
•
number constant
•
•
text alert field
•
•
Operators
Left field
exists
not
exists
in
not
in
=
≠
>
>=
<
<=
Right field
•
•
•
•
text constant
•
•
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
•
•
•
•
•
time alert field
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
time constant
•
text state variable
time of day
•
•
•
•
•
•
number alert field
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
number constant
•
•
text alert field
•
•
•
•
•
•
text constant
•
•
•
•
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
time state variable
•
•
•
•
•
time alert field
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
time constant
•
number state variable
312
time of day
•
•
•
•
•
•
number alert field
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Operators
Left field
text constant
number constant
time constant
exists
not
exists
in
not
in
=
≠
>
>=
<
<=
•
•
•
•
•
•
Right field
number constant
•
•
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
•
•
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
•
•
•
•
tool profile
•
•
user-defined group
313
Actions table
The following table is for use with the Rule Builder. It lists the various actions a Manager can take to
respond to alert events. These actions are configured in the rules window’s Actions box.
The table’s Action column lists the actions that are available. They are alphabetized for easy
reference. The Description column briefly states how the action behaves. The Fields column lists
the primary data fields that apply with each action. Some data fields will vary, depending on the
options you select.
Action
Add Domain User
To Group
Description
Fields
This action adds a
domain user to a specified user group that
resides on a particular
Agent.
Domain Controller Agent
Select the alert field or constant that defines
the Agent on which the group to be modified
resides.
To modify a group at the domain level, specify
a domain controller as the Agent.
Group Name
the group that is to be modified.
Username
the user who is to be added to the group.
Add Local User To
Group
This action adds a local
user to a specified user
group that resides on a
particular Agent.
Agent
resides.
To modify a group at the domain level, specify
a domain controller as the Agent.
Group Name
Username
the user who is to be added to the group.
314
Actions table
Action
Description
Fields
Add UserDefined Group
Element
This action adds a new
data element to a
particular user-defined
group.
User-Defined Group Element
From the User-Defined Groups list, select
the User-Defined Group that is to receive the
new data Element.
Value
the data element that is to be added to the
specified User-Defined Group. The fields will
vary according to which User-Defined Group
you select.
Append Text To
File
This action appends
text to a file. This
allows you to data from
an alert and put it in a
text file.
Agent
the Agent on which the file to be appended is
located.
File Path
the path to the Agent file that is to be
appended with text.
Text
the text to be appended to file.
Block IP
This action blocks an
IP address.
IP Address
Select the alert field or constant that identifies
the device’s IP address.
315
Action
Description
Fields
Create User
Account
This action creates a
new user account on an
Agent.
Agent
the Agent on which the new user account is to
be added.
To create a user account at the domain level,
specify a domain controller as the Agent.
Account Name
Select the alert field or constant that names
the account that is to be created.
Account Password
the password that is to be assigned to the
new account.
Create User
Group
This action creates a
specified user group on
an Agent.
A user group is a new
group of Windows
users on a Windows
PC, server, or network
who are external to the
TriGeo system.
Delete User
Account
Agent
the Agent on which the new user group is to
reside.
To create a user group at the domain level,
Group Name
which user group is to be created.
This action deletes a
user account from an
Agent.
Agent
the Agent on which the user account is to be
deleted.
To delete a user account at the domain level,
Account Name
Select the alert field or constant that names
the account that is to be deleted.
316
Actions table
Action
Description
Fields
Delete User
Group
This action deletes a
user group from a
particular Agent.
Agent
the Agent on which the user group to be
deleted resides.
To delete a user group at the domain level,
Group Name
the user group that is to be deleted.
Detach USB
Device
This action detaches a
USB mass storage
device that is
connected to an Agent.
Agent
the Agent from which the USB device is to be
detached.
Device
the device ID of the USB device that is to be
detached.
Disable Domain
User Account
This action disables a
Domain User Account
on a Domain Controller
Agent.
the Domain Controller Agent on which the
domain user is to be disabled.
Destination Account
the account that is to be disabled.
Disable Local
User Account
local user account on
an Agent.
Agent
the Agent on which the local user is to be
disabled.
Destination Account
the account that is to be disabled.
317
Action
Description
Fields
Disable
Networking
This action disables an
Agent’s network
access.
Agent
The result is that the
specified Agent will be
unable to connect to
the network.
Disable Windows
Machine Account
the Agent that is to be disabled from the
network.
Message
Type the message that is to appear on the
Agent.
Windows machine
account that resides on
a Domain Controller
Agent.
account is to be disabled.
Destination Account
Select the alert field or constant that specifies
which Windows account is to be disabled.
Enable Domain
User Account
This action enables a
Domain User Account
on a Domain Controller
Agent.
domain user is to be enabled.
Destination Account
the account that is to be enabled.
Enable Local
User Account
local user account on
an Agent.
Agent
the Agent on which the local user is to be
enabled.
Destination Account
the account that is to be enabled.
318
Actions table
Action
Description
Fields
Enable Windows
Machine Account
Windows machine
account that resides on
a Domain Controller
Agent.
account is to be enabled.
Destination Account
Select the alert field or constant that specifies
which Windows account is to be enabled.
Incident Alert
This action escalates
potential issues by
creating an Incident
Alert.
Alert
Select which Incident Alert the rule is to
create.
Alert Fields
From the list pane, select the alerts and
constants that define the appropriate data
elements for each alert fields The fields vary,
depending on which Incident Alert alert is
selected.
Infer Alert
Kill Process by
ID
This action escalates
potentially irregular
audit traffic into
security events by
creating (or “inferring”) a
new alert with a higher
severity.
Alert
Select which Alert the rule is to infer.
Alert Fields
From the list pane, select the alerts and
constants that define the appropriate data
elements for each alert field. The fields vary,
depending on the which alert is selected.
This action terminates
the specified process
on an Agent by using
its process ID value.
Agent
the Agent on which the process is to be
terminated.
Process ID
the ID number of the process that is to be
terminated.
319
Action
Description
Fields
Kill Process by
Name
This action terminates
the specified process
on an Agent by referring
to the process name.
Agent
the Agent on which the process is to be
terminated.
Process Name
the name of the process that is to be
terminated.
Account Name
the name of the account that is running the
process to be terminated.
Log Off User
This action logs the
user off of an Agent.
Agent
the Agent from which the user is to be logged
off.
Account Name
the specific account name that is to be logged
off.
Modify State
Variable
This action modifies a
state variable.
State Variable
From the State Variables list, drag the state
variable that the rule is to modify.
State Variable Fields
From the appropriate component list, type or
drag the data element that is to be modified in
the state variable. The fields vary, depending
on the which state variable is selected.
320
Actions table
Action
Remove Domain
User From Group
Description
Fields
This action removes a
domain user from a specified user group that
Agent.
the domain controller Agent on which the
group to be modified resides.
Group Name
User Name
the user who is to be removed from the group.
Remove Local
User From Group
local user from a specified user group that
Agent.
Agent
resides.
Group Name
User Name
the user who is to be removed from the group.
Remove UserDefined Group
Element
data element from a
particular user-defined
group.
User-Defined Group
From the User-Defined Groups list, select
the user-defined group from which the
specified data element is to be removed.
Value
the data element that is to be removed from
the specified user-defined group. The fields
will vary according to which user-defined
group you select.
321
Action
Description
Fields
Reset User
Account
Password
This action resets a
user account password
on a particular Agent.
Agent
the Agent on which the user password is to be
reset.
To reset an account at the domain level,
Account Name
the user account that is to be reset.
New Password
the user’s new password.
Restart Machine
This action reboots an
Agent.
Agent
the Agent that is to be rebooted.
Delay (sec)
Type the time (in seconds) after the event
occurs that the Manager is to wait before
rebooting the Agent.
Restart Windows
Service
This action restarts the
specified Windows
service on an Agent.
Agent
the Agent on which the Windows service will
be restarted.
Service Name
the name of the service that is to be restarted.
322
Actions table
Action
Description
Fields
Send Email
Message
This action sends a
preconfigured email
message to a
predetermined email
distribution list.
Email Template
Select the template that the email message is
to use. For more information on email
templates, see "Configuring Email
Templates" on page 230.
Recipients
Click the check boxes to select which users
are to receive the email message.
Email Fields
Either drag a field from the components list, or
select a constant from the components list to
select the appropriate data elements that are
to appear in each email template field. The
fields vary, depending on which email
template is selected.
Send Popup
Message
This action displays a
pop-up message to an
Agent.
Agent
the Agent that is receive the pop-up message.
Account Name
the user account to receive the message.
Message
the message that is to appear on the Agent’s
monitor.
Shutdown
Machine
This action shuts down
an Agent.
Agent
the Agent that is to be shut down.
Delay (sec)
Type the time (in seconds) after the event
occurs that the Manager is to wait before
shutting down the Agent.
323
Action
Description
Fields
Start Windows
Service
This action starts the
specified Windows
Agent
the Agent on which the Windows service is to
be started.
Service Name
the Windows service that is to be started.
Stop Windows
Service
This action stops the
specified Windows
Agent
the Agent on which the Windows service is to
be stopped.
Service Name
the Windows service that is to be stopped.
324
Chapter 11: Users
About the Users view
The Users view is used to manage the system users who are associated with each TriGeo Manager.
By adding email addresses for each user, the Console can notify users of alert conditions by email.
In this chapter, you will learn how to:
l
use the key features of the Users grid
l
add new users and user email addresses
l
view a user's system privileges
l
edit user settings
l
delete users.
325
Chapter 11: Users
Users view features
This topics in this section describe the key features of the Users view, the meaning of each column in
the Users grid, and how to refine the Users grid.
Users view features
The Users view
326
Users view features
The following table describes the key features of the Users view.
Item
Name
Description
Refine
Results
This form behaves like a search engine. It lets you apply filters to
the Users grid to reduce the number of users it shows. See
"Refining the Users grid" on page 329.
Users grid
The Users grid displays all of the system users who are
associated with each Manager throughout your network.
Click this button to add a new user.
User
Information
This pane displays detailed information about the user who is
currently selected in the grid, including the user’s role, password
information, and contact information. When editing a user, the
User Information pane turns into an editable form.
327
Chapter 11: Users
Users grid columns
By default, the Users grid shows all users who are configured for all Managers that are monitored by
the Console. However, you can use the Refine Results form to refine the grid’s contents.
you are using.
Column
Description
perform on the item that is currently selected in the grid.
l
l
Status
Use the Edit command to edit the user’s settings and contact
information.
Use the Delete command to delete the user.
Indicates if the user is currently logged on to the Console:
means the user is logged on.
means the user is not logged on.
User Name
Displays the name the user uses to log on to the Manager.
First Name
Displays the user’s first name.
Last Name
Displays the user’s last name.
Role
Displays the user role that has been assigned to the user. For more
information on user roles, see "Adding new users" on page 330.
Description
Displays a brief description of the user’s job function or responsibility.
Manager
States which Manager the user is associated with.
Last Login
States the date and time the user last logged on to the system.
328
By default, the Users grid shows all users for all Managers. The Refine Results form behaves like a
search engine, letting you apply filters to the grid to reduce the number of users it shows.
you are using.
Field
Description
Reset
Click Reset to return the form and the Users grid to their default settings.
Manager
Select the Manager you want to work with. By default, the grid displays All
Managers.
Role
Select the user role you want to work with. By default, the grid displays All
roles.
Last Login
Date Range
Type or select the begin and end date range to display the users who have
logged in within that date range.
329
Chapter 11: Users
Adding new users
The following procedure explains how to add and configure new users. You will add each new user by
opening and completing the User Information form. This form records each user’s individual
settings. It also allows you to record a user’s email addresses, which the Manager can use to notify
the user when an appropriate alert event occurs.
To add a new user:
1. Open the Build ► Users view.
2. At the top of the Users grid, click Add User.
Below the grid, a blank User Information form appears. A completed form is shown here for
reference purposes.
3. Complete the User Information form, as described in the following table.
Field
Description
Manager
list
In the upper-right corner of the form, select the Manager this user will be
associated with.
User Name
Type the user’s TriGeo system user name. This is the name the user will
use when logging into the Manager.
First Name
Type the user’s first name.
Last Name
Type the user’s last name.
330
Adding new users
Field
Description
Password
Type the user’s TriGeo system password. This is the password the user
will use when logging into the Manager. This can be an initial system
password or a temporary password that is assigned to replace a
forgotten password.
If you have the Must Meet Complexity Requirements option checked
in the Appliances view's Settings tab, the Console enforces the
following password policy:
l
l
Passwords must have a minimum of six characters. Spaces are
not allowed.
Passwords must have two of the following three attributes:
o
At least one special character
o
At least one number
o
A mix of lowercase and uppercase letters.
Confirm
Password
Type the password a second time to verify that you entered it correctly.
Role
Select the appropriate role for this user:
l
l
l
l
Administrators are users who have full access to the system,
and can view and modify everything. These users are designated
with a green icon.
Auditors are users who have extensive view rights to the
system, but cannot modify anything other than their own filters.
These users are designated with a blue icon.
Monitors are users who can access the Console, but cannot
view or modify anything, and must be provided a set of filters.
These users are designated with a yellow icon.
Contacts are users who cannot access the Console, but do
receive external notification. These users are designated with a
red icon.
View Role
After selecting a user role, you can click the View Role button to open
the Privileges form, which shows the system privileges for that role.
This information is provided here for reference purposes and cannot be
changed.
Description
Type a brief description (up to 50 characters) of the user’s title, position,
or area of responsibility.
331
Chapter 11: Users
Field
Description
Contact
Information
Use this section to record the user’s email addresses, so the Manager
can notify users of network security events by email. You can add as
many email addresses as you need for each user.
It is always a good idea to test each email address to confirm that it has
been entered correctly and that it works properly.
To add the user’s email address:
1. Click the “add”
button.
2. In the box that appears (shown here), type the user’s email
address and then click Save.
3. The email address appears in the Contact Information section.
4. Repeat this procedure as needed, to record each email address
that applies to the user.
4. When you are finished, click Save to save the new user; otherwise, click Cancel.
332
After selecting a user role, you can use the View Role button to view the system privileges that are
associated with the user’s assigned role.
To view a user’s system privileges:
2. In the Users grid, double-click to user you want to work with.
Below the grid, the User Information pane displays the user’s current settings.
3. Click the View Role button.
The Privileges form appears, showing the user’s system privileges for his or her assigned
role. This information is provided here for reference purposes and cannot be changed.
4. When you are finished viewing the role’s privileges, click Close to return to the Console.
333
Chapter 11: Users
Editing user settings
Follow this procedure to edit an existing user’s configuration settings. You can also edit the user’s
email addresses to make corrections or keep them current. If an email address becomes obsolete,
you can also easily remove it.
To edit a user’s settings:
2. In the Users grid, do one of the following:
l
Double-click the user you want to work with.
l
Click to select the user you want to work with. Then click the row’s gear
button
and click Edit.
Below the grid, the User Information pane displays the user’s current settings and becomes
an editable form.
3. Make the necessary changes to the User Information form. For instruction on completing this
form, see "Adding new users" on page 330.
4. Click Save.
To delete a user’s email address:
2. In the Users grid, click to select the user you want to work with.
4. In the User Information form’s Contact Information section, click the “delete”
next to each email address you want to delete.
The system removes that particular contact information.
5. Click Save.
334
button
Deleting users
Deleting users
Follow this procedure to delete a user from a Manager.
To delete a user:
2. In the Users grid, click to select the user you want to delete.
3. Click the gear
Note: You cannot delete the admin user from the system.
4. At the Confirmation prompt, click Yes to delete the user; otherwise, click No.
The user is removed from the Users list. This user is no longer authorized to use the Manager.
335
About TriGeo tools
Before you can begin using the TriGeo SIM Console, you must configure your Managers and Agents
to work with each of your third-party network security products, such as firewalls, anti-virus software,
intrusion detection systems, and various operating system tools.
You will do this with the Tool Configuration form. The Tool Configuration form connects your
network security products to the TriGeo SIM. Once these products have been connected, you can
receive alert messages from these products; consolidate their alerts and reports into a centralized
system for automated analysis, response, and event correlation; and report any potential security
incidents.
Throughout this chapter, the term tool refers to the sensors or actors that are used to connect TriGeo
Managers and Agents to your network security products and devices.
How TriGeo tools work
The Tool Configuration form integrates your security products by connecting each of their event log
sources to a dedicated data sensor. A sensor is a data gathering tool that monitors and interprets a
product’s log data. You will use the Tool Configuration form to identify each product you are using
with the TriGeo SIM, to locate each product’s logging sources, and to connect each logging source to
the appropriate data sensor.
Once in place, the TriGeo sensors monitor your products’ logging source data, compare the data to a
set of patterns and alert normalization assignments, identify “alert” data, and then forward that
information to the Console for alert processing.
Each sensor monitors only one type of log data source. If a product generates more than one log data
source, you must configure a separate sensor for each source. Each configuration of a TriGeo tool is
called a tool instance, or an alias.
The Tool Configuration form also records the settings for tools called actors. Managers use actors
to connect to active response tools and devices, such as firewalls and email, which can perform
specific functions or actions when directed to do so by the Manager’s security policies.
For example, an actor tells a Manager how to connect to a particular firewall when the Manager
issues a command for that firewall to block an IP address. Or, if you want the Manager to notify
people via email when there is a particular alert condition, the actor tells the Manager how to send the
email message.
337
Manager tools
To fully integrate your network security products and devices with the TriGeo SIM, begin by
configuring the Manager’s sensor and actor tools. The Tool Configuration form lets you connect the
Manager’s tools to any supported products or devices that are installed on or remotely logging to that
Manager. After the tools are configured, the Manager can monitor and interact with those products
and devices.
Manager tools run locally, on the Manager appliance. A Manager’s sensor tools monitor log files about
the Manager itself, as well as data that is logged to the Manager from remote devices that cannot
have their own Agents, such as firewalls. A Manager’s active response tools (actors) allow the
Manager to run remote actions and to send email.
Agent tools
After configuring a Manager’s tools, you must configure the sensor and actor tools for each Agent that
is associated with that Manager. The Tool Configuration form lets you connect the Agent’s tools to
any supported products that are installed on or remotely logging to the Agent’s computer. After the
Agent tools are configured, the Manager can monitor and interact with the products and devices on
that computer.
Agents tools run locally to monitor data on the Agent’s computer. An Agent’s sensors generally
monitor log files, as well as data that is logged to the Agent’s computer from remove devices that
cannot have their own Agents. An Agent’s active response tools (actors) allow the Agent to receive
instructions from the Manager and perform active responses locally, on the Agent’s computer, such
as sending pop-up messages or detaching USB devices.
Using Tool Profiles to configure multiple Agents
Most Agents in a network have only a few different tool configurations. Therefore, you can greatly
speed up the tool configuration process by creating Tool Profiles. A Tool Profile is a group of Agents
that share the same tool configuration. It allows you to configure a set of standardized tool settings,
and then apply those settings to all of the Agents that are assigned to that profile. Once applied, every
Agent in the profile will then have the exact same tool settings.
One of the great benefits of using Tool Profiles is that you can maintain all of the Agents in a profile at
once by updating only the Tool Profile’s tool configuration. The system then propagates your changes
to all of the Agents in the profile.
By using Tool Profiles, you can greatly speed up the process of connecting your network security
products to the TriGeo SIM. If you do not use Tool Profiles, you will have to create at least one tool
instance for every product that you intend to integrate with the TriGeo SIM, and then repeat this
process for every one of your Agents.
338
Supported products
A well-planned set of Tool Profiles provides you with a versatile and efficient method for configuring
and maintaining your Agents’ tool configurations. For more information on Tool Profiles, see
"Configuring Tool Profiles" on page 241.
Supported products
TriGeo supports a continuously expanding list of leading network security products. TriGeo adds
value to these products by integrating them into one comprehensive solution. You can find a current
list of supported products at: www.trigeo.com/products/supportedlists/.
In addition, TriGeo Network Security will work with you to integrate custom products, or to add
products that are not currently supported. For more information about supporting specific products
that are not listed on the TriGeo web site, please send an e-mail message to sales@trigeo.com.
339
Actor
An actor is a tool that initiates or completes active responses to security alert conditions when
directed to do so by the Manager’s security policies. An actor provides functionality for the Manager
and Agent software to interact with a device or application (such as a firewall, router, or email server),
and causes that device to perform an active response. Briefly, an actor is the interface between
incoming alerts and external devices. It is the software that says which response needs to happen,
and how to do it.
Agent
An Agent is software that is installed on a client computer that connects the client computer to a
Manager. Each Agent performs the following functions:
l
It uses sensors to monitor network security product log source data on the client computer for
potential “security alert” situations. The Agent can monitor multiple log sources for each product.
l
It transmits alert information from the client computer to the Manager.
l
It uses actors to process active responses from the Manager to the client computer.
An Agent can monitor multiple network security products, so long as those products are supported by
TriGeo, and they are installed on or remotely logging to the same computer the Agent is installed on.
Configured tool instance (Alias)
Each TriGeo sensor and actors can have more than one configuration. Each configuration is called a
tool instance (also called an alias). Tool instances let you use the same sensor to monitor multiple
logging sources with a single Agent. They allow you to differentiate between an Agent’s different log
file-to-tool mappings.
You will need to create at least one tool instance for each computer’s copy of each product that you
intend to integrate with the TriGeo SIM. Most products typically write to only one log source. For
these products, a single tool instance will suffice. However, some products write to more than one
log. For these products, you will need to create separate tool instances—one instance for each log
source.
Example: Two anti-virus scanners from the same vendor write the same type of log file to two
different places, and you want to monitor them both. To accomplish this, you need to create two tool
instances of the same sensor. One instance (alias) points to the first log file, and a second instance
(alias) points to the second log file. Each tool instance is a way of telling the sensor, “you will find the
same type log source data you need, but in this location, also.”
Example: A primary server is set up to share data from a secondary server to the primary server.
This share defines a single Agent. The same anti-virus software monitors both servers, but the
software places log files on each server. Each sensor alias can only point to one path for each antivirus log. But for the primary server, there are two different anti-virus log file paths—one on each
340
server. Therefore, you must set up aliases that define the paths to the log files on each server so that
the Agent can tell them apart—one alias to monitor “AV-Primary Server” and one alias to monitor “AVSecondary Server.”
Logging sources
Logging sources record data that is reported from your network security applications and devices.
Typical logging sources are text files on the hard drive, or binary sources, such as the Windows
Event Log.
Manager
A Manager is a network appliance that consists of hardware, TriGeo’s security policy management
software, the TriGeo database, and usually the Snort IDS. The Manager software is effectively the
“central processing station” for all Agents that are connected to it. The Manager processes incoming
alerts from its Agents, is responsible for all network security policy decisions, and is responsible for
sending the data to the TriGeo database and/or an external database warehouse.
You can think of a Manager as a server that collects and processes source log data from your
network security products and devices. A network can have more than one Manager. For large
networks, multiple Managers assist with balancing the processing load. Each Manager on a network
is independent of the others—they do not share data or data processing tasks.
Sensor
A sensor is a TriGeo tool that is part of the Manager and Agent software. Sensors interpret the logging
source data that is generated by the network security applications and devices that are integrated
with the TriGeo SIM. The sensor monitors and interprets the log data, coverts it to an alert, and then
forwards it to the Manager for alert processing.
In general, each sensor corresponds to only one logging source from a single vendor’s application,
device, or series of devices. However, some applications or devices have multiple log sources;
therefore, they have multiple sensors assigned to them. For example, McAfee Anti-Virus uses
several different log files, so each log file requires its own sensor.
Tool
Tool is the generic term for the TriGeo sensor or actor that you are configuring for use with a thirdparty network security product, such as a firewall or anti-virus software. Tools configure sensors to
retrieve data from network security products, and they configure actors that allow the Manager to
initiate an active response to an alert condition. Think of a tool as the connection between a your
network security products’ log data and the TriGeo SIM.
341
Tool Configuration features
The topics in this section describe key features of the Tool Configuration form, its grid columns, its
tool icons, and how to use its Refine Results form.
The Tool Configuration form has similar features, whether you are configuring or editing a Manager,
an Agent, or a Tool Profile.
The Tool Configuration form
The following table describes the key features of the Tool Configuration form.
Item
Name
Description
Sidebar
button
Click the Sidebar button to alternately hide and open the form’s
Refine Results pane.
342
Item
Name
Description
Refine
Results pane
By default, the Tools grid shows all of the products that TriGeo
supports. The Refine Results pane lets you apply filters to the grid
to reduce the number of products it shows. This way, you can
show only those products that are configured for use with this
Agent, or that are associated with a particular product category or
status (Running or Stopped).
Tools grid
The Tools grid lists all of the TriGeo sensor and actor tools that are
available to each Agent. These tools are what allow the TriGeo
SIM to monitor and interact with your network security products
and devices.
Tools are organized by category and product name. Each TriGeo
tool is named after the third-party product it is designed to
configure for use with the TriGeo SIM.
Click this button to create a new tool instance the sensor or actor
that is currently selected in the Tools grid.
Properties
pane
This pane displays detailed information about the tool that is
currently selected in the Tools grid.
l
l
If the tool is not configured, this pane displays a description
of the tool.
If the tool is configured, this pane displays the tool’s
configuration settings as read-only information.
Whenever you add or edit a tool, this pane turns into an editable
form for recording the tool’s configuration settings.
343
Tools grid columns
The following table briefly describes the meaning of each column in the Tool Configuration form’s
Tools grid.
Column
Description
The gear button opens a menu of commands that apply to the tool that is
currently selected in the grid.
Status
Shows the tool’s current connection status:
means the tool is connected and running.
means the tool is disconnected and not running.
Category
The high-level tool category, such as anti-virus tools, firewall tools,
operating system tools, etc. For more information, see "Tool categories"
on page 359.
Name
The name of the TriGeo actor, sensor, or tool instance. Typically, TriGeo
tools are named after the third-party products they are designed to
configure for use with the TriGeo SIM.
For a description of the icons that appear in this column, see "Tools grid
icons" on page 345.
344
Tools grid icons
Tools grid icons
The following table describes the icons used in the Tool Configuration utility’s node tree.
Icon
Description
A blue tool icon represents a TriGeo sensor for a particular product. The sensor
displays the name of the product it is designed to monitor.
Each tool instance (or alias) that is currently configured to monitor that product is
listed below the tool. If no tool instances are listed, it means the product, on this
Agent computer, has not been configured for use with the TriGeo SIM.
Whenever you select a sensor in the grid, the lower pane displays the tool’s name
and a description of the TriGeo sensor, when available.
The orange tool icon represents a TriGeo actor for a product that can perform an
active response. The actor displays the name of the product it is designed to
interact with.
Each tool instance (or alias) that is currently configured to initiate an active
response on that product is listed below the tool. If no tool instances are listed, it
means the product, on this Agent computer, has not been configured for use with
the TriGeo SIM.
Whenever you select an actor in the grid, the lower pane displays the tool’s name
and a description of the TriGeo actor, when available.
This icon represents a configured instance of a sensor tool. Each sensor can
have more than one instance, where each configuration is identified by a different
name, called an alias. In the grid, each configured tool instance appears below its
tool.
Whenever you select a sensor tool instance in the grid, the lower pane displays
the sensor tool’s name, and the tool instance’s name (or alias) and configuration
settings. The Status column displays each instance’s current status—Stopped (
) or Running ( ).
This icon represents a configured instance of an actor tool. Each actor can have
more than one instance, where each configuration is identified by a different
name, called an alias. In the grid, each configured tool instance appears below its
tool.
Whenever you select an actor tool instance in the grid, the lower pane displays
the actor tool’s name, and the tool instance’s name (or alias) and configuration
settings. The Status column displays each instance’s current status—Stopped (
) or Running ( ).
345
Refining the Tools grid
By default, the Tools grid shows every tool (sensor and actor) that can be configured for use with a
particular Agent or Manager. To help you work more efficiently with a long list of tools, the Refine
Results pane lets you apply filters to the Tools grid to reduce the number of tools it shows.
When you select options in the Refine Results pane, the Tools grid refreshes to show only those
sensor and actors that match the options you have selected. The other tools are still there; however,
they are hidden. To restore them to the grid, simply click the Reset button or select All in the
refinement lists you are using.
The following table explains how to use the Refine Results pane.
Field
Description
Reset
Click Reset to clear the form and return the Tools grid to its default state
(showing all tools).
Search
Use this field to perform keyword searches for specific products, such as
“Cisco” or “McAfee.” To search, type the text you want to search for in the
text box. Then press Enter or click the magnifying glass symbol. The grid
displays only those products that match or include the text you entered.
Configured
Tools
Select this check box to have the Tools grid show only those tool
instances that are currently configured for the Manager or Agent you are
working with.
Clear this check box to have the grid list both configured and unconfigured
tools.
Category
Select a high-level category to list the TriGeo tools that are available to
support third-party products in that category. Each TriGeo tool is named
after the product it is designed to configure for use with the TriGeo SIM.
Note: If you cannot find a particular product, it is either not supported, or it
is in a different category.
Status
Select Running to list all of the tools that are currently running on the
Manager or Agent you are working with.
Select Stopped to list all of the tools that are currently stopped on the
Manager or Agent you are working with.
346
To protect the integrity of your network security infrastructure, you must configure the tools needed to
connect the TriGeo SIM to your network’s various security products and devices. To do this,
Managers and Agents use tools called sensors and actors. Sensors monitor the log data that is
written by your security products and devices. Actors transmit responses from the Manager to your
security products and devices, to prompt them to take a particular action.
These tools are configured with the Tool Configuration form. You will use this form with each
Manager, and with each Agent that is associated with a Manager. The procedure for configuring
Manager tools and Agent tools is the same. When you are finished, your Managers will be able to
monitor every one of your network security products’ logging sources, and to respond to each alert
condition with the appropriate notification, escalation, and response requirements for each tool’s
security policies.
Note: Before you configure TriGeo tools (sensors and actors), the network security products or
devices you are connecting to must already be installed on or remotely logging to the computer the
TriGeo SIM will be monitoring.
If you configure a TriGeo tool for a product or device that is not yet installed, you will have to start the
Manager’s or Agent’s tool instance for that product after you install the product. See "Starting a tool
instance" on page 355.
First-time users
Typically, TriGeo configures the tools that connect your network security products and devices to
your company’s Managers during the installation and training process. If you did not receive this
interactive installation, or if you are configuring TriGeo tools for the first time, please read this chapter
carefully.
Once you understand how TriGeo tools work, the following procedures will guide you through the tool
configuration process needed to integrate the TriGeo SIM with your network security products and
devices.
347
A note about TriGeo nDepth
TriGeo nDepth is an appliance and plug-in application that is sold separately. If you are using nDepth,
each TriGeo SIM (Manager) has its own dedicated nDepth appliance that is mounted in a rack with
the Manager. nDepth stores all of the original log file data from each host (network device) and source
(application or tool) that passes through the Manager. The data is stored in its entirety and in real time.
This is relevant here because each TriGeo actor and sensor tool has nDepth configuration settings,
whether you use nDepth or not. Therefore, you need to know what these settings mean.
1. First, decide which network security applications and devices that are being monitored by the
Manager are to also send their log file data to nDepth.
2. Then, when configuring TriGeo tools (actors and sensors) in the Tool Configuration form, be
sure to configure each of these products for use with nDepth. You can choose to route a product’s log file data to the TriGeo SIM, to TriGeo nDepth, or both.
348
Follow this procedure to configure a Manager’s tools (sensors and actors). It lets the Manager monitor
and interact with the supported security products or devices that are installed on or remotely logging
to the Manager computer.
To configure a Manager’s tools:
1. Start the TriGeo SIM Console.
2. Open the Manage ► Appliances view.
3. If you have not already done so, add and configure each TriGeo Manager you will be using with
your network. See details, see "Adding appliances to the Console" on page 380 and "Configuring a Manager's properties" on page 384.
4. Log on to the Manager you want to work with.
5. Open the Tool Configuration for [Manager] form. See "Opening the Tool Configuration
form" on page 351.
6. Add a tool instance for each of the product’s event log sources. See "Adding new tool
instances" on page 353.
7. When you are finished, start the tool instance. See "Starting a tool instance" on page 355.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each product or device that is logging to the Manager computer.
9. Repeat Steps 4–8 for each Manager, until you have configured TriGeo tools for each point on
your network.
349
Configuring Agent tools (general procedure)
Follow this procedure to configure the tools (sensors and actors) the Agent uses to monitor and
interact with each network’s security product and device that is running on the Agent computer.
To configure an Agent’s tools:
1. Open the Manage ► Agents view.
2. Open the Tool Configuration for [Agent] form. See "Opening the Tool Configuration form"
on page 351.
3. Add a tool instance for each of the product’s event log sources. See "Adding new tool
instances" on page 353.
4. When you are finished, start the tool instance. See "Starting a tool instance" on page 355.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each product or device the Agent is monitoring on the Agent’s computer.
6. If you are not using Tool Profiles, repeat Steps 2–5 for each Agent, until you have configured
the TriGeo tools for each point on your network. If you are using Tool Profiles, you can use a
configured Agent as a template for a Tool Profile. For more information, see "Configuring Tool
Profiles" on page 241.
350
Use the following procedure whenever you need to open the Tool Configuration form. Typically, you
will open this form for the following reasons:
l
To configure and manage a Manager’s sensor, actor, and notification tools.
l
To configure and manage an Agent’s sensor and actor tools.
l
To change the tools configured in an Agent’s Tool Profile.
Note: To change a Tool Profile's membership and properties, edit the Tool Profile in the Build
► Groups view.
You must be logged on to a Manager before you can configure its tools or its Agents’ tools. See
"Logging in and out of Managers" on page 382.
Opening a Manager’s Tool Configuration form:
1. On the TriGeo SIM Console, click Manage ► Appliances.
2. In the Appliances grid, click to select the Manager you want to work with.
3. If needed, log in to the Manager. To do so, click the gear
4. Click the gear
button and then click Login.
button and then click Tools.
The Tool Configuration for [Manager] form appears. You may now add the tool instances
for each network security product or device this Manager is to monitor or interact with on the
Manager computer. For details, see "Adding new tool instances" on page 353.
Opening an Agent’s Tool Configuration form:
1. If needed, log in to the Manager you want to work with.
2. On the TriGeo SIM Console, click Manage ► Agents.
3. In the Agents grid, click to select the Agent you want to work with.
4. Click the gear
l
l
If the Agent is not in a Tool Profile, the Tool Configuration for [Agent] form appears.
You may now add the tool instances for each network security product or device this
Agent is to monitor or interact with on the Agent’s computer. For details, see "Adding
new tool instances" on page 353.
If the Agent is in a Tool Profile, the Agent Tool Configuration prompt appears. This
prompt simply warns you that the Agent belongs to a Tool Profile.
351
You can choose to edit the Tool Profile, which affects every Agent in that profile; or you
can remove the Agent from the profile to configure the Agent separately.
l
To edit the Tool Profile, click Tool Profile.
The Tool Configuration for [Tool Profile] form appears. You may now begin adding,
editing, or deleting the tool instances associated with that Tool Profile.
l
To remove the Agent from the Tool Profile and configure its tools separately, click
Agent Tool Configuration.
The Tool Configuration for [Agent] form appears. You may now add the tool
instances for each network security product or device this Agent is to monitor or
interact with on the Agent’s computer.
352
In this procedure, you will use the Tool Configuration form to do the following:
l
l
Configure the tool settings for each sensor that is to gather data from a network security product’s event logs.
Configure the tool settings for each actor that is to initiate an active response from a network
security product or device.
Each configuration of a TriGeo sensor or actor tool is called a tool instance. Most products typically
write to only one log source. For these products, a single tool instance will suffice. However, some
products write to more than one log. For these products, you will need to create separate tool
instances—one instance for each log source. When a product requires more than one instance, you
can differentiate between them by assigning each instance a unique name, called an alias.
To add a new tool instance:
1. Open the Tool Configuration form for the Manager or Agent you want to work with.
2. If desired, use the Refine Results pane to select the tool Category you want to work with. For
information on categories, see "Tool categories" on page 359.
3. In the Tools grid, click to select the tool you want to configure.
l
The
icon means the tool is for a sensor.
l
The
icon means the tool is for an actor.
l
At the top of the Tools grid, click New.
l
Click the tool row’s gear
button and then click New.
The Properties pane opens as an editable form, as shown here.
The fields that appear on the form vary from one tool to another, in order to support the product
or device you are configuring. For new instances, the form displays the default tool settings
353
needed to configure the associated product or device. In most cases, you can save the tool
with its default settings; however, you can change the settings, as needed.
5. Complete the Properties form, as needed.
To assist you, we have prepared some reference tables that explain the meaning of each field
you may encounter in the Properties form.
l
l
l
6. Click Save to save the tool configuration as a new tool instance; otherwise, click Cancel.
Upon saving, the following things happen in the Tools grid:
l
If you configured a sensor, a sensor tool instance
icon appears below the tool you
are working with.
l
If you configured an actor, an actor tool instance
icon appears below the tool you
are working with.
l
The
icon in the Status column means the tool instance is stopped. All new tool
instances automatically have a status of Stopped. To begin using the tool, you must
start it.
7. To start the tool instance, click its gear
button and then click Start.
After a moment, the system starts the tool instance. Upon starting, the tool’s Status icon
changes to . The selected tool instance is now running.
8. If needed, repeat Steps 3–7 for each additional tool instance that is required to fully integrate
this product or device with the TriGeo SIM.
354
Whenever you finish adding or reconfiguring a tool instance, you must start it so it can begin running.
Starting a tool instance enables that particular tool configuration. If the tool instance is for a sensor,
starting it enables the sensor to begin monitoring the product’s event log. If the tool instance is for an
actor, starting it enables the actor to begin initiating active responses on that product when requested
to do so by policy.
To start a tool instance:
2. In the Tools grid, click to select the tool instance you want to start.
3. Click the tool instance’s gear
button and then click Start.
After a moment, the system starts the tool instance. Upon starting, the tool’s Status icon
changes to . The selected tool instance is now running.
Common problems with starting tool instances
If the tool fails to start, the TriGeo Console will display a Warning or a Failure alert that states the
problem. Normally, tools fail to start for either of the following reasons:
l
The network security device’s log file does not exist.
l
The Agent does not have permission to access the file.
Stopping a tool instance
Use this procedure to stop a tool instance. You must always stop a tool instance before you can edit
or delete that tool instance. However, you can also stop a tool instance to prevent the tool from
gathering data for the TriGeo Console, or to prevent it from initiating active responses on a network
security product or notification system.
To stop a tool instance:
2. In the Tools grid, click to select the tool instance you want to stop.
button and then click Stop.
After a moment, the system stops the tool instance. When the tool’s Status icon changes to
, it means the tool has stopped.
Once a tool instance has been stopped, it can be edited, deleted, or restarted, as needed. The
tool instance will remain stopped until you restart it.
355
Editing a tool instance
When needed, you can edit an existing tool instance’s configuration settings. However, you cannot
edit its name (alias). If you need to rename a tool instance alias, you must delete the current tool
instance and create a new one with the new name. Also, you cannot edit the Log File value for some
Windows event log sensors.
Use this procedure whenever you need to correct or change a TriGeo tool’s configuration. If you are
using TriGeo nDepth, also see "A note about TriGeo nDepth" on page 348.
To edit a tool instance:
2. In the Tools grid, click to select the tool instance you want to edit.
4. To edit the tool, click the gear
To assist you, we have prepared some reference tables that explain the meaning of each field
you may encounter in the Properties form.
l
l
l
7. When you are finished, restart the tool instance by clicking the gear
ing Start.
356
button and then click-
When needed, you can delete an obsolete or incorrect tool instance.
To delete a tool instance:
2. In the Tools grid, click to select the tool instance you want to delete.
4. Click the tool instance’s
5. At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to delete the tool instance.
After a moment, the tool instance disappears from the Tools grid.
357
Using an Agent to edit a Tool Profile
You can use an Agent that is a member of a Tool Profile as a vehicle for editing that profile’s tool
settings. You can add new tool instances to the profile, or edit or delete its existing instances. Use
caution when editing a Tool Profile. The changes you make will apply to every Agent that is a member
of that profile.
You can also edit a Tool Profile's tool settings from the Manage ► Agents view. For details, see
"Editing a Tool Profile’s tool settings" on page 247.
To use an Agent to edit a Tool Profile’s tool settings
2. In the Agents grid, click to select the Agent that is in the Tool Profile you want to edit.
3. Click the gear
The Agent Tool Configuration prompt appears to warn you that the Agent belongs to a Tool
Profile.
4. Click Tool Profile.
The Tool Configuration for [Tool Profile] form appears. You may now begin adding,
editing, or deleting the tool instances that are associated with that Tool Profile.
358
The tables in this section describe the various categories of network security products that can be
connected to the TriGeo SIM, and explain the fields for configuring sensors, actors, and notification
systems.
Tool categories
The following table describes the various categories of network security products that can be
connected to the TriGeo SIM. The Description column describes how the TriGeo tools (sensors and
actors) typically work with each type of product or device. The Use with columns indicate if each
product type requires Manager tools, Agent tools, or both.
Use with
Category
Description
Anti-Virus
This category lets you configure sensors for use
with common anti-virus products. These
products protect against, isolate, and remove
viruses, worms, and Trojan programs from
computer systems.
Managers
Agents
ü
ü
To configure an anti-virus tool, the anti-virus
software must already be installed on the Agent
computer.
Some anti-virus tools can also be run on the
Manager by remotely logging from an Anti-Virus
server.
Due to software conflicts, it is recommended
that you run only one brand of anti-virus software
per computer.
Application
Switch
Database
with application switches. Application-Layer
switches transmit and monitor data at the
application layer.
This category lets you configure sensors for
use with database auditing products. These
products monitor databases for potential
database intrusions, changes, and database
system events.
359
ü
ü
ü
Use with
Category
File Transfer and
Sharing
Firewalls
Description
Managers
ü
This category lets you configure sensors for
use with file transfer and file sharing products.
These products are used to share files over the
local network and/or Internet. Monitoring these
products provides information about what files
are being transferred, by whom, and system
events.
This category lets you configure sensors and
actors for use with applications and devices that
are used to protect and isolate networks from
other networks and the Internet.
Firewall sensors connect to, read, and retrieve
firewall logs. Most firewalls also have an active
response tool. These tools configure actors that
interface with routers and firewalls to perform
block commands. Actors can perform active
responses either via telnet or serial/console
cable. Normally, you will configure these tools
on the Manager.
To configure a firewall tool, the firewall product
must already be installed on the Agent
computer, or it must be remotely logging to an
Agent or a Manager. Normally, you will configure
these tools on the Manager.
You must also configure each firewall’s data
gathering and active response capabilities
separately. For example, configuring a firewall’s
data gathering capabilities does not configure
the firewall’s active response settings.
360
Agents
ü
ü
Tool categories
Use with
Category
Description
Managers
Identity and
Access
Management
with identity access, identity management, and
other single-sign on tools. These products
provide authentication and single-sign on
capabilities, account management, and other
user access features. Monitoring these products
provides information about authentication and
management of accounts.
IDS and IPS
actors for use with network-based and hostbased intrusion detection systems. These
products provide information about potential
threats on the network or host, and can be used
to raise alarms about possible intrusions,
misconfigurations, or network issues.
ü
ü
Generally, network-based IDS and IPS tools are
configured to log remotely, while host-based
IDS and IPS systems log locally on an agent
system. Some network-based IPS systems
provide the capability to perform an active
response via their actor tool, allowing you to
block an IP address at the IPS device.
Manager
with the Manager and other TriGeo Appliances.
These tools monitor for conditions on the
Manager that may be informational or display
potential problems with the appliances.
361
Agents
ü
ü
Use with
Category
Description
Managers
Agents
Network
Management
with network management tools. These tools
monitor for different types of network activity
from users on the network, such as workstationlevel process and application monitoring.
Generally, these systems are configured to log
remotely from a central monitoring server.
ü
ü
Network Services
with different network services. These tools
monitor service-level activity for different
network services, including DNS and DHCP.
Most network services are configured to log
locally on an agent's system, however, some
are configured to log remotely.
ü
ü
362
Tool categories
Use with
Category
Description
Managers
Operating
Systems
with utilities in the Microsoft Windows operating
system that monitor system events.
Agents
ü
This category includes a Windows Active
Response tool. This tool configures an actor that
enables Windows active response capabilities
on Agents using Windows operating systems.
This allows the TriGeo SIM to perform operating
system-level responses, such as rebooting
computers, shutting down computers, disabling
networking, and disabling accounts.
To configure an operating system tool, the
operating system software must already be
installed on the Agent computer.
If you perform the remote Agent installation, the
Windows NT/2000/XP Event Application Logs
and System Logs tools are configured by
default.
Proxy Servers
and Content
Filters
with different content monitoring tools. These
tools monitor user network activity for such
activities as web surfing, IM/chat, and file
downloads, and events related to administering
the monitoring systems themselves. Generally,
these tools are configured to log remotely from
the monitoring system.
363
ü
ü
Use with
Category
Description
Routers/Switches
This category lets you configure sensors, and in
some cases actors, for use with different routers
and switches. These tools monitor activity from
routers and switches such as
connected/disconnected devices,
misconfigurations or system problems/events,
detailed access-list information, and other
related messages. Some routers/switches have
the capability to configure an actor tool to block
an IP address at the device. Generally, these
tools are configured to log remotely from the
router/switch.
System Scan
Reporters
with different asset scanning tools, such as
vulnerability scanners. These tools provide
information about potential vulnerabilities,
exposures, and misconfigurations with different
devices on the network. Generally, these tools
create alerts in the 'Asset' categories in the
TriGeo alert tree.
System Tools
This category lets you configure the Manager
with an external notification system, so the
TriGeo SIM can transmit alert messages to
TriGeo users via email or pager. For details, see
"Setting up a notification system" on page 371.
ü
VPN and Remote
Access
actors for use with Virtual Private Network
(VPN) server products that provide secure
remote access to networks. Normally, you will
configure these tools on the Manager.
ü
Web Server
with Web server products. To configure a web
server tool, the web server software must
already be installed on the Agent or Manager
computer.
364
Managers
Agents
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Configuring sensors
Configuring sensors
The following table describes each field you’ll find on the Tool Configuration form when configuring
sensors for data gathering tools. The actual fields that appear depend on the tool you are configuring.
Not every field appears with every tool. For convenience, the table is sorted alphabetically by field
name.
Field
Description
Alias
Type a name that easily identifies the application or appliance event log
file that is being monitored. For more information, see "Glossary to
TriGeo tool terms" on page 340.
For active response tools, we recommend you end the alias with “AR”.
For example, an alias for the Cisco PIX Active Response tool might be
“Cisco PIX AR”. This allows you to differentiate the active response
tool from the data gathering tool.
Log File /
Log Directory
When you create a new alias for a tool, the TriGeo SIM automatically
places a default log file path in the Log File box. This path tells the tool
where the operating system stores the product’s event log file.
For most tools, you can change the log file path, as needed. However,
some products write events to the Windows Application Log or the
Windows System Log. In these cases, you are actually configuring the
sensor that monitors events that are written to that log file. For these
tools, the Log File setting is disabled, and the system automatically
populates the Log File field with the name of the Windows event log
the sensor is monitoring.
In most cases, you should be able to use the default log file path that is
shown for the tool. These paths are based on the default vendor
settings and the product documentation for each product. If a different
log path is needed, type or paste the correct path in the Log File box, or
use the Browse button to explore to correct folder or file.
If you are uncertain about which file path to use, either refer to your
original product documentation, or contact TriGeo Technical Support.
Note: If the product creates separate log files based on the current date
or some other fixed interval, you can either select the log directory or
any log file in that directory. If you select a log file, the TriGeo SIM reads
through the directory’s log files in order, from the file you selected to the
most current file. The SIM then reads new files as they are added.
nDepth Host
Type the IP address or host name for the nDepth appliance. Generally,
the default setting is correct. Only change it if you are advised to do so.
365
Field
Description
nDepth Port
Type the port number to which the tool is to send nDepth data. If you are
uncertain, use the default value. Generally, the default setting is
correct. Only change it if you are advised to do so.
New File Name
Interval
Select the interval in which the tool posts and names each new log file.
The interval tells the TriGeo SIM when to begin reading the next log file.
The default setting is Daily: yymmdd.
Output
If you are not using TriGeo nDepth, do not configure the form’s
Output, nDepth Host, and nDepth Port settings. Use the form’s
default settings for these fields. To learn more, see "A note about
TriGeo nDepth" on page 348.
If you are using TriGeo nDepth, select one of the following log file data
output options:
Alert - This is the default option. It sends the tool’s log file data as alerts
to the TriGeo SIM for processing by your correlation rules, associated
active responses, TriGeo Consoles, and databases.
nDepth - This option sends the tool’s log file data to TriGeo nDepth for
archiving. The data does not go to the TriGeo SIM, so any potential alert
activity does not appear in the Alert Panel. However, you can still
search the data from the SIM with the nDepth Explorer, or you can
search the data directly in nDepth with the nDepth Browser.
Alert, nDepth - If you are using nDepth, TriGeo recommends that you
choose this option. It sends the tool’s log file data to the TriGeo SIM for
alert processing and to TriGeo nDepth for data archiving. This means
the SIM reports potential alert activity in the Alert Panel, and nDepth
archives the tool’s output data for later reference. Furthermore, you can
access the nDepth data from the SIM with the nDepth Explorer, or you
can search the data directly in nDepth with the nDepth Browser.
Server IP
Address/
[Product] IP
Address/
[Product] Server
Type the IP address of the router or firewall. Use the following IP
address format: 192.123.123.123.
366
Configuring sensors
Field
Description
Sleep Time
Type or select the time (in seconds) the tool sensor is to wait between
event monitoring sessions. The default (and minimum) value for all tools
is one (1) second. If you experience adverse effects due to too many
rapid readings of log entries, increase the Sleep Time for the
appropriate tools.
Windows NT-based tools automatically notify Windows Event Log
sensors of new events that enter the log file. Should automatic
notification stop for any reason, the Sleep Time dictates the interval
the sensor is to use for monitoring new events.
Tool Version
This is TriGeo’s release version for this tool. This is read-only
information for reference purposes.
Wrapper Name
This is an identification key that the TriGeo SIM uses to uniquely
identify the properties that apply to this particular tool. This is read-only
information for TriGeo reference purposes.
If the tool settings you need are not shown here, you are probably configuring an active response tool.
See "Tool configuration tables," below. When you have finished configuring the tool settings, don’t
forget to start the tool. See "Starting a tool instance" on page 355.
367
Configuring actors
The following table describes each field you will find on the Tool Configuration form when
configuring actors for active response tools. Because each tool is product-based, the fields that
appear depend on the tool you are currently configuring. Not every field appears with every tool. For
convenience, the table is sorted alphabetically by field name.
Field
Recommended field settings
Advanced
These settings are no longer applicable.
Auth Port
For CheckPoint OPSEC firewalls, select the port used to connect to
the CheckPoint server via the LEA/OPSEC interface.
Base URL
Type the URL to connect to the SonicWALL firewall and perform the
login. Include “http://” at the beginning of the URL.
Note: TriGeo does not support HTTPS. Only use this tool for older
SonicWALL firmware version.
Block Timeout
For CheckPoint OPSEC firewalls, type the timeout in seconds for the
blocks to expire from the firewall. A value of zero (0) means “never
expire.”
Client DN
For CheckPoint OPSEC firewalls, type the client DN string. The “CN”
and “O” must be uppercase.
Configuration Mode
Select either telnet or SerialPort.
Enable Password
Type the tool’s password for entering Enable mode.
Enable Windows
Active Response
For the Windows Active Response tool, select this check box to
enable active response settings.
From Zone
Type the external zone used for configuring restrictions on firewall
connections.
Incoming Interface
Type the Interface for which the block is to be made effective; that is,
the Interface for which incoming traffic will be filtered to prevent traffic
from the blocked IP address.
Password / Login
Password
Type the tool’s login password. For some products, the password
name must be the same one that was used when the firewall was
installed.
368
Configuring actors
Field
Port Name / Serial
Port Name
Select a serial port for performing active response via console cable, if
applicable. The port name represents the physical communication port
on the computer. The port name is only relevant if the Configuration
Mode (below) is set to SerialPort.
/dev/ttyS0 = serial port 1, and
/dev/ttyS1 = serial port 2.
If the Configuration Mode is set to telnet, then this field is disabled
and the Port Name box reads: There are no ports available.
Remote Connection
Port
Type the firewall port used for connecting to and configuring the
firewall.
Server DN
For CheckPoint OPSEC firewalls, type the server DN string. The “cn”
and “o” must be lowercase.
Server Port
For CheckPoint OPSEC firewalls, select the port used to connect to
the CheckPoint server via the SAM/OPSEC interface.
Server /
Server Address /
IP Address /
[Product] IP
Address
Type the IP address of the router or firewall. This address allows the
TriGeo SIM to perform active responses to events on that particular
router or firewall. Use the following IP address format:
192.123.123.123.
SSLCA
For CheckPoint OPSEC firewalls, click the Browse button to locate
the SSL certificate file to upload to the server. If the tool is already
configured, then use the existing certificate on the server. You can
use the same path for both the LEA (log reading) and SAM (active
response) certificates.
Take Admin Control
Only one person can configure the firewall at one time. Selecting this
check box allows the TriGeo SIM’s active response to take
administrative control over the firewall when a user is logged into the
WatchGuard Management Console. That is, the TriGeo SIM
disconnects the user and takes control over the firewall.
To Zone
Type the internal zone used for configuring restrictions on firewall
connections.
369
Field
Tool Configuration
Instance (Alias)
Type a name that easily identifies the product that the TriGeo SIM is
to act on. For active response tools, we recommend you end the alias
with “AR”. For example, an alias for the Cisco PIX Active Response
tool might be “Cisco PIX AR”. This allows you to differentiate the
active response tool from the data gathering tool. For more information
on aliases, see "Glossary to TriGeo tool terms" on page 340.
User Name /
Login User Name
Type the user name needed to log onto and configure the firewall. For
some products, the user name must be the same one that was used
when the firewall was installed.
If the tool settings you need are not shown here, you are probably configuring a sensor (data
gathering) tool. See "Configuring sensors" on page 365. When you have finished configuring the tool
settings, don’t forget to start the tool. See "Starting a tool instance" on page 355.
370
The Tool Configuration form has a category called System Tools that you can use to set up an
external notification system. This allows the Manager to transmit messages to TriGeo users via email or pager, to record pertinent alert data or text to a specified file, or to synchronize your existing
Directory Service Groups with your existing network directory services.
The following table explains how to configure each option in the System Tools category.
Field
Append Text to File Active Response
Description
Use this tool to have the Agent “write” the specified alert data or text to the
specified file.
How to append
Select Newline to write the alert data to the file so that each alert is on a
distinct line (that is, one alert per line), by inserting a “return” or “newline”
character.
Select No Newline to stream the alert data to the file by appending the
new data immediately following any existing data in the file.
Maximum file
size (MB)
Type the allowable maximum file size for the text file, in Megabytes.
Directory Service Query
Description
Use this tool to have the Manager communicate with existing directory
services on the network to retrieve and update group information. This
allows you to synchronize your existing Directory Service Groups for use
with TriGeo rules and filters.
User Name
Type a user name that is valid on the configured domain and server for
authenticating to the domain and retrieving group information.
Directory
Service Server
Type the IP address or host name of your directory services server
(commonly, this is a domain controller).
Domain Name
Type the fully-qualified domain name of your directory services domain.
Password
Type the password for the above user name that is valid on the configured
domain and server for authenticating to the domain and retrieving group
information.
371
Field
Directory
Service Server’s
Port
Type the port used to communicate with the directory service server.
Email Active Response
Description
Use this tool to have a Manager automatically notify TriGeo users of alert
events when configured to do so by alert policy.
Return Display
Name
Type the name that you want to appear in the From field of active
response e-mail messages.
Port
Type the port used to communicate with the internal email server.
Return Address
Type the email address that you want to appear in the From field of active
response email messages.
Mail Host
Type the IP address or host name of an internal SMTP server that the
Manager can use to send email messages through without authentication.
Authentication
Server
Username
Type the user name needed to access the internal email server, if
required.
Authentication
Server
Password
Type the password needed to access the internal email server, if required.
Test E-mail
Address
Type the e-mail address you want to use to test the Mail Host
assignment. When you click the Test Email button, a test message
should appear at this email address.
Test Email
button
This button tests your email notification settings to ensure that you
entered the correct e-mail host.
Click the Test Email button. Then check the email address’s in-box. If
you entered the correct address, the in-box should receive the test
message.
372
About the Appliances view
The Manage ► Appliances view (also called the Appliances view) is used to add, configure, and
maintain each Security Information Manager appliance that is associated with and monitored by the
TriGeo system. Throughout this chapter, we will use appliances as a generic term to include:
l
TriGeo Security Information Managers (or more simply, Managers).
l
database servers
l
logging servers, and
l
network sensors.
This chapter is primarily concerned with Managers, even though other appliances may appear in your
appliance list. Once a Manager is in place, you can use the Appliances view to do the following:
l
Use the Console to connect to and disconnect from a particular Manager.
l
Add a Manager’s Agents.
l
Configure rules, policies, and network security tools that apply to each Manager.
Note: Commands in the Appliances view can take a while to execute, because they must
remotely access the Manager or network appliance.
373
This topic describes the key features of the Appliances view, the Details pane, the Appliances grid,
and its Status icons.
The Appliances view manages your TriGeo SIMs and databases
374
The following table describes the key features of the Manage ► Appliances view.
Item
Name
Description
Appliances
grid
This grid lists all of the Managers and other network appliances that
are monitored by the TriGeo SIM. You can use this grid to add,
configure, or remove appliances, to configure Manager tools and
Manager policy, and to connect to and disconnect from Managers.
Click this button to add a new Manager or network appliance to the
Console.
The gear button at the top of the grid opens commands that you can
perform on multiple selections in the grid, and commands that do not
require a grid selection. Click this button to copy the grid's information
about your Managers to the clipboard, so you can paste it elsewhere,
such as Microsoft Excel for analysis or the Remote Agent Installer for
updates.
Details
The Details pane displays an image of the appliance, as well as
basic properties about that appliance, such as its name, connection
status, etc.
TriGeo provides the images for the last few (and next) generation of
appliances. When you add or configure a Manager, one of the
options is to identify the model. Your choice determines which
picture, if any, is shown.
Properties
The Properties form is used to configure each Manager. It records
the Manager’s configuration settings, such as its login options,
Agent licenses, its password settings, its ability to automatically
send software updates to Agents, and its database warehouse
connection, if applicable.
Note: This form is only used for Managers. It is disabled for other
types of appliances.
375
Appliances grid columns
The following table briefly describes the meaning of each column in the Manage ► Appliances
view’s Appliances grid.
Column
Description
perform on the appliance that is currently selected in the grid, such as
Login, Logout, Configure, Tools (for connecting products to the
appliance), Policy (for assigning alert distribution policy), and Delete.
The Login, Logout, Tools, and Policy options apply only when you have
a Manager selected. If you have a Manager selected but are not connected,
only the Login, Configure, and Delete commands are available.
Status
The appliance’s current connection status:
means Connected/Logged In.
means Disconnected/Logged Off.
Name
The name of the Manager or the appliance.
Type
The type of appliance—Manager, Database, Logging Server, or Network
Sensor.
Version
States the version of the TriGeo Manager software.
Level
The TriGeo model number for the appliance. It is directly related to the
capacity and performance of the appliance, ranging from Level to Level 4.
IP Address
States the Manager’s or the appliance’s IP address.
Port
The port number the Console is using to communicate with the Manager,
the network appliance, or the database.
Service Tag
The Dell serial number or registration number for this appliance. It uniquely
identifies this piece of equipment and its specific configuration properties.
Model
For Managers, states the model number.
User
For Managers, this column displays the user name that is currently logged
on to that Manager.
376
The Details pane
The Details pane
The Details pane displays essential information about an appliance, such as its name, connection
status, IP address, etc. The image area can also display an image for each appliance, if you choose
to provide them.
To view an appliance’s details:
2. If needed, log into the Manager you want to work with.
3. In the Appliances grid, click to select the Manager or appliance you want to work with.
4. If the Details/Properties pane is not already open, click the “open pane” ▲ button at the
bottom of the window.
377
The Details pane displays information about the Manager or appliance you have selected.
Field
Description
Image area
Displays an image of the Manager that is currently selected in the
Appliances grid, if the model number is known and an image is
available.
Status
Displays the Manager’s or the appliance’s current connection status.
Name
Displays the Manager’s or the appliance’s name.
Type
Indicates the appliance type—Manager, Database Server, nDepth,
Logging Server, or Network Sensor.
Version
Displays the version of the TriGeo Manager software.
Level
Displays the specific TriGeo Manager appliance configuration level you
have purchased.
IP Address
Displays the Manager’s or the appliance’s IP address.
Port
Displays the port number that the Console uses to communicate with
the Manager or the appliance.
Service Tag
Displays Dell’s assigned serial number for the Manager appliance. You
can find this number on the Manager information sheet that is provided
with the appliance.
Model
When applicable, this field displays the Manager’s model number. If the
model is unknown, the model may be Other. If the appliance is not a
Manager, this field is empty.
378
If you are setting up a Manager for the first time, you should follow this order of events:
1. On the Console, open the Manage ► Appliances view.
2. Add a Manager to the Console.
3. Log on to the Manager through the Console.
4. Configure the Manager’s properties with the Properties form.
5. Configure the Manager’s tools with the Tool Configuration window.
6. (Optional) Assign the Manager’s alert distribution policy with the Alert Distribution Policy
window.
379
Use this procedure whenever you want to add a new Manager or other network appliance to the
TriGeo Console.
To add a new appliance:
1. At the top of the TriGeo Console, click Manage and then click Appliances.
2. At the top of the Appliances grid, click New.
The New Appliance form appears. This form records information that is required for adding or
configuring a new appliance.
3. Complete the New Appliance form as described in the following table.
Field
Description
Appliance Type
Select the appliance type you are adding—Manager, Database
Server, nDepth, Logging Server, or Network Sensor.
Name
Type the network appliance’s host name, the fully-qualified
domain name, or the IP address.
Example:
Host name: bubbles
Domain name: bubbles.trigeo.com
IP address: 192.1.1.1
380
Field
Description
Connection Port
Type the port number the Console must use to communicate with
the Manager network appliance or the database. The default port
number is 8443.
Note: This field only applies when the Appliance Type field is set
to Manager.
Level
The appliance’s level. Its level is directly related to the appliance's
capacity and performance, ranging from Level 1 to Level 4. If you
are uncertain which level the Manager belongs to, select
Unknown. If you are adding a Database Server, Level 4 is
automatically selected.
Model
Select the appliance's appropriate model. If you are uncertain
which model you have, select Unknown. If you know your model
but it is not listed, select Other. Your selection here has no affect
on the Manager’s operation.
If you selected any of the specific models, a picture of the
appliance appears at the top of the Details pane.
Service Tag
Type the Dell serial number or registration number found on the
appliance. It uniquely identifies this piece of equipment and its
specific configuration properties.
Reset
At any time, you can click Reset to reset the form to its default
settings.
4. Click Save to add the appliance and close the form. Otherwise, click Cancel to return to the
Console without adding the appliance.
381
Logging in and out of Managers
After setting up a new Manager, you need to log on to it. Otherwise, you will not be able to configure it,
receive its alerts, or build any rules for it.
When needed, you can also log out to disconnect from a Manager. You may want to do this to
reconfigure the Manager, or to stop monitoring its alerts.
Note: Only existing Administrator, Auditor, and Monitor TriGeo Users can log on to the TriGeo
system. Contacts cannot log on to the TriGeo SIM.
Logging into a Manager
2. In the Appliances grid, click to select the appliance you want to work with.
3. Click the gear
button and then select Login.
Depending on the Manager’s Login tab settings (in the Properties pane), the SIM Console
may automatically log you on to the appliance. Otherwise, the Login form appears.
4. In the Username box, type user name for this Manager.
5. In the Password box, type your password for this Manager.
6. Click OK or press Enter to log on.
A
icon appears in the Manager’s Status column, indicating that you are logged on to that
Manager.
Logging out of a Manager
2. In the Appliances grid, click the gear
button for the Manager you want to log out of, and
then select Logout.
After a moment, a
icon appears in the Manager’s Status column, indicating that you are
no longer logged on to that Manager.
382
Changing an appliance’s basic configuration settings
Changing an appliance’s basic configuration
settings
Use this procedure whenever you need to change an appliance’s basic configuration settings, such
as its type, name, IP address, connection port, etc.
To reconfigure an appliance:
3. Click the gear
button and then select Configure.
The Configure Appliance form appears. It is the same form used to add a new appliance.
4. Make the necessary changes to the Configure Appliance form. For information on completing the form, see "Adding appliances to the Console" on page 380. If you make a mistake,
you can click Reset to reset the form to its default settings.
5. Click Save.
383
Configuring a Manager's properties
In the Properties pane, the Properties form is used to configure Managers. It records the Manager’s
configuration settings, such as its login options, Agent licenses, its password settings, its ability to
automatically send software updates to Agents, and its database warehouse connection, if
applicable.
Note: The Properties form is only used for Managers. It is disabled for other types of appliances.
Procedure for configuring a Manager
3. If the Details/Properties pane is not already open, click the “open pane” ▲ button at the bottom of the window.
4. Complete Properties form. The following sections describe how to complete each tab.
Note: The Properties form automatically refreshes to display any changes that may have
occurred with the Manager since you opened the form. This ensures that you are looking at the
most current information.
384
The Login tab has two main uses:
l
l
If the Login on console startup option is checked, the system uses this data to automatically connect to the Manager whenever the Console is opened.
If you manually log in to a Manager from the Appliances grid, the system uses this data to
connect the Manager so you don’t have to complete the log in dialog box.
Use the following table to complete the Properties pane’s Login tab.
Option
Description
Username
Type your user name for logging into Manager.
Password
Type your password for logging into the Manager.
Login on
console
startup
Select this check box to have the TriGeo SIM automatically log you
into the Manager upon opening the TriGeo Console. If you prefer to
manually log on, then clear this check box.
385
Option
Description
Save
Credentials
Select this check box to have the Console save the Manager’s user
name and password locally. The Console can then automatically
provide them whenever you log on to a Manager.
o
If you also select the Login on console startup check box,
the Console will automatically log on to the Manager
whenever the Console is started.
o
If the Login on console startup check box is not selected,
then the Console automatically supplies the user name and
password whenever you manually log on to the Manager.
Reconnect on
disconnection
Select this check box to have the Console automatically attempt to
reconnect with the Manager, if the Manager becomes disconnected.
Try to
reconnect
every xx
seconds
Type the number of seconds the Console is to wait before
attempting a new connection with the Manager.
Timeout
reconnection
attempts after
xx tries
Select this check box to have the Console quit its reconnection
attempts with the Manager after a given number of tries, if the
previous connection attempts have been unsuccessful.
Save
Click Save to save the configuration settings.
Cancel
Click Cancel to discard any configuration settings you may have
entered since the last time you saved.
Then type the number of tries the Console is to attempt to reconnect
with the Manager before giving up.
386
The License tab summarizes your available and allocated licenses. It is used to allocate available
licenses of any new Agents that are to be associated with a particular Manager. This tells the
Manager that you are using the Agent licenses for connections that are associated with this Manager.
To add Agent licenses to a Manager:
1. In the Number of Agents to add to Manager box, type the number of new Agents you want
to add to the Manager; or click the Up or Down arrows that are adjacent to the box to increase
or decrease the number of Agents.
The total number of Agents that you may add is equal to the number of licenses that you have
purchased.
2. Click Add.
3. Click Save to add the Agents to the Manager; otherwise, click Cancel.
The new Agents will appear in the Console’s Agent Panel:
4. Click Save to add the Agents to the Manager; otherwise, click Cancel.
The new Agents will appear in the Console’s Agent Panel:
l
If you have already installed the Agent software on individual computers, you will begin
to see Agents connecting in the Agent Panel.
387
l
If you have not installed the Agent software on individual computers, the Agent Panel
will list those Agents as Open License.
License reference information
The following table explains the License tab's remaining reference information.
Field
Description
Available
Licenses
Displays the number of available Agent licenses you have left.
Licenses
Awaiting
Agents
Displays the number of allocated Agent licenses that have not yet been
assigned to a specific Agent.
Installed
Agents
Displays the total number of Agents that are currently associated with this
Manager. These are Agents that have connected to the Manager and have
consumed one of those allocated licenses.
Total Unused
Agent
Licenses
Displays the total number of Agent licenses that remain unused.
Total Agent
Licenses
Displays the total number of Agent licenses associated with this Manager.
For example, if you buy a 100-Agent license pool, the available number of
licenses is 100. If you allocate 10 licenses, the available license pool drops
to 90, and the Licenses Awaiting Agents grows to 10. As Agents are
actually installed, they pull from the 10, not from the 90.
388
The Settings tab defines the Manager’s password policy settings and global automatic update
settings. Global automatic updates allow the Manager to automatically send software updates to
Agents as new software becomes available.
Use the following table to complete the Properties pane’s Settings tab.
Option
Description
Password Policy
Minimum
Password
Length
Type or select the minimum number of characters that must be used on
passwords for user account that are to connect to the Console and its
Managers. Passwords must have at least six characters, but no more than 40
characters.
389
Option
Description
Must meet
complexity
requirements
Select this check box if passwords must meet the following complexity
requirements:
l
Passwords must not match or contain part of the user’s user name.
l
Passwords must be at least six characters long.
l
Passwords must contain characters from three of the following four
categories:
o
English uppercase characters (A through Z).
o
English lowercase characters (a through z).
o
Base 10 digits (0 through 9).
o
Non-alphanumeric characters (!, $, #, %, ^, etc.).
Remote Updates
Enable
Global
Automatic
Updates
This check box indicates whether or not the Manager can automatically
update its Agents with new software.
l
l
Select this check box to have the Manager automatically issue the
latest software updates to qualifying Agents as they become
available.
If this check box is not selected, then global automatic updates for this
Manager are Disabled. This means its Agents will not automatically
receive new software updates from the Manager.
Note that each Agent is also controlled by itsAutomatic Updates setting on
the Agents grid (see "Changing an Agent’s Remote Updates setting" on page
413). The Agent’s Automatic Updates setting will not work if you do not also
select this Enable Global Automatic Updates check box.
Here is how it works. If you do not select this check box, but you have an
Agent set to automatically receive updates, nothing will happen. The Agent
will not receive its updates. But if you do select this check box and if you
have an Agent set to automatically update, the Agent will automatically
receive updates when they become available.
Maximum
Concurrent
Updates
Select how many Agents the Manager can update at one time. The default
value is 10.
If the number of Agents that require updates is greater than the value you
have entered here, the remaining Agents will be queued for updating as soon
as an update slot becomes available.
Explorer Command Agent
390
Option
Description
Current
Default
Agent
Select the default Agent for performing TriGeo explorer functions, such as
NSLookup and Whois. For best results, choose an Agent that is normally
online and will return the expected results.
391
Use the Database tab to have a Manager send its alerts to a database warehouse, which is a second
database that can be used for reporting.
Each database warehouse configuration only applies to the Manager you select when you create it.
You must set up a separate data warehouse configuration for each Manager, even if it is pointing to
the same database warehouse used by another Manager.
Note: Before you can use this feature, you must set up the warehouse database on the data
warehouse server with the utilities on the TriGeo CD-ROM.
Use the following table to complete the Properties pane’s Database tab.
Field
Description
Enable
Database
Warehouse
Select this check box to allow the Manager to use a database warehouse.
You can only enable one database warehouse at a time. By default, this
check box is not selected.
Database
Name
This read-only box displays the name of the database on the server.
Server Name
Type the database server name for the intended database warehouse.
392
Field
Description
Repository
Type
This read-only box displays which type of server the database warehouse
is using.
Username
Based on your above selections, the Console automatically fills in the
Username, Password, and Connection Port boxes. Only change them
here if the defaults are not correct. TriGeo highly recommends that you do
not change these settings unless you are absolutely certain of what you are
doing.
Password
If you choose to change these settings, complete each field follows:
l
Connection
Port
l
l
In the Username box, type the user name needed for remote
connection to the database warehouse.
In the Password box, type the password needed for remote
connection to the database warehouse.
In the Connection Port, type the network port required for remote
connection to the database.
For information on using database warehouses, see "Using a database warehouse" on page 395.
393
Configuring Manager network security tools
A crucial part of the TriGeo system is the proper integration of each Manager’s network security tools.
This topic is covered at length in "Connecting to other products" on page 337.
To configure a Manager’s network security tools:
3. If you have not already done so, log into the Manager. See "Logging in and out of Managers" on
page 382.
4. Click the gear
The Tool Configuration for [Manager] window appears.
5. See "Connecting products to the TriGeo SIM" on page 347 for complete step-by-step instructions on integrating your Manager’s network security tools with the TriGeo system.
394
If desired, you can assign a Manager's alert data to a database warehouse. The following procedures
explain how to assign a database warehouse and alert data storage, and how to disable a database
warehouse when it is no longer needed.
Assigning a Manager’s alert data to a database warehouse
1. In the Appliances grid, click to select the Manager that has the alert data you want to send to
a database warehouse.
3. In the Properties pane, click the Database tab.
You will use this form to assign the Manager’s alert data to a database warehouse.
4. Complete the Database tab. For instructions, see "Completing the Database tab" on page
392.
5. Click Save to save your changes and begin data warehousing.
To verify your connection to the database warehouse, monitor the warehouse for warning
alerts and check the database to confirm that it is receiving data from the Manager. If the
warehouse is not receiving the data, verify your settings on the Configure Database
Warehouse form. If necessary, reconfigure the form.
Disabling a database warehouse
1. In the Appliances grid, click to select the Manager that has the alert data you want to send to
a database warehouse.
3. In the Properties pane, click the Database tab.
4. Clear the Enable Database Warehouse check box.
5. Click Save.
The Manager will no longer transmit its alert data to the database warehouse.
395
Copying appliance data
If needed, you can copy your the data from the Appliances grid to your clipboard. This allows you to
page the data into another application, such as Microsoft Excel for analysis or the Remote Agent
Installer for updates. You can copy the data for a single appliance, multiple appliances, or for every
appliance in the grid.
To copy data for a single appliance:
2. In the Appliances grid, select the appliances you want to copy.
3. Click the
button, and then do one of the following:
l
Click Copy Selected to copy the data for the selected appliances.
l
Click Copy All to copy the data for every appliance in the grid.
The appliance data is now copied to your clipboard, where it can be pasted into another
application.
Removing an appliance
When needed, you can remove a Manager or other network appliance from the Console.
To remove an appliance:
2. In the Appliances grid, click to select the appliance you want to remove.
3. Click the gear
4. At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to remove the appliance. Otherwise, click No to return to
the Console without removing the appliance.
The appliance disappears from the Appliances grid.
396
The topics in this section explain how to configure alert distribution policy for Managers. Alert
distribution policy lets you control how alerts are routed through the TriGeo system. With the Alert
Distribution Policy window, you can choose—at the alert level—which alerts are to go to the TriGeo
Console, to the local TriGeo database, and to your database warehouse.
Practical uses for alert distribution policy
Alert distribution policy has several practical uses that are explained in the following examples.
l
l
l
Many data sources generate alerts that are difficult to control at a granular level; or, they generate alerts of little or no value. You are better off removing these alerts from the system to
reduce the volume and noise being sent to your Console, database, or database warehouse.
By configuring alert distribution policy, you can disable (exclude) specific alert types, at the
alert level, from being sent to any or all of these destinations. The data sources will continue to
generate these alerts, so you can always enable them at any time. Until then, the selected system destinations will ignore them.
If you are using a database warehouse, storing data in both TriGeo’s local database and in the
warehouse is redundant. Alert distribution policy is the mechanism that allows you to disable
storing alerts in the local database.
There may be alerts that you want to monitor in the TriGeo Console, but do not need for longterm storage and reporting. In this case, you can use alert distribution policy to disable database storage for certain alerts, while enabling processing by the Console.
397
2. In the Appliances grid, click the gear
button for the Manager you want to work with, and
then click Policy.
The Alert Distribution Policy for [Manager] window appears.
3. If you open the Alert Distribution Policy window while another user is currently using it, a
Policy Locked message appears. You can choose to take over the window, or to view it in
read-only mode. Any Full User can unlock any other user.
l
Click Yes at the prompt to break the user’s lock and take over the policy. You may now
edit the policy.
398
l
l
Click No at the prompt to view the policy in read-only mode. The Save and Apply commands will be disabled, and you will not be able to make policy changes.
Click Cancel to close the prompt and return to the form.
399
The following table describes the key features of the Alert Distribution Policy window.
Item
Description
The window’s grid is a hierarchical node tree. The Alert/Field column lists each of
TriGeo’s alert categories and alert types. Opening an alert category node displays
the lower-level alert types that are associated with that category. Click a node ▼ to
open it, showing its lower-level alert type nodes. Click the node again to close it,
hiding its lower-level alert type nodes.
The check boxes in the grid’s Console, Database, and Warehouse columns
indicate whether or not a particular alert type (or entire alert category) is to be sent to
the TriGeo Console, to the local TriGeo database, or to your database warehouse,
respectively. A check mark means the alert type will be routed to that particular
destination. An empty check box means the alert type will not be routed to that
destination.
400
Item
Description
The Export button exports a Manager’s alert policy to a spreadsheet file. For more
information, see "Exporting a Manager’s alert policy" on page 404.
Click the gear
button to use the Apply State to Branch command. This
command pushes, or propagates, the selected alert node’s check box settings
down to the related, lower-level alert types in the node tree hierarchy. For more
information, see "Pushing alert policy to lower-level alert types" on page 403.
The Description box provides a description of the alert type or alert category that is
currently selected in the grid.
The OK, Apply, and Cancel buttons let you save or cancel changes to your alert
distribution policies.
401
The Alert Distribution Policy window makes configuring your alert distribution policy a
straightforward matter. First, you find the alert types you want to work with, and then you select
check boxes to determine whether or not those alerts types are to be routed to a particular
destination.
To configure alert distribution policy:
1. Open the Alert Distribution Policy window for the Manager you want to work with.
2. In the Alert/Fields grid, locate the alert type you want to work with. You can do this several different ways:
l
l
In the Alert/Field list, click any node to show its lower-level alert type nodes.
In the Alert/Field list, double-click any alert type row to show its lower-level alert type
nodes.
3. Once you have found the alert type you want, configure it as follows:
l
l
l
l
Select the row’s Console check box to have that alert type appear in the TriGeo Console.
Select the row’s Database check box to have that alert type stored in the local TriGeo
database.
Select the row’s Warehouse check box to have that alert type stored in your database
warehouse.
Clear a check box to exclude the alert type from that particular destination.
4. To save or cancel your changes, do one of the following:
l
l
l
Click OK to save your alert distribution policy changes, close the window, and return to
the Console.
Click Apply to save your changes, but keep the window open so you can continue
working.
Click Cancel to close the window without saving your changes and return to the
Console.
Upon saving, the Applying Changes status bar appears. Please be patient. Updating the
Manager with the new alert policy configuration changes can take anywhere from 30 seconds
to several minutes.
402
With the Apply State to Branch command, you can propagate or “push” alert distribution policy
settings from a high-level alert type to each of its lower-level “child” alert types in the alert hierarchy.
For example, let’s say you select the topmost Security Alert row and then select its Console and
Warehouse check boxes. Clicking Apply State to Branch assigns the same Console and
Warehouse check box settings to every child item that is associated with Security Alert. Upon
saving, this policy causes all alert types that are child items of Security Alert to begin sending alerts
to all user’s Consoles and your data warehouse.
To push policy configure alert distribution policy downward:
Open the Alert Distribution Policy window for the Manager you want to work with.
1. In the Alert/Field grid, locate the alert type that is a “parent” to the alert types you want to configure.
2. In the parent row, define the policy by selecting or clearing the Console, Database, and Warehouse check boxes.
button and then click Apply State to Branch.
The Console pushes, or propagates, the parent row’s check box settings down to each of its
lower-level alert types in the node tree hierarchy.
l
l
If you select one or more of the parent row’s check boxes, the Console selects the
same check box settings for each related lower-level alert type in the node tree. Upon
saving, the policy begins sending the “child” alert types to the selected destinations.
Similarly, if you clear any of the parent row’s check boxes, the Console disables the
same check box settings from each related lower-level alert type in the node tree. Upon
saving, the policy stops sending those alert types to those destinations.
4. Click OK to save your changes.
The Console immediately implements the new policy.
403
Exporting a Manager’s alert policy
When needed, you can export a Manager’s alert policy to a spreadsheet file. You may want to do this
for any of the following reasons:
l
l
You can view and manipulate the policy information in a spreadsheet application, such as
Microsoft Excel.
You can provide TriGeo Network Security with a copy of your policy information for technical
support or troubleshooting purposes.
To export a Manager’s policy:
1. Open the Alert Distribution Policy window for the Manager you want to work with.
2. At the top of the window, click Export.
The Save As form appears.
3. In the Save In box, select the folder you want to export to.
4. In the File Name box, type a name and file type for the exported file. In the file name, include a
file type of .xls to save the file as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
5. Click Save to save the file.
The Console saves the file to the folder and with the file name you specified. You may now
view the Manager’s policy information in a spreadsheet file, such as Excel.
404
About the Agents view
The Manage ► Agents view displays the Agents that are monitored by each of your TriGeo Security
Information Managers.
Once you have installed the TriGeo Agents on your client PCs, you can use the Agents view to do
the following:
l
Integrate the Agent’s network security tools with the TriGeo system. You are actually integrating the Agents themselves, but the Agents forward messages from the network security
tools to the Manager for alert processing.
l
Connect an Agent to a Manager.
l
View the name, connection status, alert status, and IP address of each Agent.
l
Determine whether or not the Agent is using USB-Defender.
l
View an Agent’s properties.
l
Create or edit an Agent’s Tool Profile. A Tool Profile is a group of Agents that have the same
tool configuration. You can use Tool Profiles with policies and alert filters to include or exclude
the Agents associated with a particular profile.
l
Control an Agent’s automatic update settings for installing new software from the Manager.
l
Actively respond to events that affect Agents.
l
l
Copy Agent information to the clipboard for use with the Remote Agent Installer, or for analysis with programs such as Microsoft Excel.
Remove an Agent from a Manager.
405
This topic describes the key features of the Agents view and the Agents grid, and how to refine the
Agents grid.
The Agents view
The following table describes the key features of the Manage ► Agents view.
Item
Name
Description
Sidebar
Click the Sidebar button to alternately hide and open the Refine
Results pane.
406
Item
Name
Description
Refine
Results
pane
By default, the Agents grid shows all Agents that are associated
with all of your Managers. The Refine Results pane lets you apply
filters to the Agents grid to reduce the number of Agents it shows.
This way, you can show only those Agents that are associated with
a particular Manager, Tool Profile, status, etc.
Agents grid
The Agents grid lists all of the Agents that are associated with each
Manager and appliance that is monitored by the TriGeo SIM
Console.
Respond
menu
Use the Respond menu to perform an action on a particular Agent.
For example, you can send an Agent a pop-up message, or shut the
computer down.
This menu behaves exactly as it does in the Monitor view’s alert
grid. For more information, see "Responding to alert messages" on
page 83.
Remote
Updates
menu
This menu lets you control the Agent’s automatic update status.
Remote updates are a way for the Agent to automatically accept
updated Agent software from the Manager when new software
becomes available.
The gear button at the top of the grid opens commands that you can
perform on multiple selections in the grid, and commands that do not
require a grid selection. It includes commands for copying Agent information and for deleting Agents.
407
Agents grid columns
The following table briefly describes the meaning of each column of the Agents grid.
Column
Description
The gear button in each row opens a menu of commands that you can perform
on the item that is currently selected in the grid.
l
The Tools command lets you configure the Agent’s tools.
l
The Delete command lets you delete Agent licenses from a Manager.
l
Status
The Copy command lets you copy Agent information to the clipboard for
use with the Remote Agent Installer, or for analysis in another program,
such as Microsoft Excel.
The Agent’s current connection status:
means the Agent is Connected to a Manager.
means Agent is Not Connected to a Manager (that is, it is an open
license).
IP Address
The Agent’s IP address.
Name
The name of the system where the Agent is installed. Typically, this is the
computer name or host name assigned to the Agent.
USB
The Agent’s current USB-Defender status. An icon ( ) means USB-Defender
is installed on the Agent. If no icon is present, USB-Defender is not installed on
the Agent.
Version
The version number of the TriGeo Agent software.
OS
The operating system of the computer the Agent is installed on.
Profile
The Tool Profile associated with the Agent, if applicable.
Updates
Enabled
Indicates whether or not the Agent is enabled for receiving remote updates.
means the Agent is Enabled for receiving remote updates.
means the Agent is Disabled from receiving remote updates.
408
Agents grid columns
Column
Description
Update
Status
This field indicates the Agent’s current software update status:
Current: The Agent's software is current.
Outdated: The Manager has an update newer than the version being used
by this Agent.
Updating: The Manager is currently sending an update to this Agent.
Queued: The Agent is waiting to be updated while other Agents get updated.
The number of Agents that can be updated at one time is determined by the
Maximum Concurrent Updates setting in the Appliances view's Settings
tab.
Unknown: The Manager does not yet know the Agent’s software status.
Canceled: The user canceled updating during update process.
Error: An error has occurred while updating.
ID
The Agent’s unique identification number.
Manager
The TriGeo Manager that this Agent is connected to. An Agent can only be
connected to one Manager.
Install Date
The time and date the Agents was first installed and connected to the Manager.
Last Connected
The time and date the Agent was last connected to the Manager.
409
Refining the Agents grid
By default, the Agents grid shows every Agents that is associated with every Managers that is
monitored by the TriGeo SIM Console. To help you work more efficiently with a long list of Agents,
the Refine Results pane lets you apply filters to the Agents grid to reduce the number of Agents it
shows.
you are using.
Field
Description
Reset
Click Reset to clear the form. This returns the form and the Agents grid to
their default settings (showing all Agents for all Managers.)
Search
Use this field to perform a keyword search for a specific Agent in the Name
field. To search, simply type the text you want to search for in the text box.
The grid displays only those Agents that match or include the text you
entered.
Manager
Select the Manager you want to work with. Select All to include Agents from
every Manager.
Profile
Select the Tool Profile profile you want to work with. Select All to include
Agents from every Tool Profile.
Status
Select the connection status of the Agents you want to work with
(Connected or Not Connected). Select All to include both.
Version
Select the version of the TriGeo software on the Agent. Select All to include
Agents of every version.
OS
Select the operating system (OS) of the computer the Agent is installed on.
Select All to include all operating systems.
USB
Select the Agent’s USB-Defender status (Installed or Not Installed). Select
All to include both.
410
Managing Agents
Managing Agents
The topics in this section explain how to use the Agents grid to add, configure, and manage Agents.
Topics include:
l
adding Agents
l
configuring Agent tools
l
responding to alerts that affect Agents
l
deleting Agent licenses from a Manager
l
deleting Agents, and
l
changing an Agent's Remote Updates setting.
Adding Agents
Agent licenses are managed and allocated through Managers in the Manage ► Appliances view. To
view this procedure, see "Configuring a Manager's properties" on page 384.
Configuring Agent tools
A crucial part of the TriGeo system is the proper integration your network security products and
devices to the TriGeo SIM. Each Agent has tools that allow the Agent to monitor and interact with
your network security products.
See "Connecting products to the TriGeo SIM" on page 347 for complete step-by-step instructions on
connecting Agent sensor and actor tools to your network security products and devices.
411
Responding to events that affect Agents
The Agents grid’s Respond menu lets you take direct action on a particular Agent. For example, you
can send an Agent a pop-up message, or shut the Agent's computer down.
To respond to an Agent:
Open the Manage ► Agents view.
1. In the Agents grid, select the Agent you want to work with.
2. In the Respond menu, select the appropriate active response you want to take.
The Respond form appears. It includes data about the Agents you selected and options for
customizing the response. This is just like responding to a filter, or configuring a rule’s
response in Rule Creation.
3. Complete the Respond form. For detailed information on configuring responses, see
"Responding to alert messages" on page 83 and the "Actions table" on page 313.
412
In the Agents grid, you can manage the Remote Updates settings for each Agent. Remote Updates
allow the Agent to automatically accept updated Agent software from the Manager, when new
software becomes available. You can change the settings for multiple Agents, all at the same time,
even when Agents are not connected. Each Agent will receive its new setting the next time it
becomes connected.
To change Agents’ Remote Updates settings:
2. (Optional) In the Refine Results pane, in the Status list, select Connected.
The Agents grid refreshes to show only Agents that connected to Managers.
3. In the Agents grid, select the Agents you want to work with. For instructions on selecting multiple Agents, see "Selecting items in a grid" on page 31.
4. In the Remote Updates menu, select the appropriate command for these Agents. The
purpose of each command is explained in the following table.
Command
Description
Enable
Allows the Agents to automatically receive the latest software updates
from the Manager as they become available.
Disable
Prevents the Agents from automatically receiving new software from the
Manager. When Agents are disabled, you must manually update them by
using the Update command.
Update
Click Update to have the Manager send a software update to the Agent, if
one is available. If no update is available, this button is disabled.
This command is only needed for Agents that have a Disabled remote
update status; otherwise, updates occur automatically. However, you
can use the Update command on an Agent that is set for automatic
updates. In this case, it forces an immediate update on the Agent.
Stop
If a software update in progress, you can click the Stop command to
have the Manager stop sending the update. Otherwise, this button is
disabled.
In the grid, the Agents’ Updates Enabled and Update Status columns refresh to reflect their
new Remote Updates settings and status.
5. On the Refine Results pane, click Reset to return the Agents grid to its default setting.
413
Deleting Agents
When needed, you can delete Agents. You may want to do this if the computer is no longer in
commission, or if you need to delete and reinstall an Agent for maintenance reasons.
Deleting an Agent does not remove the Agent software. But it does disconnect the Agent from the
Manager, which means it will no longer be able to connect to and send data to the TriGeo SIM.
Deleting an Agent also reallocates its license to the Open License pool, so it can be reassigned to
another computer.
To delete Agents:
2. In the Agents grid, select the Agents you want to delete.
3. Click the grid's gear
Note: You can delete individual Agents with the Agent row's gear button, or you can delete
multiple Agents at the same time with the gear button at the top of the grid.
4. Click Yes to delete the Agents from the Manager. Otherwise, click No to return to the Console
without deleting the Agents.
The Agents are removed from the Agents grid. In addition, your number of available
unassigned licenses increases accordingly. You can now reallocate these licenses to other
Agents on this or some other Manager.
414
Use this procedure to remove one or more open (unallocated) Agent licenses from a Manager. This
frees the Agent licenses for later use, or for use with a different Manager.
To remove an Agent from a Manager:
2. In the Agents grid, locate the [Open License] row in the grid's Name column.
3. Select the [Open License] row.
4. Click the row's gear
button (not the grid's) and then click Delete.
The Delete Open Licenses form appears.
5. In the counter box, type or select the number of unallocated licenses you want to remove from
the Manager.
6. Click OK to remove the Agents from the Manager. Otherwise, click Cancel to return to the
Console without removing the licenses.
In the Appliances view, the number of available unassigned licenses increases accordingly.
You can now reallocate these licenses to other Agents on this or some other Manager.
Note: Removing an Agent from a Manager does not remove the Agent software from the
computer. See “Removing a TriGeo Agent from a computer” in the TriGeo SIM Installation
Guide.
415
Copying Agent data
If needed, you can copy your the data from the Agents grid to your clipboard. This allows you to paste
the data into another application, such as Microsoft Excel for analysis or the Remote Agent Installer
for updates. You can copy the data for a single Agent, multiple Agents, or for every Agent in the grid.
To copy data for a single appliance:
2. In the Agents grid, select the Agents you want to copy.
3. Click the
button, and then do one of the following:
l
Click Copy Selected to copy the data for the selected Agents.
l
Click Copy All to copy the data for every Agent in the grid.
The Agent data is now copied to your clipboard, where it can be pasted into another
application.
416
About TriGeo Reports
TriGeo Reports allows you to select which Manager or data warehouse you want to report on, select
the reports you want to run, and schedule when you want to run the reports. The system then
automatically generates the reports according to your schedule and settings.
You can run reports two different ways:
l
l
Scheduled Reports are reports that you configure to automatically run on their own, on a particular schedule, and without intervention.
On-demand reports are those reports that you run only when you need them.
Reports can take quite a bit of time to run. The larger the report, the longer it takes. For that reason, it
is recommended that you schedule any reports that you intend to run frequently.
Opening TriGeo Reports
1. Click the Start button and then click All Programs.
2. Point to the TriGeo folder, click the TriGeo Reports shortcut.
After a moment, TriGeo Reports appears.
417
TriGeo Reports features
The topics in this section describe the key features of the TriGeo Reports window, its Menu Button,
its Quick Access Toolbar, and its Ribbon.
The following table describes the key features of TriGeo Reports.
Item
Name
Description
Menu Button
Click the Menu Button to open, save, or print a report, and to see
everything else you can do with a report. This button has a similar
function to the File menu used by earlier Windows programs.
418
Item
Name
Description
Quick
Access
Toolbar
The Quick Access Toolbar is a customizable toolbar. It contains a
set of commands that are independent of the tab that is currently
displayed. You can customize the toolbar by adding buttons for the
commands you use most often, and you can move the toolbar to two
different locations. For more information, see "Using the Quick
Access Toolbar" on page 421.
Ribbon
The Ribbon is designed to help you quickly find the commands that
you need to complete a task. Commands are organized in logical
groups that are collected together under tabs. Each tab relates to a
type of activity, such as running and scheduling reports, or viewing
and printing reports. To save space, you can minimize the Ribbon,
showing only the tabs. For more information, see "Minimizing the
Ribbon" on page 423.
Settings tab
Use the commands on this tab to choose the reports you want to run,
open, and schedule, and to configure reports and the reports’ data
source settings.
View tab
Upon opening or running a report, the Ribbon automatically switches
to the View tab, which has a toolbar for printing, exporting, resizing,
and viewing the report.
If you click the View tab without having opened a report, the Preview
pane shows a blank page. If you click the View tab and you have run
a report, the Preview pane displays the contents of the report.
Grouping bar
You can use the yellow bar above the grid to group, sort, and
organize the reports list. For more information, see "Grouping
reports" on page 451.
Report list/
Preview
pane
By default, this section is a grid that displays a list of TriGeo’s
Standard Reports. Upon selecting a different report category, the grid
changes to list the reports that are in that category. You use this grid
to select report that you want to run or schedule.
You can also filter and sort the grid to quickly find the reports you
want to work with. See "Sorting, filtering, and grouping report lists"
on page 444.
Upon opening or running a report, this section changes into a report
Preview pane that displays the report. In Ribbon also automatically
switches to the View tab, which has a toolbar for printing, exporting,
resizing, or viewing the report.
419
Using the Menu Button
In TriGeo Reports, the Menu Button opens a menu that lets you execute the most common report
commands. The following table describes each command in the Menu Button menu.
Menu option
Description
Open Report
Opens a report that has been saved in RPT format. The report opens in
the TriGeo Reports Preview pane in the View tab, where you can view,
search, print, and export it.
The Recent Reports list to the right shows a list of recently opened
reports.
Export Report
Use this command to export the report you are currently viewing.
Schedule Report
Use this command to configure a schedule for automatically running the
selected report in the Report list.
Print Report
This command prints the report you are viewing to your default printer,
with its default settings.
Printer Setup
This command opens a Print Setup dialog box, which you can use to
select a printer and customize its print settings.
Refresh Report
List
This command refreshes the report list for each report category. Use this
command if you have added new report files—such as some new custom
reports—and they are not showing up in the report list. This command
accesses your computer’s Reports directory, retrieves information about
all of the reports, and rebuilds the lists for each report category.
Exit
Exits the TriGeo Reports application.
420
The Quick Access Toolbar is a customizable toolbar. It contains a set of commands that are
independent of the tab that is currently displayed. You can customize the toolbar by adding buttons
for the commands you use most often, and you can move the toolbar to two different locations.
The Quick Access toolbar
Default commands
By default, the Quick Access Toolbar shows the commands listed in the following table.
Button
Command
Description
Open
Opens a report that has been saved in RPT format. The report opens
in the TriGeo Reports Preview pane in the View tab, where you can
view, search, print, and export it. See "Opening your saved reports"
on page 475.
Run
Runs the report that is currently selected in the report list. If the
report requires any parameters, the Enter Parameter Values form
appears. For the procedure on running reports, see "Running reports
on demand" on page 454.
Refresh
Report
List
This command refreshes the report list for each report category. Use
this command if you have added new report files—such as some
new custom reports—and they are not showing up in the report list.
This command accesses your computer’s Reports directory,
retrieves information about all of the reports, and rebuilds the lists for
each report category.
Exit
Exits the TriGeo Reports application.
421
Moving the Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access Toolbar can be located in either of two places—in the upper-left corner of the
window, next to the Reports Button (its default location), or below the Ribbon. If you don't want the
toolbar to be displayed in its current location, you can move it to the other location.
To move the Quick Access Toolbar:
1. Click the drop-down list next to the Quick Access Toolbar.
The Customize Quick Access Toolbar form appears.
l
l
To move the toolbar below the Ribbon, click Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the
Ribbon.
To move the toolbar above the Ribbon, click Show Quick Access Toolbar Above the
Ribbon.
422
You cannot delete or replace the Ribbon with the toolbars and menus from the earlier versions of
TriGeo Reports. However, you can minimize the Ribbon to make more space available on your
screen. When the Ribbon is minimized, you see only the tabs.
Full Ribbon
Minimized Ribbon
To always keep the Ribbon minimized:
2. In the list, click Minimize the Ribbon.
3. To use the Ribbon while it is minimized, click the tab you want to use, and then click the option
or command you want to use.
4. After clicking the command, the Ribbon goes back to being minimized.
To restore the Ribbon:
2. In the list, clear the Minimize the Ribbon check box.
To quickly minimize or restore the Ribbon:
To quickly toggle between minimizing and restoring the Ribbon, do one of the following:
l
Double-click the name of the active tab.
l
Press Ctrl+F1.
423
Configuring report preferences
TriGeo Reports has a Preferences group that is used to set up database connections so the Console
knows which database to draw from when running reports.
Table of preferences
The following table briefly describes each preference in the Preferences group.
Preference
Option
Description
Configure
Primary
Data
Source
Select this option to choose the default data source that is to be
used for running reports whenever the TriGeo Reports window
is opened.
The option you select here becomes the default setting in the
Data Source list. At any time, you can select a different data
source and then run reports from that source. But whenever you
reopen the TriGeo Reports window, it defaults to the data
source you have selected here.
Data
Source
Syslog
Server
Select this option to have a TriGeo Manager send report log
information to a syslog server. A syslog server logs basic report
activity, such as who is running reports, which reports are being
run, which database a report is drawing from, when each report
is run, when each report is complete, and any error messages
that occur if a report generates errors.
Data
Warehouse
Select this option to configure a new Database Warehouse
source so it appears in the Report Data Sources list.
Use this list to select the data source that you want to run
reports against. When you select a data source here, it
temporarily overrides the Primary Data Source (default) you
have selected as the Primary Data Source in the Configure
list. For more information, see "Running reports on demand" on
page 454.
The following topics explain how to configure each preference.
424
Use this procedure to select your Primary Data Source. This is the default data source that is to be
used for running reports whenever the TriGeo Reports window is opened. It will appear as the default
setting in the Preferences group’s Data Source list.
At any time, you can select a different data source and run reports from that source. But whenever
you close and then reopen the TriGeo Reports window, it defaults to your Primary Data Source.
To run reports from a different data source, see "Running reports on demand" on page 454.
To select a primary data source:
1. Open TriGeo Reports.
2. On the Settings tab, in the Preferences group, click Configure and then select Primary Data
Source.
The Select Primary Data Source form appears.
3. In the Primary Data Source list, select the default data source.
4. Click Test Connection to have the system perform a ping test a to confirm that a connection
to the data source has been established. A test is not required, but highly recommended.
During the test, the OK button will become disabled.
l
l
If the test succeeds, the OK button will become enabled, and the status area below the
Test Connection button will read: "Ping Test...success."
If the test fails, an error message will occur. If the test fails, see "Troubleshooting database connections" on page 430.
5. Click OK.
425
Configuring a syslog server
Use this procedure to have a TriGeo Manager send report log information to a syslog server. A syslog
server records all report-related events and application messages. It logs basic report activity, such
as who is running reports, which reports are being run, which database a report is drawing from, when
each report is run, when each report is complete, and any error messages that occur if a report
generates errors.
By default, the syslog server is set to the Primary Manager, but it can be set to any server running a
standard syslog service. However, the server must have an Agent installed so it can communicate
with the Manager.
To configure a syslog server:
2. On the Settings tab, in the Preferences group, click Configure and then select Syslog
Server.
The Set Syslog Server form appears.
3. In the Syslog Server (Host Name) box, type the server’s host name.
4. Click Test.
The system performs a ping test to confirm that a connection has been established. You must
test the connection before the server can be accepted. A successful test does not confirm if
the host is actually a syslog server.
l
l
If the ping test succeeds, it will retrieve and display the host IP address and a message
appears, stating: "The Ping Test succeeded."
If the ping test fails, a message appears to tell you so. In this case, confirm that you
have entered the correct host name and that it matches a valid DNS entry.
5. Upon completing a successful test, click OK.
426
Use this procedure to configure a new database warehouse as a data source, so you can report
against it. Once configured, it appears in the Preferences group’s Data Source list under
Warehouses.
This procedure also creates a matching ODBC DSN that is used by TriGeo Reports to communicate
with the data warehouse server.
To configure a data warehouse:
2. On the Settings tab, in the Preferences group, click Configure and then select Data
Warehouse.
The Configure Data Warehouse form appears.
3. Complete the form as described in the following table.
Field
Description
Warehouse
Name (Host
Name)
Type the data warehouse server’s host name.
Port Number
Type the port number for connecting to the data warehouse.
427
Field
Description
Database
Type
Select the type of database that is used by the data warehouse.
Security
Click this button to create a password for reporting against the data
warehouse, if it is different than the default password.
l
l
In the Specify Password box, type the new password, and
then click OK.
Click Reset to reset the password to its default setting.
Timeout for
database
connection
test x sec.
Type how long (in seconds) the system is to wait for a response when
performing a “ping test” to test for a connection to the database. If a
connection cannot be made within this period, the test automatically
stops.
Set as
Primary Data
Source
Select this option to make the data warehouse the Primary Data
Source. This means it will become the default data source for
reporting.
Host IP
Address
If you perform a connection test and the test is successful, this readonly field displays data warehouse server’s IP address.
Do not ping
Select this option if you do not intend to perform a ping test to verify
your connection to data warehouse server.
Connect with
Warehouse
Name
Select this option to have the TriGeo Reports window connect to the
data warehouse server with the Host Name setting.
Connect with
IP Address
Select this option to have the TriGeo Reports window connect to the
data warehouse server with the IP Address setting.
No
Warehouse
Click this button to clear the form’s data warehouse settings, delete
any warehouse configuration details, and close the Configure Data
Warehouse form.
428
Field
Description
Test
Connection
Click this button to have the system perform a ping test and a
database connection test to confirm that a connection to the data
warehouse has been established.
l
l
If the test succeeds, a dialog box will displays the Host IP
Address.
If the test fails, see "Troubleshooting database connections"
on page 430.
If you do not perform a connection test, the system will perform one
automatically when you click OK.
4. Click OK.
429
Troubleshooting database connections
Use the following table to troubleshoot error messages that may occur with the ping test used to test
the connection between TriGeo Reports and the data warehouse or the Primary Data Source.
Error message
Description
Manager ping
timed out.
TriGeo Reports was unable to
connect to the Manager's host
name or IP address. Confirm
that the host name (or IP
address) you specified is
correct.
Sending the
authentication
packet failed. Could
not flush socket
buffer.
Correction
TriGeo Reports could resolve
and connect to the IP
address, but could not
authenticate to the database
server at that location.
l
l
Confirm that you have
entered the warehouses’s
Host Name properly. Make
sure it matches a valid DNS
entry.
Try entering the warehouse’s
actual IP address in the Host
Name field.
Confirm that the Host Name (or IP
address) you specified is correct and
is allowing connections from the
location on which you are running
TriGeo Reports.
This error may also indicate a need
to modify report restrictions. See the
restrictreports and
unrestrictreports CMC commands
in "Using the CMC 'service' menu"
on page 569.
Server ping test
successful, but
database
connection test
failed.
TriGeo Reports could resolve,
connect to the IP address,
and connect to SQL Server,
but could not log in using the
reports user.
Login incorrect.
Login failed for user
‘[user name]’
430
l
l
Confirm that the Host Name
(or IP address) you specified
contains the TriGeo
database.
The warehouse may require a
password for reporting
purposes. In this case, click
the Security button and then
enter the warehouse’s
reporting password.
TriGeo provides a large variety of standard reports that cover the needs of a several different
industries. The Manage Categories form allows you to choose reports for those industries,
regulatory concerns, and auditing areas that concern your company; to search for specific reports;
and to add reports to your Favorite Reports list.
Manage Categories form
The Manage Categories form
The Manage Categories form has three tabs that have the following functions:
l
l
The Industry Setup tab lets you select the industries and areas of regulatory compliance that
are of interest to your company. Reports that are related to the options you select then appear
in the Industry Reports list.
The Favorites Setup tab’s Search view lets you list, sort, and group the report list by industry
and regulatory area. It highlights reports that are already listed in your Favorite Reports list,
and allows you to add new reports to the Favorite Reports list.
431
l
The Favorites Setup tab’s Favorites view displays your current list of favorite reports. You
can use this view to sort and group your favorite reports to locate a specific report. When
needed, this view is also used to remove a report from your list of favorites.
Selecting reports for specific industries
In the Manage Categories form, use the Industry Reports tab to select the industries and areas of
regulatory compliance that are of interest to your company. By selecting only those reports that apply
to your industry, you can greatly reduce the number of reports that appear when you view the
Industry Reports list.
To select industry reports:
2. On the Settings tab, in the Report Categories group, click the Manage button and then click
Manage Categories.
The Manage Categories form appears.
3. Click the Industry Setup tab, if it is not already shown.
The Classifications section lists those industries and regulatory areas that are supported by
standard TriGeo reports. The Reports for section displays all of the standard TriGeo reports
that support the classifications you select.
4. In the Classifications section, select the check box for each industry (Education, Federal,
Financial, Healthcare, etc.) that your company is concerned with.
The Reports for section displays all of the standard reports that support the industry or
industries you have selected.
5. If you are only concerned with a few regulatory areas within these industries, select the check
box for each regulatory area your company is concerned with (such as HIPAA or SOX). For a
description of each regulatory option, see "Industry options" on page 433.
The Reports for section now lists only those standard reports that support the regulatory
areas you have selected.
6. To remove reports for any industry or regulatory area, simply click to clear the corresponding
check box.
7. Click OK to save your changes and close the window.
In the Category list, the Industry Reports option now lists the standard TriGeo reports that
support the industries and regulatory areas you have selected.
432
Industry options
Industry options
Industry reports are standard reports that are designed to support the compliance and auditing needs
of certain industries. Currently, TriGeo provides reports that support the financial services industry,
the health care industry, and the accountability reporting needs of publicly traded companies. The
following table describes which compliance and auditing areas are specifically supported.
Area supported
Description
Education
FERPA
Reports in this category support compliance with the Federal Educational
Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA), which gives parents and eligible
students certain rights with respect to their children's education records.
Federal
CoCo
FISMA
NERC-CIP
Reports in this category support compliance with the UK Code of Connection regulations.
Reports in this category support compliance with the Federal Information
Security Management Act (FISMA).
Reports in this category support compliance with the North American Electric Reliability Council (NERC) Critical Infrastructure Protection (CIP) reliability standards.
Finance
CISP
Reports in this category support compliance with the Cardholder
Information Security Program, which helps safeguard credit card and
bank card transactions at the point of sale, over the Internet, on the
phone, or through the mail. CISP helps protect cardholder data for
cardholders, merchants, and service providers.
COBIT
Reports in this category support compliance with Control Objectives for
Information and related Technology (COBIT™). COBIT is an “open”
standard for IT security and control practices. It includes more than 320
control objectives and includes audit guides for more than 30 IT
processes.
433
Area supported
Description
GLBA
Reports in this category support compliance with the Gramm Leach Bliley
Act (GLBA).
GLBA requires financial institutions to protect the security, integrity, and
confidentiality of consumer information. It affects banking institutions,
insurance companies, securities firms, tax preparation services, all credit
card companies, and all federally insured financial institutions.
Security information and event management (SIEM) plays a vital role in
GLBA.
NCUA
Reports in this category support compliance with the National Credit
Union Administration (NCUA).
NCUA is the federal agency that charters and supervises federal credit
unions and insures savings in federal and most state-chartered credit
unions across the country through the National Credit Union Share
Insurance Fund (NCUSIF), a federal fund backed by the United States
government.
PCI
Reports in this category support compliance with the Payment Card
Industry (PCI) Data Security Standard requirements of VISA CISP and
AIS, MasterCard SDP, American Express and DiscoverCard.
SOX
Reports in this category support compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley
(SOX) Act of 2002. Sarbanes-Oxley protects a company’s investors by
improving the accuracy and reliability of corporate disclosures made
pursuant to securities laws. Provisions within Sarbanes-Oxley hold
executive management and the board of directors liable for criminal and
civil penalties. Specifically, under Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley
Act, executives must certify and demonstrate that they have established
and are maintaining an adequate internal control structure and procedures
for financial reporting.
General
ISO 17799/
27001/27002
Reports in this category support compliance with the ISO 17799, ISO
27001, and ISO 27002 international security standards.
Healthcare
HIPAA
Reports in this category support compliance with the Health Insurance
Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA), which requires national
standards for electronic health care transactions.
434
In the Manage Categories form, the Favorites Setup tab has a Search view. It is similar to the
Industry Setup tab in that it lets you view a list of reports by industry and regulatory area. It highlights
reports that are already in your Favorite Reports list and allows you to add new reports to the
Favorite Reports list.
Step 1: Searching the reports
Manage Categories.
3. Click the Favorites Setup tab.
4. Click the Search button near the top of the form.
As you can see, the Search view looks just like the Industry Setup tab. The Classifications
area lists those industries and regulatory areas that are supported by standard TriGeo reports.
The Reports Matching Search Criteria box lists every standard TriGeo report. If a report
appears highlighted in green, it means the report is in your Favorite Reports tab.
435
5. In the Classifications area, select the check box for each industry or regulatory area your company is concerned with.
6. Click the Search button below the left frame.
The Reports Matching Search Criteria box displays all of the standard reports that support
the options you have selected. For example, if you selected Finance, it lists only those reports
that are associated with Finance. If you selected Finance and PCI, it lists every report that is
associated with either Finance or PCI.
If needed, you can also organize the report list by sorting, filtering, and grouping the report list.
Step 2: Adding a report to your list of favorites
1. In the report list, locate the report you want to add to the Favorite Reports list.
l
Click to select the report. Then click Add To Favorites.
l
Right-click the report, and then click Add To Favorites.
The Favorite Reports list now includes the report as one of your favorites.
436
When needed, you can use the Manage Categories form to remove a report from the Favorite
Reports list. This does not delete the report; the report remains in its original category. For example,
if you remove a favorite report that originally came from the Standard Reports list, it remains listed in
the Standard Reports list. This means you can restore the report as a favorite at any time.
To remove a report from the Favorite Reports list:
Manage Categories.
3. Click the Favorites Setup tab.
4. Click the Favorites button.
The window displays your current list of favorite reports. If there are a lot of reports, you can
sort, filter, and group the report list to locate the specific report you want to remove.
5. In the report list, select the report you want to remove from the Favorite Reports list. Then do
either of the following:
437
l
Click Remove From Favorites.
l
Right-click the report and then select Remove From Favorites.
6. Click Apply to save the change.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each report you want to remove.
8. Click OK to save your changes and close the window.
The reports no longer appear in your Favorite Reports list.
Viewing Historical Reports
On rare occasion, typically during after taking an upgrade, you may encounter a report that can only
be run against the earlier version. These legacy reports are called Historical Reports. In these cases,
the View Historical Reports option lets you view, schedule, and run these reports. By default, this
option is disabled, as it is only used to for viewing legacy reports.
To view historical reports:
View Historical Reports.
A Historical Reports option appears in the Category list.
3. In the Category list, select Historical Reports to display the list of Historical Reports.
4. You may now view, schedule, or run a Historical Report.
438
TriGeo Reports ships with a wide range of reports. To keep them organized, they are arranged and
listed into different categories. This topic explains how to locate reports, view report properties, and
create a list of your favorite reports.
Viewing lists of reports by category
TriGeo Reports ships with a wide range of reports. To keep them organized, they are arranged into
categories. You can use report categories to select the type of reports you want to work with—
TriGeo’s standard reports or your own custom reports. Each option in the Category list displays the
reports that are assigned to that category.
To view a list of reports by category:
l
On the Settings tab, in the Report Categories group, click the Category list and then select a
report category.
The window displays the list of reports in that category. If you select a different category, the
reports list changes to display the reports that are in the new category.
The following table describes each option in the Category list.
Tab
Description
Standard
Reports
This list displays the standard set of reports that ship with the TriGeo
system and are supported by TriGeo technical support. Most standard
reports capture specific event data that occurs during a particular period.
Industry
Reports
This list displays the standard reports that are designed to support the
compliance and auditing needs of certain industries, such as the financial
services industry, health care industry, and the accountability requirements
of publicly traded companies. For more information, see "Selecting reports
for specific industries" on page 432.
Custom
Reports
This list displays any custom reports that you created, or that TriGeo
created for your company, to meet a specific need.
Standard and custom reports are essentially the same thing. They are run
and scheduled in the same manner. The only difference is that custom
reports are “undocumented,” as they are created specifically by you or for
you.
While TriGeo supports any custom reports they make for your company,
TriGeo does not support any custom reports that you make yourself.
439
Tab
Description
Favorite
Reports
This list displays the standard, industry, and custom reports that you use
most often. You can add and remove reports to this category as needed.
440
If you know a report’s title, you can quickly locate it in the TriGeo Reports window by typing its name
in the appropriate report category list.
To locate a report by title:
2. On the Settings tab, in the Report Categories group’s Category list, select the category that
contains the report.
3. Click any row in the report list.
4. In the Report Title column, begin typing the report name.
The system takes you to the first report title that matches the letters you have typed. For
example, if you clicked Standard Reports and began typing “even”, the system takes you to
Event Summary, which is the first matching report title.
5. From here, you can scroll down to the exact report you are looking for.
441
Viewing a report’s properties
In TriGeo Reports, many reports have similar titles. Therefore, you can use the Properties feature to
view a written description of each report. These descriptions match the ones given in "The following
tables list all of TriGeo’s reports, provide descriptions of their contents, and suggest schedules for
running each report. " on page 573.
To view a report’s properties:
1. In the reports list, click to select the report you want to work with.
l
In the report grid, position the mouse pointer over the report you have selected.
l
On the Settings tab, in the Report Selection group, click Report Properties.
In either case, an Information box appears, showing a description of the report.
3. Click OK to close the Information box.
442
The reports you use most often are obviously your favorite reports. To easily access these reports,
you can add them in the Favorite Reports list. This list contains only your favorite reports. It can
include any of TriGeo’s standard reports, as well as any custom reports you may have.
To designate a report as a favorite, you must copy it to the Favorite Reports list. Each Console user
can set up his or her own list of favorite reports. The Console displays the favorites of the user who is
currently logged on.
Note: A “Console user” is determined by the user’s Windows account. If two users on the same
computer log into the same account, they will share a list of favorites.
To create a list of favorite reports:
2. On the Settings tab, in the Report Categories group, click the Category list. Then select the
category that contains the report you want to add to your list of favorites.
3. Locate the report in the report list.
4. Right-click the favorite report and then select Add Report to Favorites.
The system copies the report to your Favorite Reports list. The next time you open the
Favorite Reports list, the report will be there.
Note: Usually, reports are added to the Favorite Reports list through the Report View
Preferences window. See "Creating a list of favorite reports" on page 435 for more
information.
443
Sorting, filtering, and grouping report lists
Sorting the report list
You can sort the report list by the clicking its column headers. This sorts the entire report list by the
contents of the column you have selected. You can sort each column in either ascending order
(alphabetical) or descending order (reverse alphabetical).
To sort the report list:
l
Click a column header once to sort the report list by that column in ascending (alphabetical)
order.
The column header shows an upward
this column in ascending order.
l
arrow. This arrow means the report list is sorted by
Click the column header again to sort the report list by that column in descending (reverse
alphabetical) order.
The column header shows a downward
this column in descending order.
arrow. This arrow means the report list is sorted by
444
The TriGeo Reports window lets you filter the report list. This means you can have the list display
only those reports that are associated with a particular report title, category, level, or type. You can
also apply more than one filter at a time to display a very small subset of the report list. If needed, you
can also create your own custom filters, and then save them for later use.
Each column header in the report list has a drop-down button. Clicking the button displays a list of
filter options that are available for that column, as shown here.
For example, the Category column has several options. Selecting Audit reduces the list to show
only the reports associated with the Audit category.
When you apply a filter, a yellow status bar appears below the reports list. The status bar lists which
filters are currently applied. You can use this list to remove each filter individually, or to remove them
all at once.
1. Decide which column you want to use for the filter.
2. Click a column header's drop-down list and select a filter option.
3. The report list refreshes to display the filtered list.
4. Repeat Step 2 for each additional filter you want to apply.
445
Changing a filter setting
l
Click a filtered column header's drop-down list and select a different filter option.
l
In the status bar below the report list, click the filter’s drop-down arrow
. Then select a
different filter option from your list of most commonly used filters.
The report list refreshes to display the list with the new filter.
In the TriGeo Reports window, when you are finished with a report filter, you can turn it off. Turning off
a filter refreshes the report list so that it displays the list without that column filter. You can turn off a
single filter or all of the filters at once.
To turn off a filter:
l
In the appropriate column header drop-down list, select (All).
l
Clear the check box next to the filter in the status bar.
The report list refreshes to display the list without that column filter.
446
To turn off all of the filters:
l
Click the
icon in the status bar.
The report list refreshes to display the list without any filters.
447
Custom report filters
In most cases, the standard column filters should meet your day-to-day needs. But if the filters are
insufficient, you can create your own customized multi-column filters. You can also choose to save
your custom filters. This allows you to save them for later use, or to pass them on to other users.
Creating a custom report filter
1. On the TriGeo Reports window, click the report filter you want to use as a starting point.
2. At the bottom of the filter, click the Customize… button.
The Filter Builder form appears.
3. Use the form’s buttons to select the column, column option, and specific conditions that define
the filter.
In the example shown above, the filter displays only those reports where the Category column
equals Audit, and the Type column equals Authentication.
4. Click OK or Apply to apply the filter. Otherwise, click Cancel.
448
1. Create the custom filter, as explained above.
2. Click Save As.
The Save the active filter to file form appears.
3. Use the Save in list to locate and select the folder you want to store the filter in.
4. In the File name box, type a name for the filter.
5. Click Save.
The filter is now saved and available for later use.
449
Opening a saved custom report filter
1. Click the Customize button.
The Filter Builder form appears.
2. Click Open.
The Open an existing filter form appears.
3. Use the Look in list to locate and open the folder that contains the custom filter. Then click to
select the filter.
4. Click Open.
5. The custom filter’s configuration appears in the Filter Builder form.
6. On the Filter Builder form, click OK or Apply.
The custom filter is applied to the report list.
450
Grouping reports
Grouping reports
You can sort the TriGeo Reports window’s report list into groups of reports by dragging one or more
column headers into grouping box above the report list. This feature allows you to quickly organize
and display groups of reports that fall into very specific categories.
For example, suppose you want to group the reports by Category. By simply dragging the Category
column header from the report list into the grouping box, you can rearrange the report list into groups
that are defined by items from the Category column, as shown here.
The tools for grouping reports
Groups change the report list into a series of nodes. There is a separate node for each unique item or
category from the column that defines the grouping. The nodes are alphabetized, and each node is
named by the column and category that defines the grouping.
For example, the Category column that defines the grouping in the example above has three unique
categories—Audit, Security, and Support. So grouping by the Category column creates three
nodes—Category: Audit, Category: Security, and Category: Support.
Opening a particular node displays only the reports that are associated with that particular grouping
configuration.
You can group reports by any column header in the report list (Title, Category, Level, Type, etc.).
You can also create sub-groups to create parent-child hierarchies. For example, you could create a
Category group and a Type sub-group, or vice versa.
451
Creating a report group
l
Decide which column is to define the report groupings. Then drag that column header into the
Drag a column header here to group by that column area above the report list.
Before
After
In the example shown above, we have dragged the Category header to group the report list by
Category.
The report list now displays a separate node for each unique item that is in the column that is
defining the grouping. The nodes are alphabetized and labeled for easy reference.
Viewing the reports within a group
l
Click a node to display a list of reports that fall within that grouping. To close the node, simply
click it again.
452
1. Drag another column header into the Drag a column header here to group by that column
area.
l
l
Place the new column header above the existing header to have the new header act as
the primary grouping. In the example shown above, the report list would be grouped by
Level and then Type.
Place the new column header below the existing header to have the new header act as
the secondary grouping. In the example shown above, the report list would be grouped
by Type and then Level.
The report list refreshes to display two levels of nodes—one level of nodes for the primary
group, and one set of nodes for the secondary group.
3. To view the reports within a particular grouping, click a higher-level group node, and then a
sub-group node.
The report list displays only those reports that apply to both groupings.
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each additional grouping you require.
453
Running and scheduling reports
This section explains how to run reports. You can run reports two different ways:
l
l
On-demand reports are those reports that you run only when you need them.
Scheduled Reports are reports that you configure to automatically run on their own, on a particular schedule, and without intervention.
All TriGeo reports are scheduled and run in the same manner. The following procedures explain the
methods for running on-demand reports and scheduled reports.
Reports can take quite a bit of time to run. The larger the report, the longer it takes to run. For that
reason, it is recommended you schedule any reports you intend to run frequently.
2. On the Settings tab, in the Preferences group, click the Data Source list and then select the
Manager or database warehouse that is to be the data source for the report. This step is only
needed if you are selecting a data source that is different from the Primary (default) Data
Source.
3. In the Report Categories group, click the Category list and select the report category you
want to work with.
The report list displays all of the reports in the category you have selected.
454
4. In the report list, locate the report you want to run. Then do any of the following:
l
Double-click the report.
l
Right-click the report and then click Run Report.
l
l
Click to select the report. Then on the Settings tab, in the Report Selection group,
click Run.
Click to select the report. Then on the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Run button.
Depending on the report you selected, you may be prompted to enter certain report
parameters, such as a start date/time, an end date/time, and a range. In this case, the Enter
Parameter Values form appears.
455
5. To complete the Enter Parameter Values form, select an item in the Parameter Fields box.
Then, in the lower half of the form, type or select the appropriate value for that parameter. The
following table explains how to complete each parameter field.
Parameter field
Description
Start
Date/Time
Type or select the report’s start date and time. The time is optional.
Click the Now button to populate these fields with the current date
and time.
End Date/Time
Type or select the report’s ending date and time. The time is
optional. Click the Now button to populate these fields with the
current date and time.
Top N
Type the number of items you want reported, such as the “top 5” or
the “top 10.”
6. Click OK.
The report appears in the Preview pane and the Ribbon changes to the View tab. You can use
the View tab to print, export, view, resize, and search the various pages of the report.
Report errors
If you receive the following error, it is possible that your database server for your data warehouse or
your TriGeo appliance is offline, or that you need to run the restrictreports CMC command.
1. First, check to make sure that your servers are online.
2. Then check your restrictreports settings. See the CMC restrictreports command in "Using
the CMC 'service' menu" on page 569.
If you receive any other errors, or if you are uncertain about how to properly perform these procedures,
please refer to the TriGeo Knowledgebase or contact TriGeo Technical Support.
456
Scheduling a report requires several steps. But once you configure a report schedule, TriGeo does the
rest. You can create more than one schedule for the same report. This allows you to run the same
report on different Managers, and to run the same report in different intervals (daily, weekly, monthly,
etc.), each with a different scope.
Scheduling a report is basically a seven-step process:
1. First, select the report you want to schedule and then click Schedule.
2. Name the scheduled task. You need to name the scheduled task to distinguish it from other
similar tasks. For example, the same scheduled report needs to be configured separately for
each data source (Manager or database warehouse). Therefore, you will name each task to
readily distinguish between the scheduled tasks for each data source.
3. Set the schedule parameters. This states when the scheduled report is to run.
4. Apply any advanced scheduling options, if desired.
5. Select settings that define when the TriGeo system can and cannot run the task.
6. Apply the scheduled report to the data source (Manager or the database warehouse) for which
you want a report. Then define the scope, which is the period you want to the report to cover.
When the system runs the report, it retrieves any pertinent events that occurred within the
period defined by the scope.
7. Finally, select any export options for the report. This allows you to export to the folder of your
choice, and in a format that is easy to read and print. If you do not export the report, it will automatically print to your default printer.
Each step of this process is fully explained in the following numbered topics. You must repeat this
process for each report you want to schedule.
457
Step 1: Selecting the report you want to schedule
In this step, you will select the report you want to schedule, then open the Report Scheduler Tasks
window.
To begin scheduling:
2. On the Settings tab, in the Report Categories group, click the Category list and select the
report category you want to work with.
The report list displays all of the reports in the category you have selected.
3. In the Report Title column, locate the report you want to schedule. Then do any one of the following:
l
Click the report and then click the Schedule button.
l
Right-click the report and then select Schedule Report.
l
Click the report you want to schedule. Then on the Menu Button menu, select
Schedule Report.
The Report Scheduler Tasks window appears. Use this window to add, edit, and delete your
scheduled report tasks.
Note that the Event Summary box shows only the tasks that apply to the report you selected
in Step 3.
458
Here, you will name and configure the new scheduled task that is associated with this report.
To create a scheduled task:
1. To add a new report schedule, click the Add button.
The Enter Scheduler Task Description form appears.
2. In the Task Description box, type a name for the report, then click OK.
At this point, the task scheduler form appears. The form takes the name of the report to
indicate which report you are scheduling.
459
3. Complete the Task tab as described in the following table.
In this box
Do this
Run
Normally, you will not change the default setting. But if you do, use this
box to type the path to the argument that initiates the task settings for
this report. If needed, click the Browse button to locate the correct
folder and file.
Start in
Normally, you will not change the default setting. But if you do, use this
box to type the path to the TriGeo Reports executable file (.exe).
Comments
Type a description of the report schedule you are configuring, such as
“Monthly TriGeo Event Summary Graphs.”
Run as
By default, this box displays the current user. To change the user, type
the domain and user name as follows: [Domain]\[UserName].
Then click the Set password button to set up a password for the
current user to run the report. This step is required for the scheduler to
work properly.
Enabled
(scheduled
task runs at
specified
time)
Select this check box to run the scheduled task to the schedule you
will specify in the Schedule tab. If you clear this check box, the report
will not run on that schedule.
4. Click Apply to save your changes to the tab.
460
Now you will create the actual report schedule. The settings on the Schedule tab tell the system
when to run the report.
If needed, you can create multiple schedules for each report that are within the same scope. For
example, perhaps you would like to run an event summary report for the current week and have it
display the running total for the week at each hour. You could set the report to “Week: Current” and
have multiple schedules that run on an hourly schedule and on a twice-daily schedule.
To schedule a report:
1. Click the Schedule tab. For new tasks, the tab states that the task is not scheduled.
2. Click the New button to create a new schedule for the report.
The schedule shown above appears by default. You will create a new schedule by modifying
this default schedule with the various boxes in the Schedule tab.
461
3. Complete the Schedule tab as described in the following table.
In this box
Do this
Schedule Task
Select how often the system is to run the report—daily, weekly, etc.
Start time
Type or select the time the system is to run the report.
For more detailed scheduling, click the Advanced button. See "Step
4: Selecting advanced scheduling options" on page 463 for more
information.
Every
Type or select how often you want to run the task based on your
selection in the Schedule Task box above. For example, for a daily
report, you can run the report every day, every 2 days, every 3 days,
etc. For a weekly report, you can run the report every week, every 2
weeks, etc.
Show multiple
schedules
Select this check box if you will have more than one schedule for
this task, where each schedule has the same scope.
If you are going to create more than one schedule with different
scopes, then you will need to create a different task for each
schedule.
If the report is to have only one schedule, then clear this check box.
4. Click Apply to save your changes.
The new report schedule appears in the list box near the top of the tab.
5. If desired, repeat Steps 2 – 4 to set up each new schedule for this task.
462
If you clicked the Schedule tab’s Advanced button, then the Advanced Schedule Options form
appears (shown here). This form provides you with complete control over your report schedules. For
example, you can schedule start and end dates for the report, or set a task to repeat for a set period of
time.
To select advanced scheduling options:
1. Click the Advanced button on the Schedule tab.
The Advanced Schedule Options form appears.
2. Complete the Advanced Schedule Options form as described in the following table.
In this box
Do this
Start Date
Type or select the date you want the system to begin running the
report.
End Date
Select this check box if there is a date on which you want the system
to stop running the report. Then type or select the end date.
If there is no end date, then leave this check box blank.
Repeat task
Select this check box if you want the system to repeat running the
scheduled report at regular intervals.
Every
Type or select the interval. In the example shown above, this task
will run every 4 hours.
463
In this box
Do this
Time
Type or select the time you want the system to stop running the
repeated task.
Duration
Type or select how long you want the task to run. By limiting the time
the task can run, you can prevent the task from running forever,
should a problem occur. Reports can be very time consuming;
therefore, use this configuration option with caution.
If the task is
still running,
stop it at this
time.
Select this check box to have the system stop running a report that is
running when the Time or Duration setting occurs.
Keep the check box clear to have the system finish running a report
that overlaps the Time or Duration setting.
In the example shown above, the configured report will run every four hours, starting on
Monday, August 18, and running through Sunday, August 30. Each time the task runs, the
system will stop it if it continues to run for more than one hour.
3. Click OK to save your changes and exit the form; otherwise, click Cancel.
You return to the task scheduler form.
464
In this topic, you will use the Settings tab to select options that state when the system can and
cannot run the task.
To define when the system can or cannot run the task:
1. Click the Settings tab to fine tune the options for this task.
2. Complete the Settings tab as described in the following table.
465
In this section
Do this
Scheduled Task
Completed
Select Delete the task if it is not scheduled to run again to
have the system delete a task that has run its course. For
example, you may want the system to delete a task that has a
definite end date. Leave this check box clear to keep the task.
Select Stop the task if it runs for [xxx] hour(s) [xxx] minute(s)
to specify a maximum allowable time limit for the system to
accomplish a task. Use the hour(s) and minute(s) boxes to
specify a maximum allowable time. In the example shown, the
system will stop the task if it exceeds 72 hours. If you leave this
check box clear, then the system continues running the task until
it is complete.
Idle Time
These options allow you to run tasks when the computer is idle.
Select Only start the task if the computer has been idle for at
least [xxx] minute(s) to begin running a task only if the computer
is idle for the specified time. Use the minute(s) box to specify a
minimum idle time. If you leave this check box clear, then the
system will run the task when the computer is in use.
In the If the computer has not been idle for that long, retry for
up to [xxx] minute(s) box, use the minutes(s) box to specify how
often you want the system to check to see if the computer has
reached its minimum idle time requirement for beginning the task.
Select Stop the task if the computer ceases to be idle to have
the system stop running a task when the computer is once again in
use. If you leave this check box clear, then the system will
continue running the task until it is complete.
466
In this section
Do this
Power
Management
Select Don’t start the task if the computer is running on
batteries to prevent the system from running the task when the
computer is running with a battery as its power source. If you
leave this check box clear, then the system will run the task even
when the computer is on batteries.
Select Stop the task if battery mode begins to have the system
stop the task when the computer switches to a battery as its
power source. If you leave this check box clear, then the system
will continue running the report even when the computer switches
to battery power.
Select Wake the computer to run this task to have the system
run the computer at normal power to run the scheduled report task.
If you leave this check box clear (not checked), then the report will
not run until the next scheduled time after the computer is removed
from “sleep.”
3. Click Apply to save your changes.
4. Click OK to close the task scheduler form and return to the Report Scheduler Tasks window.
467
Once you have added your scheduled report tasks, you can assign the task to a particular data
source (a Manager or a database warehouse) and define the task’s scope. The scope is the event
period you want the report to cover. When the system runs the report, it retrieves any pertinent events
(that the report covers) that occurred within the period defined by the scope.
To assign the task’s data source:
1. In to the Report Scheduler Tasks window’s Task Description list, select the report
schedule you want to assign.
2. Click the Load to View or Edit button.
The window’s Report Execution Settings For Selected Task section becomes enabled.
You will use this section to configure the report execution settings for the task (report
schedule) you selected above.
3. Use the Select the report data source list to select the Manager or database warehouse to
which you want to assign this task.
468
Note: You can only assign a task to a single Manager. If you need to assign a similar or
identical task to another Manager, then you must create a new task for that other Manager.
To assign the task’s scope:
In the Report Scope area, you will set up the task’s scope for this data source. The scope is the
event period, or time frame, for the events you want the report to cover.
1. In the Date Range list, select the date range you want the report to cover for this task and this
data source.
In the example shown above, the date range is Day: Today. This means the report will cover
the period from 12:00:00 AM to 11:59:59 PM of the current date.
For a more complex example, suppose you chose Week: Previous as the date range. The
scheduled report would contain information from the last full week, from 12:00:00 AM the last
Monday to 11:59:59 PM the last Sunday. For example, if today is Wednesday the 11th, the
task runs from 12:00:00 AM on the 2nd to 11:59:59 PM on the 8th.
The following table describes each option in the Date Range list.
Date Range
Description
Day: Today
Run for the specified timeframe on the current (today’s) date.
Day: Yesterday
Run for the specified timeframe on the previous (yesterday’s) date.
Week: Current
Run from one week ago to the current time.
Week: Previous
Run from 12:00:00 AM last Monday to at most 11:59:59 Sunday.
This report will capture the last full week of data.
Month: Current
Run from one month ago to the current time.
Month:
Previous
Run from 12:00:00 AM on the first of the month until 11:59:59 PM
on the last day of the month. This will report will capture the last full
month of data.
469
Date Range
Description
User Defined
Use this option to run any other report scopes. You can use this
option to schedule reports for arbitrary periods, or for periods that
are outside of the conventional scope of a day, week, or month.
2. In the Start Time and End Time boxes, type or select a start time and end time for reporting
events that occurred on this Manager. The report will only show those events that occurred on
the Manager within this period.
Note: If you select a Week or a Month scope, you cannot edit the Start Date/Time and End
Date/Time.
3. The Count Settings area only applies to count-based reports, such as “Top 20” reports. In the
Number of Items box, type or select the number of items you want the report to track.
4. To configure the report so that it automatically exports to a file, continue to "Step 7: Exporting
a scheduled report," below. Otherwise, click Save.
Finally, you can have the report utility automatically export a scheduled report in Adobe’s Portable
Document Format (.PDF) to the folder of your choice. If you do not choose to export a scheduled
report, then the system will print the report to your default printer each time it runs.
To export a scheduled report to a file:
1. Open the Report Scheduler Tasks window, if you have not already done so.
2. In the Task Description box, select the scheduled report task you want to export.
3. On the Report Settings tab, select the Export check box. This enables the other fields in this
section. This section allows you to name and export this report in the format and folder of your
choice when the task scheduler runs this report.
4. In the Format list, select the file format in which you want to export the report.
5. Click the folder icon next to the File Name box. Browse to the folder where you want to save
the report, then type a unique file name for the report.
If the report has multiple schedules, then give each schedule’s exported report a different
name. Otherwise, the exported filenames files will overwrite each other, or they will increment
470
according to the If File Exists setting, causing it to be difficult to readily identify the different
schedules’ reports.
6. In the If File Exists list, choose one of the following options:
l
l
Select Increment to store the new report along with any previous versions of the report
in the folder. The Report Console increments each report by appending the report filename with an underscore and a digit. For example, the first increment is [FileName]_
1.pdf, the second is [FileName]_2.pdf, and so on.
Select Overwrite to have each new version of the report overwrite the previous version
of the report in the folder.
7. Click Save.
8. Click Close to close the Report Scheduler Tasks window and return to the TriGeo Reports
window.
9. Repeat sections "Step 2: Adding a new scheduled report task" through "Step 7: Exporting a
scheduled report" for each report you want to schedule and assign to a particular data source.
471
Managing reports
The following topics explain how to edit a scheduled report task, how to delete a schedule from a
task, and how to delete a scheduled report task.
Editing a scheduled report task
When needed, you can easily make changes to a scheduled report task, or to a specific task
schedule, by editing its settings.
To edit a schedule report task:
2. On the Settings tab, in the Report Categories group, click the Category list and then select
either Standard Reports or Custom Reports.
The grid displays all of the reports in the category you have selected.
3. In the grid’s Report Title column, click the name of the report that needs the schedule change.
4. On the Settings tab, in the Report Selection group, click Schedule.
The Report Scheduler Tasks window appears.
5. In the Task Description list, select the report schedule you want to edit.
6. Click Modify.
The scheduler form appears.
7. Make your report schedule changes to the Task, Schedule, and Settings tabs, as needed.
8. To change the settings for a particular schedule, click the Schedule tab. In the tab’s schedule
list, select the schedule you want to change. Use the boxes to change the settings, then click
Apply.
9. When you are finished making all of your changes, click OK to close the form.
You return to the Report Scheduler Tasks form.
10. If needed, make any changes to the Report Settings.
11. Click Save.
12. Click Close to close the Report Scheduler Tasks form.
472
If a particular task schedule is incorrect or no longer needed, you can easily delete it from a tasks list
of schedules.
To delete a task schedule:
3. In the grid’s Report Title column, click the name of the report for which you want to delete a
task schedule.
5. In the Task Description list, select the scheduled report that has a schedule you want to
delete.
6. Click Modify.
The task schedule form appears.
7. Click the Schedule tab and select the Show Multiple Schedules check box if it has not been
selected.
8. In the schedule list box, select the schedule you want to delete.
9. Click Delete.
473
Deleting a scheduled report task
If a scheduled report task is incorrect or no longer needed, you can easily delete it from your task list.
To delete a scheduled report task:
3. In the grid’s Report Title column, click the name of the scheduled report that has a task you
want to delete.
5. In the Task Description list, select the scheduled report task you want to delete.
6. Click Delete.
7. At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. Otherwise, click No to keep the scheduled report task.
474
Viewing reports
Viewing reports
The topics in this section explain how to open, view, and manipulate a report image shown in the
TriGeo Reports Preview pane.
Opening your saved reports
Whenever a report is saved or exported to .rpt format, you can use the Open command to reopen and
view the report’s contents. This applies to scheduled reports that the system has run and saved, as
well as on-demand reports that you have run and exported for later viewing.
To open a saved report:
l
Click the Menu Button and then click Open Report.
l
On the Quick Access Toolbar, click Open Report.
l
On the Settings tab, in the Report Selection group, click Open.
The Open Report File form appears.
3. Use the Open Report File form to explore to the report file you want to view.
Note: If the report cannot be found where it is expected, be sure you have selected Crystal
Reports (*.rpt) in the File type list.
4. Select the file and then click Open.
The report opens in the TriGeo Reports Preview pane. You may now view, search, resize,
print, or export the report, as needed.
475
Viewing the sections of a master report
Some of TriGeo’s standard reports are “master” reports. A master report is a report made up by a
series of sub-topics, where each sub-topic contains a specific set of details about the higher-level
master topic. Together, these topics make up the whole report, just like individual chapters make up a
book.
When a report has more than one sub-topic, a sub-topic pane appears on to the left of the TriGeo
Reports window’s Preview pane. The sub-topic pane lists the sub-topics that are found in the report.
If you click a sub-topic, the Preview pane displays the first page of that section of the report.
To view a section of a master report:
l
In the sub-topic pane, select the sub-topic you want to see.
The Preview pane displays the first page of that section of the report.
In this example, the Preview pane is showing the Authentication report. The sub-topic pane
shows this report has sub-topics on suspicious authentications, authentication failures, user
logons, user logoffs, user logon failures, etc. Clicking a sub-topic displays that section of the
report.
476
Whenever you are previewing a master report (that is, a report that has lower-level topics), the View
tab’s Tree
button becomes enabled. You can use this button to toggle between hiding and
revealing the report’s sub-topic pane.
To hide the sub-topic pane:
l
On the View tab, in the View group, click the Tree
The sub-topic pane becomes hidden, as shown here.
477
button.
To restore the sub-topic pane:
l
On the View tab, in the View group, click the Tree
The sub-topic pane appears again.
478
button again.
In the TriGeo Reports window, the View tab’s Navigate group has a toolbar that you can use to
browse through the pages of a multi-page report. If the report has only one page, then this toolbar is
disabled.
To view the pages of a report:
1. In the TriGeo Reports window, open or run the report you want to view.
2. Click the View tab.
3. In the Navigate group, use the toolbar to view the report, as described in the following table.
Button
Function
Displays the first page of the report.
Displays the previous page of the report.
Displays the next page of the report.
Displays the last page of the report.
479
Button
Function
Displays the page number that is currently shown in the Preview
frame, as well as the total number of pages in the report. If the
Console has not yet tallied the total number of pages, you will see
how ever many pages it is certain of and a “+” to indicate that there
are more pages.
To determine how many pages are in the report, click the
button. This takes you to the last page of the report, forcing the
Console to determine how many pages there are. It also causes
the 1+ to display the actual number of pages.
You can also use this feature to display a particular page of the
report. In the Page box, type a page number you want to see and
then press Enter. The Preview frame then displays that page.
480
You can use the TriGeo Reports Zoom feature to resize a report by typing or selecting a percentage
of the report’s actual size. You can magnify (zoom in) or reduce (zoom out) on a report, or have the
report expand or reduce to fit the Preview pane.
To zoom in or out on a report:
1. In TriGeo Reports, open or run the report you want to view.
The report appears in the Preview pane.
2. On the View tab, in the View group, click the Zoom list and then select the option you want.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Select Page Width to have the width of the report page match that of the Preview
pane.
Select Whole Page to display the entire report page within the Preview pane.
Select anything less than 100% to reduce the report accordingly. For example, 50% displays the report at have its normal size.
Select 100% to display the report in its actual size.
Select anything greater than 100% to magnify the page accordingly. For example,
200% displays the report at twice its normal size.
In the Zoom box, type a [number]% for the magnification you want, and then press
Enter. For example, type 33% to reduce the image to one-third of its actual size. Or
type 175% to magnify the report so it is three-quarters larger than its normal size.
481
Stopping a report in progress
l
To stop running or loading a report that is progress, click the Stop button on the status bar, in
the lower-right corner of the TriGeo Reports window.
482
In the TriGeo Reports window has a Search tool that you can use to
search for key words or phrases in text-based reports.
This tool only works when you are viewing a text-based view of a
report in the Preview pane. You cannot use this tool with graphicalonly reports, or the default graphical view that is displayed when you
first run the report.
Viewing the text-based details of a report
l
l
Open a page that is past the graphical section of the report, into the report content pages.
On the View tab, click the Tree button to open the report’s list of sub-topics. Then click the content-based sub-topic to jump to that section of the report. For more information, see "Viewing
reports" on page 475.
Using the Search tool
1. In the TriGeo Reports window, open or run the report you want to view.
2. Display the text-based details you want to search in the Preview pane.
3. On the View tab, in the Navigate group, click Search.
The Find form appears.
4. In the Find what box, type the text you want to search for.
5. Select Match whole word only to search for entire words that match, omitting matching
letters within words.
6. Select Match case to make the search sensitive to uppercase or lowercase letters.
7. In the Direction area, click Up to search from where you are now to the start of the document,
or click Down to search from where you are now to the end of the document.
8. Click Find Next.
The tool locates the next instance of the text in the report and highlights it for easy viewing.
483
9. Continue clicking Find Next for each remaining instance of the text you want to find.
10. When you are finished, click Cancel to close the Search form.
484
The Select Expert tool lets you use queries to create a smaller, more focused report from a larger
text-based report. In this manner, you can create reports with very focused information.
This tool only works when you are viewing a text-based view of a report in the Preview frame. You
cannot use this tool with the default graphical view that is displayed when you first run the report.
Note: Using the Select Expert to filter report data by date or time fields (such as InsertionTime or
DetectionTime) will result in an error. If you receive this error, clear the error prompt, return to the
Select Expert, and delete the time-based filter. To filter by time and date, you must run the report with
the specified range.
485
1. In TriGeo Reports, open or run the report you want to work with.
2. On the View tab, in the View group, click Select Expert.
The Select Expert form appears.
3. Click either the New button or the <New> tab.
The Fields form appears. This form displays all of the various report fields that you can query
on this report.
You can click the Browse button to bring up a list of available fields that you can select with
the tool.
4. Select the field you want to query, then click OK.
486
The Select Expert form appears. The first tab displays the field name you have selected. It
lists the query options for that field and has an adjacent list where you can select a specific
value.
5. In the tab’s left-hand list box (or boxes), select a query option for the field. Then, in the
adjacent right-hand list box, select a specific value for the field.
If needed, you can click the Browse Data button to see a complete list of values that are
present in the report for that field. From the Browse Data box, you can select a value; then
click Close to apply that value to the query.
6. Repeat Steps 3 – 5 for each field you want to add to the query.
7. Click OK to close the form and apply the query; otherwise, click Cancel.
The new report appears in Preview frame. If needed, you can use the Preview frame’s toolbar
to save or export the report.
487
Restoring the original report
When you are through querying a report with the Select Expert tool, you can restore the report to its
original state.
To turn off the Select Expert settings:
1. On the View tab, in the View group, click Select Expert.
The Select Expert form appears.
2. Click Delete to remove the query options.
3. Click OK.
The original report appears in the Preview frame.
488
Printing reports
Printing reports
You can print any report shown in the TriGeo Reports window’s Preview pane.
Printing a report
1. In the TriGeo Reports window, open or run the report you want to print.
2. On the View tab, in the Output group, click Print.
The Print form appears.
3. Select the printer and any print options you want.
4. Click Print.
The report is printed according to the print options you selected.
489
Setting up printer preferences
Use the Printer Setup command to define the default print settings the Print command is to use
when printing TriGeo reports. For example, if you usually print in landscape, you can select that
preference here. The Print command will then print in landscape, by default. Whenever you need to
override a default setting, you can always do so with the normal Print dialog box.
To set up printer preferences:
1. In the TriGeo Reports window, open or run the report you want to print.
2. On the View tab, in the Preferences group, click Printer Setup.
The Page Setup form appears.
3. Select the Paper, Orientation, Margin, and Printer options you want.
A preview section at the top of the form displays a thumbnail version of the report with the
options you have selected.
4. Click OK.
The report is printed according to the print options you selected.
490
Exporting a report
Exporting a report
Use this procedure to export the report shown in the TriGeo Reports window’s Preview pane. You
can choose to export the report as a Adobe Portable Document File (.PDF), a Crystal Reports RPT
file, as HTML, as a Microsoft Excel file, or as several other common file formats. TriGeo officially
supports PDF and RPT formats.
To export a report:
1. In the TriGeo Reports window, open or run the report you want to export.
2. On the View tab, in the Output group, click Export.
The Export form appears.
3. In the Format list, select the fine type in which you want to save the report. The Description
box at the bottom of the form describes each file format that you choose.
4. Use the Destination list to browse to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Click OK.
The system save the file to the folder and in the format that you selected.
491
This appendix describes every alert type that is displayed in the Alerts Panel and that can be
configured with the Policy commands. For more information, see "About the Monitor view" on page
63, and "Configuring alert distribution policy" on page 397.
Types of alerts
The TriGeo SIM reports alerts in a hierarchical node tree, shown here. When you click a node to open
it, you will see that most nodes also have lower-level nodes. Each node that has lower-level nodes is
called a parent node. Similarly, all lower-level nodes below a particular parent node can be thought of
as child nodes or children to that parent node. Naturally, the term parent and child applies to the node,
relative to its position and role on the node tree. That is, a node can be a child to one node, and a
parent to others.
The TriGeo SIM automatically assigns alerts to the nodes of the alert tree based on the specific
nature of the alert and its severity.
493
Alert types
There are five types of alerts:
l
l
l
l
l
Security Alerts are generally related to network activity that is consistent with an internal or
external attack, a misuse or abuse of resources, a resource compromise, resource probing, or
other abnormal traffic that is noteworthy. Security Alert events indicate aggressive behavior
that may lead to an attack or resource compromise, or suspicious behavior that may indicate
unauthorized information gathering. The TriGeo SIM infers some Security Alerts from what is
normally considered audit traffic, but it escalates the events to alert status based on thresholds that are defined by Rules.
Internal Alerts are related to the operation of the TriGeo SIM system. Any events generated
by TriGeo relating to Active Response, TriGeo users, or TriGeo errors will appear under one of
the many children. These alerts are for informational purposes. They do not necessarily reflect
conditions that should cause alarm. Alerts that may reflect potential issues within TriGeo SIM
are specifically marked for forwarding to TriGeo.
Audit Alerts are generally related to normal network activity that would not be considered an
attack, compromise, or misuse of resources. Many of the audit alerts have rules that can be
used to threshold and escalate “normal” behavior into something which may be considered a
security event.
Incident alerts are used to raise global enterprise-wide visibility in response to any issue
detected by TriGeo Rules. Incidents generally reflect serious issues that should be addressed.
Since Incidents are created by Rules, any combination of malicious or suspicious traffic from
any other single alert or combination of alerts can create an Incident.
Asset alerts relate to the changing state of different types of enterprise assets, including software, hardware, and users. These alerts can indicate changes made to system configurations,
software updates, patch applications, vulnerability information, and other system events.
The following topics list and describe every preconfigured alert message that can appear in the Alert
grid. For your convenience, they are listed alphabetically.
494
Asset Alerts
Asset Alerts
Asset Alerts deal with assets and asset scan results. They relate to the changing state of different
types of enterprise assets, including software, hardware, and users. Asset information can come
from centralized directory service tools, or it can be scan information from security scan tools,
including Vulnerability Assessment and Patch Management tools. Therefore, these alerts indicate
changes made to system configurations, software updates, patch applications, vulnerability
information, and other system events.
Each Asset Alert is described below. For your convenience, they are listed alphabetically.
AssetManagement
AssetManagement alerts are for gathering non-realtime data about system assets (computer,
software, users). The data will come from various sources, including Directory Service tools.
AssetManagement > MachineAsset
MachineAsset is a specific type of AssetManagement alert that indicates additions, removals, and
updates (including software installation) of specific nodes that exist in the enterprise.
AssetManagement > MachineAsset > MachineAssetAdded
MachineAssetAdded alerts indicate a new presence of a node (host or network device) in the
enterprise.
AssetManagement > MachineAsset > MachineAssetRemoved
MachineAssetRemoved alerts indicate the removal of a node (host or network device) from the
enterprise.
AssetManagement > MachineAsset > MachineAssetUpdated
MachineAssetUpdated alerts indicate a change to an existing node (host or network device) in the
enterprise, including new software and software patch installations on the node.
AssetManagement > MachineAsset > MachineAssetUpdated > SoftwareAssetUpdated
SoftwareAssetUpdated alerts indicate an attempted software change (including application of a
software patch) to an existing node (host or network device) in the enterprise, successful or failed.
AssetManagement > MachineAsset > MachineAssetUpdated > SoftwareAssetUpdated >
SoftwareAssetPatched
SoftwareAssetPatched alerts indicate a successful application of a software patch to an existing
node (host or network device) in the enterprise.
AssetManagement > MachineAsset > MachineAssetUpdated > SoftwareAssetUpdated >
SoftwareAssetPatchFailed
SoftwareAssetPatchFailed alerts indicate a failed application of a software patch to an existing node
(host or network device) in the enterprise.
AssetManagement > SoftwareAsset
495
SoftwareAsset is a specific type of AssetManagement alert that indicates additions, removals, and
updates of specific software and software versions that exist in the enterprise.
AssetManagement > SoftwareAsset > SoftwareAssetAdded
SoftwareAssetAdded alerts indicate a new presence of an installation of specific software
applications or operating systems in the enterprise.
AssetManagement > SoftwareAsset > SoftwareAssetAdded > SoftwareAssetVersionAdded
SoftwareAssetVersionAdded alerts indicate a new version installation of specific known software
applications or operating systems in the enterprise.
AssetManagement > SoftwareAsset > SoftwareAssetRemoved
SoftwareAssetRemoved alerts indicate removals of specific software applications or operating
systems from the enterprise.
AssetManagement > UserAsset
UserAsset is a specific type of AssetManagement alert that indicates additions, removals, and
updates to users and user groups that exist in the enterprise.
AssetManagement > UserAsset > GroupAssetAdded
GroupAssetAdded alerts indicate a new presence of a user group in the enterprise.
AssetManagement > UserAsset > GroupAssetRemoved
GroupAssetRemoved alerts indicate the removal of a user group from the enterprise.
AssetManagement > UserAsset > GroupAssetUpdated
GroupAssetUpdated alerts indicate a change to a user group that exists in the enterprise, including
group member additions and deletions.
AssetManagement > UserAsset > GroupAssetUpdated > GroupAssetMemberAdded
GroupAssetMemberAdded alerts indicate an addition of a user member to a user group that exists in
the enterprise.
AssetManagement > UserAsset > GroupAssetUpdated > GroupAssetMemberRemoved
GroupAssetMemberRemoved alerts indicate a removal of a user member from a user group that
exists in the enterprise.
AssetManagement > UserAsset > UserAssetAdded
UserAssetAdded alerts indicate a new presence of a user in the enterprise.
AssetManagement > UserAsset > UserAssetRemoved
UserAssetRemoved alerts indicate the removal of a user from the enterprise.
AssetManagement > UserAsset > UserAssetUpdated
UserAssetUpdated alerts indicate a change to a user that exists in the enterprise.
496
Asset Alerts
AssetScanResult
AssetScanResult contains alerts useful for data gathered from security scan results (reports). These
alerts are commonly gathered from Vulnerability Assessment and Patch Management tools.
AssetScanResult > ExposureFound
ExposureFound alerts indicate scan results that are not high risk but demonstrate configuration
issues or potential risks. These alerts may indicate exposures that can potentially cause future
exploits or have been common sources of exploits in the past, such as common open ports or host
configuration issues.
AssetScanResult > VulnerabilityFound
VulnerabilityFound alerts indicate scan results that demonstrate high risk vulnerabilities. These alerts
can indicate the presence of serious exposures that should be addressed and can represent
significant risk of exploit or infection of enterprise assets.
GeneralAsset
GeneralAsset alerts are generated when a supported product outputs data that has not yet been
normalized into a specific alert, but is known to be asset issue-related.
497
Audit Alerts
Alerts that are children of AuditAlert node are generally related to normal network activity that would
not be considered an attack, compromise, or misuse of resources. Many of the audit alerts have rules
that can be used to threshold and escalate “normal” behavior into something which may be
considered a security event.
Each Audit Alert is described below. For your convenience, they are listed alphabetically.
AuthAudit
Alerts that are part of the AuthAudit tree are related to authentication and authorization of accounts
and account ''containers'' such as groups or domains.
These alerts can be produced from any network node including firewalls, routers, servers, and clients.
AuthAudit > DomainAuthAudit
DomainAuthAudit events are authentication, authorization, and modification events related only to
domains, subdomains, and account containers. These alerts are normally operating system related,
however could be produced by any network device.
AuthAudit > DomainAuthAudit > NewDomainMember
NewDomainMember events occur when an account or account container has been added to a
domain. Usually, these additions are made by a user account with administrative privileges, but
occasionally a NewDomainMember alert will also happen when local system maintenance activity
takes place.
AuthAudit > DomainAuthAudit > DeleteDomainMember
DeleteDomainMember events occur when an account or account container has been removed from a
domain. Usually, these changes are made by a user account with administrative privileges, but
occasionally a DeleteDomainMember alert will also happen when local system maintenance activity
takes place.
AuthAudit > DomainAuthAudit > ChangeDomainMember
A ChangeDomainMember alert occurs when an account or account container within a domain is
modified. Usually, these changes are made by a user account with administrative privileges, but
occasionally a ChangeDomainMember alert will also happen when local system maintenance activity
takes place.
AuthAudit > DomainAuthAudit > ChangeDomainMember > DomainMemberAlias
DomainMemberAlias events happen when an account or account container within a domain has an
alias created, deleted, or otherwise modified. This event is uncommon and is used to track links
between domain members and other locations in the domain where the member may appear.
The alias for a domain member has been changed.
AuthAudit > DomainAuthAudit > NewDomain
498
Audit Alerts
NewDomain events occur upon creation of a new trust relationship between domains, creation of a
new subdomain, or creation of new account containers within a domain. Usually, these creations are
done by a user account with administrative privileges.
AuthAudit > DomainAuthAudit > ChangeDomainAttribute
ChangeDomainAttribute events occur when a domain type is changed. These events are uncommon
and usually provided by the operating system. Usually, these changes are made by a user account
with administrative privileges, but occasionally a ChangeDomainAttribute alert will also happen when
local system maintenance activity takes place.
AuthAudit > DomainAuthAudit > DeleteDomain
DeleteDomain events occur upon removal of a trust relationship between domains, deletion of a
subdomain, or deletion of account containers within a domain. Usually, these changes are made by a
user account with administrative privileges.
AuthAudit > GroupAudit
GroupAudit events are authentication, authorization, and modification events related only to account
groups. These alerts are normally operating system related, however could be produced by any
network device.
AuthAudit > GroupAudit > ChangeGroupAttribute
ChangeGroupAttribute events occur when a group type is modified. Usually, these changes are made
by a user account with administrative privileges, but occasionally a ChangeGroupAttribute alert will
also happen when local system maintenance activity takes place.
AuthAudit > GroupAudit > DeleteGroup
DeleteGroup events occur upon deletion of a new group of any type. Usually, these deletions are
made by a user account with administrative privileges.
AuthAudit > GroupAudit > DeleteGroupMember
DeleteGroupMember events occur when an account or group has been removed from a group.
Usually, these changes are made by a user account with administrative privileges, but occasionally a
DeleteGroupMember alert will also happen when local system maintenance activity takes place.
AuthAudit > GroupAudit > NewGroup
NewGroup events occur upon creation of a new group of any type. Usually, these additions are made
by a user account with administrative privileges.
AuthAudit > GroupAudit > NewGroupMember
NewGroupMember events occur when an account (or other group) has been added to a group.
Usually, these additions are made by a user account with administrative privileges, but occasionally
a NewGroupMember alert will also happen when local system maintenance activity takes place.
A new user, machine, or service account has been added to the group.
AuthAudit > MachineAuthAudit
499
MachineAuthAudit events are authentication, authorization, and modification events related only to
computer or machine accounts. These alerts can be produced from any network node including
firewalls, routers, servers, and clients, but are normally operating system related.
AuthAudit > MachineAuthAudit > MachineAuthTicketFailure
MachineAuthTicketFailure alerts reflect failed computer or machine account ticket events from
network devices that use a ticket-based single-sign-on system (such as Kerberos or Windows
domains). Each alert will reflect the point on the network where the computer or machine was
attempting logon. In larger quantities, these alerts may reflect a potential issue with a computer or set
of computers, but as individual events they are generally not a problem.
AuthAudit > MachineAuthAudit > MachineAuthTicket
MachineAuthTicket alerts reflect computer or machine account ticket events from network devices
monitored by Contego that use a ticket-based single-sign-on system (such as Kerberos or Windows
domains). Each alert will reflect the type of device the logon was intended for along with all other
relevant fields.
AuthAudit > MachineAuthAudit > MachineDisable
MachineDisable events occur when a machine account is actively disabled and/or when an account
is forcibly locked out by the operating system or other authentication tool. These events are usually
operating system related and could reflect a potential issue with a computer or set of computers.
AuthAudit > MachineAuthAudit > MachineEnable
MachineEnable alerts reflect the action of enabling a computer or machine account. These events are
normally OS-related and will trigger when a machine is 'enabled', normally by a user with
administrative privileges.
AuthAudit > MachineAuthAudit > MachineLogoff
MachineLogoff alerts reflect computer or machine account logoff events from network devices
(including network infrastructure devices, where appropriate). Each alert will reflect the type of device
from which the user was logging off. These alerts are usually normal events but are tracked for
consistency and auditing purposes.
AuthAudit > MachineAuthAudit > MachineLogonFailure
MachineLogonFailure alerts reflect failed computer or machine account logon events from network
devices (including network infrastructure devices, when appropriate). Each alert will reflect the point
on the network where the computer or machine was attempting logon. In larger quantities, these
alerts may reflect a potential issue with a computer or set of computers, but as individual events they
are generally not a problem.
AuthAudit > MachineAuthAudit > MachineLogon
MachineLogon events reflect computer or machine account logon events from network devices
monitored by Contego (including network infrastructure devices, when appropriate). Each alert will
reflect the type of device that the logon was intended for along with all other relevant fields. These
events are normally operating system related.
500
Audit Alerts
AuthAudit > MachineAuthAudit > MachineModifyAttribute
MachineModifyAttribute events occur when a computer or machine type is changed. These events
are uncommon and usually provided by the operating system.
AuthAudit > MachineAuthAudit > MachineModifyPrivileges
MachineModifyPrivileges events are created when a computer or machine's privileges are elevated or
demoted based on their logon or activities they are performing. These events are uncommon.
AuthAudit > UserAuthAudit
UserAuthAudit events are authentication, authorization, and modification events related only to user
accounts. These alerts can be produced from any network node including firewalls, routers, servers,
and clients.
AuthAudit > UserAuthAudit > UserAuthTicketFailure
UserAuthTicketFailure alerts reflect failed user account ticket events from network devices that use
a ticket-based single-sign-on system (such as Kerberos or Windows domains). Each alert will reflect
the point on the network where the user was attempting logon. In larger quantities, these alerts may
reflect a potential issue with a user or set of users, but as individual events they are generally not a
problem.
AuthAudit > UserAuthAudit > UserAuthTicket
UserAuthTicket alerts reflect user account ticket events from network devices monitored by Contego
that use a ticket-based single-sign-on system (such as Kerberos or Windows domains). Each alert
will reflect the type of device that the logon was intended for along with all other relevant fields.
AuthAudit > UserAuthAudit > UserDisable
UserDisable events occur when a user account is actively disabled and/or when a user is forcibly
locked out by the operating system or other authentication tool. These events are usually operating
system related and could reflect a potential issue with a user or set of users.
AuthAudit > UserAuthAudit > UserEnable
UserEnable alerts reflect the action of enabling a user account. These events are normally OS-related
and will trigger both when an account is ''unlocked'' after lockout due to unsuccessful logons and
'enabled' in the traditional sense.
AuthAudit > UserAuthAudit > UserLogoff
UserLogoff alerts reflect account logoff events from network devices (including network infrastructure
devices). Each alert will reflect the type of device from which the user was logging off. These alerts
are usually normal events but are tracked for consistency and auditing purposes.
AuthAudit > UserAuthAudit > UserLogon
UserLogon alerts reflect user account logon events from network devices monitored by Contego
(including network infrastructure devices). Each alert will reflect the type of device that the logon was
intended for along with all other relevant fields.
501
AuthAudit > UserAuthAudit > UserLogonFailure
UserLogonFailure alerts reflect failed account logon events from network devices (including network
infrastructure devices). Each alert will reflect the point on the network where the user was attempting
logon. In larger quantities, these alerts may reflect a potential issue with a user or set of users, but as
individual events they are generally not a problem.
With TriGeo policy, you can configure combinations of this event to escalate to FailedAuthentication
in the Security tree, reflecting the increase in severity of the event over several occurrences.
AuthAudit > UserAuthAudit > UserModifyAttribute
UserModifyAttribute events occur when a user type is changed. These events are uncommon and
usually provided by the operating system.
AuthAudit > UserAuthAudit > UserModifyPrivileges
UserModifyPrivileges events are created when a user's privileges are elevated or demoted based on
their logon or activities they are performing. These events are uncommon.
GeneralAudit
GeneralAudit alerts are generated when a supported product outputs data that has not yet been
normalized into a specific alert, but is known to be audit-related.
MachineAudit
MachineAudit alerts are used to track hardware or software status and modifications. These events
are generally acceptable, but do indicate modifications to the client system that may be noteworthy.
MachineAudit > SoftwareInstall
SoftwareInstall alerts reflect modifications to the system at a software level, generally an OS level (or
equivalent, in the case of a network infrastructure device). These alerts are generated when a user
updates a system or launches system-native methods to install third party applications.
MachineAudit > SoftwareInstall > SoftwareUpdate
SoftwareUpdate is a specific type of SoftwareInstall that reflects a more current version of software
being installed to replace an older version.
MachineAudit > SystemScan
SystemScan alerts reflect information related to scheduled or on-demand scans of systems. These
alerts are generally produced by Anti-Virus, Patch Management, and Vulnerability Assessment tools,
and indicate the start, finish, and information related to a scan.
MachineAudit > SystemScanInfo
SystemScanInfo is a specific type of SystemScan alert that reflects information related to a system
scan. Most of these events can safely be ignored, as they are generally normal activity that does not
reflect a failure or abnormal state.
MachineAudit > SystemScanStart
502
Audit Alerts
SystemScanStart is a specific type of SystemScan alert that indicates initiation of a system scan.
MachineAudit > SystemScanStop
SystemScanStop is a specific type of SystemScan alert that indicates completion of a system scan.
This activity is generally normal, however, in the error or failure state a specific alert will be generated.
MachineAudit > SystemScanWarning
SystemScanWarning is a specific type of SystemScan alert that indicates a scan has returned a
'Warning' message indicating an issue. These alerts may indicate scan issues that should be
corrected for future scans.
MachineAudit > SystemStatus
SystemStatus alerts reflect general system state events. These events are generally normal and
informational, however, they could potentially reflect a failure or issue which should be addressed.
MachineAudit > SystemStatus > SystemReboot
SystemReboot is a specific type of SystemStatus alert that is used to audit system restarts. This
alert will only be generated if the system restart was normal and not a result of a crash or other failure
condition.
MachineAudit > SystemStatus > SystemReboot > SystemShutdown
SystemShutdown is a specific type of SystemStatus alert that is used to audit system shutdowns,
including both expected and unexpected shutdowns. In the event the shutdown was unexpected, the
event detail will note the information provided by the tool related to the abnormality.
PolicyAudit
PolicyAudit events are used to track access, modification, scope change, and creation of
authentication, domain, account, and account container policies. Many of these alerts reflect normal
system traffic. Most PolicyAudit alerts are provided by the Operating System.
PolicyAudit > NewAuthPolicy
NewAuthPolicy alerts occur when a new authorization or authentication package, process, or logon
handler is applied to an item (usually an account or domain). In the operating system context, these
events will often occur on boot as the system initializes the appropriate authentication policies for
itself.
PolicyAudit > PolicyAccess
PolicyAccess alerts reflect all levels of access to policy, mostly targeting domain, account, access,
and logon policy modifications.
PolicyAudit > PolicyAccess > PolicyModify
PolicyModify alerts reflect all types of modifications to contained policies, both at a local and
domain/account container level. In the context of a network infrastructure device, this would be a
modification to access control lists or other similar policies on the device.
PolicyAudit > PolicyAccess > PolicyModify > DomainPolicyModify
503
DomainPolicyModify alerts are a specific type of PolicyModify alerts that reflect changes to domain
and account container level policies. These types of policies are generally related to the operating
system. Usually these modifications are made by a user with administrative privileges, but
occasionally these changes can also be triggered by the local system.
PolicyAudit > PolicyAccess > PolicyScopeChange
PolicyScopeChange alerts are a specific type of PolicyAccess alert that reflect a new scope or
assignment of policy to users, groups, domains, interfaces, or other items.
In the context of the operating system, these events are usually describing elevation of user
privileges according to predefined policies. The process of this elevation is considered a scope
change as the user is being brought under a new scope of privileges appropriate to the type of access
they are requesting (and being granted). These events may accompany or precede object or file
opens, including other policies.
PolicyAudit > PolicyAccess > GroupPolicyModify
GroupPolicyModify alerts are specific PolicyAccess alerts used to describe modifications to account
group policies. Usually these modifications are made by a user with administrative privileges, but
occasionally these changes can also be triggered by the local system.
ResourceAudit
Members of the ResourceAudit tree are used to define different types of access to network
resources. These resources may be network bandwidth/traffic, files, client processes or services, or
other types of shared security-related 'commodities'.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit
FileAudit alerts are used to track file activity on monitored network devices, usually through the
Operating System or a Host-Based IDS. These events will note success or failure of the requested
operation.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileAuditFailure
FileAuditFailure alerts are used to track failed file activity on monitored network devices, usually
through the Operating System or a Host-Based IDS. These events will note what requested operation
failed.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileRead
FileRead is a specific FileAudit alert generated for the operation of reading files (including reading
properties of a file or the status of a file). These alerts may be produced by any tool that is used to
monitor the activity of file usage, including a Host-Based IDS and some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileRead > FileExecute
FileExecute is a specific FileRead alert generated for the operation of executing files. These alerts
may be produced by any tool that is used to monitor the activity of file usage, including a Host-Based
IDS and some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileRead > FileDataRead
504
Audit Alerts
FileDataRead is a specific FileRead alert generated for the operation of reading data from a file (not
just properties or status of a file). These alerts may be produced by any tool that is used to monitor the
activity of file usage, including a Host-Based IDS and some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileWrite
FileWrite is a specific FileAudit alert generated for the operation of writing to a file (including writing
properties of a file or changing the status of a file). These alerts may be produced by any tool that is
used to monitor the activity of file usage, including a Host-Based IDS and some operating systems.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileWrite > FileDataWrite
FileDataWrite is a specific FileWrite alert generated for the operation of writing data to a file (not just
properties or status of a file). These alerts may be produced by any tool that is used to monitor the
activity of file usage, including a Host-Based IDS and some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileWrite > FileCreate
FileCreate is a specific FileWrite alert generated for the initial creation of a file. These alerts may be
produced by any tool that is used to monitor the activity of file usage, including a Host-Based IDS and
some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileWrite > FileMove
FileMove is a specific FileWrite alert generated for the operation of moving a file that already exists.
These alerts may be produced by any tool that is used to monitor the activity of file usage, including a
Host-Based IDS and some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileWrite > FileDelete
FileDelete is a specific FileWrite alert generated for the deletion of an existing file. These alerts may
be produced by any tool that is used to monitor the activity of file usage, including a Host-Based IDS
and some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileWrite > FileAttributeChange
FileAttributeChange is a specific FileWrite alert generated for the modification of file attributes
(including properties such as read-only status). These alerts may be produced by any tool that is used
to monitor the activity of file usage, including a Host-Based IDS and some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > FileAudit > FileWrite > FileLink
FileLink is a specific FileWrite alert generated for the creation, deletion, or modification of links to
other files. These alerts may be produced by any tool that is used to monitor the activity of file usage,
including a Host-Based IDS and some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > FileHandleAudit
FileHandleAudit alerts are used to track file handle activity on monitored network devices, usually
through low level access to the Operating System, either natively or with or a Host-Based IDS. These
events will note success or failure of the requested operation.
ResourceAudit > FileHandleAudit > FileHandleClose
505
FileHandleClose is a specific FileHandleAudit alert generated for the closing of file handles. These
alerts may be generated by a tool that has low-level file access, such as an Operating System or
some Host-Based IDS'.
ResourceAudit > FileHandleAudit > FileHandleCopy
FileHandleCopy is a specific FileHandleAudit alert generated for the copying of file handles. These
ResourceAudit > FileHandleAudit > FileHandleOpen
FileHandleOpen is a specific FileHandleAudit alert generated for the opening of file handles. These
ResourceAudit > FileSystemAudit
FileSystemAudit alerts reflect hardware to filesystem mapping events and usage of filesystem
resources. These events are generally normal system activity, especially during system boot.
ResourceAudit > FileSystemAudit > MountFileSystem
MountFileSystem alerts are a specific type of FileSystemAudit that reflect the action of creating an
active translation between hardware to a usable filesystem. These events are generally normal during
system boot.
ResourceAudit > FileSystemAudit > UnmountFileSystem
UnmountFileSystem alerts are a specific type of FileSystemAudit that reflect the action of removing
a translation between hardware and a usable filesystem. These events are generally normal during
system shutdown.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit
Members of the NetworkAudit tree are used to define events centered on usage of network
resources/bandwidth.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > ConfigurationTrafficAudit
ConfigurationTrafficAudit alerts reflect application-layer data related to configuration of network
resources. Included in ConfigurationTrafficAudit are protocols such as DHCP, BootP, and SNMP.
ConfigurationTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could
also be symptoms of misconfiguration, inappropriate usage, attempts to enumerate or access
network devices or services, attempts to access devices that are configured via these services, or
other abnormal traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > CoreTrafficAudit
CoreTrafficAudit alerts reflect network traffic sent over core protocols. Alerts that are children of
CoreTrafficAudit are all related to the TCP, IP, UDP, and ICMP protocols. Alerts of this type and its
children do not have any application-layer data.
506
Audit Alerts
Alerts placed in the parent CoreTrafficAudit alert itself are known to be a core protocol, but are not
able to be further categorized based on the message provided by the tool.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > CoreTrafficAudit > TCPTrafficAudit
TCPTrafficAudit alerts are a specific subset of CoreTrafficAudit alerts where the protocol is known to
be TCP.
TCPTrafficAudit alerts may indicate normal traffic inside the network, normal traffic pass-through,
denied traffic, or other non-application TCP traffic that is not known to have any immediate attack
basis.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > CoreTrafficAudit > IPTrafficAudit
IPTrafficAudit alerts are a specific subset of CoreTrafficAudit alerts where the protocol is known to be
IP.
IPTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also be
symptoms of spoofs, routing issues, or other abnormal traffic. Generally, for the abnormal traffic that
is appropriate to escalate, a Contego Policy has been defined to escalate this to an alert in the
Security tree based on a threshold.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > CoreTrafficAudit > UDPTrafficAudit
UDPTrafficAudit alerts are a specific subset of CoreTrafficAudit alerts where the protocol is known to
be UDP.
UDPTrafficAuditAlerts may indicate normal traffic inside the network, normal traffic pass-through,
denied traffic, or other non-application UDP traffic that is not known to have any immediate attack
basis.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > CoreTrafficAudit > ICMPTrafficAudit
ICMPTrafficAudit alerts are a specific subset of CoreTrafficAudit alerts where the protocol is known
to be ICMP.
ICMPTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also be
symptoms of scans, floods, or other abnormal traffic. Generally, for the abnormal traffic that is
appropriate to escalate, a Contego Policy has been defined to escalate this to an alert in the Security
tree based on a threshold.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > CoreTrafficAudit > IPSecTrafficAudit
IPSecTrafficAudit alerts are a specific subset of CoreTrafficAudit alerts where the traffic is known to
be related to non-application layer IPSec events (such as key exchanges).
IPSecTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also be
symptoms of misconfigured IPSec peers, problems with IPSec communication, or other abnormal
traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > LinkControlTrafficAudit
LinkControlTrafficAudit alerts are generated for network events related to link level configuration.
LinkControlTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also
be symptoms of misconfiguration at the link level, inappropriate usage, or other abnormal traffic.
507
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > RoutingTrafficAudit
RoutingTrafficAudit alerts are generated for network events related to configuration of network routes,
using protocols such as IGMP, IGRP, and RIP.
RoutingTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also be
symptoms of misconfigured routing, unintended route configuration, or other abnormal traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > RoutingTrafficAudit > RIPTrafficAudit
RIPTrafficAudit alerts are a specific subset of RoutingTrafficAudit alerts where the protocol is known
to be RIP.
RoutingTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also be
symptoms of misconfigured routing, unintended route configuration, or other abnormal traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > NamingTrafficAudit
NamingTrafficAudit alerts are generated for network events related to the naming of network
resources and nodes, using protocols such as WINS and DNS.
NamingTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also be
symptoms of inappropriate DNS authority attempts, misconfiguration of naming services, and other
abnormal traffic. In several cases, for traffic that is appropriate to escalate, a Contego Policy has
been defined to escalate this to an alert in the Security tree based on a threshold.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > FileSystemTrafficAudit
FileSystemTrafficAudit alerts are generated for network events related to requests for remote
filesystems, using protocols such as SMB and NFS.
FileSystemTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic for networks that have remote
filesystem resources such as SMB and NFS shares; however, alerts of this type could also be
symptoms of attempts to enumerate shares or services, misconfiguration of such resources, or other
abnormal traffic. For networks that do not have remote filesystem resources, these alerts will
generally indicate abnormal traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > ApplicationTrafficAudit
ApplicationTrafficAudit alerts reflect network traffic that is mostly or all application-layer data. Alerts
that are children of ApplicationTrafficAudit are also related to application-layer resources.
Alerts placed in the parent ApplicationTrafficAudit alert itself are known to be application-related, but
are not able to be further categorized based on the message provided by the tool or because they are
uncommon and rarely, if ever, imply network attack potential.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > ApplicationTrafficAudit > EncryptedTraffic
EncryptedTraffic alerts reflect application-layer traffic that has been encrypted and is intended for a
secure host. Included in EncryptedTraffic alerts are client and server side application events, such as
key exchanges, that normally occur after the low-level session creation and handshaking have
completed.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > ApplicationTrafficAudit > EncryptedTraffic >
EncryptedTrafficError
508
Audit Alerts
EncryptedTrafficError alerts are a specific subnet of EncryptedTraffic alerts that reflect problems
while exchanging keys or data.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > ApplicationTrafficAudit > MailTrafficAudit
MailTrafficAudit alerts reflect application-layer data related to mail services. Included in
MailTrafficAudit are client and server mail events from protocols such as IMAP, POP3, and SMTP.
MailTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also be
symptoms of excessive mail usage, unintended mail traffic, abnormal command exchanges to a
server, or generally abnormal traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > ApplicationTrafficAudit > WebTrafficAudit
WebTrafficAudit alerts reflect application-layer data related to web services. Included in
WebTrafficAudit are client and server web events from web servers, web applications, content filter
related events, and other web services.
WebTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also be
symptoms of inappropriate web usage, potential abuse of web services, or other abnormal traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > ApplicationTrafficAudit > TimeTrafficAudit
TimeTrafficAudit alerts reflect application-layer data related to network time configuration. Included in
TimeTrafficAudit are protocols such as NTP and activities, such as detection of client-side network
time updates.
TimeTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also be
symptoms of misconfiguration, inappropriate usage, or other abnormal traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > ApplicationTrafficAudit > TimeTrafficAudit >
NTPTrafficAudit
NTPTrafficAudit alerts are a specific type of TimeTrafficAudit related to the Network Time Protocol.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > ApplicationTrafficAudit > FileTransferTrafficAudit
FileTransferTrafficAudit alerts reflect application-layer data related to file retrieval and send to/from
remote hosts. Included in FileTransferTrafficAudit are protocols such as TFTP and FTP.
FileTransferTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this type could also
be symptoms of misconfiguration, inappropriate usage, attempts to enumerate or access file transfer
services, attempts to access devices that require file transfer services for configuration, or other
abnormal traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > PointToPointTrafficAudit
PointToPointTrafficAudit alerts reflect application-layer data related to point-to-point connections
between hosts. Included in PointToPointTrafficAudit are encrypted and unencrypted point-to-point
traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > PointToPointTrafficAudit > PPTPTrafficAudit
PPTPTrafficAudit alerts are a specific type of PointToPointTrafficAudit alerts that reflect applicationlayer encrypted Peer-to-Peer Tunneling Protocol activities. Included in PPTPTrafficAudit alerts are
509
tunnel creation, tunnel deletion, session creation, and session deletion, among other PPTP-related
events.
PPTPTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic for networks that have PPTP-accessible
devices on the network; however, alerts of this type could also be symptoms of inappropriate access,
misconfiguration of the PPTP server or clients, other communications errors, or other abnormal
traffic. For networks that do not have remote filesystem resources, these alerts will generally indicate
abnormal traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > RemoteProcedureTrafficAudit
RemoteProcedureTrafficAudit alerts reflect application-layer data related to remote procedure
services. Included in RemoteProcedureTrafficAudit are the traditional RPC services used to service
remote logons and file shares, and other services which require remote procedure access to complete
authentication, pass data, or otherwise communicate.
RemoteProcedureTrafficAudit alerts generally indicate normal traffic for networks that have remote
procedure services on their network; however, alerts of this type could also be symptoms of
inappropriate access, misconfiguration of the remote procedure services, errors in the remote
procedure calls, or other abnormal traffic.
ResourceAudit > NetworkAudit > RemoteProcedureTrafficAudit > RPCTrafficAudit
RPCTrafficAudit is a specific subset of RemoteProcedureTrafficAudit related to traditional RPC
services, including portmapper.
ResourceAudit > NetworkConnectionAudit
NetworkConnectionAudit alerts are generated when a connection is initiated on a network client.
ResourceAudit > NetworkConnectionAudit > LANConnection
LANConnection is a specific type of NetworkConnectionAudit that reflects a successful connection
on a physical network interface such as an Ethernet card.
ResourceAudit > NetworkConnectionAudit > VPNConnection
VPNConnection is a specific type of NetworkConnectionAudit that reflects a successful connection
to a remote VPN.
ResourceAudit > NetworkConnectionAudit > DialupConnection
DialupConnection is a specific type of NetworkConnectionAudit that reflects a successful
connection through a traditional modem.
ResourceAudit > ObjectAudit
ObjectAudit alerts are used to track special object activity on monitored network devices, usually
through the Operating System or a Host-Based IDS. Generally, Objects are special types of system
resources, such as registry items or user account databases. These objects may be actual 'files' on
the system, but are not necessarily human readable. These events will note success or failure of the
requested operation.
ResourceAudit > ObjectAudit > ObjectAuditFailure
510
Audit Alerts
ObjectAuditFailure alerts are used to track special object activity on monitored network devices,
usually through the Operating System or a Host-Based IDS. Generally, Objects are special types of
system resources, such as registry items or user account databases. These objects may be actual
'files' on the system, but are not necessarily human readable. These events will note a failure of the
ResourceAudit > ObjectAudit > ObjectDelete
ObjectDelete is a specific ObjectAudit alert generated for the deletion of an existing object. These
alerts may be produced by any tool that is used to monitor the activity of file and object usage,
including a Host-Based IDS and some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > ObjectAudit > ObjectLink
ObjectLink is a specific ObjectAudit alert generated for the creation, deletion, or modification of links
to other objects. These alerts may be produced by any tool that is used to monitor the activity of file
and object usage, including a Host-Based IDS and some Operating Systems.
ResourceAudit > ProcessAudit
ProcessAudit alerts are generated to track launch, exit, status, and other events related to system
processes. Usually, these events reflect normal system activity. Process-related activity that may
indicate a failure will be noted separately from normal activity in the alert detail.
ResourceAudit > ProcessAudit > ProcessStop
ProcessStop is a specific type of ProcessAudit alert that indicates a process has exited. Usually,
ProcessStop reflects normal application exit, however in the event of an unexpected error the
abnormal state will be noted.
ResourceAudit > ProcessAudit > ProcessStart
ProcessStart is a specific type of ProcessAudit alert that indicates a new process has been
launched. Usually, ProcessStart reflects normal system activity
ResourceAudit > ProcessAudit > ProcessWarning
ProcessWarning is a specific type of ProcessAudit alert that indicates a process has returned a
'Warning' message that is not a fatal error and may not have triggered an exit of the process.
ResourceAudit > ProcessAudit > ProcessInfo
ProcessInfo is a specific type of ProcessAudit alert that reflects information related to a process.
Most of these events can safely be ignored, as they are generally normal activity that does not reflect
a failure or abnormal state.
ResourceAudit > ServiceAudit
ServiceAudit alerts are generated to track information and other events related to system
components. Usually, these events reflect normal system activity. System service-related activity
that may indicate a failure will be noted separately from normal activity in the alert detail.
ResourceAudit > ServiceAudit > ServiceInfo
511
ServiceInfo is a specific type of ServiceAudit alert that reflects information related to a service. Most
of these events can safely be ignored, as they are generally normal activity that does not reflect a
failure or abnormal state.
ResourceAudit > ServiceAudit > ServiceStart
ServiceStart events are a specific type of ServiceAudit alert that indicates a new system service is
starting.
ResourceAudit > ServiceAudit > ServiceStop
ServiceStop events are a specific type of ServiceAudit alert that indicates a system service is
stopping. This activity is generally normal, however, in the event of an unexpected stop the abnormal
state will be noted.
ResourceAudit > ServiceAudit > ServiceWarning
ServiceWarning is a specific type of ServiceAudit alert that indicates a service has returned a
'Warning' message that is not a fatal error and may not have triggered an exit of the service.
512
Incident Alerts
Incident Alerts
Incident Alerts reflect global enterprise-wide issues that should be raised for system-wide visibility.
These alerts generally reflect serious issues that should be monitored and addressed. They are subcategorized into different types of Incidents Alerts that can provide more detailed information.
Because Incident Alerts are created by Rules, any combination of malicious or suspicious traffic from
any other single alert or combination of alerts can create an Incident Alert.
Each Incident alert is described below. For your convenience, they are listed alphabetically.
HostIncident
HostIncident alerts reflect global enterprise-wide host system issues that should be raised for
system-wide visibility. These alerts are used to indicate issues on hosts that should be tracked and
addressed, including security and administrative issues that apply specifically to host-based
information.
HybridIncident
HybridIncident alerts reflect global enterprise-wide combined network and host system issues that
should be raised for system-wide visibility. These alerts are used to indicate the combination of
network and host-based issues that should be tracked and addressed, including security and
administrative issues that span both network and host-based information.
NetworkIncident
NetworkIncident alerts reflect global enterprise-wide network system issues that should be raised for
system-wide visibility. These alerts are used to indicate network-based issues that should be tracked
and addressed, including security and administrative issues that apply specifically to network-based
information.
513
Internal Alerts
Alerts that are a part of the InternalAlert node are related to the operation of the TriGeo SIM system.
Any events generated by the system relating to Active Response, Internal users, or Internal errors
will appear under one of the many children.
These alerts are for informational purposes and do not necessarily reflect conditions that should
cause alarm. Alerts that may reflect potential issues within the system are specifically marked for
forwarding to TriGeo.
Each Internal Alert is described below. For your convenience, they are listed alphabetically.
InternalAudit
InternalAudit alerts reflect attempted accesses and changes to components of the TriGeo system by
existing TriGeo users. Both successful and failed attempts will generate alerts in this part of the tree.
InternalAudit > InternalAuditFailure
InternalAuditFailure is a specific type of InternalAudit alert that indicates failed audit information.
These alerts are generated when a user fails to view or modify (including creation, update, and
deletion) anything within the TriGeo system. The alert will include the user, type of access, and item
being accessed. InternalAuditFailure events are uncommon and can indicate an attempted privilege
escalation within the TriGeo system by unprivileged users.
InternalAudit > InternalAuditSuccess
InternalAuditSuccess is a specific type of InternalAudit alert that indicates successful audit
information. These alerts are generated when a user successfully views or modifies (including
creation, update, and deletion) anything within the TriGeo system. The alert will include the user, type
of access, and item being accessed.
InternalCommands
InternalCommands alerts are only used internally with few exceptions. These alerts are used for
sending Commands through the system to complete active responses.
InternalCommands > InternalAgentToolCommand
InternalAgentToolCommand alerts are internal only. They are fired between Managers and Agents to
manage tool settings.
InternalCommands > InternalAgentFastPack
InternalAgentFastPack alerts are internal only. They are fired between Managers and Agents to
configure updated tool signatures.
InternalFailure
Alerts that are a part of the InternalFailure tree reflect potential issues within the system. These alerts
could reflect configuration issues, issues that cannot be resolved without contacting TriGeo, and
potential serious issues which also merit contacting TriGeo.
514
Internal Alerts
InternalFailure > InternalError
InternalError alerts reflect configuration or install issues that should be reported to TriGeo. These are
generally internal errors related to tools that may be producing unexpected log entries or conditions
that were not expected. These issues generally cannot be solved without contacting TriGeo, however
they should not be fatal errors.
InternalFailure > InternalException
InternalException alerts reflect more serious problems within the system. These problems generally
lie within the product implementation and may require a software update to eliminate. These alerts
and their surrounding conditions should be reported to TriGeo.
InternalFailure > InternalWarning
InternalWarning alerts are generally problems which can be solved by the user. Usually, these alerts
are configuration related and may assist in debugging the underlying issue.
InternalWarning alerts do not reflect internal problems within the system and thus should not be
immediately reported to TriGeo, however they may assist with solving a technical support issue
should the need arise.
InternalGeneralAlert
InternalGeneralAlert events are uncommon events used to track Internal information that has not yet
been placed into a more specific InternalAlert. Alerts of the InternalFailure family providing more
information will be generated in addition to this event if the event is serious.
InternalInfo
Alerts within the InternalInfo family are related to events that are happening within the system.
Generally, these informational alerts are confirming or reporting normal activity such as user updates,
user logons, policy updates, and Agent connection-related events.
InternalInfo > InternalAgentOffline
InternalAgentOffline alerts reflect detection of disconnection of an Agent to its Manager. These alerts
will happen when the Manager has detected that the Agent closed the connection, whether that be
due to network down time of the Agent or due to a shut down of the Agent service.
InternalInfo > InternalAgentOnline
InternalAgentOnline alerts reflect successful connection of Agents to their respective Managers.
These alerts will happen when an Agent initiates successful communication with the Manager,
whether that be due to network down time of the Manager or Agent or due to an update of the Agent in
question.
InternalInfo > InternalDuplicateConnection
InternalDuplicateConnection alerts occur when an Agent has attempted to connect to their given
Manager more than once. Usually these alerts are triggered by network issues on the Agent end, due
to a possible asynchronous disconnection detection (for example, the Manager was not able to detect
the Agent went offline, but the Agent service was restarted).
515
Usually this issue can be resolved by stopping the Agent service, waiting for the InternalAgentOffline
alert, and then restarting the Agent service.
InternalInfo > InternalInvalidConnection
InternalInvalidConnection alerts occur when an Agent that the Manager recognizes, but cannot
communicate with, attempts to connect. These alerts usually reflect Agents that are missing an
update that has already been applied to the Manager.
Please ensure that the indicated Agent has been upgraded to the same release version of the system
that is installed on your Manager. If this alert persists: uninstall and reinstall the Agent triggering the
alert. This will force the Agent to re-initialize connection to the Manager.
InternalInfo > InternalInvalidInstallation
InternalInvalidInstallation alerts occur in the unlikely case that the Manager can communicate with
the Agent but there are errors detected in the Manager-to-Agent relationship. These alerts are very
uncommon, but may be triggered during an upgrade process.
Please ensure that the indicated Agent has been upgraded to the same release version of the system
alert. This will force the Agent to re-initialize connection to the Manager.
InternalInfo > InternalLicenseMaximum
InternalLicenseMaximum alerts reflect an attempt to add more Agents to a Manager than that
Manager is licensed for. The number of Agents that can be added is a hard limit that the Manager
stores and this limit is also enforced by the Console.
If more licenses are needed, this issue can be resolved by contacting TriGeo Sales for an update.
InternalInfo > InternalNewToolData
InternalNewToolData alerts generally reflect issues related to tools with unexpected log entries or
other conditions that were not expected. These issues generally cannot be solved without contacting
TriGeo, however they are not fatal.
InternalInfo > InternalPolicyConfiguration
InternalPolicyConfiguration alerts reflect successful or unsuccessful attempts to update Policy on a
given Manager. These alerts are generated after Policy has been successfully installed to the
Manager or after an error has been detected. Generally, an error in updating Policy will also produce
an alert from the InternalFailure family, providing more information.
InternalInfo > InternalToolOffline
InternalToolOffline alerts reflect successful stop of an Internal Tool. These alerts are generated after
a tool has stopped the log file reader that was created when the tool was brought online. Generally, an
error in an attempt to stop a tool will produce an alert from the InternalFailure family providing more
information.
InternalInfo > InternalToolOnline
516
Internal Alerts
InternalToolOnline alerts reflect successful startup of an Internal Tool. These alerts are generated
after a tool has successfully created a log file reader and has begun the reading process. Generally,
an error in an attempt to start a tool will produce an alert from the InternalFailure family providing more
information.
InternalInfo > InternalUnknownAgent
InternalUnknownAgent alerts occur when an Agent that the Manager does not recognize has
attempted to connect. Commonly, this alert is caused by removing the Agent from the Console before
removing the Agent service on the client. These alerts may also be triggered during an upgrade
process; in that case, they may reflect Agents that have not yet been brought up to date.
Usually this issue can be resolved by Uninstalling and Reinstalling the Agent triggering the alert. This
will force the Agent to re-initialize connection to the Manager.
InternalInfo > InternalUnsupportedAgent
InternalUnsupportedAgent alerts are generated when a valid Agent connects and has not been
upgraded to the same release version as the Manager. The Agent in question failed to properly
negotiate its connection or respond to a query and has been assumed to be missing a feature required
of it. Please ensure that the indicated Agent has been upgraded to the same release version of TriGeo
alert, this will force the Agent to re-initialize connection to the Manager.
InternalInfo > InternalUserLogoff
InternalUserLogoff alerts are generated when a user logs off or is disconnected from the Console.
InternalInfo > InternalUserLogon
InternalUserLogon alerts are generated when a user successfully completes the logon process to a
Manager via the Console. Failed log-on attempts are produced in a separate alert,
InternalUserLogonFailure.
InternalInfo > InternalUserLogonFailure
InternalUserLogonFailure alerts are generated when a user has completed initialization of a
connection to the Console, but enters an incorrect user name and/or password.
InternalInfo > InternalUserUpdate
InternalUserUpdate alerts are generated when a user is modified and the update has successfully
been sent to the Manager, or when the update has failed to apply. These updates include change or
addition of an email address, change or addition of a pager, and change or addition of blocked alerts
from selected Agents. Generally, an error in updating a user will also produce an alert from the
InternalFailure family.
InternalPolicy
InternalPolicy alerts reflect information related to correlation rules. These alerts are used to indicate
that a rule has been triggered, either in test mode or in normal operating conditions.
InternalPolicy > InternalTestRule
517
InternalTestRule alerts reflect rule activity where a correlation rule has triggered and is set in “Test”
mode. It indicates the trigger of the rule and includes an enumeration of what actions would take
place, if any, if the rule were fully enabled. To remove a rule from Test mode, clear the “Test”
checkbox for the Rule in the Rule Builder.
InternalPolicy > InternalRuleFired
InternalRuleFired alerts reflect rule activity, specifically where a correlation rule has triggered. It
indicates the trigger of the rule and includes an enumeration of what actions were triggered in
response to the correlation.
518
Security Alerts
Security Alerts
Alerts that are a part of the SecurityAlert node are generally related to network activity that is
consistent with an internal or external attack, a misuse or abuse of resources, a resource
compromise, resource probing, or other abnormal traffic that is noteworthy.
Security Alert events indicate aggressive behavior that may lead to an attack or resource
compromise, or suspicious behavior that may indicate unauthorized information gathering. The
TriGeo SIM infers some Security Alerts from what is normally considered audit traffic, but it escalates
the events to alert status based on thresholds that are defined by Rules.
Each Security Alert is described below. For your convenience, they are listed alphabetically.
AttackBehavior
Alerts that are children of AttackBehavior are generally related to network activity that may be
consistent of an attack, misuse or abuse of resources, a resource compromise, or other abnormal
behavior that should be considered indicative of a serious security event.
AttackBehavior > InferredAttack
InferredAttack alerts are reserved AttackBehavior alerts used for describing attacks that are a
composite of different types of alerts. These events will be defined and inferred by Contego Policy.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack
Members of the ResourceAttack tree are used to define different types of malicious or abusive
access to network resources, where these resources may be network bandwidth/traffic, files, client
processes or services, or other types of shared security-related 'commodities'.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack
Members of the NetworkAttack tree are used to define events centered on malicious or abusive
usage of network bandwidth/traffic. These events include access to network resources, relaying
attacks via network resources, or denial of service behavior on network resources.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access
Children of the Access tree define events centered on malicious or abusive usage of network
bandwidth/traffic where the intention, or the result, is inappropriate or abusive access to network
resources.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > ApplicationAccess
ApplicationAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources where the related data is mostly or all
application-layer. Generally, ApplicationAccess alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of
weaknesses in server or client software, or information that is restricted/prohibited by device access
control or policy.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems; in some cases,
network infrastructure devices such as firewalls or proxy servers may also provide them.
519
Alerts placed in the parent ApplicationAccess alert itself are known to be application-related, but not
able to be further categorized based on the message provided by the tool or because they are
uncommon.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > ApplicationAccess >
DataBaseAccess
DataBaseAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention,
or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer database traffic. Generally, these
alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in database server or client software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the database
server, or the client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access
control of database servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted
clients are connecting), applying updates or patches to database servers and/or clients, or the
possible removal of the database service or client application related to this event.
FileTransferAccess
FileTransferAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer file transfer traffic.
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in file transfer server or
client software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the file transfer
control of file transfer servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted
clients are connecting), applying updates or patches to file transfer servers and/or clients, or the
possible removal of the file transfer service or client application related to this event.
FileTransferAccess > FTPFileAccess
FTPFileAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention, or
the result, is gaining access to filesystems of resources via application-layer file transfer traffic.
client software with the intent of information gathering or low-level filesystem access of the server or
client.
FileTransferAccess > FTPInvalidFormatAccess
FTPInvalidFormatAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
520
Security Alerts
client software with the intent of information gathering or low-level access to the server or client.
These attacks are always abnormal traffic that the file transfer server or client is not prepared to
respond to; attacks, such as buffer overflows, may also result in the server or client software or
system being halted.
FileTransferAccess > FTPCommandAccess
FTPCommandAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in file transfer server
software with the intent of information gathering or low-level access to the server or client. These
attacks are always abnormal command traffic that the file transfer server is not prepared to respond
to, but may provide access to (e.g. debug or legacy commands).
clients are connecting), applying updates or patches to file transfer servers and/or clients, restriction
of allowed commands, or the possible removal of the file transfer service or client application related
to this event.
MailAccess
MailAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention, or the
result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer mail transfer, retrieval, or service traffic.
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in mail-related server or
client software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems or the mail server,
service, or client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control
of mail servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are
connecting), applying updates or patches to mail servers and/or clients, or possible removal of the
mail server, service, or client application related to this event.
MailAccess > MailTransferAccess
MailTransferAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer mail transfer traffic.
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in SMTP server software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, or the SMTP
server software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control of the
521
SMTP server (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are
connecting, especially for SMTP servers that relay mail for external/remote entities), applying
updates or patches to SMTP servers, or the possible removal of the SMTP server related to this
event.
MailAccess > MailTransferAccess > SMTPInvalidFormatAccess
SMTPInvalidFormatAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in SMTP server software
with the intent of information gathering or low-level access to the server. These attacks are always
abnormal traffic that the SMTP server is not prepared to respond to; attacks, such as buffer
overflows, may also result in the server software or system being halted.
event.
MailAccess > MailTransferAccess > SMTPInvalidFormatAccess > SmailAccess
SmailAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention, or
the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer mail transfer traffic. Generally, these
alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in SMTP server software with the intent of
information gathering or low-level access to the server. These attacks are always abnormal traffic
that the SMTP server is not prepared to respond to; they may also result in the server software or
system being halted. The smail attack specifically attempts to execute applications resulting in
compromise of the SMTP server system.
event.
MailAccess > MailTransferAccess > SMTPCommandAccess
SMTPCommandAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in SMTP server software
with the intent of information gathering or low-level access to the server. These attacks are always
abnormal command traffic that the SMTP server is not prepared to respond to, but may provide
access to (e.g. debug or legacy commands).
522
Security Alerts
updates or patches to SMTP servers, restriction of allowed commands, or the possible removal of the
SMTP server related to this event.
MailAccess > MailDeliveryAccess
MailDeliveryAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer mail retrieval traffic.
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in mail retrieval related
server or client software - the MDA (mail delivery Agent) or MUA (mail user Agent).
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, or the mail server,
service, or client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control
of mail servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are
connecting), applying updates or patches to mail servers and/or clients, or the possible removal of the
mail server, service, or client application related to this event.
MailAccess > MailServiceAccess
MailServiceAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer mail service traffic.
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in mail service-related
server or client software, including services such as mailing list software, spam filters, email
redirection software, and other mail filtering software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the mail service,
or the client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control of
mail services or servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients
are connecting), applying updates or patches to mail services and/or clients, or the possible removal
of the mail service or client application related to this event.
MailAccess > MailServiceAccess > MajordomoAccess
MailServiceAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer mail service traffic.
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in Majordomo, a specific
type of mailing list software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, or the mail service
itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control of mail services or
servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are
connecting), applying updates or patches to the mail service, or the possible removal of the mail
service related to this event. Generally, the most appropriate response will be updates or patches that
can be retrieved from the Majordomo web site (http://www.greatcircle.com/majordomo) or your
operating system vendor.
523
NewsAccess
NewsAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention, or
the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer news traffic (over protocols such as
NNTP). Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in the news server
or client software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the news server,
or the client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control of
news servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are
connecting), applying updates or patches to news servers and/or clients, or the possible removal of
the news service or client application related to this event.
PrinterAccess
PrinterAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention, or
the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer remote printer traffic. Generally, these
alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in the remote printer server or client software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the remote printer
control of remote printer servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only
trusted clients are connecting), applying updates or patches to remote printer servers and/or clients,
or the possible removal of the remote printer service or client application related to this event.
WebAccess
WebAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention, or the
result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer WWW traffic. Generally, these alerts will
reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in the web server or client software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the web server, or
client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control of web
servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are
connecting), applying updates or patches to web servers and/or clients, or the possible removal of the
web service or client application related to this event.
WebAccess > HTTPClientAccess
HTTPClientAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer WWW traffic where the
information flow is from server to client. Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of
weaknesses in the client software or abuse and/or misuse of resources from clients.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the web client
software itself, proxy servers, content filters, and/or firewalls with capability to monitor incoming web
traffic. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail applying updates or patches to web client
524
Security Alerts
software, or restriction of incoming/outgoing web requests/responses to reflect inappropriate or
abusive access.
WebAccess > HTTPClientAccess > FraudulentCertificateAccess
FraudulentCertificateAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where
the intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer WWW traffic in which
the information flow is from server to client. Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation
of weaknesses in the client software through fraudulent certificates. The intent of these attacks may
be to forge certificates that convince the client that the site is trusted, when in fact it is not, passing
data along with those certificates that may be inappropriate and/or contain exploits.
software, or restriction of incoming/outgoing web requests/responses to reflect the abusive access.
WebAccess > HTTPClientAccess > ProhibitedHTTPControlAccess
ProhibitedHTTPControlAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where
the information flow is from server to client. Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation
of weaknesses in the client software or abuse and/or misuse of resources from clients through client
controls such as ActiveX and Java.
software, or restriction of incoming/outgoing web requests/responses to reflect inappropriate or
abusive access.
WebAccess > HTTPServerAccess
HTTPServerAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer WWW traffic where the
information flow is from client to server. Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of
weaknesses in the server software or abuse and/or misuse of server resources.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the web server or
service software itself, and/or firewalls with the capability to monitor incoming/outgoing web traffic.
Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control of web servers (e.g. restriction
by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are connecting), applying updates or
patches to web servers, services, and/or clients, or the possible removal of the web service or client
application related to this event.
WebAccess > HTTPServerAccess > HTTPApplicationAccess
525
HTTPApplicationAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer WWW traffic in which the
weaknesses in applications running on top of the server software, such as PHP, CGI, administrative
sites, and other application services.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the web server,
the service software itself, and/or firewalls with capability to monitor incoming/outgoing web traffic.
Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control of web servers or the service
itself (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are connecting),
applying updates or patches to web servers, services, and/or clients, or the possible removal of the
web service application related to this event.
WebAccess > HTTPServerAccess > HTTPApplicationAccess > HTTPAdministrationAccess
HTTPAdministrationAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
weaknesses in applications run on top of server software that are related to remote administration of
sites, services, and/or systems.
applying updates or patches to web servers, services, administrative sites, and/or clients, or the
possible removal of the web service application or administrative site related to this event.
WebAccess > HTTPServerAccess > HTTPApplicationAccess >
HTTPDynamicContentAccess
HTTPDynamicContentAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where
the information flow is from client to server. Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation
of weaknesses in applications, running on top of the server software, that generate dynamic content
such as PHP, CGI, and ASP.
applying updates or patches to web servers, services, dynamic content, and/or clients, or the
possible removal of the web service application or dynamic content related to this event.
WebAccess > HTTPServerAccess > HTTPApplicationAccess > HTTPFileRequestAccess
HTTPFileRequestAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
526
Security Alerts
weaknesses in applications running on top of server software that are related to remote administration
of sites, services, and/or systems with the intent of information gathering or low-level filesystem
access of the server or client.
web service application related to this event.
WebAccess > HTTPServerAccess > HTTPApplicationAccess > HTTPServiceAccess
HTTPServiceAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
weaknesses in applications running on top of server software that are related to remote services such
as printing or console access.
web service application or site related to this event.
WebAccess > HTTPServerAccess > HTTPInvalidFormatAccess
HTTPInvalidFormatAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer web traffic in which the
weaknesses in web server software with the intent of information gathering or low-level access to the
server. These attacks are always abnormal traffic that the web server is not prepared to respond to;
attacks, such as buffer overflows, may also result in the server software or system being halted.
Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control of the web server (e.g.
restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are connecting), applying
updates or patches to web servers or services, or the possible removal of the web server related to
this event.
NamingAccess
NamingAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention, or
the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer naming service traffic (using protocols
527
such as DNS and WINS). Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in
the naming server or client software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the naming
control of name servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients
are connecting), applying updates or patches to naming servers and/or clients, or the possible
removal of the naming service or client application related to this event.
RemoteConsoleAccess
RemoteConsoleAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer remote console service
traffic (services such as telnet, SSH, and terminal services). Generally, these alerts will reflect
attempted exploitation of weaknesses in the remote console server or client software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the remote
console server, or the client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better
access control of remote console servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure
only trusted clients are connecting), applying updates or patches to remote console servers and/or
clients, or the possible removal of the remote console service or client application related to this
event.
TimeAccess
TimeAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention, or
the result, is gaining access to resources via application-layer remote time service traffic (using
protocols such as NTP). Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in
the remote time server or client software.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the time server, or
client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control of remote
time servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are
connecting), applying updates or patches to remote time servers and/or clients, or the possible
removal of the remote time service or client application related to this event.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > ConfigurationAccess
ConfigurationAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via resource configuration traffic (using
protocols such as DHCP, BootP, and SNMP). Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted
exploitation of weaknesses in the configuration server or client software or attempts to gain systemlevel access to configuration servers themselves. In the case of SNMP and similar configuration
protocols, it could reflect an attempt to enumerate a device or devices on the same network for further
attack.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, the configuration
control of configuration servers and services (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to
528
Security Alerts
ensure only trusted clients are connecting), applying updates or patches to configuration servers
and/or clients, or the possible removal of the configuration service or client application related to this
event.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > CoreAccess
CoreAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention, or
the result, is gaining access to resources where the related data is mostly or all core protocols (TCP,
UDP, IP, ICMP). Generally, CoreAccess alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in
network protocols or devices with intent to gain access to servers, clients, or network infrastructure
devices.
network infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers may also provide them. In some cases,
these events are escalated from the Audit tree via Contego Policy.
Alerts placed in the parent CoreAccess alert itself are known to be a core protocol-related but not able
to be further categorized based on the message provided by the tool or because they are uncommon.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > CoreAccess >
ICMPRedirectAccess
ICMPRedirectAccess alerts reflect a specific type of CoreAccess alert where the attack traffic is all
ICMP Redirects (ICMP type 5) and the intent is to redirect traffic to either enumerate devices or client
machines, or to gather information on devices or client traffic to further attack those or other
resources. ICMP Redirects are generally benign ICMP messages sent to hosts to redirect traffic
intended for a network that another gateway can control. In the cases where ICMP Redirects are
used for attacking, a host will generally feign themselves as a router, pass a redirect to a client
machine to modify it's routing table to send traffic to the false router instead of their normal network
gateway, and proceed to enumerate, gather information, or attack the redirected host. The false router
will then send the traffic on to the correct gateway, and the host has no idea of what has occurred
(unless another device or tool detects it). This is one type of what is commonly referred to as a manin-the-middle attack.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and network
infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail
blocking or resetting the local or remote user's connection/IP address, updates to network
infrastructure devices, or restriction of incoming/outgoing ICMP redirect requests/responses to
reflect inappropriate or abusive access. Appropriate methods of prevention of ICMP redirect attacks
would be to limit hosts who can broadcast ICMP Redirects across network devices to correct routers
and gateways, limit ingress and egress ICMP traffic, and to make sure clients, servers, and network
infrastructure devices are current with regards to operating system or other networking software to
ensure that other attacks related to ICMP Redirect attacks of this type (such as denial of service
attacks) do not occur.
IPFragmentationAccess
IPFragmentationAccess alerts reflect a specific type of CoreAccess alert where the attack traffic is
all IP and the intent is to mask possible malicious or abusive data past an IDS or other detection
device by using many IP fragments (usually either much larger or smaller than normal fragments).
529
The network infrastructure devices handling the traffic will reassemble and pass on the traffic
correctly, however, an IDS on the network may not be able to detect the malicious traffic, only the
presence of fragments (if even that). The attack may be allowed to pass through the network either
incoming or outgoing, thereby eliminating one line of defense. Normal IP fragmentation (data that has
been taken apart because it is too large based on network parameters) should not trigger an
IPFragmentationAccess alert.
Fragmentation alerts themselves are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection
systems and network infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers. Appropriate response to
these alerts may entail blocking or resetting the local or remote user's connection/IP address,
applying updates or patches to server and/or client software (especially the IDS), updates to network
infrastructure devices, or restriction of incoming/outgoing network requests/responses to reflect
inappropriate or abusive access.
IPSourceRouteAccess
IPSourceRouteAccess alerts reflect a specific type of CoreAccess alert where the attack traffic is all
IP and the intent is generally to misrepresent the originating address to bypass detection.
IPSourceRouteAccess is a type of IP Spoofing where an attacker falsifies network information to
convince the destination that the given source is something other than the actual source, directing the
destination to return the traffic through an IP Source Route option that traces the traffic to the trusted
host and then on to the untrusted attacker. The trusted host receives the traffic from the destination
and because of the IP Source Route, it passes the traffic on to the untrusted attacker. The data is not
modified and the attacker has 'tricked' the network into passing the traffic on. Generally, while
spoofed, clients will attempt to gather information, perform actual attacks on internal or external
devices, or perform denial of service attacks.
infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers. Response to IP Spoofing itself is difficult as the
originating host may be alternating spoofed hostnames or IP addresses in order to continually
circumvent detection; however, response to IP spoofing which utilizes the IP source route could
entail removing the ability to pass traffic through routers or gateways that contains an IP Source
Route option. Initial appropriate response to these alerts may entail blocking or resetting the local or
remote user's connection/IP address, however this may prove ineffective or unrealistic. Other
responses may include applying updates or patches to server and/or client software, updates to
network infrastructure devices, or restriction of incoming/outgoing network requests/responses to
reflect inappropriate or abusive access. Unfortunately, it may prove difficult to derail an attempted
attack through IP Spoofing, however, routing and firewalling policies (including disallowing traffic with
the IP Source Route option) should prevent further access through spoofed addresses.
IPSpoofAccess
IPSpoofAccess alerts reflect a specific type of CoreAccess alert where the attack traffic is all IP and
the intent is to misrepresent the originating address to either bypass detection or misdirect response
to attack activity. IP Spoofing is done by falsifying network information to convince the destination
(and any network hops in between) that the given source is something other than the actual source.
530
Security Alerts
Generally, while spoofed, clients will attempt to gather information, perform actual attacks on internal
or external devices, or perform denial of service attacks.
infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers. Response to IP Spoofing is difficult as the
originating host may be alternating spoofed hostnames or IP addresses in order to continually
circumvent detection. Initial appropriate response to these alerts may entail blocking or resetting the
local or remote user's connection/IP address, however this may prove ineffective or unrealistic. Other
responses may include applying updates or patches to server and/or client software, updates to
network infrastructure devices, or restriction of incoming/outgoing network requests/responses to
reflect inappropriate or abusive access. Unfortunately, it may prove difficult to derail an attempted
attack through IP Spoofing, however, routing and firewalling policies should prevent further access
through spoofed addresses.
TCPHijackAccess
TCPHijackAccess alerts reflect a specific type of CoreAccess alert where the attack traffic is all
TCP and the intent is to hijack a user's connection. TCP Hijacking is done with the intent to take over
another network user's connection by sending malformed packets to 'confuse' the server into thinking
that the new user is the original user. In doing so, the original user gets removed from his connection
to the server and the new user has injected himself, taking over all attributes the server assumed from
the original - including levels of security and/or trust. TCP Hijacking can be used to place future
attack tools on client systems, gather information about networks and/or client systems, immediately
attack internal networks, or other malicious and/or abusive behavior.
network infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers may also provide them. Appropriate
response to these alerts may entail blocking or resetting the remote hijacker's connection/IP address,
applying updates or patches to server and/or client software, updates to network infrastructure
devices, or restriction of incoming/outgoing network requests/responses to reflect inappropriate or
abusive access.
TCPTunnelingAccess
TCPTunnelingAccess alerts reflect a specific type of CoreAccess alert where the attack traffic is all
TCP and the intent is to tunnel a possible malicious or abusive connection through other TCP traffic.
TCP tunneling uses permitted TCP traffic to bypass access policies on network devices, content
filtering, monitoring, and other traffic shaping or behavior policies. TCP tunneling is done by initiating
a known 'acceptable' TCP connection through allowed policies and piggybacking an unacceptable
connection atop the granted one. On the new 'tunnel' that the user has built, they are allowed to pass
any traffic through that does not match other policies - often after the connection has been initiated, it
may be difficult to detect and prevent further malicious or abusive activity.
network infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers may also provide them. Appropriate
response to these alerts may entail blocking or resetting the local or remote user's connection/IP
address, applying updates or patches to server and/or client software, updates to network
531
infrastructure devices, or restriction of incoming/outgoing network requests/responses to reflect
inappropriate or abusive access.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > FileSystemAccess
FileSystemAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via remote filesystem traffic (using protocols
such as SMB and NFS). Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in
the remote filesystem server or client software or attempts to gain system-level access to remote
filesystem servers themselves.
filesystem server, or the client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better
access control of remote filesystems (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only
trusted clients are connecting), applying updates or patches to remote filesystem servers and/or
clients, or the possible removal of the remote filesystem service or client application related to this
event
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > FileSystemAccess >
NFSAccess
NFSAccess alerts are a specific type of FileSystemAccess alert that reflects malicious or abusive
usage of network resources where the intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via NFS
(network file share) remote filesystem traffic. Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted
exploitation of weaknesses in the NFS server or client software or attempts to gain system-level
access to NFS servers themselves.
event.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > FileSystemAccess >
SMBAccess
SMBAccess alerts are a specific type of FileSystemAccess alert that reflects malicious or abusive
usage of network resources where the intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via SMB
(server message block) remote filesystem traffic. Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted
exploitation of weaknesses in the SMB server or client software or attempts to gain system-level
access to SMB servers themselves.
event.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > LinkControlAccess
532
Security Alerts
LinkControlAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources where the related data is low-level link control
(using protocols such as ARP). Generally, LinkControlAccess alerts will reflect attempted
exploitation of weaknesses in switching devices by usage of malformed incoming or outgoing data,
with intent to enumerate or gain access to or through switching devices, clients that are also on the
switching device, and entire networks attached to the switching device. In some cases, a managed
switch with restrictions on port analyzing activity may be forced into an unmanaged switch with no
restrictions - allowing a malicious client to sniff traffic and enumerate or attack.
infrastructure devices with link level control (such as switches). Appropriate response to
LinkControlAccess events may be to clear the link-level control mechanisms of the switching device
(things such as flushing the ARP cache), applying updates or patches to switching devices, or better
segmentation of networks to prevent information disclosure if an attack occurs.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > PointToPointAccess
PointToPointAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via point to point traffic (using protocols such
as PPTP). Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in point to point
server or client software, attempts to enumerate networks, or attempts to further attack devices on
trusted networks.
network infrastructure devices such as firewalls, routers, or VPN servers may also provide them.
Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better access control of remote access services (e.g.
restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are connecting), applying
updates or patches to remote access servers and/or clients, or the possible removal of the remote
point to point service or client application related to this event.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > PointToPointAccess >
PPTPSpoof
PPTPSpoof alerts reflect a specific type of PointToPointAccess alert where the attack traffic is all
PPTP and the intent is to misrepresent the originating address to either bypass detection or misdirect
response to attack activity; often times the target of these attacks are internal trusted networks that
allow remote access through PPTP tunneling. PPTP Spoofing is done by falsifying network
information to convince the destination (and any network hops in between) that the given source is
something other than the actual source. Generally, while spoofed, clients will attempt to gather
information, perform actual attacks on internal devices, or perform denial of service attacks.
infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers. Response to PPTP Spoofing is difficult, as the
originating host appears to be coming from a 'trusted' address that has already completed initial
handshaking and key sharing. Initial appropriate response to these alerts may entail blocking or
resetting the local or remote user's connection/IP address, applying updates or patches to server
and/or client software, updates to network infrastructure devices, or restriction of incoming/outgoing
PPTP traffic requests/responses to reflect inappropriate or abusive access.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > RemoteProcedureAccess
533
RemoteProcedureAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via remote procedure call traffic (using
protocols such as the traditional RPC services, RMI, and CORBA). Generally, these alerts will
reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in the remote procedure server or client software or
attempts to gain system-level access to remote procedure servers themselves.
procedure server, or the client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better
access control of remote procedure (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only
trusted clients are connecting), applying updates or patches to remote procedure servers and/or
clients, or the possible removal of the remote procedure service or client application related to this
event.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > RemoteProcedureAccess >
RPCPortmapperAccess
RPCPortmapperAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources via remote procedure call traffic using the
traditional RPC portmapper service. Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of
weaknesses in the remote procedure server or client software or attempts to gain system-level
access to remote procedure servers themselves.
procedure server, or the client software itself. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail better
access control of remote procedure (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only
trusted clients are connecting), applying updates or patches to remote procedure servers and/or
clients, or the possible removal of the remote procedure service or client application related to this
event.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > RoutingAccess
RoutingAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the intention, or
the result, is gaining access to resources where the related data is routing-related protocols (RIP,
IGMP, etc.). Generally, RoutingAccess alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in
routing protocols or devices with intent to enumerate or gain access to or through routers, servers,
clients, or other network infrastructure devices. These routing protocols are used to automate the
routing process between multiple devices that share or span networks.
infrastructure devices that utilize routing protocols such as firewalls and routers. Appropriate
response to RoutingAccess events may be better access control of routing devices (e.g. restriction of
what devices are allowed to update routing by IP address to ensure only trusted devices are passing
data), applying updates or patches to routing servers and/or devices, or the possible removal of the
automated routing protocols from servers and/or devices.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > RoutingAccess >
MalformedRIPAccess
MalformedRIPAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources where the related data is all RIP (Routing
Information Protocol). Generally, MalformedRIPAccess alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of
534
Security Alerts
weaknesses in RIP by usage of malformed incoming or outgoing data, with the intent to enumerate or
gain access to or through routers, servers, clients, or other network infrastructure devices. RIP is
used to automate the routing process between multiple devices that share or span networks.
infrastructure devices that utilize routing protocols such as firewalls and routers. Appropriate
response to RIP Access events may be better access control of routing devices (e.g. restriction of
what devices are allowed to update routing by IP address to ensure only trusted devices are passing
data), applying updates or patches to routing servers and/or devices, or the possible removal of the
automated routing protocols from servers and/or devices.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > TrojanTrafficAccess
TrojanTrafficAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources through malicious code commonly known as a
Trojan Horse. This alert detects the communication related to Trojans over the network (generally,
'trojaned' clients calling home to the originator). Trojans are generally executables that generally
require no user intervention to spread and contain malicious code that is placed on the client system
and used to exploit the client (and return access to the originator of the attack) or exploit other clients
(used in attacks such as distributed denial of service attacks).
These alerts are generally provided by a virus scanner, a network-based intrusion detection system,
or in some cases, the operating system or network infrastructure devices such as firewalls and
routers. Appropriate response to these alerts may entail a quarantine of the node from the network to
prevent internal attacks and further compromise of the client system, updates of virus scanner
pattern files on this and other network nodes to prevent future or further infection, virus scans on this
and other network nodes to detect further infection if any has taken place, and research into the
offending Trojan to find out methods of removal (if necessary).
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > TrojanTrafficAccess >
TrojanCommandAccess
TrojanCommandAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources through malicious code commonly known as
Trojan Horses. This alert detects the communication related to Trojans sending commands over the
network (infecting other clients, participating in a denial of service activity, being controlled remotely
by the originator, etc.). Trojans are generally executables that generally require no user intervention to
spread and contain malicious code that is placed on the client system and used to exploit the client
(and return access to the originator of the attack) or exploit other clients (used in attacks such as
distributed denial of service attacks).
535
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > TrojanTrafficAccess >
TrojanInfectionAccess
TrojanInfectionAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources through malicious code commonly known as a
Trojan Horse. This alert detects the infection traffic related to a Trojan entering the network (generally
with intent to infect a client). Trojans are generally executables that generally require no user
intervention to spread and contain malicious code that is placed on the client system and used to
exploit the client (and return access to the originator of the attack) or exploit other clients (used in
attacks such as distributed denial of service attacks).
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Access > VirusTrafficAccess
VirusTrafficAccess alerts reflect malicious or abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to resources through malicious code commonly known as
viruses. This alert detects the communication related to viruses over the network (generally, the
spread of a virus infection or an incoming virus infection). Viruses are generally executables that
require user intervention to spread, contain malicious code that is placed on the client system, and
are used to exploit the client and possibly spread itself to other clients.
offending virus to find out methods of removal (if necessary).
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial
Children of the Denial tree define events centered on malicious or abusive usage of network
bandwidth/traffic where the intention, or the result, is inappropriate or abusive access to network
resources through a denial of service attack.
These alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems, but may also be
provided by firewalls or other network infrastructure devices.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > ApplicationDenial
ApplicationDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage is application-layer protocols. The intent, or the result, of this activity is inappropriate
or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service attack. ApplicationDenial events
may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in software to gain access to a host system, attempts to
536
Security Alerts
exploit weaknesses in network infrastructure equipment to enumerate or reconfigure devices, or other
denial of service activities.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > ApplicationDenial >
FileTransferDenial
FileTransferDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage is application-layer file transfer-related protocols (FTP, TFTP, etc.). The intent, or the
result, of this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of
service attack. FileTransferDenial events may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in file transferrelated software to gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in the software to
enumerate or reconfigure, or other denial of service activities.
MailDenial
MailDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or abusive
usage is application-layer mail-related protocols (SMTP, IMAP, POP3, etc.) or services (majordomo,
spam filters, etc.). The intent, or the result, of this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to
network resources through a denial of service attack. MailDenial events may be attempts to exploit
weaknesses in mail-related software to gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit
weaknesses in the software to enumerate or reconfigure, or other denial of service activities.
MailDenial > MailServiceDenial
MailServiceDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage is application-layer mail-related services (majordomo, spam filters, etc.). The intent, or
the result, of this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of
service attack. MailServiceDenial events may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in mail-related
software to gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in the software to
MailDenial > MailServiceDenial > MailSpamDenial
MailSpamDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage is application-layer mail-related services (usually SMTP). The intent, or the result, of
this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service
attack through excessive mail relaying. MailSpamDenial events reflect excessive attempts to relay
537
mail through an SMTP server from remote sites that should not typically be relaying mail through the
server, let alone excessive quantities of mail. The goal of these attacks may not be to enumerate or
exploit weaknesses in the mail server, but simply to relay as much mail through an open relay mail
server as quickly as possible, resulting in a denial of service attack.
provided by the mail server itself, firewalls, or other network infrastructure devices. These alerts may
indicate an open relay on the network or an attempt to find an open relay; appropriate response may
be to close access to SMTP servers to only internal and necessary external IP addresses.
WebDenial
WebDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or abusive
usage is application-layer web-related protocols (HTTP, HTTPS, etc.) or services (CGI, ASP, etc.).
The intent, or the result, of this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources
through a denial of service attack. WebDenial events may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in webrelated software to gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in the software to
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > CoreDenial
CoreDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or abusive
usage is core protocols (TCP, IP, ICMP, UDP). The intent, or the result, of this activity is
inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service attack. CoreDenial
events may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in software to gain access to a host system,
attempts to exploit weaknesses in network infrastructure equipment to enumerate or reconfigure
devices, or other denial of service activities.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > CoreDenial > ChargenDenial
ChargenDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result, of this
activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service via UDP
chargen or echo services. This attack attempts to exploit network infrastructure devices and hosts by
pointing two chargen or echo hosts at each other and forcing so many responses that the network and
hosts are flooded. In response to a request to the echo or chargen port, the second device will send a
response, which will trigger another request, which will trigger a response, etc. The source of the
initial request is a spoofed IP address, which appears as one of the hosts which will be a party in the
attack (sent to the second host). This will render both devices and possibly the network they are on
useless either temporarily or for a significant amount of time by the sheer amount of traffic that is
created.
ChargenDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and
network infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers.
538
Security Alerts
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > CoreDenial >
ICMPFloodDenial
ICMPFloodDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result, of
this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service by an
ICMP-based 'flood' attack (which uses many very large ICMP packets). The network infrastructure
devices handling the traffic may pass on the traffic correctly, however, any vulnerable client or device
on the network may not be able to process the incoming traffic (it may use up system resources to the
point where the device is rendered useless and cannot accept network connections). Normal ICMP
Traffic should not trigger an ICMPFloodDenial alert.
ICMPFloodDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and
ICMPFragmentationDenial
ICMPFragmentationDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the
service attack by using many ICMP fragments (usually either much larger or smaller than normal
fragments). The network infrastructure devices handling the traffic will reassemble and pass on the
traffic correctly, however, any vulnerable client on the network may not be able to reassemble the
fragmented traffic (it may overflow the stack, triggering a host or service crash). Normal ICMP
fragmentation (data that has been taken apart because it is too large based on network parameters)
should not trigger an ICMPFragmentationDenial alert.
systems and network infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers.
ICMPSourceQuenchDenial
ICMPSourceQuenchDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the
service by an ICMP-based attack (which uses many ICMP packets set to type 4 - Source Quench).
The network infrastructure devices handling the traffic may pass on the traffic correctly, however, any
client listening and responding to source quench traffic may be slowed down to the point where
rendered useless by way of correct response to the quench request. Normal ICMP traffic (including
single, normal, source quench packets) should not trigger an ICMPSourceQuenchDenial alert.
ICMPSourceQuenchDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > CoreDenial > IPFloodDenial
IPFloodDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result, of this
activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service by an IPbased 'flood' attack (which uses many very large IP packets). The network infrastructure devices
handling the traffic may pass on the traffic correctly, however, any vulnerable client or device on the
network may not be able to process the incoming traffic (it may use up system resources to the point
539
where the device is rendered useless and cannot accept network connections). Normal IP Traffic
should not trigger an IPFloodDenial alert.
IPFloodDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and
IPFragmentationDenial
IPFragmentationDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result,
of this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service
attack by using many IP fragments (usually either much larger or smaller than normal fragments). The
network infrastructure devices handling the traffic will reassemble and pass on the traffic correctly,
however, any vulnerable client on the network may not be able to reassemble the fragmented traffic (it
may overflow the stack, triggering a host or service crash). Normal IP fragmentation (data that has
been taken apart because it is too large based on network parameters) should not trigger an
IPFragmentationDenial alert.
IPFragmentationDenial > PingOfDeathDenial
PingOfDeathDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result, of
this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service by a
'ping of death' attack (which uses many large ICMP Echo Request packets). The network
infrastructure devices handling the traffic will pass on the traffic correctly, however, any vulnerable
client on the network may not be able to process the incoming traffic (it may be processed in such a
way that triggers a host or service crash). Unpatched Windows NT and 95/98 clients are especially
vulnerable to this type of attack. Normal ICMP Echo Traffic should not trigger a PingOfDeathDenial
alert.
PingOfDeathDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and
LandAttackDenial
LandAttackDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result, of
'land' attack (which uses TCP traffic with the SYN bit set and the same source IP and port as the
destination). The network infrastructure devices handling the traffic will pass on the traffic correctly,
however, any vulnerable client on the network may not be able to process the incoming traffic (it may
be processed in such a way that triggers a host or service crash). Unpatched Windows 3.11, NT, and
95 clients are especially vulnerable to this type of attack. Normal TCP traffic (with or without the SYN
bit) should not trigger a LandAttackDenial alert.
LandAttackDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > CoreDenial > SmurfDenial
540
Security Alerts
SmurfDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result, of this
activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service by a
'Smurf' attack. A Smurf attack attempts to exploit a vulnerability in some network infrastructure
devices by sending ICMP Echo Requests to devices that will re-broadcast the traffic to internal
devices. In response to the broadcast Echo Request, all of the devices will send an ICMP Echo
Reply, which will effectively overflow the device. The destination of the ICMP Echo Reply is a
spoofed 'victim' IP address which will also be overflowed by the actual replies sent to their host. This
will render both devices useless either temporarily or for a significant amount of time.
SmurfDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and network
infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > CoreDenial > SnorkDenial
SnorkDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result, of this
'Snork' attack. A Snork attack attempts to exploit a vulnerability in Windows NT devices by using the
Windows RPC service and sending packets to devices that will broadcast the traffic to other internal
Windows NT devices using RPC. In response to the broadcast, all of the Windows NT devices will
send another packet, and this process will continue until it effectively overflows the device and
possibly the network. The destination or source of the initial packet is a spoofed 'victim' IP address
which will create the illusion of internal activity. This will render both devices useless either
temporarily or for a significant amount of time.
SnorkDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and network
infrastructure devices such as firewalls or routers.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > CoreDenial > SynFloodDenial
SYNFloodDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result, of
TCP-based 'flood' attack (which uses many very large TCP packets with the SYN bit set). The
network infrastructure devices handling the traffic may pass on the traffic correctly, however, any
vulnerable client or device on the network may not be able to process the incoming traffic (it may use
up system resources to the point where the device is rendered useless and cannot accept network
connections). Normal TCP Traffic (with or without the SYN flag) should not trigger a SYNFloodDenial
alert.
SYNFloodDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > CoreDenial > TeardropDenial
TeardropDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result, of this
teardrop attack (which uses many overlapping IP fragments, usually either much larger or smaller
than normal fragments). The network infrastructure devices handling the traffic will reassemble and
pass on the traffic correctly, however, any vulnerable client on the network may not be able to
reassemble the fragmented traffic (it may be reassembled in such a way that triggers a host or
service crash). Unpatched Windows NT and 95/98 clients are especially vulnerable to this type of
541
attack. Normal IP fragmentation (data that has been taken apart because it is too large based on
network parameters) should not trigger a TeardropDenial alert.
TeardropDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and
UDPBombDenial
UDPBombDenial alerts reflect a specific type of CoreDenial alert where the intent, or the result, of
UDP-based 'bomb' attack (which uses many large UDP packets). The network infrastructure devices
handling the traffic may pass on the traffic correctly, however, any vulnerable client or device on the
network may not be able to process the incoming traffic (it may be processed in such a way that
triggers a host or service crash). Normal UDP Traffic should not trigger a UDPBombDenial alert.
UDPBombDenial alerts are generally provided by network-based intrusion detection systems and
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > ConfigurationDenial
ConfigurationDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage is protocols related to configuration of resources (DHCP, BootP, SNMP, etc.). The
intent, or the result, of this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a
denial of service attack. ConfigurationDenial events may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in
configuration-related software to gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in
network infrastructure equipment to enumerate or reconfigure devices, or other denial of service
activities.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > FileSystemDenial
FileSystemDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage is remote filesystem-related protocols (NFS, SMB, etc.). The intent, or the result, of
this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service
attack. FileSystemDenial events may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in remote filesystem
services or software to gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in network
infrastructure equipment to enumerate or reconfigure devices, or other denial of service activities.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > LinkControlDenial
LinkControlDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage is link level protocols (such as ARP). The intent, or the result, of this activity is
inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service attack.
LinkControlDenial events may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in link-level control software to
gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in network infrastructure equipment to
enumerate or reconfigure devices, or other denial of service activities.
542
Security Alerts
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > RemoteProcedureDenial
RemoteProcedureDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the
malicious or abusive usage is remote procedure-related protocols (traditional RPC, RMI, CORBA,
etc.) or service (portmapper, etc.). The intent, or the result, of this activity is inappropriate or abusive
access to network resources through a denial of service attack. RemoteProcedureDenial events may
be attempts to exploit weaknesses in remote procedure services or software to gain access to a host
system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in the software to enumerate or reconfigure, or other denial
of service activities.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > RemoteProcedureDenial >
RPCPortmapperDenial
RPCPortmapperDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the
malicious or abusive usage is remote procedure-related protocols, specifically related to the RPC
portmapper service. The intent, or the result, of this activity is inappropriate or abusive access to
network resources through a denial of service attack. RPCPortmapperDenial events may be
attempts to exploit weaknesses the remote procedure service or software to gain access to a host
system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in the software to enumerate or reconfigure, or other denial
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > RoutingDenial
RoutingDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage is routing-related protocols (RIP, IGMP, etc.). The intent, or the result, of this activity
is inappropriate or abusive access to network resources through a denial of service attack.
RoutingDenial events may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in routers or routing software to gain
access to a host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in the routing software or service to
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Denial > TrojanTrafficDenial
TrojanTrafficDenial events are a specific type of Denial event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage originates with malicious code on a client system known as a Trojan. The intent, or the
service attack. TrojanTrafficDenial events may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in software to
gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in network infrastructure equipment to
enumerate or reconfigure devices, attempts to spread the Trojan to other hosts, or other denial of
service activities.
543
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Relay
Children of the Relay tree define events centered on malicious or abusive usage of network
bandwidth/traffic where the intention, or the result, is relaying inappropriate or abusive access to other
network resources (either internal or external). Generally, these attacks will have the perimeter or an
internal host as their point of origin. When sourced from remote hosts, they may indicate a successful
exploit of an internal or perimeter host.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Relay > DDOSToolRelay
DDOSToolRelay events reflect potential network traffic related to known Distributed Denial of
Service tools. These tools are used to relay attacks to new remote (and possibly local) hosts to
exploit or inundate the remote host with data in an attempt to cripple it. Generally, these attacks will
have a perimeter or an internal host as their point of origin. When sourced from remote hosts, they
may indicate a successful exploit of an internal or perimeter host.
Appropriate response to these events may be to restrict the source from accessing any external
network, running a virus scanner or other detection utility to detect and remove the presence of any
relay tool (in some cases known as a 'zombie'), and if necessary, to quarantine the source node from
the network to further isolate the issue. If these events are sourced from a completely external
network, blocking the remote host, better access control of clients, servers, and services (e.g.
restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure only trusted clients are connecting), application
of updates or patches to servers and/or clients, or the possible removal of the service related to this
event may also be appropriate actions.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Relay > FileTransferRelay
FileTransferRelay events reflect potential network traffic related to known attack tools that operate
over file transfer protocols. These tools are used to relay attacks to new remote (and possibly local)
hosts to exploit or abuse services. Generally, these attacks will have a perimeter or an internal host
as their point of origin. When sourced from remote hosts, they may indicate a successful exploit of an
internal or perimeter host.
provided by the file transfer software itself, and firewalls or other network infrastructure devices.
relay tool, and if necessary, to quarantine the source node from the network to further isolate the
issue. If these events are sourced from a completely external network, blocking the remote host,
better access control of file transfer servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure
only trusted clients are connecting), application of updates or patches to file transfer servers and/or
544
Security Alerts
clients, or the possible removal of the file transfer service or client application related to this event
may also be appropriate actions.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > NetworkAttack > Relay > FileTransferRelay >
FTPBounce
FTPBounce events are a specific type of FileTransferRelay related to known attack tools using file
transfer protocols that are used to launder connections to other services, redirect attacks to other
hosts or services, or to redirect connections to other hosts or services. Generally, these attacks will
have a perimeter or an internal host as their point of origin. When sourced from remote hosts, they
may indicate a successful exploit of an internal or perimeter host.
provided by the file transfer software or service itself, and firewalls or other network infrastructure
devices.
relay tool, and if necessary, to quarantine the source node from the network to further isolate the
issue. If these events are sourced from a completely external network, blocking the remote host,
better access control of file transfer servers (e.g. restriction by IP address and/or user name to ensure
only trusted clients are connecting), application of updates or patches to file transfer servers and/or
clients, or the possible removal of the file transfer service or client application related to this event
may also be appropriate actions.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > ServiceProcessAttack
Members of the ServiceProcessAttack tree are used to define events centered on malicious or
abusive usage of services or user processes. These events include abuse or misuse of resources
from malicious code placed on the client system.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > ServiceProcessAttack > VirusAttack
VirusAttack alerts reflect malicious code placed on a client or server system, which may lead to
system or other resource compromise and may lead to further attack. The severity of this alert will
depend on the ActionTaken field, which reflects whether the virus or other malicious code was
successfully removed.
These alerts are usually provided by a virus scanner running on the client system. Appropriate
response to these alerts may entail a quarantine of the node from the network to prevent further
outbreak, updates of virus scanner pattern files on other network nodes to prevent further outbreak,
virus scans on other network nodes to detect further outbreak if any has taken place, and research
into the offending virus to find out methods of removal.
AttackBehavior > ResourceAttack > ServiceProcessAttack > VirusSummaryAttack
VirusSummaryAttack alerts reflect malicious code placed on a client or server system, which may
lead to system or other resource compromise and may lead to further attack. The severity of this alert
will depend on the ActionTaken field which reflects whether the virus or other malicious code was
successfully removed. These alerts differ from VirusAttack in that they may be a composite of virus
events normally due to a scheduled scan on the client system as opposed to a real-time scan.
545
These alerts are usually provided by a virus scanner running on the client system. Appropriate
response to these alerts may entail a quarantine of the node from the network to prevent further
outbreak, updates of virus scanner pattern files on other network nodes to prevent further outbreak,
virus scans on other network nodes to detect further outbreak if any has taken place, and research
into the offending virus to find out methods of removal.
GeneralSecurity
GeneralSecurity alerts are generated when a supported product outputs data that has not yet been
normalized into a specific alert, but is known to be security issue-related.
SuspiciousBehavior
Alerts that are children of SuspiciousBehavior are generally related to network activity that may be
consistent of enumeration of resources, unexpected traffic, abnormal authentication events, or other
abnormal behavior that should be considered indicative of a serious security event.
SuspiciousBehavior > AuthSuspicious
Members of the AuthSuspicious tree are used to define events regarding suspicious authentication
and authorization events. These events include excessive failed authentication or authorization
attempts, suspicious access to unauthenticated users, and suspicious access to unauthorized
services or information.
SuspiciousBehavior > AuthSuspicious > FailedAuthentication
FailedAuthentication events occur when a user has made several attempts to authenticate
themselves which has continuously failed, or when a logon failure is serious enough to merit a
security event on a single failure.
SuspiciousBehavior > AuthSuspicious > GuestLogin
GuestLogin events describe user authentication events where an attempt was made successfully or
unsuccessfully granting access to a user that generally has no password assigned (such as
anonymous, guest, or default) and no special privileges. Access of a user with this level of privileges
may be granted access to enough of the client system to begin exploitation.
These events are usually produced by a client or server operating system, however may also be
produced by a network-based IDS or network infrastructure device when it is possible or appropriate.
SuspiciousBehavior > AuthSuspicious > RestrictedInformationAttempt
RestrictedInformationAttempt events describe a user attempt to access local or remote information
that their level of authorization does not allow. These events may indicate user attempts to exploit
services which they are denied access to or inappropriate access attempts to information.
SuspiciousBehavior > AuthSuspicious > RestrictedServiceAttempt
RestrictedServiceAttempt events describe a user attempt to access a local or remote service that
their level of authorization does not allow. These events may indicate user attempts to exploit
services which they are denied access to or inappropriate access attempts to services.
SuspiciousBehavior > InferredSuspicious
546
Security Alerts
InferredSuspicious alerts are reserved SuspiciousBehavior alerts used for describing suspicious
behavior that is a composite of different types of alerts. These events will be defined and inferred by
Contego Policy.
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious
Members of the ResourceSuspicious tree are used to define different types of suspicious access to
network resources, where these resources may be network bandwidth/traffic, files, client processes
or services, or other types of shared security-related 'commodities'.
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious > NetworkSuspicious
Members of the NetworkSuspicious tree are used to define events regarding suspicious usage of
network bandwidth/traffic. These events include unusual traffic and reconnaissance behavior
detected on network resources.
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious > NetworkSuspicious > Recon
Children of the Recon tree reflect suspicious network behavior with intent of gathering information
about target clients, networks, or hosts. Reconnaissance behavior may be valid behavior on a
network, however, only as a controlled behavior in small quantities. Invalid reconnaissance behavior
may reflect attempts to determine security flaws on remote hosts, missing access control policies
that allow external hosts to penetrate networks, or other suspicious behavior that results in general
information gathering without actively attacking.
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious > NetworkSuspicious > Recon > Enumerate
Enumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target networks, or specific target
hosts, by sending active data which will elicit responses that reveal information about clients,
servers, or other network infrastructure devices. The originating source of the enumeration is
generally attempting to acquire information that may reveal more than normal traffic to the target
would.
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious > NetworkSuspicious > Recon > Enumerate >
ApplicationEnumerate
ApplicationEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or services on
target hosts, by sending active application-layer data which will elicit responses that reveal
information about the application or host. This enumeration may be a simple command sent to the
application to attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or denied by the service, requests to the
application which may enable an attacker to surmise the version and specific application running, and
other information gathering tactics. These enumerations may result in information being provided that
can allow an attacker to craft a specific attack against the host or application that may work correctly
the first time - enabling them to modify their methodology to go on relatively undetected.
ApplicationEnumerate > FileTransferEnumerate
FileTransferEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or services on
target hosts, by sending active application-layer data to file transfer services which will elicit
responses that reveal information about the application or host. This enumeration may be a simple
547
command sent to the file transfer service to attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or denied by the
service, requests to the file transfer service that may enable an attacker to surmise the version and
specific service running, and other information gathering tactics. These enumerations may result in
information being provided that can allow an attacker to craft a specific attack against the file transfer
service or application that may work correctly the first time - enabling them to modify their
methodology to go on relatively undetected.
ApplicationEnumerate > FileTransferEnumerate > FTPCommandEnumerate
FTPCommandEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or services
on target hosts, by sending active application-layer data to file transfer services which will elicit
responses that reveal information about the application. This enumeration specifically entails
commands sent to the FTP service to attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or denied by the service,
requests to the FTP service that may enable an attacker to surmise the version and specific service
running, and other information gathering tactics that use FTP commands to query. These
enumerations may result in information being provided that can allow an attacker to craft a specific
attack against the FTP service that may work correctly the first time - enabling them to modify their
ApplicationEnumerate > MailEnumerate
MailEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or services on target
hosts, by sending active application-layer data to mail-related services which will elicit responses
that reveal information about the application or host. This enumeration may be a simple command
sent to the mail service to attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or denied by the service, requests to
the mail service that may enable an attacker to surmise the version and specific service running, and
can allow an attacker to craft a specific attack against the mail service or application that may work
correctly the first time - enabling them to modify their methodology to go on relatively undetected.
ApplicationEnumerate > MailEnumerate > SMTPCommandEnumerate
SMTPCommandEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or
services on target hosts, by sending active application-layer data to mail-related services which will
elicit responses that reveal information about the application. This enumeration specifically entails
commands sent to the SMTP service to attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or denied by the
service, requests to the mail service that may enable an attacker to surmise the version and specific
service running, and other information gathering tactics that use SMTP commands to query. These
enumerations may result in information being provided that can allow an attacker to craft a specific
attack against the mail service that may work correctly the first time - enabling them to modify their
ApplicationEnumerate > WebEnumerate
548
Security Alerts
WebEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or services on target
hosts, by sending active application-layer data to web-related services which will elicit responses
that reveal information about the application or host. This enumeration may be a simple command
sent to the web service to attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or denied by the service, requests to
the web service that may enable an attacker to surmise the version and specific service running, and
can allow an attacker to craft a specific attack against the web service or application that may work
correctly the first time - enabling them to modify their methodology to go on relatively undetected.
BannerGrabbingEnumerate
BannerGrabbingEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or
services on target hosts, by sending a request which will elicit a response containing the host or
service's 'banner'. This 'banner' contains information that may provide a potential attacker with such
details as the exact application and version running behind a port. These details could be used to craft
specific attacks against hosts or services that an attacker may know will work correctly the first time
- enabling them to modify their methodology go on relatively undetected.
MSNetworkingEnumerate
MSNetworkingEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or services
on target hosts, by sending active data to Microsoft networking services (using protocols such as
NetBIOS and SMB/CIFS) that will illicit responses that reveal information about the application, host,
or target network. This enumeration may be a simple command sent to the networking service to
attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or denied by a service, requests to a service that may enable an
attacker to surmise the version and specific service running, requests to a service that may enable an
attacker to fingerprint the target network, and other information gathering tactics. These enumerations
may result in information being provided that can allow an attacker to craft a specific attack against
the networking service, host, or application that may work correctly the first time - enabling them to
modify their methodology to go on relatively undetected.
RemoteProcedureEnumerate
RemoteProcedureEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or
services on target hosts, by sending active data to Remote Procedure services (using protocols such
as RMI, CORBA, and traditional RPC) that will elicit responses that reveal information about the
application or host. This enumeration may be a simple command sent to the remote procedure
service to attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or denied by the service, requests to the remote
procedure service that may enable an attacker to surmise the version and specific service running,
and other information gathering tactics. These enumerations may result in information being provided
that can allow an attacker to craft a specific attack against the remote procedure service or
application that may work correctly the first time - enabling them to modify their methodology to go on
relatively undetected.
RemoteProcedureEnumerate > RPCPortmapperEnumerate
549
RPCPortmapperEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or
services on target hosts, by sending active data to the Portmapper Remote Procedure service that
will illicit responses that reveal information about the application or host. This enumeration may be a
simple command sent to the portmapper service to attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or denied by
the service, requests to the portmapper service that may enable an attacker to surmise the version
and specific service running, and other information gathering tactics. These enumerations may result
in information being provided that can allow an attacker to craft a specific attack against the
portmapper service or client application that may work correctly the first time - enabling them to
modify their methodology to go on relatively undetected.
RemoteProcedureEnumerate > RPCPortScanEnumerate
RPCPortScanEnumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target hosts, or services
on target hosts, by sending active data to Remote Procedure services (using protocols such as RMI,
CORBA, and traditional RPC) that will elicit responses that reveal information about the application or
host. This specific type of enumeration is done by sending queries to RPC related ports to attempt to
fingerprint the types and specific services running, and may involve other information gathering
tactics. These enumerations may result in information being provided that can allow an attacker to
craft a specific attack against the remote procedure service or application that may work correctly the
first time - enabling them to modify their methodology to go on relatively undetected.
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious > NetworkSuspicious > Recon > Footprint
Footprint alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target networks by tracing the network
through routers, clients, servers, or other network infrastructure devices. The originating source of the
footprint is generally attempting to acquire information that may reveal more about network behavior
than normal traffic to the target would.
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious > NetworkSuspicious > Recon > Footprint >
DNSRequestFootprint
DNSRequestFootprint alerts are a specific type of Footprint alert that reflects a DNS record request
that may serve to reveal DNS configuration. Contained within this DNS configuration may be
information that reveals internal networks, protected devices, or IP addresses of potential targets.
FirewalkingFootprint
FirewalkingFootprint alerts are a specific type of Footprint alert that reflects the usage of a tool that
attempts to gather information about network infrastructure device access control and filtering lists.
Firewalking works by passing TCP and UDP packets to determine what packets a given device will
forward. This activity may reflect attempts to enumerate devices beyond the perimeter of a network,
gathering information about activity that is allowed or denied past given gateways.
TraceRouteFootprint
TraceRouteFootprint alerts are a specific type of Footprint alert that reflects an IP packet route trace
from source to destination. Generally, this route will not reveal specific information about device
550
Security Alerts
types or hosts on a network, but will trace the path of IP traffic across routing devices. This traffic
may be an attempt to discover routing devices that are misconfigured (which may be vulnerable to
attacks such as IP spoofing or IP fragmentation).
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious > NetworkSuspicious > Recon > Scan
Scan alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target networks, or specific target hosts, by
sending scans which will elicit responses that reveal information about clients, servers, or other
network infrastructure devices. The originating source of the scan is generally attempting to acquire
information that may reveal more than normal traffic to the target would, information such as a list of
applications listening on ports, operating system information, and other information that a probe may
discover without enumeration of the specific services or performing attack attempts.
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious > NetworkSuspicious > Recon > Scan >
CoreScan
CoreScan alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target networks, or specific target hosts,
by sending scans over core network protocols (TCP, IP, ICMP, UDP) which will elicit responses that
reveal information about clients, servers, or other network infrastructure devices. The originating
source of the scan is generally attempting to acquire information that may reveal more than normal
traffic to the target would, information such as a list of applications listening on ports, operating
system information, and other information that a probe may discover without enumeration of the
specific services or performing attack attempts.
CoreScan > HostScan
HostScan alerts reflect attempts to gather information about specific target hosts by sending scans
which will elicit responses that reveal information about clients, servers, or other network
infrastructure devices. The originating source of the scan is generally attempting to acquire
information that may reveal more than normal traffic to the target would, such as a list of applications
on the host, operating system information, and other information that a probe may discover without
enumeration of the specific services or performing attack attempts. These scans generally do not
occur across entire networks and generally have the intent of discovering operating system and
application information which may be used for further attack preparation.
CoreScan > ICMPQuery
ICMPQuery alerts reflect attempts to gather information about specific target hosts, or networks, by
sending ICMP-based queries that will elicit responses that reveal information about clients, servers,
or other network infrastructure devices. The originating source of the scan is generally attempting to
acquire information that may reveal more than normal traffic to the target would, such as operating
system information and other information that a probe may discover without enumeration of the
specific services or performing attack attempts. These scans generally do not occur across entire
networks, contain many sequential ICMP packets, and generally have the intent of discovering
operating system and application information which may be used for further attack preparation.
CoreScan > PingSweep
551
PingSweep alerts reflect a specific type of CoreScan alert that describe an attempt to gather
information about target networks, and hosts on those networks, by sending ICMP or TCP ping
packets to test whether hosts are alive. The originating source of the scan is generally attempting to
acquire information about network topology or groups of specific hosts on the network and may have
the intent of gathering information for future attack attempts.
CoreScan > PingSweep > ICMPPingSweep
ICMPPingSweep alerts reflect a specific type of CoreScan alert that describe an attempt to gather
information about target networks, and hosts on those networks, by sending ICMP ping packets to
test whether hosts are alive. The originating source of the scan is generally attempting to acquire
information about network topology or groups of specific hosts on the network and may have the
intent of gathering information for future attack attempts.
CoreScan > PingSweep > TCPPingSweep
TCPPingSweep alerts reflect a specific type of CoreScan alert that describe an attempt to gather
information about target networks, and hosts on those networks, by sending TCP ping packets to test
whether hosts are alive. The originating source of the scan is generally attempting to acquire
information about network topology or groups of specific hosts on the network and may have the
intent of gathering information for future attack attempts.
CoreScan > PortScan
PortScan alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target networks, or specific target hosts,
by sending scans over core network protocols (TCP, IP, ICMP, UDP) that will elicit responses that
reveal information about clients, servers, or other network infrastructure devices. The originating
traffic to the target would, such as a list of applications listening on ports, operating system
information, and other information that a probe may discover without enumeration of the specific
services or performing attack attempts. Portscans specifically operate by sending probes to every
port within a range, attempting to identify open ports that may use applications or services that are
easy to enumerate and attack.
CoreScan > PortScan > TCPPortScan
TCPPortScan alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target networks, or specific target
hosts, by sending scans over TCP that will elicit responses that reveal information about clients,
servers, or other network infrastructure devices. The originating source of the scan is generally
attempting to acquire information that may reveal more than normal traffic to the target would, such as
a list of applications listening on ports, operating system information, and other information that a
probe may discover without enumeration of the specific services or performing attack attempts. TCP
portscans specifically operate by sending TCP probes to every port within a range, attempting to
identify open ports that may use applications or services that are easy to enumerate and attack.
552
Security Alerts
CoreScan > PortScan > UDPPortScan
UDPPortScan alerts reflect attempts to gather information about target networks, or specific target
hosts, by sending scans over UDP that will elicit responses that reveal information about clients,
servers, or other network infrastructure devices. The originating source of the scan is generally
attempting to acquire information that may reveal more than normal traffic to the target would, such as
a list of applications listening on ports, operating system information, and other information that a
probe may discover without enumeration of the specific services or performing attack attempts. UDP
portscans specifically operate by sending UDP probes to every port within a range, attempting to
identify open ports that may use applications or services that are easy to enumerate and attack.
CoreScan > StackFingerprint
StackFingerprint alerts reflect attempts to gather information about specific target hosts by sending a
certain set of packets to probe a device's network stack, which will elicit responses that reveal
information about clients, servers, or other network infrastructure devices. The originating source of
the scan is generally attempting to acquire information that may reveal more than normal traffic to the
target would, such as operating system information (including type and version) and other information
that a probe may discover without enumeration of the specific services or performing attack attempts.
These scans generally do not occur across entire networks and generally have the intent of
discovering operating system information which may be used for further attack preparation.
CoreScan > StackFingerprint > ICMPStackFingerprint
ICMPStackFingerprint alerts reflect attempts to gather information about specific target hosts by
sending a certain set of ICMP packets to probe a device's ICMP stack, which will elicit responses
that reveal information about clients, servers, or other network infrastructure devices. The originating
traffic to the target would, such as operating system information (including type and version) and
other information that a probe may discover without enumeration of the specific services or
performing attack attempts. These scans generally do not occur across entire networks and generally
have the intent of discovering operating system information which may be used for further attack
preparation.
CoreScan > StackFingerprint > TCPStackFingerprint
TCPStackFingerprint alerts reflect attempts to gather information about specific target hosts by
sending a certain set of TCP packets to probe a device's TCP/IP stack, which will elicit responses
that reveal information about clients, servers, or other network infrastructure devices. The originating
traffic to the target would, such as operating system information (including type and version) and
other information that a probe may discover without enumeration of the specific services or
performing attack attempts. These scans generally do not occur across entire networks and generally
have the intent of discovering operating system information which may be used for further attack
preparation.
553
TrojanScanner
TrojanScanner alerts reflect attempts of Trojans on the network to gather information about target
networks, or specific target hosts, by sending scans which will elicit responses that reveal
information about the host. The originating Trojan source of the scan is generally attempting to
acquire information that will reveal whether a target host or network has open and available services
for further exploitation, whether the target host or network is alive, and how much of the target
network is visible. A Trojan may run a scan before attempting an attack operation to test potential
effectiveness or targeting information.
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious > NetworkSuspicious > UnusualTraffic
UnusualTraffic alerts reflect suspicious behavior on network devices where the traffic may have no
known exploit, but is unusual and could be potential enumerations, probes, fingerprints, attempts to
confuse devices, or other abnormal traffic. UnusualTraffic may have no impending response,
however, it could reflect a suspicious host that should be monitored closely.
SuspiciousBehavior > ResourceSuspicious > NetworkSuspicious > UnusualTraffic >
UnusualICMPTraffic
UnusualICMPTraffic alerts reflect ICMP-based suspicious behavior on network devices where the
traffic may have no known exploit, but is unusual and could be potential enumerations, probes,
fingerprints, attempts to confuse devices, or other abnormal traffic. UnusualICMPTraffic may have
no impending response, however, it could reflect a suspicious host that should be monitored closely.
UnusualIPTraffic
UnusualIPTraffic alerts reflect IP-based suspicious behavior on network devices where the traffic
may have no known exploit, but is unusual and could be potential enumerations, probes, fingerprints,
attempts to confuse devices, or other abnormal traffic. UnusualIPTraffic may have no impending
response, however, it could reflect a suspicious host that should be monitored closely.
UnusualProtocol
UnusualProtocol alerts reflect suspicious behavior on network devices where the traffic is targeted at
unknown, unassigned, or uncommonly used protocols. This traffic may have no known exploit, but is
unusual and should be considered potential enumerations, probes, fingerprints, attempts to confuse
devices, or other abnormal traffic. UnusualProtocol may have no impending response, however, it
could reflect a suspicious host that should be monitored closely.
UnusualTCPTraffic
UnusualTCPTraffic alerts reflect TCP-based suspicious behavior on network devices where the
fingerprints, attempts to confuse devices, or other abnormal traffic. UnusualTCPTraffic may have no
impending response, however, it could reflect a suspicious host that should be monitored closely.
554
Security Alerts
UnusualUDPTraffic
UnusualUDPTraffic alerts reflect UDP-based suspicious behavior on network devices where the
fingerprints, attempts to confuse devices, or other abnormal traffic. UnusualUDPTraffic may have no
impending response, however, it could reflect a suspicious host that should be monitored closely.
555
Appendix B: Table of alert event data
fields
The following table explains the meaning of each grid column or data field that can appear in various
alert grids, event grids, and information panes throughout the Console. The actual columns and fields
that are shown vary according to the alert, view, or grid you are working with. But the meaning of
these fields remains the same, regardless of where you see them.
For convenience, the fields are listed in alphabetical order.
Grid column or field
Description
AlertName
The name of the alert. For information on a particular alert, see
"Alert Types" on page 493.
ConnectionName
The name of the dial-up or VPN connection.
ConnectionStatus
The current status of the dial-up or VPN connection.
DestinationMachine
The IP address the network traffic is going to.
DestinationPort
The port number the network traffic is going to.
DetectionIP
The network node that is the originating source of the alert data.
This is usually a Manager or an Agent and is the same as the
InsertionIP field, but can also be a network device such as
firewall or an intrusion detection system that may be sending log
files over a remote logging protocol.
DetectionTime
The time the network node generated the data. This is usually the
same as the InsertionTime field, but they can differ when the
Agent or Manager is reading historical data, or if a network device
has an incorrect time setting.
EventInfo
A short summary of the alert details. Additional details appear in
the following fields, but EventInfo provides enough information to
view a “snapshot” of the alert information.
557
Appendix B: Table of alert event data fields
Description
ExtraneousInfo
Extra information that is relevant to the alert, but may not be
reflected in other fields. This can include information useful for
correlating or summarizing alert information in addition to the
EventInfo field.
InferenceRule
The name of the correlation that caused this alert. The
InferenceRule field will generally be blank, but in cases where
the alert was related to a rule, it displays the rule name.
InsertionIP
The Manager or Agent that first created the alert. This is the
source that first read the log data from a file or other source.
InsertionTime
The time the Manager or Agent first created the alert. This time
indicates when the data was read from a log file or other source.
Manager
The name of the Manager that received the alert. For data
generated from an Agent, this is the Manager the Agent is
connected to.
Order
In the Event explorer’s event grid, the Order field indicates when
each event occurred:
means the event occurred before the central event shown in
the event map.
means the event occurred during (as part of) the central
event shown in the event map.
means the event occurred after the central event shown in
the event map.
Protocol
Displays the protocol associated with this alert (TCP or UDP).
ProviderSID
A unique identifier for the original data. Generally, the
ProviderSID field includes information that can be used in
researching information on the alert in the originating network
device vendor's documentation.
558
Description
Severity
Each alert is assigned a number that indicates its severity. The
following table explains each severity level.
Level
Name
Description
0
Debug
Designates detailed event
information used for debugging by
TriGeo engineers.
1
System
Error
Indicates that part of the system is
unusable.
2
Informational
Indicates TriGeo informational
messages only.
3
Normal Audit
Indicates normal behavior, but
could be part of a signature attack.
4
Normal
Notice
Indicates normal behavior that
should be monitored.
5
Suspicious
Indicates normal behavior under
some circumstances, but should
be investigated.
6
Threatening
Indicates that investigation is
needed and possibly an action.
7
Critical
Indicates that immediate action is
needed.
SourceMachine
The IP address the network traffic is coming from.
SourcePort
The port number the network traffic is coming from.
ToolAlias
The Alias Name entered when configuring the tool on the
Manager or Agent. For more information on configuring tools, see
"Connecting to other products" on page 337.
559
TriGeo Management Configuration Commands
(CMC)
CMC commands are the only means to access TriGeo SIM and nDepth Appliances. Use CMC to
upgrade and maintain the appliances.
You can use the CMC commands for such tasks as:
l
upgrading the TriGeo Manager software
l
deploying new tool infrastructure to the Managers and Agents
l
rebooting or shutting down the network appliance
l
configuring trusted reporting hosts
l
configuring supplemental services on the Manager appliance, and
l
controlling your nDepth appliances.
The following topics describe how to log on to CMC and describe each command found in the
appliance, manager, service and ind menus.
561
Logging on to CMC
Before connecting to the CMC, get your “Manager Information Sheet,” which you can find on your
TriGeo DVD.
To log on to CMC:
1. Connect to the Network Appliance either of two ways:
l
l
Connect directly to the Network Appliance with a keyboard and monitor. If you connect
in this manner, skip to Step 7.
Connect using SSH on port 32022.
SSH stands for Secure Shell, which is a remote administration tool. To connect to the network
appliance using SSH, you can use PuTTY, which is a free SSH tool. You can find this tool on
the TriGeo CD-ROM in the Extras\ssh client folder.
The following example shows the PuTTY Configuration form with the default TriGeo
Manager settings. Your own connection settings can be found on your “Manager Information
Sheet.”
562
Logging on to CMC
2. In the Host Name (or IP address) box, type the IP address of your TriGeo Manager (in this
example, the IP address is 10.1.1.200).
3. Under Protocol, click SSH.
4. In the Port box, type 32022.
5. So you don’t have to do this again, type TriGeo Manager into the Saved Sessions box, and
then click Save.
6. Click Open.
Note: To reopen this connection for future sessions, simply double-click TriGeo Manager in
the Saved Session box. The connection will reopen
7. Whether you connect remotely or physically, the system will prompt you for your CMC user
name and password. Type the CMC user name and password found on your “Manager Information Sheet.”
563
After typing the appliance command, the cmc::acm# prompt appears. You may then use any of the
commands listed in the following table.
The commands are listed in alphabetical order. Command descriptions with an asterisk (*) mean the
command requires an automatic restart of the Manager service.
Command
Description
checklogs
Check the contents of the TriGeo Manager appliance’s log files from
sources such as syslog and SNMP.
cleantemp
* Removes temporary files created by the TriGeo Manager during
normal operation. You may run this command to recover used disk
space, or at the suggestion of TriGeo Technical Support.
dateconfig
Set the TriGeo Manager’s date and time.
demote
* Demotes this appliance to a secondary appliance in a high availability
or disaster recovery configuration. This appliance will disable running
TriGeo services and resume replicating its configuration information
from the configured primary appliance.
diskusage
Checks and provides a summary of disk usage for your TriGeo Manager
and several of the internal components (such as the database or log
files). This information is included when you send TriGeo Technical
Support information using the support command.
exit
Returns you to the main CMC menu.
exportsyslog
Exports system logs.
help
Displays a brief description of each command within the appliance
menu.
564
Command
Description
netconfig
This command configures the network parameters. You can choose
between several configurations. By default, the Manager comes with a
DHCP configuration. Each choice is described below:
l
DHCP with server-assigned DNS
All parameters are provided by the DHCP server. No
configuration parameters are needed.
l
DHCP with static-assigned DNS
The DHCP server only provides an IP address but no DNS
address. You will need to know the network DNS address.
l
Static with static-assigned DNS
There is no DHCP server, or you wish to statically assign the
IP address without using a DHCP reservation. You will need to
know the IP address, netmask, gateway, and DNS address for
the Network Appliance.
It is critical for the operation of the TriGeo system that the network DNS
is functional. The Manager needs to be resolvable by all Agents and
vice-versa. Without functioning DNS, the TriGeo system will not
operate properly.
ntpconfig
Configure the Network Time Protocol (NTP) service on the TriGeo
Manager for synchronization with a time server.
password
Change the cmc user password.
ping
Pings other IP addresses or host names from the TriGeo Manager
appliance to verify network connectivity.
promote
* Promotes this appliance to the primary appliance in a high availability
or disaster recovery configuration. The prompted appliance will take
over TriGeo services until it is demoted with the demote command.
reboot
Reboots the TriGeo Manager.
shutdown
Shuts down the TriGeo Manager.
top
Displays and monitors CPU and memory usage, as well as per-process
information for the Manager Network Appliance.
tzconfig
Configure the TriGeo Manager’s time zone information.
viewnetconfig
Display the current network configuration parameters (IP address,
netmask, DNS) for the TriGeo Manager.
565
After typing the manager command, the cmc::cmm# prompt appears. You may then use any of the
commands listed in the following table. The commands are listed in alphabetical order. Command
descriptions with an asterisk (*) mean the command requires an automatic restart of the Manager
service.
Command
Description
actortoolupgrade
* Upgrades the TriGeo Manager’s Actor Tools from CD or floppy
disk.
archiveconfig
Configures the TriGeo Manager appliance database archives to a
remote file share on a daily, weekly, or monthly schedule.
backupconfig
Configures the TriGeo Manager appliance software and
configuration backups to a remote file share on a daily, weekly, or
monthly schedule.
cleanagentconfig
Reconfigures the Agent on this Manager to a new Manager.
dbquery
Queries the TriGeo Manager appliance database directly.
debug
Emails the TriGeo Manager debugging information to any given
email address. The email message contains a collection of data that
can be useful in diagnosing problems.
exit
Return to main CMC menu.
exportcert
Exports the CA certificate for Console.
exportcertrequest
Exports a certificate request for signing by CA.
help
Displays a brief description of each command within the trigeo
menu.
importcenter
* Imports a certificate used for Console communication.
logbackupconfig
Configures the TriGeo Manager appliance remote log backups to a
remote file share on a daily, weekly, or monthly schedule.
resetadmin
* Resets the admin password to the default value, as noted in the
Manager Information Sheet provided on your TriGeo DVD. This
command does not affect other users on the system and all settings
will be preserved.
566
Command
Description
restart
* Restarts the TriGeo Manager service. This will take the Manager
offline for 1–3 minutes.
sensortoolupgrade
Upgrades the TriGeo Manager’s Sensor Tools from a CD or floppy
disk.
showlog
Allows you to page through the Manager’s log file.
showmanagermem
Displays the Manager's configured memory utilization settings.
start
Starts the TriGeo Manager service. If the Manager is already
started, then nothing will happen.
stop
* Stops the TriGeo Manager service. This makes the Manager
inactive until it is started again.
support
Sends debugging information via email to support@trigeo.com.
This command will prompt you for your name and email address. It
then sends TriGeo a collection of data that can be useful in
diagnosing problems.
upgrade
Upgrade the TriGeo Manager software from a CD or floppy disk.
This command looks for Manager upgrades on the floppy disk or
CD, and prompts you for which updates you wish to install.
viewsysinfo
Displays appliance settings and information, useful for support and
troubleshooting.
watchlog
Displays 20 lines of the current Manager log file and monitors the
log for further updates. Any new log entries appear as they are
written to the log.
whpause
Temporarily pause logging from the TriGeo Manager appliance to
the Database Warehouse. The Manager will queue any data that
would normally be sent to the warehouse until the connection is
resumed with the whresume command.
whresume
Resumes paused logging from the TriGeo Manager appliance to the
Database Warehouse.
567
Using the CMC 'ndepth' menu
If you have one or more nDepth appliances, CMC has an ind menu that lets you control these
appliances. After typing the ind command, the cmc::ind# prompt appears. You may then use any of
the commands listed in the following table.
Command
Description
backupconfig
Configures nDepth data backup to store all data.
disableretirement
Disables automatic nDepth archiving of retired data.
enableretirement
Enables automatic nDepth archiving of retired data.
exit
Exits nDepth Configuration/Maintenance (returns to main CMC
menu).
help
Shows the help menu.
licenseupgrade
* Installs a new nDepth license file or upgrades an existing one.
restart
* Restarts the nDepth Service.
setminfree
* Specifies the minimum amount of disk space for the nDepth
appliance to preserve. The appliance will retire data before
exceeding the available space in order to always keep this amount of
space available.
start
Starts the nDepth service.
stop
Stops the nDepth service.
568
After typing the service command, the cmc::scm# prompt appears. You may then use any of the
commands listed in the following table.
Command
Description
addsymantechost
Configures additional Symantec Velociraptor-based log import hosts
for integration with the TriGeo system. You will need the IP address of
the Velociraptor, the connection port, and the password that was
assigned when creating the configuration on the Velociraptor itself.
copysnortrules
Copy the existing Snort rules from the Manager onto a floppy disk or
network file share. This allows you to retrieve the Snort rules from the
Manager’s hard drive and make any rule updates or modifications.
This requires a formatted floppy disk or a network file share.
deletesymantechost
Remove any configured Symantec Velociraptor-based log import
hosts.
disableflow
Disables NetFlow/sFlow collection on the TriGeo Appliance (and in
the TriGeo Explorer).
disablesnmp
Disables SNMP trap logging to the TriGeo Manager. The SNMP trap
logging service will be permanently disabled until the enablesnmp
command is issued.
enableflow
* Enables NetFlow/sFlow collection on the TriGeo Appliance (and in
the TriGeo Explorer).
enablesnmp
Enables SNMP trap logging to the TriGeo Manager. By default, SNMP
is disabled on the TriGeo Manager. This command enables SNMP to
allow integration with some security tools that can only log using
SNMP.
exit
Returns to the main CMC menu.
getflowdbsize
Checks the size of the Flow database.
help
Displays a brief description of each command within the service
menu.
569
Command
Description
loadsnortbackup
Loads Snort rules from “factory default” on the Manager. This allows
you to revert to the Snort rules’ original default settings in case of an
error. This command overwrites any changes that were made to the
main set of rules with the original rules that were installed with the
TriGeo system.
loadsnortrules
Loads Snort rules from a floppy disk or a network file share to the
Manager. This allows you to update the Snort rules on the Manager.
The floppy disk must be in the same format (i.e., the same names and
directories) that the copysnortrules command uses to issue the
original rules; otherwise, the rules will not be updated.
restartsnort
Restarts the Snort service.
restartssh
Restarts the SSH service. If the SSH service is running, this
command stops and then restarts the service.
restartsymantec
Stops and restarts all log import connections for configured Symantec
Velociraptor-based firewalls.
restrictconsole
Restricts access to the TriGeo Console’s graphical user interface to
only certain IP addresses or hostnames. This command prompts you
to provide the allowable IP addresses or hostnames. Once the
restriction is in place, only the given IP addresses/hostnames are able
to connect to the Console. Users are still required to log in with a
password to fully access the TriGeo Console.
restrictreports
Restricts access to reports to only certain IP addresses or
hostnames. This command prompts you to provide the allowable IP
addresses or hostnames. Once the restriction is in place, only the
given IP addresses/hostnames are able to create and view reports.
restrictssh
Restrict the SSH service to only certain IP addresses. This command
prompts you to provide the allowable IP addresses. Once the
restriction is done, only the given IP address/user combinations will be
able to connect to the TriGeo Manager using the SSH service.
startssh
Start running the SSH service.
startsymantec
Begin log import process for all configured Symantec Velociraptorbased firewalls. The command sends the log data to a file on the
Manager for integration with the TriGeo system.
stopopsec
Terminate any connections from the TriGeo Manager Appliance to
Check Point® OPSEC™ hosts.
570
Command
Description
stopssh
Stops running the SSH service. If you issue this command, you can
only access the Manager with a keyboard and monitor until you issue
a reboot command.
To restrict access to the SSH service (outside of the user name and
password requirements), see the restrictssh command.
stopsymantec
Stops any running log import connections to Symantec Velociraptorbased firewalls.
unrestrictconsole
Removes restrictions to the TriGeo Console’s graphical user
interface. This command removes all restrictions and allows any valid
TriGeo system user to connect to the TriGeo Console. The only
protection at this point is the user name and password combination.
unrestrictreports
Removes restrictions on access to reports. This command removes
all restrictions and allows anyone with the TriGeo Reports Console, or
any alternative database connection software, with the proper
username and password, to create and view reports and browse the
TriGeo database.
unrestrictssh
Removes restrictions to the SSH service. Any connection attempts
will still require a user name and password.
viewsymantechost
Displays all currently configured Symantec Velociraptor-based log
import hosts.
571
The following tables list all of TriGeo’s reports, provide descriptions of their contents, and suggest
schedules for running each report.
The following table lists and describes each of TriGeo’s audit reports. For your convenience, the
reports are listed alphabetically by title.
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Authentication Report
This report lists all authentications tracked by
the TriGeo system, including user logon, logoff,
failed logon attempts, guest logons, etc.
RPT2003-02.rpt
Weekly
Authentication Report Authentication Audit
This report lists alert events that are related to
authentication and authorization of accounts
and account “'containers'” such as groups or
domains. These alerts can be produced from
any network node including firewalls, routers,
servers, and clients.
RPT2003-02-10.rpt
As needed
Authentication Report Suspicious
Authentication
This report lists alert events that are related to
suspicious authentication and authorization
events. These events include excessive failed
authentication or authorization attempts,
suspicious access to unauthenticated users,
and suspicious access to unauthorized services
or information.
RPT2003-02-9.rpt
As Needed
Authentication Report Top User Log On by
User
This report lists the Top User Log On alerts
grouped by user name.
RPT2003-02-6-2.rpt
As needed
Authentication Report Top User Log On
Failure by User
This report lists the Top User Log On Failure
alerts grouped by user name.
RPT2003-02-7-2.rpt
As needed
Authentication Report TriGeo Authentication
This report shows logon, logoff, and logon
failure activity to the TriGeo Console.
RPT2003-02-8.rpt
As needed
Authentication Report User Log Off
User Logoff alerts reflect account logoff events
from network devices (including network
infrastructure devices). Each alert will reflect
the type of device from which the user was
logging off. These alerts are usually normal
events but are tracked for consistency and
auditing purposes.
RPT2003-02-5.rpt
As needed
573
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Authentication Report User Log On
User Logon alerts reflect user account logon
events from network devices monitored by
TriGeo (including network infrastructure
devices). Each alert will reflect the type of
device that the logon was intended for along
with all other relevant fields.
RPT2003-02-6.rpt
As needed
Authentication Report User Log On by User
This report lists all account logon alerts,
RPT2003-02-6-1.rpt
As needed
Authentication Report User Log On Failure
User Logon Failure alerts reflect failed account
logon events from network devices (including
network infrastructure devices). Each alert will
reflect the point on the network where the user
was attempting logon. In larger quantities,
these alerts may reflect a potential issue with a
user or set of users, but as individual events
they are generally not a problem.
RPT2003-02-7.rpt
As needed
Authentication Report User Log On Failure by
User
This report lists all account logon failure alerts,
RPT2003-02-7-1.rpt
As needed
Change Management General Authentication
Related Events
This report includes changes to domains,
groups, machine accounts, and user accounts.
RPT2006-20.rp
As needed
Change Management General Authentication:
Domain Events
This report includes changes to domains,
including new domains, new members, and
modifications to domain settings.
RPT2006-20-01.rpt
As needed
Domain Events Change Domain
Attribute
This report lists changes to domain type. These
events are uncommon and usually provided by
the operating system. Usually, these changes
are made by a user account with administrative
privileges, but occasionally a change will
happen when local system maintenance
activity takes place.
RPT2006-20-01-7.rpt
As needed
Domain Events Change Domain
Member
This report lists alert events that occur when an
account or account container within a domain is
modified. Usually, these changes are made by
a user account with administrative privileges,
but occasionally an alert occurs when local
system maintenance activity takes place. Alerts
of this nature mean a user, machine, or service
account within the domain has been modified.
RPT2006-20-01-4.rpt
As needed
Domain Events - Delete
Domain
This report lists alert events that occur upon
removal of a trust relationship between
domains, deletion of a subdomain, or deletion
of account containers within a domain. Usually,
these changes are made by a user account
with administrative privileges.
RPT2006-20-01-8.rpt
As needed
574
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Domain Events - Delete
Domain Member
account or account container has been
removed from a domain. Usually, these
changes are made by a user account with
administrative privileges, but occasionally they
occur when local system maintenance activity
takes place.
RPT2006-20-01-3.rpt
As needed
Domain Events Domain Member Alias
This report lists alert events that happen when
the alias for a domain member has been
changed. This means an account or account
container within a domain has an alias created,
deleted, or otherwise modified. This event is
uncommon and is used to track links between
domain members and other locations in the
domain where the member may appear.
RPT2006-20-01-5.rpt
As needed
Domain Events DomainAuthAudit
This report lists authentication, authorization,
and modification events that are related only to
domains, subdomains, and account
containers. These alerts are normally related
to operating systems. However, they can be
produced by any network device.
RPT2006-20-01-1.rpt
As needed
Domain Events - New
Domain
creation of a new trust relationship between
domains, creation of a new subdomain, or
creation of new account containers within a
domain. Usually, these creations are done by a
user account with administrative privileges.
RPT2006-20-01-6.rpt
As needed
Domain Events - New
Domain Member
account or an account container (a new user,
machine, or service account) has been added
to the domain. Usually, these additions are
made by a user account with administrative
privileges, but occasionally they occur when
RPT2006-20-01-2.rpt
As needed
Group Events
This report lists changes to groups, including
new groups, members added/removed
to/from groups, and modifications to group
settings.
RPT2006-20-02.rpt
As needed
Group Events - Change
Group Attribute
This report lists alert events that occur when a
group type is modified. Usually, these changes
are made by a user account with administrative
privileges, but occasionally a they occur when
RPT2006-20-02-6.rpt
As needed
Group Events - Delete
Group
deletion of a new group of any type. Usually,
these additions are made by a user account
with administrative privileges.
RPT2006-20-02-5.rpt
As needed
575
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Group Events - Delete
Group Member
account or group has been removed from a
group. Usually, these changes are made by a
user account with administrative privileges, but
occasionally they occur when local system
maintenance activity takes place.
RPT2006-20-02-3.rpt
As needed
Group Events - Group
Audit
This report lists authentication, authorization,
and modification events related only to account
groups. These alerts are normally operating
system related, however could be produced by
any network device.
RPT2006-20-02-1.rpt
As needed
Group Events - New
Group
This report lists NewGroup events. These
events occur upon creation of a new group of
any type. Usually, these additions are made by
a user account with administrative privileges.
RPT2006-20-02-4.rpt
As needed
Group Events - New
Group Member
This report lists NewGroupMember events.
These events occur when an account (or other
group) has been added to a group. Usually,
these additions are made by a user account
with administrative privileges, but occasionally
an alert will occur when local system
maintenance activity takes place. A new user,
machine, or service account has been added to
the group.
RPT2006-20-02-2.rpt
As needed
Machine Account
Events
This report includes changes to machine
accounts, including enabling/disabling machine
accounts and modifications to machine account
settings.
RPT2006-20-03.rpt
As needed
Machine Account
Events - Machine
Disabled
This report lists MachineDisable events. These
events occur when a machine account is
actively disabled and/or when an account is
forcibly locked out by the operating system or
other authentication tool. These events are
usually operating system related and could
reflect a potential issue with a computer or set
of computers.
RPT2006-20-03-3.rpt
As needed
Machine Account
Events - Machine
Enabled
This report lists MachineEnable alerts, which
reflect the action of enabling a computer or
machine account. These events are normally
related to the operating system, and will trigger
when a machine is “enabled,” normally by a
user with administrative privileges.
RPT2006-20-03-1.rpt
As needed
Machine Account
Events - Machine
Modify Attribute
This report lists MachineModifyAttribute
events, which occur when a computer or
machine type is changed. These events are
uncommon and usually provided by the
operating system.
RPT2006-20-03-2.rpt
As needed
576
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
User Account Events
This report includes changes to user accounts,
including enabling/disabling user accounts and
modifications to user account settings.
RPT2006-20-04.rpt
As needed
User Account Events User Disabled
This report lists UserDisable events. These
events occur when a user account is actively
disabled and/or when a user is forcibly locked
out by the operating system or other
authentication tool. These events are usually
related to the operating system and can reflect
a potential issue with a user or set of users.
RPT2006-20-04-3.rpt
As needed
User Account Events User Enabled
This report lists UserEnable alerts, which
reflect the action of enabling a user account.
These events are normally related to the
operating system . They occur both when an
account is “'unlocked'” after lockout due to
unsuccessful logons, and when an account is
“enabled” in the traditional sense.
RPT2006-20-04-1.rpt
As needed
User Account Events User Modify Attributes
This report lists UserModifyAttribute events
that occur when a user type is changed. These
events are uncommon and usually provided by
the operating system.
RPT2006-20-04-2.rpt
As needed
Change Management Network Infrastructure:
Policy/View Change
This report includes accesses to network
infrastructure device policy, including viewing
or changing device policy.
RPT2006-21.rpt
As needed
Change Management Windows/Active
Directory Domains:
Group Created
This report includes creations of
Windows/Active Directory groups.
RPT2006-22-01.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Group Deleted
This report includes deletions of
Windows/Active Directory groups.
RPT2006-22-02.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Group Events
This report includes Windows/Active Directory
group-related events.
RPT2006-22.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Group Property
Updated
This report includes changes to
Windows/Active Directory group properties,
such as the display name.
RPT2006-22-03.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Machine Events
machine-related events.
RPT2006-23.rpt
As needed
577
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Directory Domains:
Machine Events Account Created
Windows/Active Directory machine accounts.
RPT2006-23-01.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Machine Events Account Deleted
RPT2006-23-02.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Machine Events Account Disabled
This report includes disables of
RPT2006-23-03.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Machine Events Account Enabled
This report includes enables of Windows/Active
Directory machine accounts.
RPT2006-23-04.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Machine Events Account Properties
Update
Windows/Active Directory machine account
properties, such as the display name.
RPT2006-23-05.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Machine Events Added To Group
This report includes additions of
Windows/Active Directory machine accounts to
groups.
RPT2006-23-06.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Machine Events Added To OU
Windows/Active Directory machine accounts to
Organizational Units.
RPT2006-23-07.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Machine Events Removed From Group
This report includes removals of
Windows/Active Directory machine accounts
from groups.
RPT2006-23-08.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Machine Events Removed From OU
Windows/Active Directory machine accounts
from Organizational Units.
RPT2006-23-09.rpt
As needed
578
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Directory Domains:
New Critical Group
Members
Windows/Active Directory user accounts to
critical groups, such as Domain or Enterprise
Admins.
RPT2006-22-04.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains: OU
Events
Organizational Unit-related events.
RPT2006-24.rpt
As needed
Events - OU Created
This report includes creation of
Windows/Active Directory Organizational
Units.
RPT2006-24-01.rpt
As needed
Events - OU Deleted
This report includes deletion of Windows/Active
Directory Organizational Units.
RPT2006-24-02.rpt
As needed
Events - OU Properties
Update
This report includes updates to
Windows/Active Directory Organizational Unit
RPT2006-24-03.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
User Events
user-related events.
RPT2006-25.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
User Events - Account
Created
Windows/Active Directory user accounts.
RPT2006-25-01.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Deleted
RPT2006-25-02.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Disabled
This report includes disables of
RPT2006-25-03.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Enabled
This report includes enables of Windows/Active
Directory user accounts.
RPT2006-25-04.rpt
As needed
579
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Directory Domains:
Lockout
This report includes user-driven disables of
Windows/Active Directory user accounts, such
as a user triggering an excessive failed
password limit.
RPT2006-25-05.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
Properties Updated
Windows/Active Directory user account
RPT2006-25-06.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
User Events - Added
To Group
groups.
RPT2006-25-07.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
User Events - Added
To OU
RPT2006-25-08.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
User Events Removed From Group
Windows/Active Directory user accounts from
groups.
RPT2006-25-09.rpt
As needed
Directory Domains:
User Events Removed From OU
Windows/Active Directory user accounts from
RPT2006-25-10.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events
This report tracks file system activity associated
with audited files and system objects, such as
file access successes and failures.
RPT2003-05.rpt
Weekly
File Audit Events - File
Attribute Change
File Attribute Change is a specific File Write
alert generated for the modification of file
attributes (including properties such as readonly status). These alerts may be produced by
any tool that is used to monitor the activity of file
usage, including a Host-Based IDS and some
Operating Systems.
RPT2003-05-41.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Audit
File Audit alerts are used to track file activity on
monitored network devices, usually through
the Operating System or a Host-Based IDS.
These events will note success or failure of the
RPT2003-05-11.rpt
As needed
580
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
File Audit Events File Audit Failure
File Audit Failure alerts are used to track failed
file activity on monitored network devices,
usually through the Operating System or a
Host-Based IDS. These events will note what
requested operation failed.
RPT2003-05-12.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Create
File Create is a specific File Write alert
generated for the initial creation of a file. These
alerts may be produced by any tool that is used
to monitor the activity of file usage, including a
Host-Based IDS and some Operating
Systems.
RPT2003-05-42.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Data Read
File Data Read is a specific File Read alert
generated for the operation of reading data
from a file (not just properties or status of a file).
These alerts may be produced by any tool that
is used to monitor the activity of file usage,
including a Host-Based IDS and some
Operating Systems.
RPT2003-05-31.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Data Write
File Data Write is a specific File Write alert
generated for the operation of writing data to a
file (not just properties or status of a file). These
to monitor the activity of file usage, including a
Host-Based IDS and some Operating
Systems.
RPT2003-05-43.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Delete
File Delete is a specific File Write alert
generated for the deletion of an existing file.
Operating Systems.
RPT2003-05-44.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Execute
File Execute is a specific File Read alert
generated for the operation of executing files.
Operating Systems.
RPT2003-05-32.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Handle Audit
File Handle Audit alerts are used to track file
handle activity on monitored network devices,
usually through low level access to the
Operating System, either natively or with or a
Host-Based IDS. These events will note
success or failure of the requested operation.
RPT2003-05-21.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Handle Close
File Handle Close is a specific File Handle Audit
alert generated for the closing of file handles.
These alerts may be generated by a tool that
has low-level file access, such as an Operating
System or some Host-Based IDS'.
RPT2003-05-22.rpt
As needed
581
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
File Audit Events File Handle Copy
File Handle Copy is a specific File Handle Audit
alert generated for the copying of file handles.
RPT2003-05-23.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Handle Open
File Handle Open is a specific File Handle Audit
alert generated for the opening of file handles.
RPT2003-05-24.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Link
File Link is a specific File Write alert generated
for the creation, deletion, or modification of
links to other files. These alerts may be
produced by any tool that is used to monitor the
activity of file usage, including a Host-Based
RPT2003-05-45.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Move
File Move is a specific File Write alert
generated for the operation of moving a file
that already exists. These alerts may be
produced by any tool that is used to monitor the
activity of file usage, including a Host-Based
RPT2003-05-46.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Read
File Read is a specific File Audit alert generated
for the operation of reading files (including
reading properties of a file or the status of a
file). These alerts may be produced by any tool
that is used to monitor the activity of file usage,
Operating Systems.
RPT2003-05-33.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events File Write
File Write is a specific File Audit alert generated
for the operation of writing to a file (including
writing properties of a file or changing the
status of a file). These alerts may be produced
by any tool that is used to monitor the activity of
file usage, including a Host-Based IDS and
some operating systems.
RPT2003-05-47.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events Object Audit
Object Audit alerts are used to track special
object activity on monitored network devices,
usually through the Operating System or a
Host-Based IDS. Generally, Objects are
special types of system resources, such as
registry items or user account databases.
These objects may be actual 'files' on the
system, but are not necessarily human
readable. These events will note success or
failure of the requested operation.
RPT2003-05-51.rpt
As needed
582
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
File Audit Events Object Audit Failure
Object Audit Failure alerts are used to track
special object activity on monitored network
devices, usually through the Operating System
or a Host-Based IDS. Generally, Objects are
special types of system resources, such as
registry items or user account databases.
These objects may be actual 'files' on the
system, but are not necessarily human
readable. These events will note a failure of the
RPT2003-05-52.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events Object Delete
Object Delete is a specific Object Audit alert
generated for the deletion of an existing object.
is used to monitor the activity of file and object
usage, including a Host-Based IDS and some
Operating Systems.
RPT2003-05-53.rpt
As needed
File Audit Events Object Link
Object Link is a specific Object Audit alert
generated for the creation, deletion, or
modification of links to other objects. These
to monitor the activity of file and object usage,
Operating Systems.
RPT2003-05-54.rpt
As needed
Incident Alerts
This report tracks the Incident, HostIncident,
HybridIncident and NetworkIncident alerts that
have been generated to reflect enterprisewide issues.
RPT2006-19.rpt
Daily
Inferred Alerts
This report tracks alerts that are triggered by
correlations built in the TriGeo Rule Builder.
RPT2006-27.rpt
As needed
Inferred Alerts by
Inference Rule
This report tracks alerts that are triggered by
correlations, and orders them by the
correlation rule name.
RPT2006-27-01.rpt
As needed
Log On/Off/Failure
Track activity associated with account events
such as log on, log off and log on failures. This
is a refined version of the Authentication
Report that does not include TriGeo
authentication events. It is more appropriate
for management reports or audit reviews than
regular use.
RPT2003-03.rpt
Weekly
Network Traffic Audit
Track activity associated with network traffic
audit events such as TCP, IP and UDP alerts.
Specifically, this report tracks regular network
traffic activity, such as encrypted traffic, web
traffic, and other forms of UDP, TCP and ICMP
traffic. It gives you both an overview and some
details of exactly what is flowing through your
network. This report can be quite large.
RPT2003-06.rpt
Daily, if needed
583
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Network Traffic Audit Application Traffic
ApplicationTrafficAudit alerts reflect network
traffic that is mostly or all application-layer data.
Alerts that are children of
ApplicationTrafficAudit are also related to
application-layer resources. Alerts placed in
the parent ApplicationTrafficAudit alert itself
are known to be application-related, but are
not able to be further categorized based on the
message provided by the tool or because they
are uncommon and rarely, if ever, imply
network attack potential.
RPT2003-06-11.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Application Traffic by
Destination Machine
This report lists all Application Traffic alerts
(such as WebTrafficAudit), grouped by
destination machine/IP.
RPT2003-06-11-2.rpt
As needed
Provider SID
(such as WebTrafficAudit), grouped by
provider SID.
RPT2033-06-11-3.rpt
As needed
Source Machine
(such as WebTrafficAudit), grouped by source
machine/IP.
RPT2003-06-11-1.rpt
As needed
Tool Alias
(such as WebTrafficAudit), grouped by the
TriGeo sensor tool alias that reported each
alert.
RPT2003-06-11-0.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Configuration Traffic
Configuration Traffic Audit alerts reflect
application-layer data related to configuration
of network resources. Included in
ConfigurationTrafficAudit are protocols such
as DHCP, BootP, and SNMP.
ConfigurationTrafficAudit alerts generally
indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this
type could also be symptoms of
misconfiguration, inappropriate usage,
attempts to enumerate or access network
devices or services, attempts to access devices
that are configured via these services, or other
abnormal traffic.
RPT2003-06-02.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Core Traffic
CoreTrafficAudit alerts reflect network traffic
sent over core protocols. Alerts that are
children of CoreTrafficAudit are all related to
the TCP, IP, UDP, and ICMP protocols. Alerts
of this type and its children do not have any
application-layer data. Alerts placed in the
parent CoreTrafficAudit alert itself are known
to be a core protocol, but are not able to be
further categorized based on the message
provided by the tool.
RPT2003-06-03.rpt
As needed
584
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Network Traffic Audit Core Traffic by
Destination Machine
This report lists all Core Traffic alerts (such as
TCPTrafficAudit), grouped by destination
machine/IP.
RPT2003-06-03-2.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Core Traffic by
Provider SID
TCPTrafficAudit), grouped by provider SID.
RPT2003-06-03-3.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Core Traffic by Source
TCPTrafficAudit), grouped by source
machine/IP.
RPT2003-06-03-1.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Core Traffic by Tool
Alias
TCPTrafficAudit), grouped by the TriGeo tool
sensor alias that reported the alert.
RPT2003-06-03-0.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Encrypted Traffic
Encrypted Traffic Audit alerts reflect
application-layer traffic that has been
encrypted and is intended for a secure host.
Included in Encrypted Traffic Audit are client
and server side application events, such as key
exchanges, that normally occur after the lowlevel session creation and handshaking have
completed.
RPT2003-06-04.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Link Control Traffic
Link Control Traffic Audit alerts are generated
for network events related to link level
configuration. Link Control Traffic Audit alerts
generally indicate normal traffic, however,
alerts of this type could also be symptoms of
misconfiguration at the link level, inappropriate
usage, or other abnormal traffic.
RPT2003-06-05.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Network Traffic
Members of the Network Audit tree are used to
define events centered on usage of network
resources/bandwidth.
RPT2003-06-06.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Point to Point Traffic
Point To Point Traffic Audit alerts reflect
application-layer data related to point-to-point
connections between hosts. Included in Point
To Point Traffic Audit are encrypted and
unencrypted point-to-point traffic.
RPT2003-06-07.rpt
As needed
585
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Network Traffic Audit Remote Procedure
Traffic
Remote Procedure Traffic Audit alerts reflect
application-layer data related to remote
procedure services. Included in Remote
Procedure Traffic Audit are the traditional RPC
services used to service remote logons and file
shares, and other services which require
remote procedure access to complete
authentication, pass data, or otherwise
communicate. RemoteProcedureTrafficAudit
alerts generally indicate normal traffic for
networks that have remote procedure services
on their network; however, alerts of this type
could also be symptoms of inappropriate
access, misconfiguration of the remote
procedure services, errors in the remote
procedure calls, or other abnormal traffic.
RPT2003-06-08.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Routing Traffic
Routing Traffic Audit alerts are generated for
network events related to configuration of
network routes, using protocols such as IGMP,
IGRP, and RIP. RoutingTrafficAudit alerts
generally indicate normal traffic, however,
alerts of this type could also be symptoms of
misconfigured routing, unintended route
configuration, or other abnormal traffic.
RPT2003-06-09.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Time Traffic
Time Traffic Audit alerts reflect applicationlayer data related to network time
configuration. Included in TimeTrafficAudit are
protocols such as NTP and activities, such as
detection of client-side network time updates.
RPT2003-06-10.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Top Application Traffic
by Source
This report lists the Top Application Traffic
alerts (such as WebTrafficAudit), grouped by
source machine/IP.
RPT2003-06-01-2.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Top Core Traffic by
Source
This report lists the Top Core Traffic alerts
(such as TCPTrafficAudit), grouped by source
machine/IP.
RPT2003-06-03-2.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Web Traffic
WebTrafficAudit alerts reflect application-layer
data related to web services. Included in
WebTrafficAudit are client and server web
events from web servers, web applications,
content filter related events, and other web
services. WebTrafficAudit alerts generally
indicate normal traffic, however, alerts of this
type could also be symptoms of inappropriate
web usage, potential abuse of web services, or
other abnormal traffic.
RPT2003-06-01.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Web Traffic by
Destination Machine
This report lists all WebTrafficAudit alerts
grouped by destination machine/IP.
RPT2003-06-01-2.rpt
As needed
586
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Network Traffic Audit Web Traffic by Provider
SID
This report lists Web Traffic Audit alerts
grouped by provider SID.
RPT2003-06-01-3.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Web Traffic by Source
Machine
This report lists all WebTrafficAudit alerts
grouped by source machine/IP.
RPT2003-06-01-1.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Web Traffic by Tool
Alias
This report lists Web Traffic Audit alerts
grouped by tool alias.
RPT2003-06-01-0.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Web URL Requests by
Source Machine
This report lists the most frequently visited
URLs grouped by the requesting client source
machine.
RPT2003-06-01-5.rpt
As needed
Network Traffic Audit Web URL Requests by
Source Machine Graphs
This report shows graphs of the most
frequently visited URLs for each client source
machine.
RPT2003-06-01-4.rpt
As needed
Resource
Configuration
The Resource Configuration report details
events that relate to configuration of user
accounts, machine accounts, groups, policies
and their relationships. Items such as domain
or group modification, policy changes, and
creation of new network resources.
RPT2003-08.rpt
Weekly
Resource
Configuration Authorization Audit
Alerts that are part of the Auth Audit tree are
related to authentication and authorization of
accounts and account ''containers'' such as
groups or domains. These alerts can be
produced from any network node including
firewalls, routers, servers, and clients.
RPT2003-08-01.rpt
As needed
Resource
Configuration - Domain
Authorization Audit
Domain Auth Audit events are authentication,
authorization, and modification events related
only to domains, subdomains, and account
containers. These alerts are normally
operating system related, however could be
produced by any network device.
RPT2003-08-02.rpt
As needed
Resource
Configuration - Group
Audit
Group Audit events are authentication,
only to account groups. These alerts are
normally operating system related, however
could be produced by any network device.
RPT2003-08-03.rpt
As needed
Resource
Configuration Machine Authorization
Audit
Machine Auth Audit events are authentication,
only to computer or machine accounts. These
alerts can be produced from any network node
including firewalls, routers, servers, and clients,
but are normally operating system related.
RPT2003-08-04.rpt
As needed
587
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Resource
Configuration - Policy
Audit
Policy Audit events are used to track access,
modification, scope change, and creation of
authentication, domain, account, and account
container policies. Many of these alerts reflect
normal system traffic. Most PolicyAudit alerts
are provided by the Operating System.
RPT2003-08-06.rpt
As needed
Resource
Configuration - User
Authorization Audit
User Auth Audit events are authentication,
only to user accounts. These alerts can be
produced from any network node including
firewalls, routers, servers, and clients.
RPT2003-08-05.rpt
As needed
588
The following table lists and describes each of TriGeo's security reports. For your convenience, the
reports are listed alphabetically by title.
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Authentication Report Failed Authentication
Failed Authentication events occur when a user has
made several attempts to authenticate themselves
which has continuously failed, or when a logon
failure is serious enough to merit a security event on
a single failure.
RPT2003-02-1.rpt
As needed
Authentication Report Guest Login
This report shows logins to various Guest accounts.
RPT2003-02-2.rpt
As needed
Authentication Report Restricted Information
Attempt
Restricted Information Attempt events describe a
user attempt to access local or remote information
that their level of authorization does not allow.
These events may indicate user attempts to exploit
services which they are denied access to or
inappropriate access attempts to information.
RPT2003-02-3.rpt
As needed
Authentication Report Restricted Service
Attempt
Restricted Service Attempt events describe a user
attempt to access a local or remote service that their
level of authorization does not allow. These events
may indicate user attempts to exploit services which
they are denied access to or inappropriate access
attempts to services.
RPT2003-02-4.rpt
As needed
Console
The Console report shows every alert that passes
through the system in the given time interval. It
mimics the basic management console view. It does
not contain the same level of field detail, but it is
useful to get a quick snapshot of activity for a period,
a lunch hour, for example.This report can be very
large, so you will only want to run for small time
intervals, such as hours.
RPT2003-10.rpt
As needed
Console - Overview
An overview of all alerts during the specified time
range. Shows graphs of the most common generic
alert field data from the console report.
RPT2003-10-00.rpt
As needed
Event Summary Attack Behavior
Statistics
Event Summary Sub Report - Attack Behavior
Statistics
RPT2003-01-02.rpt
As needed
Event Summary Authorization Audit
Statistics
Event Summary Sub Report - Authorization Audit
Statistics
RPT2003-01-03.rpt
As needed
589
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Event Summary Graphs
The event summary report gathers statistical data
from all major event categories, summarizes it with
a one-hour resolution, and presents a quick,
graphical overview of activity on your network.
RPT2003-01.rpt
Daily
Event Summary Machine Audit Statistics
Event Summary Sub Report - Machine Audit
Statistics
RPT2003-01-05.rpt
As needed
Event Summary Policy Audit Statistics
Event Summary Sub Report - Policy Audit Statistics
RPT2003-01-06.rpt
As needed
Event Summary Resource Audit Statistics
Event Summary Sub Report - Resource Audit
Statistics
RPT2003-01-07.rpt
As needed
Event Summary Suspicious Behavior
Statistics
Event Summary Sub Report - Suspicious Behavior
Statistics
RPT2003-01-08.rpt
As needed
Event Summary Top Level Statistics
Event Summary Sub Report - Top Level Statistics
RPT2003-01-01.rpt
As needed
Machine Audit
Track activity associated with machine process and
service audit events. This report shows machinelevel events such as software installs, patches,
system shutdowns, and reboots. It can be used to
assist in software license compliance auditing by
providing records of installs.
RPT2003-09.rpt
Weekly
Machine Audit File System Audit
This report tracks activity associated with file system
audit alerts including mount file system and
unmount file system alerts. These events are
generally normal system activity, especially during
system boot.
RPT2003-09-010.rpt
As needed
Machine Audit - File
System Audit - Mount
File System
Mount File System alerts are a specific type of File
System Audit that reflect the action of creating an
active translation between hardware to a usable
files ystem. These events are generally normal
during system boot.
RPT2003-09-012.rpt
As needed
Machine Audit - File
System Audit - Unmount
File System
Unmount File System alerts are a specific type of
File System Audit that reflect the action of removing
a translation between hardware and a usable files
ystem. These events are generally normal during
system shutdown.
RPT2003-09-013.rpt
As needed
Machine Audit - Process
Audit
This report tracks activity related to processes,
including processes that have started, stopped, or
reported useful process-related information.
RPT2003-09-030.rpt
As needed
Audit - Process Audit
This report lists Process Audit alerts that are
generated to track launch, exit, status, and other
events related to system processes. Usually, these
events reflect normal system activity. Processrelated activity that may indicate a failure will be
noted separately from normal activity in the alert
detail.
RPT2003-09-031.rpt
As needed
590
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Audit - Process Info
Process Info is a specific type of Process Audit alert
that reflects information related to a process. Most
of these events can safely be ignored, as they are
generally normal activity that does not reflect a
RPT2003-09-032.rpt
As needed
Audit - Process Start
Process Start is a specific type of Process Audit alert
that indicates a new process has been launched.
Usually, Process Start reflects normal system
activity.
RPT2003-09-033.rpt
As needed
Audit - Process Stop
Process Stop is a specific type of Process Audit alert
that indicates a process has exited. Usually,
Process Stop reflects normal application exit,
however in the event of an unexpected error the
abnormal state will be noted.
RPT2003-09-034.rpt
As needed
Audit - Process Warning
Process Warning is a specific type of Process Audit
alert that indicates a process has returned a
'Warning' message that is not a fatal error and may
not have triggered an exit of the process.
RPT2003-09-035.rpt
As needed
Machine Audit - Service
Audit
This report tracks activity related to services,
including services that have started, stopped, or
reported useful service-related information or
warnings.
RPT2003-09-040.rpt
As needed
Audit - Service Info
This report tracks ServiceInfo events, which reflect
information related to a particular service. Most of
these events can safely be ignored, as they are
generally normal activity that does not reflect a
RPT2003-09-041.rpt
As needed
Audit - Service Start
This report tracks ServiceStart events, which
indicate that a new system service is starting.
RPT2003-09-042.rpt
As needed
Audit - Service Stop
This report tracks ServiceStop events, which
indicate that a system service is stopping. This
activity is generally normal, however, in the event of
an unexpected stop the abnormal state will be
noted.
RPT2003-09-043.rpt
As needed
Audit - Service Warning
This report lists ServiceWarning alerts. These alerts
indicate a service has returned a “'Warning”
message that is not a fatal error and may not have
triggered an exit of the service.
RPT2003-09-044.rpt
As needed
Machine Audit - System
Audit
This report tracks activity associated with system
status and modifications, including software
changes, system reboots, and system shutdowns.
RPT2003-09-020.rpt
As needed
Audit - Machine Audit
Machine Audit alerts are used to track hardware or
software status and modifications. These events
are generally acceptable, but do indicate
modifications to the client system that may be
noteworthy.
RPT2003-09-021.rpt
As needed
591
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Audit - Software Install
SoftwareInstall alerts reflect modifications to the
system at a software level, generally at the
operating system level (or equivalent, in the case of
a network infrastructure device). These alerts are
generated when a user updates a system or
launches system-native methods to install third
party applications.
RPT2003-09-025.rpt
As needed
Audit - Software Update
SoftwareUpdate is a specific type of SoftwareInstall
that reflects a more current version of software
being installed to replace an older version.
RPT2003-09-026.rpt
As needed
Audit - System Reboot
System Reboot alerts occur on monitored network
devices (servers, routers, etc.) and indicate that a
system has restarted.
RPT2003-09-022.rpt
As needed
Audit - System
Shutdown
System shutdown alerts occur on monitored
network devices (servers, routers, etc.) and
indicate that a system has been shutdown.
RPT2003-09-023.rpt
As needed
Audit - System Status
SystemStatus alerts reflect general system state
events. These events are generally normal and
informational, however, they could potentially
reflect a failure or issue which should be addressed.
RPT2003-09-024.rpt
As needed
Machine Audit USB-Defender
This report tracks activity associated with USBDefender, including insertion and removal events
related to USB Mass Storage devices.
RPT2003-09-050.rpt
As needed
Malicious Code
This report tracks event activity associated with
malicious code such as virus, Trojans, and worms,
both on the network and on local machines, as
detected by anti-virus software.
RPT2003-04.rpt
Weekly
Malicious Code - Service
Process Attack
Members of the Service Process Attack tree are
used to define events centered on malicious or
abusive usage of services or user processes. These
events include abuse or misuse of resources from
malicious code placed on the client system.
RPT2003-04-01.rpt
As needed
Malicious Code - Trojan
Command Access
Trojan Command Access alerts reflect malicious or
abusive usage of network resources where the
intention, or the result, is gaining access to
resources through malicious code commonly
known as Trojan Horses. This alert detects the
communication related to Trojans sending
commands over the network (infecting other clients,
participating in a denial of service activity, being
controlled remotely by the originator, etc.). Trojans
are generally executables that generally require no
user intervention to spread and contain malicious
code that is placed on the client system and used to
exploit the client (and return access to the originator
of the attack) or exploit other clients (used in attacks
such as distributed denial of service attacks).
RPT2003-04-05.rpt
As needed
592
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Infection Access
Trojan Infection Access alerts reflect malicious or
known as a Trojan Horse. This alert detects the
infection traffic related to a Trojan entering the
network (generally with intent to infect a client).
Trojans are generally executables that generally
require no user intervention to spread and contain
malicious code that is placed on the client system
and used to exploit the client (and return access to
the originator of the attack) or exploit other clients
(used in attacks such as distributed denial of service
attacks).
RPT2003-04-04.rpt
As needed
Traffic Access
Trojan Traffic Access alerts reflect malicious or
known as a Trojan Horse. This alert detects the
communication related to Trojans over the network
(generally, 'trojaned' clients calling home to the
originator). Trojans are generally executables that
generally require no user intervention to spread
and contain malicious code that is placed on the
client system and used to exploit the client (and
return access to the originator of the attack) or
exploit other clients (used in attacks such as
distributed denial of service attacks).
RPT2003-04-02.rpt
As needed
Malicious Code Report Trojan Traffic Denial
Trojan Traffic Denial events are a specific type of
Denial event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage originates with malicious code on a
client system known as a Trojan. The intent, or the
result, of this activity is inappropriate or abusive
access to network resources through a denial of
service attack. Trojan Traffic Denial events may be
attempts to exploit weaknesses in software to gain
access to a host system, attempts to exploit
weaknesses in network infrastructure equipment to
enumerate or reconfigure devices, attempts to
spread the Trojan to other hosts, or other denial of
service activities.
RPT2003-04-03.rpt
As needed
Malicious Code Report Virus Attack
Virus Attack alerts reflect malicious code placed on
a client or server system, which may lead to system
or other resource compromise and may lead to
further attack. The severity of this alert will depend
on the ActionTaken field, which reflects whether the
virus or other malicious code was successfully
removed.
RPT2003-04-06.rpt
As needed
593
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Malicious Code Report Virus Summary Attack
Virus Summary Attack alerts reflect malicious code
placed on a client or server system, which may lead
to system or other resource compromise and may
lead to further attack. The severity of this alert will
depend on the Action Taken field which reflects
whether the virus or other malicious code was
successfully removed. These alerts differ from Virus
Attack in that they may be a composite of virus
events normally due to a scheduled scan on the
client system as opposed to a real-time scan
RPT2003-04-07.rpt
As needed
Malicious Code Report Virus Traffic Access
Virus Traffic Access alerts reflect malicious or
known as viruses. This alert detects the
communication related to viruses over the network
(generally, the spread of a virus infection or an
incoming virus infection). Viruses are generally
executables that require user intervention to
spread, contain malicious code that is placed on the
client system, and are used to exploit the client and
possibly spread itself to other clients.
RPT2003-04-08.rpt
As needed
Network Events: Attack
Behavior
This report tracks activity associated with top-level
NetworkAttack alerts.
RPT2003-11-00.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access
This report shows malicious asset access via the
network. For example, attacks on FTP or Windows
Network servers, malicious network database
access, abuses of services, or attempted
unauthorized entry.
RPT2003-11.rpt
Weekly
Behavior - Access Access
Children of the Access tree define events centered
on malicious or abusive usage of network
bandwidth/traffic where the intention, or the result,
is inappropriate or abusive access to network
resources.
RPT2003-11-01.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access Application Access
Application Access alerts reflect malicious or
resources where the related data is mostly or all
application-layer. Generally, ApplicationAccess
alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of
weaknesses in server or client software, or
information that is restricted/prohibited by device
access control or policy.
RPT2003-11-02.rpt
As needed
594
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Behavior - Access Configuration Access
Configuration Access alerts reflect malicious or
resources via resource configuration traffic (using
protocols such as DHCP, BootP, and SNMP).
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted
exploitation of weaknesses in the configuration
server or client software or attempts to gain systemlevel access to configuration servers themselves. In
the case of SNMP and similar configuration
protocols, it could reflect an attempt to enumerate a
device or devices on the same network for further
attack.
RPT2003-11-03.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access - Core
Access
Core Access alerts reflect malicious or abusive
usage of network resources where the intention, or
the result, is gaining access to resources where the
related data is mostly or all core protocols (TCP,
UDP, IP, ICMP). Generally, CoreAccess alerts will
reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in
network protocols or devices with intent to gain
access to servers, clients, or network infrastructure
devices.
RPT2003-11-04.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access Database Access
Database Access alerts reflect malicious or abusive
the result, is gaining access to resources via
application-layer database traffic. Generally, these
weaknesses in database server or client software.
RPT2003-11-05.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access - File
System Access
File System Access alerts reflect malicious or
resources via remote filesystem traffic (using
protocols such as SMB and NFS). Generally, these
weaknesses in the remote filesystem server or
client software or attempts to gain system-level
access to remote filesystem servers themselves.
RPT2003-11-06.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access - File
Transfer
File Transfer Access alerts reflect malicious or
resources via application-layer file transfer traffic.
Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted
exploitation of weaknesses in file transfer server or
client software.
RPT2003-11-07.rpt
As needed
595
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Behavior - Access - Link
Control Access
Link Control Access alerts reflect malicious or
resources where the related data is low-level link
control (using protocols such as ARP). Generally,
Link Control Access alerts will reflect attempted
exploitation of weaknesses in switching devices by
usage of malformed incoming or outgoing data,
with intent to enumerate or gain access to or
through switching devices, clients that are also on
the switching device, and entire networks attached
to the switching device. In some cases, a managed
switch with restrictions on port analyzing activity
may be forced into an unmanaged switch with no
restrictions - allowing a malicious client to sniff traffic
and enumerate or attack.
RPT2003-11-08.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access - Mail
Access
Mail Access alerts reflect malicious or abusive
application-layer mail transfer, retrieval, or service
traffic. Generally, these alerts will reflect attempted
exploitation of weaknesses in mail-related server or
client software.
RPT2003-11-09.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access Naming Access
Naming Access alerts reflect malicious or abusive
application-layer naming service traffic (using
protocols such as DNS and WINS). Generally,
these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of
weaknesses in the naming server or client software.
RPT2003-11-10.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access News Access
News Access alerts reflect malicious or abusive
application-layer news traffic (over protocols such
as NNTP). Generally, these alerts will reflect
attempted exploitation of weaknesses in the news
server or client software.
RPT2003-11-11.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access - Point
to Point Access
Point To Point Access alerts reflect malicious or
resources via point to point traffic (using protocols
such as PPTP). Generally, these alerts will reflect
attempted exploitation of weaknesses in point to
point server or client software, attempts to
enumerate networks, or attempts to further attack
devices on trusted networks.
RPT2003-11-12.rpt
As needed
596
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Behavior - Access Printer Access
Printer Access alerts reflect malicious or abusive
application-layer remote printer traffic. Generally,
these alerts will reflect attempted exploitation of
weaknesses in the remote printer server or client
software.
RPT2003-11-13.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access Remote Console Access
Remote Console Access alerts reflect malicious or
resources via application-layer remote console
service traffic (services such as telnet, SSH, and
terminal services). Generally, these alerts will reflect
attempted exploitation of weaknesses in the remote
console server or client software.
RPT2003-11-14.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access Remote Procedure
Access
Remote Procedure Access alerts reflect malicious
or abusive usage of network resources where the
resources via remote procedure call traffic (using
protocols such as the traditional RPC services, RMI,
and CORBA). Generally, these alerts will reflect
attempted exploitation of weaknesses in the remote
procedure server or client software or attempts to
gain system-level access to remote procedure
servers themselves.
RPT2003-11-15.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access Routing Access
Routing Access alerts reflect malicious or abusive
the result, is gaining access to resources where the
related data is routing-related protocols (RIP,
IGMP, etc.). Generally, Routing Access alerts will
reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in
routing protocols or devices with intent to
enumerate or gain access to or through routers,
servers, clients, or other network infrastructure
devices. These routing protocols are used to
automate the routing process between multiple
devices that share or span networks.
RPT2003-11-16.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access - Time
Access
Time Access alerts reflect malicious or abusive
application-layer remote time service traffic (using
protocols such as NTP). Generally, these alerts will
reflect attempted exploitation of weaknesses in the
remote time server or client software.
RPT2003-11-17.rpt
As needed
597
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Behavior - Access - Virus
Traffic Access
Virus Traffic Access alerts reflect malicious or
known as viruses. Generally, these alerts will reflect
attempted exploitation of weaknesses in the web
server or client software.
RPT2003-11-19.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Access - Web
Access
Web Access alerts reflect malicious or abusive
application-layer WWW traffic. Generally, these
weaknesses in the web server or client software.
RPT2003-11-18.rpt
As needed
Behavior - Denial / Relay
Track activity associated with network denial or
relay attack behaviors. This report shows malicious
asset relay attempts and denials of service via the
network. For example, FTP bouncing, Distributed
Denial of Service events, and many protocol
abuses.
RPT2003-12.rpt
Weekly
- Application Denial
Application Denial events are a specific type of
abusive usage is application-layer protocols. The
intent, or the result, of this activity is inappropriate or
abusive access to network resources through a
denial of service attack. Application Denial events
may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in software
to gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit
enumerate or reconfigure devices, or other denial
RPT2003-12-01.rpt
As needed
- Configuration Denial
Configuration Denial events are a specific type of
abusive usage is protocols related to configuration
of resources (DHCP, BootP, SNMP, etc.). The
intent, or the result, of this activity is inappropriate or
abusive access to network resources through a
denial of service attack. ConfigurationDenial events
may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in
configuration-related software to gain access to a
host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in
network infrastructure equipment to enumerate or
reconfigure devices, or other denial of service
activities.
RPT2003-12-02.rpt
As needed
598
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
- Core Denial
Core Denial events are a specific type of Denial
event where the transport of the malicious or
abusive usage is core protocols (TCP, IP, ICMP,
UDP). The intent, or the result, of this activity is
inappropriate or abusive access to network
resources through a denial of service attack. Core
Denial events may be attempts to exploit
weaknesses in software to gain access to a host
system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in network
infrastructure equipment to enumerate or
activities.
RPT2003-12-03.rpt
As needed
- Denial
Children of the Denial tree define events centered
RPT2003-12-04.rpt
As needed
- File System Denial
File System Denial events are a specific type of
abusive usage is remote filesystem-related
protocols (NFS, SMB, etc.). The intent, or the
service attack. File System Denial events may be
attempts to exploit weaknesses in remote filesystem
services or software to gain access to a host
system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in network
infrastructure equipment to enumerate or
activities.
RPT2003-12-05.rpt
As needed
- File Transfer Denial
File Transfer Denial events are a specific type of
abusive usage is application-layer file transferrelated protocols (FTP, TFTP, etc.). The intent, or
the result, of this activity is inappropriate or abusive
service attack. FileTransferDenial events may be
attempts to exploit weaknesses in file transferrelated software to gain access to a host system,
attempts to exploit weaknesses in the software to
enumerate or reconfigure, or other denial of service
activities.
RPT2003-12-06.rpt
As needed
599
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
- Link Control Denial
Link Control Denial events are a specific type of
abusive usage is link level protocols (such as ARP).
The intent, or the result, of this activity is
LinkControlDenial events may be attempts to
exploit weaknesses in link-level control software to
gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit
enumerate or reconfigure devices, or other denial
RPT2003-12-07.rpt
As needed
- Mail Denial
MailDenial events are a specific type of Denial event
where the transport of the malicious or abusive
usage is application-layer mail-related protocols
(SMTP, IMAP, POP3, etc.) or services
(majordomo, spam filters, etc.). The intent, or the
service attack. MailDenial events may be attempts
to exploit weaknesses in mail-related software to
gain access to a host system, attempts to exploit
weaknesses in the software to enumerate or
reconfigure, or other denial of service activities.
RPT2003-12-08.rpt
As needed
- Relay
Children of the Relay tree define events centered
is relaying inappropriate or abusive access to other
network resources (either internal or external).
Generally, these attacks will have the perimeter or
an internal host as their point of origin. When
sourced from remote hosts, they may indicate a
successful exploit of an internal or perimeter host.
RPT2003-12-09.rpt
As needed
- Remote Procedure
Denial
Remote Procedure Denial events are a specific
type of Denial event where the transport of the
malicious or abusive usage is remote procedurerelated protocols (traditional RPC, RMI, CORBA,
etc.) or service (portmapper, etc.). The intent, or
the result, of this activity is inappropriate or abusive
service attack. RemoteProcedureDenial events
may be attempts to exploit weaknesses in remote
procedure services or software to gain access to a
host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in the
software to enumerate or reconfigure, or other
RPT2003-12-10.rpt
As needed
600
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
- Routing Denial
Routing Denial events are a specific type of Denial
abusive usage is routing-related protocols (RIP,
IGMP, etc.). The intent, or the result, of this activity
Routing Denial events may be attempts to exploit
weaknesses in routers or routing software to gain
access to a host system, attempts to exploit
weaknesses in the routing software or service to
enumerate or reconfigure, or other denial of service
activities.
RPT2003-12-11.rpt
As needed
- Web Denial
Web Denial events are a specific type of Denial
abusive usage is application-layer web-related
protocols (HTTP, HTTPS, etc.) or services (CGI,
ASP, etc.). The intent, or the result, of this activity is
resources through a denial of service attack. Web
Denial events may be attempts to exploit
weaknesses in web-related software to gain access
to a host system, attempts to exploit weaknesses in
the software to enumerate or reconfigure, or other
RPT2003-12-12.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior
Track activity associated with suspicious network
behaviors such as reconnaissance or unusual
traffic. Specifically, this report shows potentially
dangerous activity, such as excessive
authentication failures, port scans, stack
fingerprinting, and network enumerations.
RPT2003-07.rpt
Weekly
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Application Enumerate
Application Enumerate alerts reflect attempts to
gather information about target hosts, or services
on target hosts, by sending active application-layer
data which will elicit responses that reveal
information about the application or host. This
enumeration may be a simple command sent to the
application to attempt to fingerprint what is allowed
or denied by the service, requests to the application
which may enable an attacker to surmise the
version and specific application running, and other
information gathering tactics. These enumerations
may result in information being provided that can
allow an attacker to craft a specific attack against
the host or application that may work correctly the
first time - enabling them to modify their
RPT2003-07-01.rpt
As needed
601
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Banner Grabbing
Enumerate
Banner Grabbing Enumerate alerts reflect attempts
to gather information about target hosts, or services
on target hosts, by sending a request which will elicit
a response containing the host or service's 'banner'.
This 'banner' contains information that may provide
a potential attacker with such details as the exact
application and version running behind a port.
These details could be used to craft specific attacks
against hosts or services that an attacker may know
will work correctly the first time - enabling them to
modify their methodology go on relatively
undetected.
RPT2003-07-02.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Core Scan
Core Scan alerts reflect attempts to gather
information about target networks, or specific target
hosts, by sending scans over core network
protocols (TCP, IP, ICMP, UDP) which will elicit
responses that reveal information about clients,
servers, or other network infrastructure devices.
The originating source of the scan is generally
attempting to acquire information that may reveal
more than normal traffic to the target would,
information such as a list of applications listening on
ports, operating system information, and other
information that a probe may discover without
enumeration of the specific services or performing
attack attempts.
RPT2003-07-03.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Enumerate
Enumerate alerts reflect attempts to gather
hosts, by sending active data which will elicit
The originating source of the enumeration is
generally attempting to acquire information that
may reveal more than normal traffic to the target
would.
RPT2003-07-04.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Footprint
Footprint alerts reflect attempts to gather
information about target networks by tracing the
network through routers, clients, servers, or other
network infrastructure devices. The originating
source of the footprint is generally attempting to
acquire information that may reveal more about
network behavior than normal traffic to the target
would.
RPT2003-07-05.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior General Security
General Security alerts are generated when a
supported product outputs data that has not yet
been normalized into a specific alert, but is known to
be security issue-related.
RPT2003-07-17.rpt
As needed
602
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Host Scan
Host Scan alerts reflect attempts to gather
information about specific target hosts by sending
scans which will elicit responses that reveal
information about clients, servers, or other network
infrastructure devices. The originating source of the
scan is generally attempting to acquire information
that may reveal more than normal traffic to the
target would, such as a list of applications on the
host, operating system information, and other
attack attempts. These scans generally do not
occur across entire networks and generally have
the intent of discovering operating system and
application information which may be used for
further attack preparation.
RPT2003-07-06.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior ICMP Query
ICMP Query alerts reflect attempts to gather
information about specific target hosts, or networks,
by sending ICMP-based queries that will elicit
more than normal traffic to the target would, such
as operating system information and other
attack attempts. These scans generally do not
occur across entire networks, contain many
sequential ICMP packets, and generally have the
intent of discovering operating system and
application information which may be used for
further attack preparation.
RPT2003-07-07.rpt
As needed
603
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior MS Network Enumerate
MS Networking Enumerate alerts reflect attempts
to gather information about target hosts, or services
on target hosts, by sending active data to Microsoft
networking services (using protocols such as
NetBIOS and SMB/CIFS) that will illicit responses
that reveal information about the application, host,
or target network. This enumeration may be a
simple command sent to the networking service to
attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or denied by a
service, requests to a service that may enable an
attacker to surmise the version and specific service
running, requests to a service that may enable an
attacker to fingerprint the target network, and other
information gathering tactics. These enumerations
may result in information being provided that can
allow an attacker to craft a specific attack against
the networking service, host, or application that may
work correctly the first time - enabling them to
modify their methodology to go on relatively
undetected.
RPT2003-07-08.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Network Suspicious
Members of the NetworkSuspicious tree are used
to define events regarding suspicious usage of
network bandwidth/traffic. These events include
unusual traffic and reconnaissance behavior
detected on network resources.
RPT2003-07-09.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Port Scan
Port Scan alerts reflect attempts to gather
hosts, by sending scans over core network
protocols (TCP, IP, ICMP, UDP) that will elicit
more than normal traffic to the target would, such
as a list of applications listening on ports, operating
system information, and other information that a
probe may discover without enumeration of the
specific services or performing attack attempts. Port
Scans specifically operate by sending probes to
every port within a range, attempting to identify
open ports that may use applications or services
that are easy to enumerate and attack.
RPT2003-07-10.rpt
As needed
604
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Recon
Children of the Recon tree reflect suspicious
network behavior with intent of gathering
information about target clients, networks, or hosts.
Reconnaissance behavior may be valid behavior on
a network, however, only as a controlled behavior in
small quantities. Invalid reconnaissance behavior
may reflect attempts to determine security flaws on
remote hosts, missing access control policies that
allow external hosts to penetrate networks, or other
suspicious behavior that results in general
information gathering without actively attacking.
RPT2003-07-11.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Remote Procedure
Enumerate
Remote Procedure Enumerate alerts reflect
attempts to gather information about target hosts,
or services on target hosts, by sending active data
to Remote Procedure services (using protocols
such as RMI, CORBA, and traditional RPC) that will
elicit responses that reveal information about the
application or host. This enumeration may be a
simple command sent to the remote procedure
service to attempt to fingerprint what is allowed or
denied by the service, requests to the remote
procedure service that may enable an attacker to
surmise the version and specific service running,
and other information gathering tactics. These
enumerations may result in information being
provided that can allow an attacker to craft a specific
attack against the remote procedure service or
application that may work correctly the first time enabling them to modify their methodology to go on
relatively undetected.
RPT2003-07-12.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Scan
Scan alerts reflect attempts to gather information
about target networks, or specific target hosts, by
sending scans which will elicit responses that reveal
target would, information such as a list of
applications listening on ports, operating system
information, and other information that a probe may
discover without enumeration of the specific
services or performing attack attempts.
RPT2003-07-13.rpt
As needed
605
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Stack Fingerprint
Stack Fingerprint alerts reflect attempts to gather
information about specific target hosts by sending a
certain set of packets to probe a device's network
stack, which will elicit responses that reveal
target would, such as operating system information
(including type and version) and other information
that a probe may discover without enumeration of
the specific services or performing attack attempts.
These scans generally do not occur across entire
networks and generally have the intent of
discovering operating system information which
may be used for further attack preparation.
RPT2003-07-14.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Trojan Scanner
Trojan Scanner alerts reflect attempts of Trojans on
the network to gather information about target
networks, or specific target hosts, by sending scans
which will elicit responses that reveal information
about the host. The originating Trojan source of the
that will reveal whether a target host or network has
open and available services for further exploitation,
whether the target host or network is alive, and how
much of the target network is visible. A Trojan may
run a scan before attempting an attack operation to
test potential effectiveness or targeting information.
RPT2003-07-15.rpt
As needed
Network Events:
Suspicious Behavior Unusual Traffic
Unusual Traffic alerts reflect suspicious behavior on
network devices where the traffic may have no
known exploit, but is unusual and could be potential
enumerations, probes, fingerprints, attempts to
confuse devices, or other abnormal traffic. Unusual
Traffic may have no impending response, however,
it could reflect a suspicious host that should be
monitored closely.
RPT2003-07-16.rpt
As needed
Rule Subscriptions by
User
The Rule Subscriptions report tracks those events
that the user has subscribed to monitor.
RPT2006-28-01.rpt
Daily
TriGeo Actions
The TriGeo Action Report lists all commands or
actions initiated by TriGeo Network Security.
RPT2003-18.rpt
As needed
606
TriGeo reports are diagnostic tools used by TriGeo Customer Support. You will normally only run
these reports at TriGeo’s request. For your convenience, the reports are listed alphabetically by title.
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Agent Connection Status
This report is a diagnostic tool used by
Customer Support, and generally run only
at their request. This report tracks internal
agent online and offline alerts.
RPT2009-33-1.rpt
As requested
Agent Connection Status
by Agent
at their request. This report tracks internal
agent online and offline alerts grouped by
agent.
RPT2009-33-2.rpt
As requested
Agent Connection
Summary
at their request. This report shows high
level summary information for when agents
go online and offline.
RPT2009-33.rpt
As requested
Audit - Internal Audit
Report
Audit - Internal Audit Report
RPT2006-31-01.rpt
As requested
Audit - Internal Audit
Report by User
Internal Audit Report grouped by User
RPT2006-31-02.rpt
As requested
Agent Maintenance
Report
at their request. This report displays internal
alert data for possible misconfigured
agents.
RPT2007-32.rpt
As requested
Database Maintenance
Report
at their request.
RPT2006-26.rpt
As requested
Database Maintenance
Report - MSSQL
at their request. This report should only be
run against a SQL database warehouse.
RPT2006-26-1.rpt
As requested
List of Rules for Rule
Subscriptions
This report lists available rules for the Rule
Subscriptions.
RPT2006-29-02.rpt
As needed
List of Subscription Rules
by User
This report lists the rules that users have
subscribed to.
RPT2006-29-03.rpt
As needed
List of Users
This report lists each user entered.
Currently, the users are only used for Rule
Subscriptions.
RPT2006-29-01.rpt
As needed
607
Title
Description
File name
Schedule
Tool Maintenance by Alias
at their request. List of New Tool Data alerts
based on Tool Alias.
RPT2003-14.rpt
As needed
Tool Maintenance by
Insertion Point
based on Agent InsertionIP.
RPT2003-15.rpt
As needed
Tool Maintenance by
Provider
based on ProviderSID.
RPT2003-13.rpt
As needed
Tool Maintenance Detail
Report
at their request. The report displays a
summary of all TriGeo error messages
received from various tools.
RPT2003-14.rpt
As requested
Tool Maintenance Report
at their request. The report displays a
summary of unique TriGeo error messages
received from various tools.
RPT2003-13.rpt
As requested
608
The following table describes each recommended report schedule.
Schedule
Description
Daily
Run and review this report once each day.
Weekly
Run and review this report once each week.
As needed
TriGeo suggests that you run these reports only when needed for specific
auditing purposes, or when you need the details surrounding a Priority
event or a suspicious event.
As requested
These reports are diagnostic tools and should only be run at the request of
TriGeo's technical support personnel.
609
Index
A
actor
340
applying filters to
72
copying alert messages
76
exploring alerts
78
74
actors
368, 370
highlighting alerts
Agents
405, 415
Pause/Resume buttons
91
387, 411
pausing alerts
73
77
adding to Managers
configuring network tools
411
read messages
defined
340
removing alerts
79
deleting
414
responding to alerts
83
editng Tool Profiles with
358
resuming alerts
73
Remote Update settings
413
sorting
73
412
unread messages
77
responding to events
Agents tab (status bar)
Agents view
Agents grid
Alert Groups
23
alert messages
405, 415
408, 411, 415
210, 221-222
72, 79
copying
76
copying grid data
416
exploring
78
features
406
pausing
91
410
read
77
removing
79
unread
77
Refine Results form
alert
Alert Description pane
9, 63
70
alert properties
80
82
alert severity
82
70
alerts
Alert Details
alert severity
Alert Details pane
alert distribution policy
alert descriptions
Alert Distribution Policy window
397, 404
Asset Alerts
494-495, 497
401
Audit Alerts
494, 498, 512
397, 404
highlighting
74
402
Incident Alerts
494, 513
defined
397
Internal Alerts
494, 514, 518
exporting Manager policy
404
Security Alerts
494, 519, 555
locked policies
398
types of
configuring
493
alias
opening
398
pushing policy downward
403
defined
340
window features
400
examples
340
alert fields
alert grid
alert severity
557
AND conditions
119
69, 72, 79
AND operators
129
anti-virus tools
359
82
611
Index: C – E
appliances
404
node tree
400
configuration settings
383
Configure Appliance form
383
removing
396
Configure Users form
335
Appliances tab (status bar)
Appliances view
22
adding users
404
configuring tools
330
349-350
about
373
general procedure
appliance status
376
nDepth options
Appliances grid
376
Console. See TriGeo SIM Console
copying grid data
396
content filter tools
363
features
374
copying grid data
396, 416
Properties pane
384, 393
Correlations box
294, 296, 302
Database tab
392
License tab
387
Login tab
385
opening
384
Settings tab
389
appliances. See Managers.
373
application switch tools
359
Apply button
295
Asset Alerts
495, 497
Audit Alerts
498, 512
Custom Reports tab
dashboard widgets. See widgets.
CMC commands
about
appliance menu
17
439
52, 59
Data Warehouse command
424
database servers
373
database tools
359
database warehouse
395
assigning
disabling
C
CISP
348
D
database warehouses
Cancel command
349-350
395
395
427, 430
Details pane
21
Managers
433
Directory Service Groups
561, 568
561
564-565
CMC menus
561
logging into CMC
562
manager menu
566
ndepth menu
568
service menu
569
COBIT
433
CoCo
433
33
resizing
32
sorting
34
400
check boxes
400
locked policies
398
226
assigning to Managers
228
defined
225
grid columns
229
Email Templates
230
configuring
230
creating messages
232
folders
254
message parameters
231
template folders
Event explorer
about
612
210, 230, 232
about
moving between folders
Configure Alert Distribution Policy window
Alert/Field column
adding to TriGeo SIM
E
columns
rearranging
377-378
210, 225, 229
259
232, 256
156, 160, 173
160
Index: F – F
Alert Details pane
deleting conditions
126
about
172
features
110
closing
172
filter status
exploring from
173
Filter Status bar
111
opening
172
Group button
118
viewing alert details
172
groups of conditions
156
list pane
111, 113, 116
notifications
111, 137, 140
operators
118, 127, 130
description
event grid
172-173
169, 171
133, 136
123
exploring from
171
Order column
169
AND/OR
129-130
responding from
171
selecting
127
structure
169
selection tips
127
viewing events from
170
table of
128
event map legend
168
OR conditions
119
event maps
165
Redo command
111
about
165
targeting
legend
168
tutorial
reading
165
Undo command
125
141, 154
111
features
162
filter groups
64
opening
161
Filter Notifications pane
26
Exit command
420
Filtering Alerts
Explore menu
69
Explorer view
155, 207
Event explorer
features
filters
alert severity
156, 160, 173
158
109
9, 63
82
conditions table
131-132
configuring
120, 132
Flow Explorer
156, 180, 188
adding conditions
121
History pane
182, 189, 191
groups of conditions
123
nDepth Browser
157, 204, 207
targeting
125
nDepth Explorer
157, 193, 203
tutorial
141, 154
NSLookup explorer
156, 175
configuring. See "Filter Creation"
Traceroute explorer
156, 176
copying
94
Whois explorer
156, 177
creating
87
420
defined
63
deleting
97
editing
89
exporting
96
Export Report command
F
Favorite Reports tab
440
FERPA
433
file transfer tools
360
Filter Creation
filter groups
109, 154
about
109
AND conditions
119
Conditions box
111, 117, 119
conditions table
131-132
9, 98, 101
adding
98
deleting
101
moving filters between groups
100
rearranging
99
renaming
98
importing
613
127
95
Index: G – G
managing
64
moving Group folders
258
pausing
91
moving Groups to folders
259
pausing/resuming
91
moving rule folders
286
showing in Alert Panel
93
moving rules to folders
287
standard filters
65
NATO5 Rules folder
282
turning on/off
93
NATO5 Templates folder
254
renaming folders
257
renaming rule folders
285
showing Group folder contents
255
284
Filters pane
filter groups
64, 67, 69
98, 101
adding
98
deleting
101
showing rule folder contents
moving filters between groups
100
State Variables folders
rearranging
99
sub-folders
renaming
98
TriGeo Rules folder
managing filters
64
standard filters
65
Filters pane. See Widget Manager.
360
FISMA
433
Flow Explorer
about
grids
Agents grid
alert grid
180
183, 185
Analysis Results graph
186
Analysis Results grid
187
description
156
exploring results
188
features
181
history
182
opening
180
possible configurations
185
responding to results
188
Folders pane
GLBA
156, 180, 188
Analysis Configuration
254
adding Group folders
257
adding rule folders
285
Custom Rules folder
282
Custom State Variables folder
254
default Group folders
254
default rule folders
282
deleting Group folders
260
deleting rule folders
287
Email Template folders
232
Email Templates
232
Email Templates folder
254
434
31, 35
408, 411, 415
69, 72, 79
applying filters to
72
copying alert messages
76
exploring alerts
78
highlighting alerts
74
pausing filters
91
removing alerts
79
responding to alerts
83
sorting
73
Appliances grid
254, 260, 282, 287
about Group folders
282
G
41
firewall tools
237
255, 283
375-376
moving within
31
rearranging columns
33
resizing columns
Rules grid
32
264
selecting cells
31
selecting rows
31
sorting columns
34
ToolTips
Groups
Alert Groups
30
209, 237
210, 221-222
configuring
614
Alert Groups
221-222
225, 229
Email Templates
230, 232
State Variables
233, 237
Index: H – I
Time Of Day Sets
Tool Profiles
User-Defined Groups
defined
238-239
State Variables
241
249, 253
254
12, 209
210, 225, 229
210, 233, 237
adding fields
233
configuring
233
defined
233
deleting fields
236
editing fields
235
folders
254
adding to TriGeo SIM
226
assigning to Managers
228
defined
225
configuring
238
grid columns
229
defined
238
Email Templates
Time Of Day Sets
210, 230, 232
Tool Profiles
210, 238-239
211, 241, 338
about
230
adding tools
246
configuring
230
adding/removing Agents
243
creating messages
232
creating
242
folders
254
defined
241
message parameters
231
deleting tools
template folders
232
editing tools
220
editing via Agent
358
opening tool configuration
245
rules of
241
exporting
Folders pane
254, 260
248
245, 247
adding folders
257
default Email Template folders
254
254
default State Variables folders
254
adding data elements
252
deleting folders
260
configuring
251
Email Tempalte folders
232
defined
249
moving folders
258
deleting data elements
253
moving Groups to folders
259
editing data elements
253
renaming folders
257
showing folder contents
255
State Variables folders
237
sub-folders
255
Group types
template
User-Defined Groups
H
highlighting alerts
HIPAA
210
History pane
Groups grid
adding Groups
216
cloning Groups
218
columns
214
deleting Groups
220
editing Groups
217
refining
215
242
211, 249, 253
Groups view
74
434
158, 182, 189, 191
clearing history
190
Flow Explorer items
182
hiding
190
nDepth Explorer items
198
opening
190
viewing explorer history
190
about
209
I
features
212
Incident Alerts
513
219
Industry Reports tab
439
importing
615
Index: L – N
Internal Alerts
514, 518
Monitor view
63
ISO 17799
434
about
63
ISO 27001
434
Alert Description
70
ISO 27002
434
Alert Details
70
features
filter groups
L
Lines Displayed
87
log file directory
365
log file path
365
logging servers
373
logging sources
341
adding
98
deleting
101
moving filters between group
100
rearranging
renaming
Filter Notifications pane
deleting notices
M
Popup Notification form
Managers
404
68
98, 101
Filters pane
99
98
25-26
25
26
64, 67
adding Agents
387
copying filters
94
appliances
373
creating filters
87
Appliances grid
376
deleting filters
97
editing
89
exporting filters
96
configuring
configuring tools
380-381, 383
394
connecting to Console
380-381
database warehouses
395
importing filters
95
defined
341, 373
managing filters
64
Details pane
377-378
filter groups
98, 101
pausing filters
91
first time setup
379
standard filters
65
global automatic updates
390
turning filters on/off
93
logging in
382
Notifications pane
70
logging out
382
Remove All command
79
Properties
384, 393
Remove command
79
Database tab
392
Respond form
License tab
387
widgets
Login tab
385
creating
105
opening
384
editing
106
Settings tab
389
editing graphs
108
removing
396
refining filters with
107
status
376
refreshing
108
users. Also see "users"
325, 335
Mark All As Read command
77
Mark All As Unread command
77
Mark As Read command
77
Mark As Unread command
77
master widgets. See widgets.
44
viewing
Widgets pane
83
102, 108
104
70, 102
N
NCUA
nDepth Browser
description
616
434
157, 204, 207
157
Index: O – P
getting help
207
OR conditions
119
introduction to
204
OR operators
129
204
Organize Filters form
opening
nDepth Explorer
157, 193, 203
description
157
exploring results
202
exploring searching results
193, 198
features
196
history items
198
opening
194
opening nDepth Browser with
203
refining log file data
200
responding to results
202
searching with
200
nDepth options
348
NERC-CIP
433
network sensors
373
network services tools
362
nodes
371
Notifications pane
70
Notifications tab (status bar)
24
deleting notifications
25
opening
25
NSLookup explorer
175
description
156
using
93
1
panes
closing
28
nodes
29
opening
28
resizing
28
Pause button
69
Pause command
156, 174, 179
about
showing filters
package contents
23, 26, 71
contents of
93
P
29
notification system
hiding filters
434
PDF (reports)
470
policy rules
323
activating
275
cloning
277
configuring rules
323
default folders
282
delting
281
disabling
276
editing
268
enabling
272
exporting
280
folders
174, 179
O
73
PCI
282, 287
adding folders
285
deleting folders
287
moving folders
286
Open Report command
420
287
operating system tools
363
renaming folders
285
284
sub-folders
283
operators
about
118, 127, 130, 297
127
AND/OR
129-130
importing
278
selecting
127
subscribers
270
selection tips
127
test mode
273
table of
Ops Center
dashboard
features
Widget Manager
128
policy rules. See "rules"
39, 62
Popup Notification form
52, 59
Primary Data Source
425
Primary Data Source command
424
Print Report command
420
40
44, 47
617
261
26
Index: R – R
Printer Setup command
420
report properties
442
products. See tools.
337
running on demand
454
Properties pane
Managers
proxy server tools
running reports
384, 393
363
R
Redo command
111, 295
Refine Results form
Agents view
410
Rules view
266
Refresh Report List command
420
Remote Updates
413
Remove All command
79
Remove command
79
reports
417, 491
about
417
deleting a task
473
exporting
491
favorites
adding to favorites
436
removing from favorites
437
searching for
435
grouping report lists
451, 453
hiding sub-topics
477
Historical Reports
438
industry options
433
industry reports
432
listing by favorites
443
locating by title
441
magnifying
481
opening
475
Preview pane
476
Primary Data Source
425
printer preferences
490
printing
489
reducing
481
report categories
report errors
report lists
445, 450
sorting
444
473
editing
472
schedules
609
scheduling
457, 471
adding scheduled tasks
459
advanced schedule options
463
assigning to Manager
468
assigning to warehouse
468
exporting to PDF
470
process overview
457
schedule settings
465
scheduling reports
461
selecting the report
458
Search tool
483
searching for text
483
Select Expert tool
485, 488
showing sub-topics
477
stopping report in progress
482
syslog servers
426
609
audit reports
573, 588
security reports
589, 606
TriGeo reports
607
about
417
configuring
424
database warehouses
439, 453
filtering
474
deleting task schedules
TriGeo Reports
456
448, 450
deleting scheduled tasks
TriGeo report tables
431, 438-439, 443
custom filters
454, 471
scheduled report tasks
418
Menu Button
420
opening
417
Quick Access Toolbar
421
Ribbon
423
viewing pages of
479
viewing report sections
476
Zoom feature
481
Respond form
drag and drop functionality
Respond menu
618
427, 430
features
83
85
69, 83
Index: S – R
Resume button
69
OR correlations
119
Resume command
73
Redo command
295
router tools
364
rule status
Rule Creation
323
rule subscribers
271
rule window features
292
targeting
125
about
13, 261, 289
133, 136, 294
actions
308-309
about
308
test mode
274
294
Threshold button
297
Undo command
295
using caution
289
Actions box
Actions table
configuring
using constants and fields with
313, 323
309
308
rules
activating rules
274-275
activating
advanced thresholds
304, 307
274-275
adding new rules
299
adding fields
306
caution when configuring
289
configuring
305
cloning
277
defined
304
configuring
deleting
307
configuring rules
289
editing fields
306
configuring. See "Rule Creation"
127
Set Advanced Threshold form
304
defined
13, 261
119
deleting
281
295
disabling
276
edting
268
enabling
272
AND correlations
Apply button
configuring rules
correlation time
289, 292, 299, 309
294, 303
292, 309
event frequency
303
exporting
280
response window
303
importing
278
locked rules
268
correlations
adding correlations
300
subscribing
270
configuring correlations
301
targeting
301
296
defined
294
Correlations table
test mode
Rules view
310, 312
273-274
13, 261, 323
description
262
264
Delete button
297
enabled status indicators
deleting correlations
126
features
disabling rules
276
Folders pane
edting rules
269
adding folders
285
enabling rules
272
default rule folders
282
features
290
deleting folders
287
Group button
297
moving folders
286
127, 130
287
AND/OR
129-130
renaming folders
285
selecting
127
284
selection tips
127
sub-folders
283
table of
128
operators
locked rules
619
262
282, 287
268
Index: S – T
Refine Results form
Rules grid
266
Notifications tab
264, 281
status bars
23
22, 27
activating rules
275
subscribing to policy rules
adding rules
299
Supported Operating Systems
cloning rules
277
supported products
339
deleting rules
281
switch tools
364
disabling rules
276
Syslog Server command
424
editing rules
268
syslog servers
426
enabling rules
272
system requirements
2-3
exporting rules
280
Agents
2
importing rules
278
hardware
3
opening rules for editing
268
operating systems
2
Rules grid columns
264
recommended hardware
3
subscribers
270
TriGeo SIM Console
test mode
273
test status indicators
System Tools
270
2
2
364
264
T
S
Sarbanes-Oxley
Save command
Schedule Report command
targeting
301
434
technical support
4
21
Time Of Day Sets
210, 238-239
420
Security Alerts
519, 555
Select Expert tool
485, 488
configuring
238
defined
238
Tool Configuration form
347, 358
restoring original report
488
first-time procedure
347
running query with
486
opening for a Manager
351
sensor
sensors
341
opening for an Agent
365, 367
Tool Profiles
351
211, 241, 338
sleep time
367
adding tools
246
SOX
434
adding/removing Agents
243
Standard Reports tab
439
creating
242
State Variables
210, 233, 237
defined
241
adding fields
233
deleting tools
configuring
233
editing tools
defined
233
editing via Agent
358
deleting fields
236
opening tool configuration
245
235
rules of
241
template
242
editing fields
folders
moving between folders
237, 254-255
259
tools
status
appliances
248
245, 247
376
status bar
actors
340
Agent tools
338
Agents
340
Agents tab
23
alias
340
Appliances tab
22
anti-virus tools
359
620
Index: U – W
application switches
configuring
359
installing
192
347, 358, 394
nDepth Browser
204, 207
configuring actors
368, 370
nDepth Explorer
194, 203
configuring sensors
365, 367
options
348
database tools
359
TriGeo Reports. See "reports"
defined
341
TriGeo SIM
file transfer tools
360
TriGeo SIM Console
firewall tools
360
exiting
37
how TriGeo tools work
337
features
19
log file path
365
opening
17
logging sources
341
Manager
341
Manager tools
338
notification system
371
notification system tools
364
opening Tool Configuration form
341
starting
355
stopping
355
supported products
339
System Tools
364
tool configuration tables
Undo command
359
editing
356
reconfiguring
356
starting
355
stopping
355
Tool Profiles
338
tool version
367
VPN tools
364
web server tools
364
wrapper name
367
ToolTips
Traceroute explorer
408
audit report
592
252
configuring
251
defined
249
deleting data elements
253
editing data elements
adding users
Configure Users form
adding users
deleting users
deleting
330, 332
335
330
335
334
pager and email settings
deleting
334
V
VPN tools
30
364
156, 174, 179
176
W
description
156
web server tools
TriGeo nDepth
253
325, 335
email settings
about
using
211, 249, 253
adding data elements
users
353-354
357
111, 295
Agent status
User-Defined Groups
359, 364
deleting
337
USB-Defender
tool instances
adding
17
U
351-352
sensors
tool categories
TriGeo tools. See tools.
417
6, 373
174, 179
Whois explorer
192, 207
about
about
192
description
configuring network for use with
192
using
621
364
156, 174, 179
177
156
174, 179
Index: U – S
Widget Builder
Widget Manager
48, 51
40, 44, 47
about
44
closing
44
Filters pane
41
opening
44
Widgets pane
41
widgets
buttons
dashboard widgets
39, 44, 62, 102, 108
52
52, 59
defined
42
deleting
59
editing graphs
57
editing in Widget Builder
56
legend
53
opening filters with
55
rearranging
58
refreshing
54
resizing
58
viewing data on
54
independence of
master widgets
adding to dashboard
as templates
42
44, 47
46
42
creating
44, 105
defined
42
deleting
editing from Monitor view
editing from Ops Center
47
106
45
editing graphs
108
refining filters with
107
refreshing
108
viewing filter widgets
Widget Builder
104
48, 51
predefined
60
storage of
43
toolbar
Widgets pane (Monitor view)
Widgets pane (Ops Center)
52
70, 102
41
wild cards (*)
146
wrapper name
367
622

Configuring an alert filter

Transcription

Similar documents

Signing up for MCU Account Alerts

HSS.net StyleGuide

Back In Stock Alerts

Direct Alert Instructions

Status Solutions SARA eMessenger

HomeAware - Sonic Alert

Product Sheet

Journalism Bots

SARA`s eMessenger Mobile`s Spec Sheet

Maia